ABB REG670 Technical Manual

Relion® 670 series
Generator protection REG670 2.0 IEC

Technical manual
Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Document ID: 1MRK502052-UEN
Issued: July 2016
Revision: B
Product version: 2.0
© Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)
This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

([email protected]) and Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure
would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to
personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity
applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that
all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.

Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN
60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in
accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.

Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................39
This manual...................................................................................... 39
Intended audience............................................................................ 39
Product documentation.....................................................................40
Product documentation set..........................................................40
Document revision history........................................................... 41
Related documents......................................................................42
Document symbols and conventions................................................42
Symbols.......................................................................................42
Document conventions................................................................ 43
IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping......................................44
Section 2 Available functions......................................................... 53

Main protection functions..................................................................53
Back-up protection functions............................................................ 54
Control and monitoring functions......................................................55
Communication.................................................................................59
Basic IED functions.......................................................................... 61
Section 3 Analog inputs..................................................................63

Introduction.......................................................................................63
Function block.................................................................................. 63
Signals..............................................................................................64
Settings.............................................................................................66
Monitored data..................................................................................71
Operation principle........................................................................... 72
Section 4 Binary input and output modules....................................75

Binary input.......................................................................................75
Binary input debounce filter......................................................... 75
Oscillation filter............................................................................ 75
Settings........................................................................................75
Setting parameters for binary input modules..........................75
Setting parameters for binary input/output module................ 76
Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ..........................77

Local HMI screen behaviour.............................................................77
Identification................................................................................ 77
Settings........................................................................................77
Local HMI signals............................................................................. 77
1
Technical manual

Table of contents
Identification................................................................................ 77
Function block............................................................................. 77
Signals.........................................................................................78
Basic part for LED indication module............................................... 78
Identification................................................................................ 78
Function block............................................................................. 79
Signals.........................................................................................79
Settings........................................................................................80
Monitored data.............................................................................80
LCD part for HMI function keys control module................................80
Identification................................................................................ 80
Function block............................................................................. 81
Signals.........................................................................................81
Settings........................................................................................81
Operation principle........................................................................... 82
Local HMI.................................................................................... 82
Display....................................................................................83
LEDs.......................................................................................85
Keypad................................................................................... 86
LED..............................................................................................88
Functionality .......................................................................... 88
Status LEDs........................................................................... 88
Indication LEDs...................................................................... 89
Function keys.............................................................................. 97
Functionality .......................................................................... 97
Operation principle................................................................. 97
Section 6 Differential protection................................................... 101

Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF ........ 101
Identification.............................................................................. 101
Functionality ............................................................................. 101
Function block........................................................................... 103
Signals.......................................................................................104
Settings......................................................................................107
Monitored data...........................................................................112
Operation principle.................................................................... 113
Function calculation principles............................................. 114
Logic diagram.......................................................................135
Technical data........................................................................... 140
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF .....................141
Identification.............................................................................. 141
Functionality.............................................................................. 141
Function block........................................................................... 142
Signals.......................................................................................142
2
Technical manual

Table of contents
Settings......................................................................................142
Monitored data...........................................................................143
Logic diagram.......................................................................144
Technical data........................................................................... 145
Generator differential protection GENPDIF ................................... 146
Identification.............................................................................. 146
Functionality.............................................................................. 146
Function block........................................................................... 147
Signals.......................................................................................147
Settings......................................................................................148
Monitored data...........................................................................150
Function calculation principles............................................. 151
Fundamental frequency differential currents........................ 151
Supplementary criteria......................................................... 156
Harmonic restrain................................................................. 159
Open CT detection feature................................................... 159
Cross-block logic scheme.................................................... 161
Technical data........................................................................... 164
Low impedance restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF ........... 165
Identification.............................................................................. 165
Functionality.............................................................................. 165
Function block........................................................................... 166
Signals.......................................................................................166
Settings......................................................................................167
Monitored data...........................................................................168
Fundamental principles of the restricted earth-fault
protection..............................................................................168
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance
differential protection............................................................ 170
Calculation of differential current and bias current............... 172
Detection of external earth faults..........................................173
Algorithm of the restricted earth-fault protection.................. 175
Technical data........................................................................... 175
Section 7 Impedance protection...................................................177

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS .. 177
Identification.............................................................................. 177
Functionality.............................................................................. 177
Function block........................................................................... 178
Signals.......................................................................................178
Settings......................................................................................179
3
Technical manual

Table of contents

Full scheme measurement................................................... 180
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 181
Basic operation characteristics.............................................182
Theory of operation.............................................................. 184
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................193
Technical data........................................................................... 197
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR. 197
Identification.............................................................................. 197
Functionality.............................................................................. 197
Function block........................................................................... 198
Signals.......................................................................................198
Settings......................................................................................199
Monitored data...........................................................................200
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR.............................................................................200
High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS..................................... 203
Identification.............................................................................. 203
Functionality.............................................................................. 203
Function block........................................................................... 205
Signals.......................................................................................205
Settings......................................................................................208
Monitored data...........................................................................212
Filtering.................................................................................212
Distance measuring zones................................................... 213
Phase-selection criteria........................................................ 214
Directional criteria.................................................................215
Fuse failure...........................................................................216
Power swings....................................................................... 216
Measuring principles............................................................ 216
Load encroachment..............................................................219
Simplified logic schemes...................................................... 220
Technical data........................................................................... 226
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS ..................................226
Identification.............................................................................. 226
Functionality.............................................................................. 226
Function block........................................................................... 228
Signals.......................................................................................229
Settings......................................................................................231
Monitored data...........................................................................237
4
Technical manual

Table of contents
Filtering.................................................................................237
Distance measuring zones................................................... 238
Phase-selection element...................................................... 239
Directional element...............................................................240
Fuse failure...........................................................................241
Power swings....................................................................... 241
Measuring principles............................................................ 241
Simplified logic schemes...................................................... 244
Technical data........................................................................... 251
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM ......................................................251
Identification.............................................................................. 251
Functionality.............................................................................. 251
Function block........................................................................... 253
Signals.......................................................................................253
Settings......................................................................................254
Monitored data...........................................................................255
Technical data........................................................................... 259
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM..................................................259
Identification.............................................................................. 259
Functionality.............................................................................. 259
Function block........................................................................... 260
Signals.......................................................................................260
Settings......................................................................................261
Monitored data...........................................................................262
Lens characteristic............................................................... 265
Detecting an out-of-step condition........................................267
Maximum slip frequency.......................................................268
Taking care of the circuit breaker ........................................ 269
Design.................................................................................. 271
Technical data........................................................................... 272
Loss of excitation LEXPDIS............................................................272
Identification.............................................................................. 272
Functionality.............................................................................. 272
Function block........................................................................... 273
Signals.......................................................................................273
Settings......................................................................................274
Monitored data...........................................................................275
Technical data........................................................................... 279
Sensitive rotor earth fault protection, injection based ROTIPHIZ .. 279
Identification.............................................................................. 279
5
Technical manual

Table of contents
Functionality.............................................................................. 279
Description of input signals........................................................280
Description of output signals..................................................... 280
Function block........................................................................... 282
Signals.......................................................................................282
Settings......................................................................................283
Monitored data...........................................................................284
The injection unit REX060....................................................286
Rotor Earth Fault Protection function................................... 287
General measurement of earth fault impedance.................. 288
Simplified logic diagram....................................................... 290
Technical data........................................................................... 292
100% stator earth fault protection, injection based STTIPHIZ .......293
Identification.............................................................................. 293
Functionality.............................................................................. 293
Description of input signals........................................................294
Description of output signals..................................................... 294
Function block........................................................................... 296
Signals.......................................................................................296
Settings......................................................................................297
Monitored data...........................................................................298
Configuration principle..........................................................299
Generator system earthing methods.................................... 302
100% Stator earth fault protection function.......................... 306
General measurement of earth fault impedance.................. 310
Measuring reference impedance..........................................312
Simplified logic diagram....................................................... 317
Technical data........................................................................... 318
Under impedance protection for generators and transformers
ZGVPDIS........................................................................................319
Identification.............................................................................. 319
Functionality.............................................................................. 319
Function block........................................................................... 319
Signals.......................................................................................320
Settings......................................................................................320
Monitored data...........................................................................322
Operation principle of zone 1............................................... 324
Load encroachment..............................................................330
6
Technical manual

Table of contents
Under voltage seal-in........................................................... 331

Technical data........................................................................... 332
Section 8 Current protection.........................................................333

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC .........................................................................................333
Identification.............................................................................. 333
Functionality.............................................................................. 333
Function block........................................................................... 333
Signals.......................................................................................333
Settings......................................................................................334
Monitored data...........................................................................334
Technical data........................................................................... 335
Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
OC4PTOC ..................................................................................... 335
Identification.............................................................................. 336
Functionality.............................................................................. 336
Function block........................................................................... 337
Signals.......................................................................................337
Settings......................................................................................339
Monitored data...........................................................................344
Second harmonic blocking element...........................................349
Technical data........................................................................... 350
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................ 351
Identification.............................................................................. 351
Functionality.............................................................................. 351
Function block........................................................................... 351
Signals.......................................................................................351
Settings......................................................................................352
Monitored data...........................................................................352
Technical data........................................................................... 353
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC .................................353
Identification.............................................................................. 353
Functionality.............................................................................. 354
Function block........................................................................... 354
Signals.......................................................................................354
Settings......................................................................................356
Monitored data...........................................................................361
Operating quantity within the function.................................. 362
7
Technical manual

Table of contents
Internal polarizing................................................................. 363

External polarizing for earth-fault function............................364
Directional detection for earth fault function......................... 364
Base quantities within the protection....................................365
Internal earth-fault protection structure................................ 365
Four residual overcurrent steps............................................365
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................366
Second harmonic blocking element..................................... 369
Switch on to fault feature......................................................371
Technical data........................................................................... 373
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC .....................................................................374
Identification.............................................................................. 374
Functionality.............................................................................. 374
Function block........................................................................... 375
Signals.......................................................................................375
Settings......................................................................................376
Monitored data...........................................................................381
Operating quantity within the function.................................. 381
Internal polarizing facility of the function.............................. 382
External polarizing for negative sequence function..............383
Internal negative sequence protection structure.................. 383
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages........................ 383
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................384
Technical data........................................................................... 387
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE ..................................................................................... 387
Identification.............................................................................. 387
Functionality.............................................................................. 388
Function block........................................................................... 389
Signals.......................................................................................390
Settings......................................................................................391
Monitored data...........................................................................393
Function inputs..................................................................... 393
Technical data........................................................................... 399
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR ........... 400
Identification.............................................................................. 401
Functionality.............................................................................. 401
Function block........................................................................... 401
Signals.......................................................................................402
8
Technical manual

Table of contents
Settings......................................................................................402
Monitored data...........................................................................403
Technical data........................................................................... 407
Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF 407
Identification.............................................................................. 407
Functionality.............................................................................. 407
Function block........................................................................... 408
Signals.......................................................................................408
Settings......................................................................................409
Monitored data...........................................................................410
Technical data........................................................................... 413
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC........................................... 413
Identification.............................................................................. 413
Functionality.............................................................................. 414
Function block........................................................................... 414
Signals.......................................................................................414
Settings......................................................................................415
Monitored data...........................................................................415
Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................418
Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................418
Technical data........................................................................... 418
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP............................... 419
Identification.............................................................................. 419
Functionality.............................................................................. 419
Function block........................................................................... 420
Signals.......................................................................................420
Settings......................................................................................421
Monitored data...........................................................................422
Low pass filtering..................................................................424
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................425
Technical data........................................................................... 426
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ................................427
Identification.............................................................................. 427
Functionality.............................................................................. 427
Function block........................................................................... 428
Signals.......................................................................................428
Settings......................................................................................429
Monitored data...........................................................................431
9
Technical manual

Table of contents
Low pass filtering..................................................................433

Calibration of analog inputs..................................................433
Technical data........................................................................... 435
Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines
NS2PTOC ......................................................................................435
Identification.............................................................................. 435
Functionality.............................................................................. 435
Function block........................................................................... 436
Signals.......................................................................................437
Settings......................................................................................437
Monitored data...........................................................................438
Start sensitivity..................................................................... 440
Alarm function...................................................................... 441
Logic diagram.......................................................................441
Technical data........................................................................... 442
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator
AEGPVOC......................................................................................442
Identification.............................................................................. 442
Functionality ........................................................................ 443
Function block...................................................................... 443
Signals..................................................................................443
Settings................................................................................ 444
Monitored data..................................................................... 444
Operation principle............................................................... 444
Technical data...................................................................... 445
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC.............. 446
Identification.............................................................................. 446
Functionality.............................................................................. 446
Function block........................................................................... 447
Signals.......................................................................................447
Settings......................................................................................448
Monitored data...........................................................................449
Measured quantities............................................................. 449
Base quantities.....................................................................449
Overcurrent protection..........................................................449
Logic diagram.......................................................................451
Undervoltage protection....................................................... 451
Technical data........................................................................... 452
Generator stator overload protection, GSPTTR ............................ 453
Identification.............................................................................. 453
Functionality.............................................................................. 453
Function block........................................................................... 454
10
Technical manual

Table of contents
Signals.......................................................................................454
Settings......................................................................................454
Monitored data...........................................................................455
Technical data........................................................................... 463
Generator rotor overload protection, GRPTTR ..............................463
Identification.............................................................................. 463
Functionality.............................................................................. 463
Function block........................................................................... 464
Signals.......................................................................................464
Settings......................................................................................465
Monitored data...........................................................................466
Technical data........................................................................... 475
Section 9 Voltage protection........................................................ 477

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ................................477
Identification.............................................................................. 477
Functionality.............................................................................. 477
Function block........................................................................... 478
Signals.......................................................................................478
Settings......................................................................................479
Monitored data...........................................................................481
Measurement principle......................................................... 482
Time delay............................................................................482
Blocking................................................................................488
Design.................................................................................. 489
Technical data........................................................................... 491
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ..................................491
Identification.............................................................................. 491
Functionality.............................................................................. 492
Function block........................................................................... 492
Signals.......................................................................................492
Settings......................................................................................493
Monitored data...........................................................................495
Time delay............................................................................496
Blocking................................................................................502
Design.................................................................................. 502
Technical data........................................................................... 504
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV ................. 505
Identification.............................................................................. 505
11
Technical manual

Table of contents
Functionality.............................................................................. 505
Function block........................................................................... 505
Signals.......................................................................................505
Settings......................................................................................506
Monitored data...........................................................................508
Time delay............................................................................508
Blocking................................................................................514
Design.................................................................................. 514
Technical data........................................................................... 515
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH ............................................ 516
Identification.............................................................................. 516
Functionality.............................................................................. 516
Function block........................................................................... 516
Signals.......................................................................................517
Settings......................................................................................517
Monitored data...........................................................................518
Measured voltage.................................................................521
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................522
Cooling................................................................................. 525
Overexcitation protection function measurands................... 525
Overexcitation alarm............................................................ 526
Logic diagram.......................................................................527
Technical data........................................................................... 527
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ......................................528
Identification.............................................................................. 528
Functionality.............................................................................. 528
Function block........................................................................... 528
Signals.......................................................................................528
Settings......................................................................................529
Monitored data...........................................................................530
Technical data........................................................................... 531
100% Stator earth fault protection, 3rd harmonic based STEFPHIZ532
Identification.............................................................................. 532
Functionality.............................................................................. 532
Function block........................................................................... 533
Signals.......................................................................................534
Settings......................................................................................535
Monitored data...........................................................................535
12
Technical manual

Table of contents
Technical data........................................................................... 541
Section 10 Frequency protection....................................................543

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF ............................................. 543
Identification.............................................................................. 543
Functionality.............................................................................. 543
Function block........................................................................... 543
Signals.......................................................................................544
Settings......................................................................................544
Monitored data...........................................................................545
Time delay............................................................................545
Voltage dependent time delay..............................................546
Blocking................................................................................547
Design.................................................................................. 547
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ...............................................548
Identification.............................................................................. 548
Functionality.............................................................................. 549
Function block........................................................................... 549
Signals.......................................................................................549
Settings......................................................................................550
Monitored data...........................................................................550
Time delay............................................................................551
Blocking................................................................................551
Design.................................................................................. 551
Technical data........................................................................... 552
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .............................553
Identification.............................................................................. 553
Functionality.............................................................................. 553
Function block........................................................................... 553
Signals.......................................................................................553
Settings......................................................................................554
Monitored data...........................................................................554
Time delay............................................................................555
Blocking................................................................................555
Design.................................................................................. 556
Technical data........................................................................... 557
Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR........ 557
Identification.............................................................................. 557
13
Technical manual

Table of contents
Functionality ............................................................................. 557

Function block .......................................................................... 558
Signals.......................................................................................558
Settings......................................................................................559
Monitored data...........................................................................560
Section 11 Multipurpose protection................................................ 565

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC.......................... 565
Identification.............................................................................. 565
Functionality.............................................................................. 565
Inadvertent generator energization...................................... 565
Function block........................................................................... 566
Signals.......................................................................................566
Settings......................................................................................568
Monitored data...........................................................................575
Measured quantities within CVGAPC...................................576
Base quantities for CVGAPC function..................................578
Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................578
Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................583
Built-in overvoltage protection steps.................................... 584
Built-in undervoltage protection steps.................................. 584
Inadvertent generator energizing......................................... 584
Logic diagram.......................................................................586
Technical data........................................................................... 591
Section 12 System protection and control......................................595

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC....................................................... 595
Identification.............................................................................. 595
Functionality.............................................................................. 595
Function block........................................................................... 595
Signals.......................................................................................595
Settings......................................................................................596
Filter calculation example.......................................................... 600
Section 13 Secondary system supervision.....................................603

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC............................................603
Identification.............................................................................. 603
Functionality.............................................................................. 603
Function block........................................................................... 603
Signals.......................................................................................604
Settings......................................................................................604
14
Technical manual

Table of contents

Technical data........................................................................... 606
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC................................................606
Identification.............................................................................. 606
Functionality.............................................................................. 607
Function block........................................................................... 607
Signals.......................................................................................608
Settings......................................................................................609
Monitored data...........................................................................610
Zero and negative sequence detection................................ 610
Delta current and delta voltage detection.............................612
Dead line detection...............................................................615
Main logic............................................................................. 616
Technical data........................................................................... 619
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC..................................................619
Identification.............................................................................. 619
Functionality.............................................................................. 619
Function block........................................................................... 620
Signals.......................................................................................620
Settings......................................................................................621
Monitored data...........................................................................621
Technical data........................................................................... 623
Section 14 Control..........................................................................625
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN...625
Identification.............................................................................. 625
Functionality.............................................................................. 625
Function block........................................................................... 626
Signals.......................................................................................626
Settings......................................................................................628
Monitored data...........................................................................631
Basic functionality.................................................................631
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 632
Technical data........................................................................... 643
Interlocking .................................................................................... 644
Functionality.............................................................................. 644
Logical node for interlocking SCILO ......................................... 647
Identification......................................................................... 647
Functionality......................................................................... 647
Function block...................................................................... 648
15
Technical manual

Table of contents
Signals..................................................................................648
Logic diagram.......................................................................648
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................649
Identification......................................................................... 649
Functionality......................................................................... 649
Function block...................................................................... 650
Logic diagram.......................................................................650
Signals..................................................................................650
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS.......................... 650
Identification......................................................................... 651
Functionality......................................................................... 651
Function block...................................................................... 652
Logic diagram.......................................................................653
Signals..................................................................................654
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................ 655
Identification......................................................................... 656
Functionality......................................................................... 656
Function block...................................................................... 656
Logic diagram.......................................................................657
Signals..................................................................................657
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................ 658
Identification......................................................................... 658
Functionality......................................................................... 659
Function block...................................................................... 660
Logic diagram.......................................................................661
Signals..................................................................................663
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH ..................................................... 666
Identification......................................................................... 666
Functionality......................................................................... 666
Function blocks.................................................................... 667
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 669
Signals..................................................................................674
Interlocking for double CB bay DB ........................................... 678
Identification......................................................................... 678
Functionality......................................................................... 678
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 680
Function block...................................................................... 683
Signals..................................................................................685
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE .......................................... 688
Identification......................................................................... 688
Functionality......................................................................... 688
Function block...................................................................... 689
Logic diagram.......................................................................690
16
Technical manual

Table of contents
Signals..................................................................................695
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................ 697
Identification......................................................................... 697
Functionality......................................................................... 698
Function block...................................................................... 699
Logic diagram.......................................................................700
Signals..................................................................................701
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................703
Identification......................................................................... 703
Functionality......................................................................... 703
Function block...................................................................... 703
Logic diagram.......................................................................704
Signals..................................................................................704
Apparatus control APC................................................................... 704
Functionality.............................................................................. 704
Error handling............................................................................ 706
Bay control QCBAY................................................................... 709
Functionality......................................................................... 709
Function block...................................................................... 709
Signals..................................................................................709
Settings................................................................................ 710
Local/Remote switch LOCREM................................................. 712
Function block...................................................................... 712
Signals..................................................................................713
Settings................................................................................ 714
Switch controller SCSWI........................................................... 715
Functionality ........................................................................ 716
Function block...................................................................... 716
Signals..................................................................................716
Settings................................................................................ 718
Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................723
Functionality ........................................................................ 723
Function block...................................................................... 723
Signals..................................................................................724
Settings................................................................................ 725
Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................729
Functionality ........................................................................ 729
Function block...................................................................... 729
17
Technical manual

Table of contents
Signals..................................................................................730
Settings................................................................................ 731
Bay reserve QCRSV..................................................................735
Functionality......................................................................... 735
Function block...................................................................... 735
Signals..................................................................................736
Settings................................................................................ 737
Reservation input RESIN...........................................................739
Functionality......................................................................... 739
Function block...................................................................... 739
Signals..................................................................................740
Settings................................................................................ 741
Voltage control................................................................................743
Identification.............................................................................. 743
Functionality.............................................................................. 743
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC .........................................................744
Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and
TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC............................................................. 748
Function block........................................................................... 752
Signals.......................................................................................753
Settings......................................................................................756
Monitored data...........................................................................758
Technical data........................................................................... 759
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGAPC.................................................................... 760
Identification.............................................................................. 760
Functionality.............................................................................. 760
Function block........................................................................... 761
Signals.......................................................................................761
Settings......................................................................................763
Monitored data...........................................................................763
Graphical display..................................................................764
Selector mini switch VSGAPC........................................................765
Identification.............................................................................. 765
Functionality.............................................................................. 766
Function block........................................................................... 766
Signals.......................................................................................766
18
Technical manual

Table of contents
Settings......................................................................................767
Generic communication function for Double Point indication
DPGAPC........................................................................................ 768
Identification.............................................................................. 768
Functionality.............................................................................. 768
Function block........................................................................... 768
Signals.......................................................................................768
Settings......................................................................................769
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC........................ 769
Identification.............................................................................. 769
Functionality.............................................................................. 769
Function block........................................................................... 770
Signals.......................................................................................770
Settings......................................................................................770
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS.......... 771
Identification.............................................................................. 771
Functionality.............................................................................. 772
Function block........................................................................... 772
Signals.......................................................................................772
Settings......................................................................................773
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD.................................... 788
Identification.............................................................................. 788
Functionality.............................................................................. 788
Function block........................................................................... 789
Signals.......................................................................................789
Settings......................................................................................790
Section 15 Logic.............................................................................791
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC .......................791
Identification.............................................................................. 791
Functionality.............................................................................. 791
Function block........................................................................... 791
Signals.......................................................................................792
Settings......................................................................................793
Logic diagram.......................................................................794
Technical data........................................................................... 798
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC........................................................... 798
Identification.............................................................................. 798
19
Technical manual

Table of contents
Functionality.............................................................................. 799
Function block........................................................................... 799
Signals.......................................................................................799
Settings......................................................................................801
Technical data........................................................................... 802
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH....................................................802
Identification.............................................................................. 802
Functionality.............................................................................. 803
Function block........................................................................... 803
Signals.......................................................................................803
Settings......................................................................................804
Technical data........................................................................... 804
Logic for group warning WRNCALH...............................................805
Identification.............................................................................. 805
Functionality.............................................................................. 805
Function block........................................................................... 805
Signals.......................................................................................805
Settings......................................................................................806
Technical data........................................................................... 807
Logic for group indication INDCALH...............................................807
Identification.............................................................................. 807
Functionality.............................................................................. 807
Function block........................................................................... 807
Signals.......................................................................................808
Settings......................................................................................808
Technical data........................................................................... 809
Basic configurable logic blocks.......................................................809
AND function block AND........................................................... 810
Function block...................................................................... 810
Signals..................................................................................811
Technical data...................................................................... 811
Controllable gate function block GATE......................................811
Function block...................................................................... 811
Signals..................................................................................811
Settings................................................................................ 812
Technical data...................................................................... 812
Inverter function block INV........................................................ 812
Function block...................................................................... 812
Signals..................................................................................812
20
Technical manual

Table of contents
Technical data...................................................................... 813

Loop delay function block LLD.................................................. 813
Function block...................................................................... 813
Signals..................................................................................813
Technical data...................................................................... 813
OR function block...................................................................... 813
Function block...................................................................... 814
Signals..................................................................................814
Technical data...................................................................... 814
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER..................................814
Function block...................................................................... 815
Signals..................................................................................815
Settings................................................................................ 815
Technical data...................................................................... 815
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.................815
Function block...................................................................... 816
Signals..................................................................................816
Settings................................................................................ 816
Technical data...................................................................... 816
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY................. 817
Function block...................................................................... 817
Signals..................................................................................817
Settings................................................................................ 817
Technical data...................................................................... 818
Settable timer function block TIMERSET.................................. 818
Function block...................................................................... 818
Signals..................................................................................818
Settings................................................................................ 819
Technical data...................................................................... 819
Exclusive OR function block XOR............................................. 819
Function block...................................................................... 819
Signals..................................................................................820
Technical data...................................................................... 820
Configurable logic blocks Q/T.........................................................820
ANDQT function block............................................................... 821
Function block...................................................................... 822
Signals..................................................................................822
Technical data...................................................................... 822
Single point indication related signals combining function
block INDCOMBSPQT.............................................................. 822
Function block...................................................................... 823
Signals..................................................................................823
Technical data...................................................................... 823
21
Technical manual

Table of contents
Single point input signal attributes converting function block

INDEXTSPQT............................................................................823
Function block...................................................................... 824
Signals..................................................................................824
Technical data...................................................................... 824
Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT.....................................824
Function block...................................................................... 825
Signals..................................................................................825
Technical data...................................................................... 826
Inverter function block INVERTERQT....................................... 826
Function block...................................................................... 827
Signals..................................................................................827
Technical data...................................................................... 827
ORQT function block................................................................. 827
Function block...................................................................... 828
Signals..................................................................................828
Technical data...................................................................... 828
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT.............................828
Function block...................................................................... 829
Signals..................................................................................829
Settings................................................................................ 829
Technical data...................................................................... 829
Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT.................................830
Function block...................................................................... 830
Signals..................................................................................830
Settings................................................................................ 831
Technical data...................................................................... 831
Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT.................................831
Function block...................................................................... 831
Signals..................................................................................832
Settings................................................................................ 832
Technical data...................................................................... 832
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT............................. 832
Function block...................................................................... 833
Signals..................................................................................833
Settings................................................................................ 833
Technical data...................................................................... 833
Exclusive OR function block XORQT........................................ 833
Function block...................................................................... 834
Signals..................................................................................834
Technical data...................................................................... 834
Extension logic package.................................................................835
Fixed signals FXDSIGN..................................................................835
22
Technical manual

Table of contents
Identification.............................................................................. 835
Functionality.............................................................................. 835
Function block........................................................................... 836
Signals.......................................................................................836
Settings......................................................................................836
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.......................................... 837
Identification.............................................................................. 837
Function block........................................................................... 837
Signals.......................................................................................837
Monitored data...........................................................................838
Settings......................................................................................838
Technical data........................................................................... 839
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation
BTIGAPC........................................................................................839
Identification.............................................................................. 839
Functionality.............................................................................. 840
Function block........................................................................... 840
Signals.......................................................................................840
Settings......................................................................................841
Monitored data...........................................................................841
Technical data........................................................................... 842
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16...........................................842
Identification.............................................................................. 842
Functionality.............................................................................. 842
Function block........................................................................... 843
Signals.......................................................................................843
Setting parameters.................................................................... 844
Technical data........................................................................... 845
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
ITBGAPC........................................................................................845
Identification.............................................................................. 845
Functionality.............................................................................. 845
Function block........................................................................... 846
Signals.......................................................................................846
Settings......................................................................................847
Technical data........................................................................... 848
Pulse integrator TIGAPC................................................................ 848
Identification.............................................................................. 848
Functionality.............................................................................. 848
23
Technical manual

Table of contents
Function block........................................................................... 849

Signals.......................................................................................849
Settings......................................................................................849
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC.....................................................................851
Identification.............................................................................. 851
Functionality.............................................................................. 852
Function block........................................................................... 852
Signals.......................................................................................853
Settings......................................................................................853
Operation accuracy.............................................................. 855
Memory storage................................................................... 855
Technical data........................................................................... 855
Section 16 Monitoring.....................................................................857
Measurements................................................................................857
Identification.............................................................................. 857
Functionality.............................................................................. 857
Function block........................................................................... 859
Signals.......................................................................................861
Settings......................................................................................864
Monitored data...........................................................................875
Measurement supervision.................................................... 878
Measurements CVMMXN.....................................................882
Phase current measurement CMMXU................................. 887
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU.............................................................. 888
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI..................................................................................888
Technical data........................................................................... 888
Gas medium supervision SSIMG................................................... 890
Identification.............................................................................. 890
Functionality.............................................................................. 890
Function block........................................................................... 891
Signals.......................................................................................891
Settings......................................................................................892
Technical data........................................................................... 893
Liquid medium supervision SSIML................................................. 893
Identification.............................................................................. 893
Functionality.............................................................................. 894
24
Technical manual

Table of contents
Function block........................................................................... 894

Signals.......................................................................................894
Settings......................................................................................895
Technical data........................................................................... 896
Breaker monitoring SSCBR............................................................896
Identification.............................................................................. 896
Functionality.............................................................................. 897
Function block........................................................................... 897
Signals.......................................................................................897
Settings......................................................................................898
Monitored data...........................................................................900
Circuit breaker contact travel time........................................902
Circuit breaker status........................................................... 903
Remaining life of circuit breaker........................................... 904
Accumulated energy.............................................................905
Circuit breaker operation cycles........................................... 906
Circuit breaker operation monitoring.................................... 907
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring............................. 908
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication................................ 909
Technical data........................................................................... 909
Event function EVENT....................................................................910
Identification.............................................................................. 910
Functionality.............................................................................. 910
Function block........................................................................... 910
Signals.......................................................................................911
Settings......................................................................................912
Disturbance report DRPRDRE....................................................... 915
Identification.............................................................................. 915
Functionality.............................................................................. 915
Function block........................................................................... 916
Signals.......................................................................................917
Settings......................................................................................922
Monitored data...........................................................................961
Technical data........................................................................... 971
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP..................................... 972
Identification.............................................................................. 972
Functionality.............................................................................. 972
Function block........................................................................... 973
Signals.......................................................................................973
25
Technical manual

Table of contents
Settings......................................................................................974
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP................................ 975
Identification.............................................................................. 975
Functionality.............................................................................. 975
Function block........................................................................... 975
Signals.......................................................................................976
Limit counter L4UFCNT..................................................................976
Identification.............................................................................. 976
Identification......................................................................... 976
Functionality.............................................................................. 977
Design.................................................................................. 977
Reporting..............................................................................978
Function block........................................................................... 979
Signals.......................................................................................979
Settings......................................................................................980
Monitored data...........................................................................980
Technical data........................................................................... 980
Section 17 Metering....................................................................... 981

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT......................................................... 981
Identification.............................................................................. 981
Functionality.............................................................................. 981
Function block........................................................................... 981
Signals.......................................................................................982
Settings......................................................................................982
Monitored data...........................................................................983
Technical data........................................................................... 985
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR 985
Identification.............................................................................. 985
Functionality.............................................................................. 985
Function block........................................................................... 986
Signals.......................................................................................986
Settings......................................................................................987
Monitored data...........................................................................988
Technical data........................................................................... 992
Technical data...................................................................... 992
Section 18 Station communication................................................. 993

670 series protocols....................................................................... 993
26
Technical manual

Table of contents
DNP3 protocol................................................................................ 993

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol......................................... 993
Communication interfaces and protocols.................................. 993
Settings......................................................................................994
Technical data........................................................................... 994
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC...............................................................994
Functionality......................................................................... 995
Function block...................................................................... 995
Signals..................................................................................995
Settings................................................................................ 996
Monitored data..................................................................... 996
Generic communication function for Measured Value
MVGAPC................................................................................... 997
Functionality......................................................................... 997
Function block...................................................................... 997
Signals..................................................................................998
Settings................................................................................ 998
Monitored data..................................................................... 999
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication.............. 999
Functionality......................................................................... 999
Function block...................................................................... 999
Signals................................................................................1000
Settings.............................................................................. 1000
Monitored data................................................................... 1000
Principle of operation..........................................................1000
LON communication protocol....................................................... 1002
Functionality............................................................................ 1002
Settings....................................................................................1002
Operation principle.................................................................. 1002
Technical data......................................................................... 1020
SPA communication protocol....................................................... 1020
Functionality............................................................................ 1020
Design..................................................................................... 1020
Settings....................................................................................1021
Communication ports......................................................... 1029
Technical data......................................................................... 1029
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol................................... 1030
Introduction..............................................................................1030
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS......................... 1030
Functionality....................................................................... 1030
27
Technical manual

Table of contents
Identification....................................................................... 1030
Function block.................................................................... 1031
Signals................................................................................1031
Settings.............................................................................. 1031
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR........................................................................1032
Functionality....................................................................... 1032
Identification....................................................................... 1032
Function block.................................................................... 1032
Signals................................................................................1033
Settings.............................................................................. 1033
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR....1034
Functionality....................................................................... 1034
Identification....................................................................... 1034
Function block.................................................................... 1034
Signals................................................................................1034
Settings.............................................................................. 1034
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF.........1035
Functionality....................................................................... 1035
Identification....................................................................... 1035
Function block.................................................................... 1035
Signals................................................................................1035
Settings.............................................................................. 1035
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT......................................................................... 1036
Functionality....................................................................... 1036
Identification....................................................................... 1036
Function block.................................................................... 1037
Signals................................................................................1037
Settings.............................................................................. 1038
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED................................ 1038
Functionality....................................................................... 1038
Identification....................................................................... 1039
Function block.................................................................... 1039
Signals................................................................................1039
Settings.............................................................................. 1039
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV............1040
Functionality....................................................................... 1040
Identification....................................................................... 1040
Function block.................................................................... 1040
Signals................................................................................1040
Settings.............................................................................. 1040
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF...........................................................................1041
28
Technical manual

Table of contents
Functionality....................................................................... 1041
Identification....................................................................... 1041
Function block.................................................................... 1041
Signals................................................................................1041
Settings.............................................................................. 1042
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD.............. 1043
Functionality....................................................................... 1043
Identification....................................................................... 1044
Function block.................................................................... 1044
Signals................................................................................1044
Settings.............................................................................. 1044
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD................ 1044
Functionality....................................................................... 1044
Identification....................................................................... 1045
Function block.................................................................... 1045
Signals................................................................................1045
Settings.............................................................................. 1045
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD..........................................................................1046
Functionality....................................................................... 1046
Identification....................................................................... 1046
Function block.................................................................... 1046
Signals................................................................................1046
Settings.............................................................................. 1047
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD..........................................................................1047
Functionality....................................................................... 1047
Identification....................................................................... 1047
Function block.................................................................... 1048
Signals................................................................................1048
Settings.............................................................................. 1048
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD..........................................................................1048
Functionality....................................................................... 1048
Identification....................................................................... 1049
Function block.................................................................... 1049
Signals................................................................................1049
Settings.............................................................................. 1049
Operation principle ................................................................. 1050
General...............................................................................1050
Communication ports......................................................... 1060
Technical data......................................................................... 1061
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.......................................................................1061
29
Technical manual

Table of contents
Functionality............................................................................ 1061
Function block......................................................................... 1062
Signals.....................................................................................1062
Settings....................................................................................1064
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV........................................1065
Function block......................................................................... 1065
Signals.....................................................................................1065
Settings....................................................................................1066
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV............................................................................1067
Identification............................................................................ 1067
Functionality............................................................................ 1067
Function block......................................................................... 1067
Signals.....................................................................................1067
Settings....................................................................................1068
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV........................................................................... 1068
Identification............................................................................ 1068
Functionality............................................................................ 1068
Function block......................................................................... 1069
Signals.....................................................................................1069
Settings....................................................................................1069
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV........................................................................... 1070
Identification............................................................................ 1070
Functionality............................................................................ 1070
Function block......................................................................... 1070
Signals.....................................................................................1070
Settings....................................................................................1071
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV............................................................................ 1071
Identification............................................................................ 1071
Functionality............................................................................ 1072
Function block......................................................................... 1072
Signals.....................................................................................1072
Settings....................................................................................1072
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND........................................ 1073
Functionality............................................................................ 1073
Design..................................................................................... 1073
General...............................................................................1073
30
Technical manual

Table of contents
Function block......................................................................... 1074

Signals.....................................................................................1074
Settings....................................................................................1076
Security events on protocols SECALARM....................................1077
Security alarm SECALARM.....................................................1077
Signals................................................................................1077
Settings.............................................................................. 1077
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG....................................... 1077
Activity logging ACTIVLOG..................................................... 1077
Settings....................................................................................1077
Section 19 Remote communication..............................................1079

Binary signal transfer....................................................................1079
Identification............................................................................ 1079
Functionality............................................................................ 1079
Function block......................................................................... 1080
Signals.....................................................................................1080
Settings....................................................................................1082
Monitored data.........................................................................1085
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit............ 1087
Function block......................................................................... 1087
Signals.....................................................................................1087
Section 20 Basic IED functions.................................................... 1089

Authority check ATHCHCK...........................................................1089
Identification............................................................................ 1089
Functionality............................................................................ 1089
Authorization with Central Account Management enabled
IED..................................................................................... 1092
Authority management AUTHMAN...............................................1095
Identification............................................................................ 1095
AUTHMAN...............................................................................1095
Settings....................................................................................1095
FTP access with password FTPACCS......................................... 1095
Identification............................................................................ 1095
FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS............................................1095
Settings....................................................................................1096
Authority status ATHSTAT........................................................... 1096
Identification............................................................................ 1096
Functionality............................................................................ 1096
Function block......................................................................... 1096
31
Technical manual

Table of contents
Signals.....................................................................................1097
Settings....................................................................................1097
Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG.................... 1097
Functionality............................................................................ 1097
Function block......................................................................... 1097
Signals.....................................................................................1098
Settings....................................................................................1098
Internal signals................................................................... 1100
Supervision of analog inputs.............................................. 1102
Technical data......................................................................... 1102
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN......................................1103
Functionality............................................................................ 1103
Settings....................................................................................1103
General concepts............................................................... 1108
Real-time clock (RTC) operation........................................ 1111
Synchronization alternatives.............................................. 1112
Technical data......................................................................... 1115
Parameter setting groups............................................................. 1115
Functionality............................................................................ 1115
Function block......................................................................... 1116
Signals.....................................................................................1116
Settings....................................................................................1117
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK................................................. 1118
Functionality............................................................................ 1118
Function block......................................................................... 1119
Signals.....................................................................................1119
Test mode functionality TESTMODE............................................1120
Functionality............................................................................ 1120
Function block......................................................................... 1120
Signals.....................................................................................1120
Settings....................................................................................1121
IED identifiers TERMINALID........................................................ 1122
Functionality............................................................................ 1122
Settings ...................................................................................1122
Product information PRODINF..................................................... 1123
Functionality............................................................................ 1123
Settings ...................................................................................1123
32
Technical manual

Table of contents
Factory defined settings.......................................................... 1123

Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI............................................ 1124
Functionality............................................................................ 1124
Function block......................................................................... 1124
Signals.....................................................................................1124
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ....................................... 1125
Functionality............................................................................ 1125
Function block......................................................................... 1126
Signals.....................................................................................1126
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI................................................ 1127
Functionality............................................................................ 1127
Function block......................................................................... 1127
Signals.....................................................................................1127
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI........................................... 1128
Functionality............................................................................ 1128
Function block......................................................................... 1128
Signals.....................................................................................1129
Settings....................................................................................1130
Frequency values............................................................... 1133
Global base values GBASVAL..................................................... 1134
Identification............................................................................ 1134
Functionality............................................................................ 1134
Settings....................................................................................1134
Primary system values PRIMVAL.................................................1135
Identification............................................................................ 1135
Functionality............................................................................ 1135
Settings....................................................................................1135
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM............................................ 1135
Functionality............................................................................ 1135
Function block......................................................................... 1136
Signals.....................................................................................1136
Settings....................................................................................1137
Denial of service DOS.................................................................. 1137
Functionality ........................................................................... 1137
Function blocks........................................................................1138
Signals.....................................................................................1138
Settings....................................................................................1139
Monitored data.........................................................................1139
33
Technical manual

Table of contents
Section 21 IED hardware............................................................. 1141

Overview.......................................................................................1141
Variants of case size with local HMI display............................1141
Case from the rear side........................................................... 1143
Hardware modules....................................................................... 1148
Overview..................................................................................1148
Numeric processing module (NUM)........................................ 1149
Introduction.........................................................................1149
Functionality....................................................................... 1149
Block diagram.....................................................................1150
Power supply module (PSM)................................................... 1150
Introduction.........................................................................1150
Design................................................................................ 1150
Technical data.................................................................... 1151
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)...........................1151
Transformer input module (TRM)............................................ 1151
Introduction.........................................................................1151
Design................................................................................ 1152
Technical data.................................................................... 1153
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
(ADM) ..................................................................................... 1154
Introduction.........................................................................1154
Design................................................................................ 1154
Binary input module (BIM)....................................................... 1156
Introduction.........................................................................1156
Design................................................................................ 1156
Signals................................................................................1159
Settings.............................................................................. 1160
Monitored data................................................................... 1160
Technical data.................................................................... 1160
Binary output modules (BOM)................................................. 1161
Introduction.........................................................................1161
Design................................................................................ 1161
Signals................................................................................1163
Settings.............................................................................. 1164
Monitored data................................................................... 1164
Technical data.................................................................... 1168
Static binary output module (SOM)......................................... 1169
Introduction.........................................................................1169
Design................................................................................ 1169
Signals................................................................................1170
Settings.............................................................................. 1171
34
Technical manual

Table of contents
Monitored data................................................................... 1171

Technical data.................................................................... 1173
Binary input/output module (IOM)............................................1174
Introduction.........................................................................1174
Design................................................................................ 1174
Signals................................................................................1176
Settings.............................................................................. 1177
Monitored data................................................................... 1177
Technical data.................................................................... 1179
mA input module (MIM)........................................................... 1181
Introduction.........................................................................1181
Design................................................................................ 1181
Signals................................................................................1182
Settings.............................................................................. 1183
Monitored data................................................................... 1184
Technical data.................................................................... 1185
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ...................... 1185
Introduction.........................................................................1185
Design................................................................................ 1185
Technical data.................................................................... 1186
Galvanic RS485 communication module.................................1187
Introduction.........................................................................1187
Design................................................................................ 1187
Technical data.................................................................... 1188
Optical ethernet module (OEM)...............................................1189
Introduction.........................................................................1189
Functionality....................................................................... 1189
Design................................................................................ 1189
Technical data.................................................................... 1190
Line data communication module (LDCM).............................. 1190
Introduction.........................................................................1190
Design................................................................................ 1190
Technical data.................................................................... 1191
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)............ 1192
Introduction.........................................................................1192
Design................................................................................ 1193
Functionality....................................................................... 1194
Technical data.................................................................... 1195
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)............................... 1195
Introduction.........................................................................1195
Design................................................................................ 1195
Monitored data................................................................... 1196
Technical data.................................................................... 1196
35
Technical manual

Table of contents
GPS antenna........................................................................... 1196

Introduction.........................................................................1196
Design................................................................................ 1196
Technical data.................................................................... 1198
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B........................... 1198
Introduction.........................................................................1198
Design................................................................................ 1198
Settings.............................................................................. 1199
Technical data.................................................................... 1199
Dimensions...................................................................................1200
Case without rear cover...........................................................1200
Flush mounting dimensions.....................................................1202
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions................................. 1203
Wall mounting dimensions.......................................................1204
External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection1204
External current transformer unit............................................. 1206
Mounting alternatives................................................................... 1206
Flush mounting........................................................................ 1206
Overview............................................................................ 1206
Mounting procedure for flush mounting..............................1207
19” panel rack mounting.......................................................... 1208
Overview............................................................................ 1208
Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting...............1209
Wall mounting..........................................................................1210
Overview............................................................................ 1210
Mounting procedure for wall mounting............................... 1210
How to reach the rear side of the IED................................ 1211
Side-by-side 19” rack mounting...............................................1212
Overview............................................................................ 1212
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting.......... 1212
IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case...........1213
Side-by-side flush mounting.................................................... 1213
Overview............................................................................ 1213
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting......... 1214
Technical data.............................................................................. 1215
Enclosure.................................................................................1215
Electrical safety....................................................................... 1215
Connection system.................................................................. 1215
Influencing factors................................................................... 1216
Type tests according to standard............................................ 1217
Section 22 Injection equipment hardware.................................... 1221

Overview.......................................................................................1221
36
Technical manual

Table of contents
Front view of injection unit, coupling capacitor and shunt

resitor unit................................................................................1221
Injection unit REX060.........................................................1221
REX060 Front panel controls............................................. 1222
Coupling capacitor unit REX061........................................ 1223
Shunt resistor unit REX062................................................ 1225
Injection unit REX060 from rear side.......................................1226
Injection unit REX060.........................................................1226
Injection unit REX060................................................................... 1226
Introduction..............................................................................1226
Design..................................................................................... 1226
Coupling capacitor unit REX061...................................................1230
Introduction..............................................................................1230
Design..................................................................................... 1230
Shunt resistor unit REX062.......................................................... 1231
Introduction..............................................................................1231
Design..................................................................................... 1231
Technical data.............................................................................. 1232
Hardware................................................................................. 1232
Type tests according to standards...........................................1234
Influencing factors................................................................... 1236
Section 23 Labels.........................................................................1237
Labels on IED............................................................................... 1237
Labels on injection equipment...................................................... 1239
Section 24 Connection diagrams................................................. 1243
Section 25 Inverse time characteristics........................................1245

Application.................................................................................... 1245
Principle of operation....................................................................1248
Mode of operation....................................................................1248
Inverse characteristics..................................................................1253
Section 26 Glossary..................................................................... 1283

Glossary....................................................................................... 1283
37
Technical manual

38

1MRK502052-UEN B Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.
1.2 Intended audience
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning

personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,

protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the
IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in
handling electronic equipment.
39
Technical manual

Section 1 1MRK502052-UEN B
Introduction
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Product documentation set
Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase
Decommissioning
Commissioning
Maintenance
Engineering
Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN
Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle
The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides
instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project
structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection
and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP3.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are
organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for
assistance during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking
of external circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as
40
Technical manual

Introduction
well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of
testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant
procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines

sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a
typical protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for
calculating settings.
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
normal service.
The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols

supported by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific
implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific
to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding
communication protocol manual.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference
normal service.
1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date History
-/May2014 First release
A/June 2016 Second release
B/June 2016 Minor corrections
41
Technical manual

Introduction
1.3.3 Related documents

Documents related to REG670 Identify number
Application manual 1MRK 502 051-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 502 053-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 502 054-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 502 052-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 502 054-TEN
670 series manuals Identify number

Operation manual 1MRK 500 118-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 308-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 019-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 1MRK 511 304-UEN
60870-5-103
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 302-UEN
Edition 1
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 303-UEN
Edition 2
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 305-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 306-UEN
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 309-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
1.4 Document symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.
The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or

warning about the temperature of product surfaces.
42
Technical manual

Introduction
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of
a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand

that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important
that the user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.
1.4.2 Document conventions

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the
signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to
achieve a valid application configuration.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are
bordered by dashed lines.
43
Technical manual

Introduction
• Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
• If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix
-int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and
continues.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another
diagram have the suffix ”-cont.”
Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products

than the one the manual describes. The example that is illustrated is
still valid.
1.4.3 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
Table continues on next page
44
Technical manual

Introduction

BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
45
Technical manual

Introduction

CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV
COUVPTOV COUVPTUV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC
D2PTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC
EF2PTRC EF2RDIR
EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR
GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
46
Technical manual

Introduction

FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOOSEBINRCV BINGREC -
GOOSEDPRCV DPGREC -
GOOSEINTLKRCV INTGREC -
GOOSEINTRCV INTSGREC -
GOOSEMVRCV MVGREC -
GOOSESPRCV BINSGREC -
GOOSEVCTRRCV VCTRGREC -
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP
LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 -
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
47
Technical manual

Introduction

LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD
LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC
NS2PTOC NS2PTRC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV
O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC
PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
48
Technical manual

Introduction

QCBAY QCBAY
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SINGLELCCH SCHLCCH
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
49
Technical manual

Introduction

TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC U2RWPTUV
U2RWPTUV
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS
ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC
ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU
ZMMMXU
50
Technical manual

Introduction

ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC
51
Technical manual

52

Available functions
Section 2 Available functions
2.1 Main protection functions
2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Generator
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
Differential protection
T2WPDIF 87T Transformer differential 0-2 1-A31 1-A33 1
protection, two winding
T3WPDIF 87T Transformer differential 0-2 1-A33 1
protection, three winding
HZPDIF 87 1Ph high impedance differential 0-6 3-A02 3 6
protection
GENPDIF 87G Generator differential protection 0-2 1 2 2
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, 0-3 1-A01 1
low impedance
Impedance protection
ZMHPDIS 21 Fullscheme distance protection, 0-4 3 3 3
mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element 0-2 1 1 1
for mho characteristic
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection 0–1
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection 0–1
for series compensated lines
PSPPPAM 78 Pole slip/out-of-step protection 0-1 1-B21 1-B21 1-B21
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0-1
LEXPDIS 40 Loss of excitation 0-2 1 2 2
ROTIPHIZ 64R Sensitive rotor earth fault 0-1 1-B31 1-B31 1-B31
protection, injection based
STTIPHIZ 64S 100% stator earth fault protection, 0-1 1-B32 1-B32 1-B32
injection based
ZGVPDIS 21 Underimpedance for generators 0–1 1 1 1
and transformers
53
Technical manual

Available functions
2.2 Back-up protection functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase 0-4 1 2 2
overcurrent protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase overcurrent 0-6 4 4 4
protection
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual 0-2 1 2 2
EF4PTOC 51N Four step residual overcurrent 0-6 1 5 5
67N2) protection
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative 0-2 1-C41 2-C42 2-C42
phase sequence overcurrent
protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual 0-2 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
overcurrent and power
protection
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload protection, 0-3 1 2 3
two time constant
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-4 2 4 4
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-4 2 2 2
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower 0-4 2 4 4
protection
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower 0-4 2 4 4
protection
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check
NS2PTOC 46I2 Negative sequence time 0-2 1 1 1
overcurrent protection for
machines
AEGPVOC 50AE Accidental energizing protection 0-2 1 1 1
for synchronous generator
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent 0-3 3-C36 3-C36 3-C36
protection
GSPTTR 49S Stator overload protection 0-1 1-C37 1-C37 1-C37
GRPTTR 49R Rotor overload protection 0–1 1-C38 1-C38 1-C38
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage 0-2 2 2 2
protection
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2 2 2 2
54
Technical manual

Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage 0-3 3 3 3

protection
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-2 1 1 2
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2 2 2 2
STEFPHIZ 59THD 100% stator earth fault 0-1 1-D21 1 1
protection, 3rd harmonic based
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check
Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 3 6 6
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 3 6 6
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change frequency 0-3 1 3 3
protection
FTAQFVR 81A Frequency time accumulation 0-12 12-E03 12-E03 12-E03
protection
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage 1-12 6 6 6
protection
General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage
2.3 Control and monitoring functions

REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check and 0-2 1 2 2
synchronizing
APC30 3 Apparatus control for up to 6 bays, max 30 0-1 1-H09 1-H09 1-H09
apparatuses (6CBs) incl. interlocking
QCBAY Apparatus control 1+5/APC30 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
APC3 APC3 APC3
0 0 0
55
Technical manual

Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch positions 1+5/APC30 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/

APC3 APC3 APC3
0 0 0
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1+5/APC30 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
APC3 APC3 APC3
0 0 0
TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 0-4 1-A31 2-A33 2
binary inputs
TCLYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision, 32 0-4
binary inputs
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection 15 15 15 15
and LHMI presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 20 20 20 20
DPGAPC Generic communication function for 16 16 16 16
Double Point indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control 8 signals 5 5 5 5
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function for 3 3 3 3
DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4 4 4 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 50 50 50 50
60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for 50 50 50 50
IEC 60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
Secondary system supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-5 4 5 5
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-3 2 3 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on voltage 0-3 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03
difference
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 1-6 6 6 6
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5 5 5
56
Technical manual

Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
AND, OR, INV, Configurable logic blocks 40-280 40-28 40-28 40-28
PULSETIMER, 0 0 0
GATE,
TIMERSET, XOR,
LLD,
SRMEMORY,
RSMEMORY
ANDQT, ORQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–1
INVERTERQT,
XORQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
PULSETIMERQT
, INVALIDQT,
INDCOMBSPQT,
INDEXTSPQT
SLGAPC, Extension logic package 0–1
VSGAPC, AND,
OR,
PULSETIMER,
GATE,
TIMERSET, XOR,
LLD,
SRMEMORY,
INV
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 18 18 18 18
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with 16 16 16 16
Logic Node representation
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 18 18 18
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with 16 16 16 16
Logic Node representation
TIGAPC Delay on timer with input signal integration 30 30 30 30
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit 12 12 12 12
transgression and overflow supervision
Monitoring
CVMMXN, Measurements 6 6 6 6
CMMXU,
VMMXU, CMSQI,
VMSQI,
VNMMXU
AISVBAS Function block for service value 1 1 1 1
presentation of secondary analog inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20
57
Technical manual

Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1

A1RADR,
A2RADR,
A3RADR,
A4RADR,
B1RBDR,
B2RBDR,
B3RBDR,
B4RBDR,
B5RBDR,
B6RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication function for Single 64 64 64 64
Point indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for Single 16 16 16 16
Point indication 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication function for 24 24 24 24
Measured Value
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3 3 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66 66 66 66
SSIMG 63 Gas medium supervision 21 21 21 21
SSIML 71 Liquid medium supervision 3 3 3 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker monitoring 0-4 2-M12 4-M14 4-M14
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 3 3 3 3
60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for IEC 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defiend signals for IEC 20 20 20 20
60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30 30 30 30
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and 6 6 6 6
demand handling
58
Technical manual

Available functions
2.4 Communication
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1 1 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between 1 1 1 1
SPA and IEC 60870-5-103 for
SLM
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1 1 1
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general 1 1 1 1
protocol
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general 1 1 1 1
TCP protocol
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 1 1 1 1
communication protocol
CH1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1
CH2TCP, communication protocol
CH3TCP,
CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 1 1 1 1
communication protocol
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for serial 1 1 1 1
MST2TCP, communication protocol
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1
and EIA-485 communication
protocol
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for 1 1 1 1
IEC 61850
GOOSEINTLKR Horizontal communication via 59 59 59 59
CV GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV Goose binary receive 16 16 16 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to 64 64 64 64
receive a double point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to 32 32 32 32
receive an integer value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to 60 60 60 60
receive a measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to 64 64 64 64
receive a single point value
59
Technical manual

Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10

MULTICMDSND
FRONT, LANABI, Ethernet configuration of links 1 1 1 1
LANAB, LANCDI,
LANCD
GATEWAY Ethernet configuration of link 1 1 1 1
one
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial 1 1 1 1
communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial 1 1 1 1
communication for RS485
AGSAL Generic security application 1 1 1 1
component
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol 1 1 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping 1 1 1 1
security events on protocols
such as DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool access via 1 1 1 1
SPA protocol over ethernet
communication
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters 1 1 1 1
ALTRK Service Tracking 1 1 1 1
SINGLELCCH Single ethernet port link status 1 1 1 1
PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet port link status 1 1 1 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 parallel 0-1 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03
redundancy protocol (only in
F00)
Remote communication
Binary signal transfer receive/ 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36
transmit
Transmission of analog data 1 1 1 1
from LDCM
Receive binary status from 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
remote LDCM
60
Technical manual

Available functions
2.5 Basic IED functions
Table 2: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
SYNCHBIN, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS,
SYNCHSNTP,
SYNCHSPA,
SYNCHCMPPS
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN, GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI20 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
DOSLANAB Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
61
Technical manual

Available functions
IEC 61850 or function Description

name
ALTRK Service tracking
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters
FSTACCS Field service tool access via SPA protocol over ethernet communication
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON
LONSPA SPA communication protocol
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
62
Technical manual

Analog inputs
Section 3 Analog inputs
3.1 Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined properly. Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system
quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is important to set the
data about the connected current and voltage transformers properly.
A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This

analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle
information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.
3.2 Function block
The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and in
ACT when a TRM is included in the configuration with the hardware
configuration tool. In the SMT or the ACT they can be mapped to the
desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the
configuration.
63
Technical manual

Analog inputs
3.3 Signals
Table 3: TRM_12I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
Table 4: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

CH7(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 7
Table 5: TRM_6I Output signals

64
Technical manual

Analog inputs



65
Technical manual

Analog inputs
3.4 Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.

Table 8: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - Ch12 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel
TRM41-Ch1 - Ch12 for phase angle
MU1-L1I presentation
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
MU4-L1I - L4I
MU4-L1U - L4U
MU5-L1I - L4I
MU5-L1U - L4U
MU6-L1I - L4I
MU6-L1U - L4U
Table 9: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
66
Technical manual

Analog inputs

Table 10: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

67
Technical manual

Analog inputs

VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
Table 11: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

68
Technical manual

Analog inputs


69
Technical manual

Analog inputs


70
Technical manual

Analog inputs

3.5 Monitored data
Table 14: AISVBAS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated
Table 15: TRM_12I Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status
Table 16: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

1=Error status
71
Technical manual

Analog inputs
Table 17: TRM_6I Monitored data

1=Error status

1=Error status

1=Error status
3.6 Operation principle
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or
away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:
• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into
the object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out
from the object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure
2)
• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.
72
Technical manual

Analog inputs
Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object
Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN
Figure 2: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED
If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or

ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and
VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and
primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated
ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/
Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.
73
Technical manual

74

Binary input and output modules
Section 4 Binary input and output modules
4.1 Binary input
4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.
A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond
when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced
binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime
value and the debounced input value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and
the debounced input value is low. The default setting of DebounceTime is 1 ms.
The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the
counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0
again.
4.1.2 Oscillation filter

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic
fields from for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the
disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.
An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the
counter value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked. The
input signal is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below the set
value OscRelease.
4.1.3 Settings
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 20: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit
75
Technical manual

Binary input and output modules
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

Table 21: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
76
Technical manual

Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour
5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -
5.1.2 Settings
Table 22: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
DisplayTimeout 1 - 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen - 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance report
On
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes
5.2 Local HMI signals
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -
5.2.2 Function block
77
Technical manual

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
IEC09000320 V1 EN
Figure 3: LHMICTRL function block
5.2.3 Signals
Table 23: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs
Table 24: LHMICTRL Output signals

HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI
are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not
active
5.3 Basic part for LED indication module
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication HW GRP1_LED1 - - -
module GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15
78
Technical manual

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK
IEC09000321 V1 EN
Figure 4: LEDGEN function block
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN
Figure 5: GRP1_LED1 function block
The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three
groups have a similar function block.
5.3.3 Signals
Table 25: LEDGEN Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs
Table 26: LEDGEN Output signals

NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is
set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are
acknowledged
Table 27: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
79
Technical manual

5.3.4 Settings
Table 28: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance
Table 29: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI alarm
Follow-F group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green
5.3.5 Monitored data

Table 30: GRP1_LED1 Monitored data
LEDStatus INTEGER 1=Red flash - Status of LED 1, local
2=Red steady HMI alarm group 1
3=Yellow flash
4=Yellow steady
5=Green flash
6=Green steady
0=Off
5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module
LCD part for HMI Function Keys Control FNKEYMD1 - - -
module FNKEYMD5
80
Technical manual

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN
Figure 6: FNKEYMD1 function block
Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for
every function key button.
5.4.3 Signals
Table 31: FNKEYMD1 Input signals
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key
Table 32: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key
5.4.4 Settings
Table 33: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state
Table 34: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut Menu shortcut for
function key
81
Technical manual

5.5 Operation principle
5.5.1 Local HMI
IEC13000239 V2 EN
Figure 7: Local human-machine interface
The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600
82
Technical manual

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.
5.5.1.1 Display
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240
pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view
depends on the character size and the view that is shown.
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
1 2
3 4
IEC13000063 V2 EN
Figure 8: Display layout
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)
83
Technical manual

• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long
to be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated
with three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and
the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears
on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not
fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.
IEC13000045 V2 EN
Figure 9: Truncated path
The number after the function instance, for example ETHFRNT:1, indicates the
instance number.
The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.
84
Technical manual

GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN
Figure 10: Function button panel
The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs. Three
alarm LED pages are available.
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN
Figure 11: Alarm LED panel
The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that
depends on the label string length that the panel contains.
5.5.1.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.
85
Technical manual

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to
each three-color LED are divided into three pages.
5.5.1.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.
86
Technical manual

24
1
23
2
18
3
19
4
6 20
21
7 22
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
IEC15000157 V2 EN
Figure 12: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port
1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
87
Technical manual

19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs
5.5.2 LED
5.5.2.1 Functionality
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx

(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs.
The input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The
input signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is
controlled by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block that controls the color and the
operating mode.
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.
5.5.2.2 Status LEDs
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and red.
The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The
yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that
a disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The
red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.
Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:

• Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is not
in service); steady > IED is in service
• Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode (IED
is not in normal service); steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the
yellow LED on has been active
• Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common write
from PCM600; steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED
on has been active
88
Technical manual

The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function,
DRPRDRE, by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR
binary input function block using the PCM600, and configuring the setting to Off,
Start or Trip for that particular signal.
5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs
Operating modes
Collecting mode
• LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated
continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable
when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system. When all three inputs (red,
yellow and green) are connected to different sources of events for the same
function block, collecting mode shows the highest priority LED color that was
activated since the latest acknowledgment was made. If a number of different
indications were made since the latest acknowledgment, it is not possible to get
a clear view of what triggered the latest event without looking at the sequence of
events list. A condition for getting the sequence of events is that the signals have
been engineered in the disturbance recorder.
Re-starting mode
• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs
defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S)
will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to
end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the
maximum time limit has elapsed. In sequence 6, the restarting or reset mode
means that upon occurrence of any new event, all previous indications will be
reset. This facilitates that only the LED indications related to the latest event is
shown.
Acknowledgment/reset
• From local HMI
• The active LED indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is
performed via the button and menus on the LHMI.
• From function input

• The active LED indications can also be acknowledged/reset via an input,
CLRLEDS, to the function block LHMICTRL. This input can for example
be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button or a
89
Technical manual

function button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered.
This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the
acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when
the button is first pressed.
• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined for
re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follows
the input signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. The following 6 sequences are available:
• Sequence 1: Follow-S
• Sequence 2: Follow-F
• Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
• Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
• Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
• Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S
For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /reset
function is not applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input
signal. Sequence 3 and 4, which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement, are
only working in collecting (Coll) mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched
type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and
re-starting (Reset) mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning
S = Steady and F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the corresponding
LED obtains a color that corresponds to the activated input, and operates according to
the selected sequence diagrams shown below.
In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the
following symbols:
90
Technical manual

= No indication = Steady light = Flash
G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN
Figure 13: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light.
It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other
LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN
Figure 14: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the
priority color it shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example of
the operation when two colors are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in
figure15.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R G
IEC09000312 V1 EN
Figure 15: Operating sequence 1, two colors
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the
91
Technical manual

signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets
a steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN
Figure 16: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block
is used for all three colour LEDs.
When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the

indication with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of
if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In figure 17 it
is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after
acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority
signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R R G
LED
Acknow
IEC09000313 V1 EN
Figure 17: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to figure 18.
92
Technical manual

Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G Y R R Y
Acknow.
IEC09000314 V1 EN
Figure 18: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1
If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority

indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according
to figure 19.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R R Y
Acknow.
IEC09000315 V1 EN
Figure 19: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.
Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation
of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.
93
Technical manual

Activating
signal
LED
Reset
IEC01000235 V2 EN
Figure 20: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according
to figure21.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R G
LED
Reset
IEC09000316 V1 EN
Figure 21: Operating sequence 5, two colors
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive
edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active
signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its
operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
94
Technical manual

Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN
Figure 22: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance
Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.
Disturbance Disturbance
tRestart tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000240 V2 EN
Figure 23: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances
95
Technical manual

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000241 V2 EN
Figure 24: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.
96
Technical manual

Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000242 V2 EN
Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset
5.5.3 Function keys
Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left
of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each
button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control
a binary signal.
5.5.3.2 Operation principle
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled

from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output
status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be
used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O
outputs etc.
FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and

parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and
parameters are normally set using the PST.
97
Technical manual

Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.
Setting OFF
This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).
Input value
Output value
IEC09000330 V2 EN
Figure 26: Sequence diagram for setting OFF
Setting TOGGLE
In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for more
than 500ms. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes.
The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.
Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms
Output value
IEC09000331 V2 EN
Figure 27: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE
Setting PULSED
In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for more
than 500ms and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the output
will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being
high and there is no output pulse.
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is
zero; else the trigger edge is lost.
98
Technical manual

Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms 500ms
pulse time pulse time pulse time

Output value
IEC09000332 V2 EN
Figure 28: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED
Input function
All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function
block becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off. It has
been implemented this way for safety reasons; the idea is that the function key LEDs
should always reflect the actual status of any primary equipment monitored by these
LEDs.
99
Technical manual

100

Section 6 Differential protection
6.1 Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and

T3WPDIF
Transformer differential protection, two- T2WPDIF 87T
winding
3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN
Transformer differential protection, T3WPDIF 87T

three-winding
3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN
6.1.2 Functionality
The Transformer differential protection, two-winding T2WPDIF and Transformer
differential protection, three-winding T3WPDIF are provided with internal CT ratio
matching, vector group compensation and settable zero sequence current elimination.
The function can be provided with up to six three-phase sets of current inputs. All
current inputs are provided with percentage bias restraint features, making the IED
suitable for two- or three-winding transformer in multi-breaker station arrangements.
Two-winding applications
two-winding power
transformer
xx05000048.vsd
IEC05000048 V1 EN
two-winding power
transformer with
unconnected delta
xx05000049.vsd tertiary winding
IEC05000049 V1 EN
101
Technical manual

two-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
xx05000050.vsd two CT-sets on one
IEC05000050 V1 EN side
two-winding power
two CT-sets on both
sides
xx05000051.vsd
IEC05000051 V1 EN
Three-winding applications
three-winding power
transformer with all
three windings
connected
xx05000052.vsd
IEC05000052 V1 EN
three-winding power
two CT-sets on one
side
xx05000053.vsd
IEC05000053 V1 EN
Autotransformer with
two circuit breakers
and two CT-sets on
two out of three sides
xx05000057.vsd
IEC05000057 V1 EN
Figure 29: CT group arrangement

for differential
protection
The setting facilities cover the application of the differential protection to all types of
power transformers and auto-transformers with or without load tap changer as well as
shunt reactors and local feeders within the station. An adaptive stabilizing feature is
included for heavy through-fault currents.By introducing the load tap changer
position, the differential protection pick-up can be set to optimum sensitivity thus
covering internal faults with low fault current level.
Stabilization is included for inrush and overexcitation currents respectively, cross-

blocking is also available. Adaptive stabilization is also included for system recovery
102
Technical manual

inrush and CT saturation during external faults. A high set unrestrained differential
current protection element is included for a very high speed tripping at high internal
fault currents.
Included is an sensitive differential protection element based on the theory of negative

sequence current component. This element offers the best possible coverage of power
transformer windings turn to turn faults.

T2WPDIF
I3PW1CT1* TRIP
I3PW1CT2* TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1* TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2* TRNSUNR
TAPOLTC1 TRNSSENS
OLTC1AL START
BLOCK STL1
BLKRES STL2
BLKUNRES STL3
BLKNSUNR BLK2H
BLKNSSEN BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
BLKWAV
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2
BLKWAVL3
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG
IEC06000249 V2 EN
Figure 30: T2WPDIF function block
103
Technical manual

T3WPDIF
I3PW1CT1* TRIP
I3PW1CT2* TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1* TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2* TRNSUNR
I3PW3CT1* TRNSSENS
I3PW3CT2* START
TAPOLTC1 STL1
TAPOLTC2 STL2
OLTC1AL STL3
OLTC2AL BLK2H
BLOCK BLK2HL1
BLKRES BLK2HL2
BLKUNRES BLK2HL3
BLKNSUNR BLK5H
BLKNSSEN BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
BLKWAV
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2
BLKWAVL3
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG
IEC06000250 V2 EN
Figure 31: T3WPDIF function block
6.1.4 Signals
Table 35: T2WPDIF Input signals
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding primary CT1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding secondary CT1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
TAPOLTC1 INTEGER 1 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1
OLTC1AL BOOLEAN 0 OLTC1 alarm
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for restrained differential feature
BLKUNRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature
BLKNSUNR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential
feature
BLKNSSEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential
feature
104
Technical manual

Table 36: T2WPDIF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General, common trip signal
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip signal from restrained differential protection
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection
TRNSUNR BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection
TRNSSENS BOOLEAN Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection
START BOOLEAN Common start signal from any phase
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common second harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common fifth harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLKWAV BOOLEAN Common block signal, waveform criterion, from
any phase
BLKWAVL1 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L1
IDALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a
delay ...
IDL1 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current, phase
L1
L2
L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, which is common to
all phases
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current
105
Technical manual

Table 37: T3WPDIF Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding tertiary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding tertiary CT2
SIGNAL
BLKRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for restrained differential feature
BLKUNRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature
feature
feature
Table 38: T3WPDIF Output signals

BLK2H BOOLEAN Common second harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common fifth harmonic block signal from any
phase
106
Technical manual


BLKWAV BOOLEAN Common block signal, waveform criterion, from
any phase
IDALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases
delay ...
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
L1
L2
L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, which is common to
all phases
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current
6.1.5 Settings
Table 39: T2WPDIF Group settings (basic)
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SOTFMode Off - - On Operation mode for switch onto fault
On
tAlarmDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Time delay for diff currents alarm level
IDiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.20 Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdMin 0.05 - 0.60 IB 0.01 0.30 Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdUnre 1.00 - 100.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of Winding 1
rated current
107
Technical manual


CrossBlockEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for cross-block logic
On between phases
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential
On protections
IMinNegSeq 0.02 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Neg. seq. curr. must be higher than this
level to be used
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq. fault
discriminator
Table 40: T2WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, multiple of Winding 1
rated current
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, multiple of Winding 1
rated current
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
OpenCTEnable Off - - Off Open CT detection feature. Open
On CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 3.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open
CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function
is activated
tOCTUnrstDelay 0.10 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained diff. protection blocked after
this delay, in s
Table 41: T2WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

GlobalBaseSelW1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 1
ConnectTypeW1 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-
Delta (D) delta
Delta (D) delta
108
Technical manual


ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Phase displacement between W2 &
1 [30 deg lag] W1=HV winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ZSCurrSubtrW1 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W1 side, On / Off
TconfigForW1 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W1 side
CT2RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W1
side
Yes YES / NO
transf. W2 side
transf. W2 side
LocationOLTC1 Not Used - - Not Used Transformer winding where OLTC1 is
Winding 1 (W1) located
Winding 2 (W2)
LowTapPosOLTC1 0 - 10 - 1 1 OLTC1 lowest tap position designation
(e.g. 1)
RatedTapOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 6 OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position
designation (e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 11 OLTC1 highest tap position designation
(e.g. 11)
TapHighVoltTC1 1 - 100 - 1 1 OLTC1 end-tap position with winding
highest no-load voltage
StepSizeOLTC1 0.01 - 30.00 % 0.01 1.00 Voltage change per OLTC1 step in
percent of rated voltage
Table 42: T3WPDIF Group settings (basic)

tAlarmDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Time delay for diff currents alarm level
On
IDiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.20 Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
109
Technical manual


SOTFMode Off - - On Operation mode for switch onto fault
On feature
IdMin 0.05 - 0.60 IB 0.01 0.30 Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdUnre 1.00 - 100.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestr. prot. limit, multi. of base curr.
usually W1 curr.
CrossBlockEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for cross-block logic
On between phases
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential
On protections
IMinNegSeq 0.02 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Neg. seq. curr. limit, mult. of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq. fault
discriminator
Table 43: T3WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, multi. of base current,
usually W1 curr.
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, multi. of base current,
usually W1 curr.
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
OpenCTEnable Off - - Off Open CT detection feature. Open
On CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 3.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open
CT is detected
is activated
this delay, in s
Table 44: T3WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Delta (D) delta
110
Technical manual


Delta (D) delta
ConnectTypeW3 WYE (Y) - - Delta (D) Connection type of winding 3: Y-wye or D-
Delta (D) delta
ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Phase displacement between W2 &
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ClockNumberW3 0 [0 deg] - - 5 [150 deg lag] Phase displacement between W3 &
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
Yes YES / NO
transf. W1 side
CT2RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W1
side
Yes YES / NO
transf. W2 side
transf. W2 side
Yes YES / NO
transf. W3 side
transf. W3 side
111
Technical manual


Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
(e.g. 1)
(e.g. 11)
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
(e.g. 1)
(e.g. 11)

Table 45: T2WPDIF Monitored data
OCTSIDE INTEGER - - Open CT side : 1 -> W 1
(pri), 2 -> W 2 (sec)
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for
input 1, 2 for input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for
L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L1
current, phase L2
112
Technical manual


current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current, which is common
to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current
Table 46: T3WPDIF Monitored data

current, phase L1
current, phase L2
current, phase L3
current, which is common
to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
6.1.7 Operation principle

The task of the power transformer differential protection is to determine whether a
fault is within the protected zone, or outside of the protected zone. The protected zone
is limited by the position of current transformers (see Figure 32), and in principle can
include more objects than just a transformer. If the fault is found to be internal, the
faulty power transformer must be quickly disconnected from the system.
The main CTs are normally supposed to be star connected. The main CTs can be
earthed in anyway (that is, either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). However internally
the differential function will always use reference directions towards the protected
transformer as shown in Figure 32. Thus the IED will always internally measure the
currents on all sides of the power transformer with the same reference direction
towards the power transformer windings as shown in Figure 32. For more information
see the Application manual.
113
Technical manual

IW1 IW2
Z1S1 Z1S2
E1S1 E1S2
IW1 IW2
IED
en05000186.vsd
IEC05000186 V1 EN
Figure 32: Typical CT location and definition of positive current direction
Even in a healthy power transformer, the currents are generally not equal when they
flow through it. This is due to the ratio of the number of turns of the windings and the
connection group of the protected transformer. Therefore the differential protection
must first correlate all currents to each other before any calculation can be performed.
First, compensation for the protected transformer transformation ratio and connection
group is made, and only then are the currents compared phase-wise. This makes
external auxiliary (interposing) current transformers unnecessary. Conversion of all
currents to the common reference side of the power transformer is performed by pre-
programmed coefficient matrices, which depends on the protected power transformer
transformation ratio and connection group. Once the power transformer vector group,
rated currents and voltages have been entered by the user, the differential protection
is capable to calculate off-line matrix coefficients required in order to perform the on-
line current comparison by means of a fixed equation.
The negative-sequence-current-based internal-external fault discriminator, is used

with advantage in order to determine whether a fault is internal or external. It not only
positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can also
independently detect minor faults which may not be sensed by the "usual" differential
protection based on operate-restrain characteristic.
For all differential functions it is the common trip that is used to

initiate a trip of a breaker. The separate trip signals from the different
parts lacks the safety against maloperation. This will in some cases
result in a 6 ms time difference between, for example restrained trip is
issued and common trip is issued. The separate trip signals are only
used for information purpose of which part that has caused the trip.
6.1.7.1 Function calculation principles
To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained differential

characteristics have been developed and is now adopted as the general practice in the
protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided with a
114
Technical manual

proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage
differential current related to the current through the transformer. This stabilizes the
protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have
good basic sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these quantities are
derived.
Fundamental frequency differential currents

The fundamental frequency differential current is a vectorial sum (sum of
fundamental frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from the different
sides of the protected power transformer.
Before any differential current can be calculated, the power transformer phase shift,
and its transformation ratio, must be accounted for. Conversion of all currents to a
common reference is performed in two steps:
• all current phasors are phase-shifted to (referred to) the phase-reference side,
(whenever possible the first winding with star connection)
• all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power
transformer (typically transformer high-voltage side)
The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on-line by the pre-programmed
coefficient matrices, as shown in equation 1 for a two-winding power transformer, and
in equation 2 for a three-winding power transformer.
These are the internal compensation within the differential function.

The protected power transformer data is always entered per its
nameplate. The Differential function will correlate nameplate data
and select proper reference windings.
é IDL1 ù é IL1_ W 1 ù é IL1_ W 2 ù

ê IDL 2 ú = A × ê IL 2 _ W 1ú + Un _ W 2 ê ú
ê ú ê ú Un _ W 1 × B × ê IL 2 _ W 2 ú
êë IDL3 úû êë IL3 _ W 1úû êë IL3 _ W 2 úû
1 2 3
EQUATION1880 V1 EN (Equation 1)
where:
1. is the resulting Differential Currents
2. is the current contribution from the W1 side
115
Technical manual

é IDL1 ù é IL1_ W 1 ù é IL1_ W 2 ù é IL1_ W 3 ù

ê IDL 2 ú = A × ê IL 2 _ W 1ú + Un _ W 2 × B × ê IL 2 _ W 2 ú + Un _ W 3 × C × ê IL 2 _ W 3ú
ê ú ê ú Un _ W 1 ê ú Un _ W 1 ê ú
êë IDL3 úû êë IL3 _ W 1úû êë IL3 _ W 2 úû êë IL3 _ W 3 úû
1 2 3 4
where:
1. is the resulting Differential Currents
and where, for equation 1 and equation 2:

IDL1 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary amperes)
IL1_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W1 side
Ur_W1 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1 side (setting parameter)
A, B and C are three by three matrices with numerical coefficients
Values of the matrix A, B and C coefficients depend on:
1. The Power transformer winding connection type, such as star (Y/y) or delta (D/
d)
2. The Transformer vector group such as Yd1, Dy11, YNautod5, Yy0d5 and so on,
which introduce phase displacement between individual windings currents in
multiples of 30°.
3. The Settings for elimination of zero sequence currents for the individual
windings.
116
Technical manual

When the end user enters all these parameters, transformer differential function
automatically calculates the matrix coefficients. During this calculations the
following rules are used:
For the phase reference, the first winding with set star (Y) connection is always used.
For example, if the power transformer is a Yd1 power transformer, the HV winding
(Y) is taken as the phase reference winding. If the power transformer is a Dy1, then the
LV winding (y) is taken for the phase reference. If there is no star connected winding,
such as in Dd0 type of power transformers, then the HV delta winding (D) is
automatically chosen as the phase reference winding.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are in general composed of currents

of all sequences, that is, the positive-, the negative-, and the zero-sequence currents.
If the zero-sequence currents are eliminated (see section "Optional Elimination of
zero sequence currents"), then the differential currents can consist only of the
positive-, and the negative-sequence currents. When the zero-sequence current is
subtracted on one side of the power transformer, then it is subtracted from each
individual phase current.
As it can be seen from equation 1 and equation 2 the first entered winding (W1) is
always taken for ampere level reference (current magnitudes from all other sides are
always transferred to W1 side). In other words, within the differential protection
function, all differential currents and bias current are always expressed in HV side
primary Amperes.
It can be shown that the values of the matrix A, B & C coefficients (see equation 1 and
equation 2) can be pre-calculated in advance depending on the relative phase shift
between the reference winding and other power transformer windings.
Table 47 summarizes the values of the matrices for all standard phase shifts between
windings.
117
Technical manual

Table 47: Matrices for differential current calculation

Matrix with Zero Sequence Matrix with Zero Sequence
Reduction set to On Reduction set to Off
Matrix for Reference Winding
é 2 -1 -1ù é1 0 0 ù
1 ê
× -1 2 -1ú ê0 1 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
ëê -1 -1 2 ûú ëê0 0 1 úû
EQUATION1227 V1 EN (Equation 3) EQUATION1228 V1 EN (Equation 4)
Matrix for winding with 30° Not applicable. Matrix on the
lagging é 1 -1 0 ù left used.
1 ê
× 0 1 -1ú
3 ê ú
êë -1 0 1 úû
Matrix for winding with 60°
lagging é1 -2 1ù é 0 -1 0 ù
1 ê
× 1 1 -2 ú ê 0 0 -1ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë -2 1 1 úû êë -1 0 0 úû
lagging é 0 -1 1 ù left used.
1 ê
× 1 0 -1ú
3 ê ú
êë -1 1 0 úû
lagging é -1 -1 2 ù é0 0 1 ù
1 ê
× 2 -1 -1ú ê1 0 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë -1 2 -1úû ëê0 1 0 úû
lagging é-1 0 1 ù left used.
1
× ê 1 -1 0 ú
3 ê ú
ëê 0 1 -1ûú
Matrix for winding which is in
opposite phase é -2 1 1ù é -1 0 0 ù
1 ê
× 1 -2 1 ú ê 0 -1 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
ëê 1 1 -2 ûú ëê 0 0 -1ûú
leading é-1 1 0 ù left used.
1
× ê 0 -1 1 ú
3 ê ú
ëê 1 0 -1ûú
118
Technical manual

Matrix with Zero Sequence Matrix with Zero Sequence

Reduction set to On Reduction set to Off
leading é -1 2 -1ù é0 1 0 ù
1 ê
× -1 -1 2 ú ê0 0 1 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë 2 -1 -1úû êë1 0 0 úû

leading é 0 1 -1ù left used.
1
× ê -1 0 1 ú
3 ê ú
ëê 1 -1 0 úû
leading é1 1 -2 ù é 0 0 -1ù
1 ê ê -1 0 0 ú
× -2 1 1ú
3 ê ú ê ú
ëê 1 -2 1 ûú ëê 0 -1 0 úû
leading é 1 0 -1ù left used.
1
× ê -1 1 0 ú
3 ê ú
ëê 0 -1 1 úû
By using this table complete equation for calculation of fundamental frequency

differential currents for two winding power transformer with YNd5 vector group and
enabled zero sequence current reduction on HV side will be derived. From the given
power transformer vector group the following is possible to be concluded:
1. The HV star (Y) connected winding will be used as the reference winding and
zero sequence currents shall be subtracted on that side
2. The LV winding is lagging for 150°
With the help of table 47, the following matrix equation can be written for this power
transformer:
é IDL1ù é 2 -1 -1ù é IL1_ W1ù é-1 0 1 ù é IL1_ W 2 ù

ê IDL2ú = 1 × ê-1 2 -1ú × ê IL2 _ W1ú + Ur _ W 2 × 1 × ê 1 -1 0 ú × ê IL2 _ W 2ú
ê ú 3 ê ú ê ú Ur _ W1 3 ê ú ê ú
ëê IDL3ûú ëê-1 -1 2 ûú ëê IL3_ W1ûú ëê 0 1 -1ûú ëê IL3_ W 2 ûú
where:
119
Technical manual


As marked in equation 1 and equation 2, the first term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from the
W1 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for eventual
power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of the equation,
represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from the W2 side
to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. The third
term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution from the
individual phase currents from the W3 side to the fundamental frequency differential
currents, compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to
the power transformer W1 side. These current contributions are important, because
they are used for calculation of common bias current.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are the "usual" differential currents,
the magnitudes which are applied in a phase-wise manner to the operate - restrain
characteristic of the differential protection. The magnitudes of the differential
currents can be read as service values from the function and they are available as
outputs IDL1MAG, IDL2MAG, IDL3MAG from the differential protection function
block. Thus they can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically
recorded during any external or internal fault condition.
On-line compensation for load tap changer movement

A load tap changer is a mechanical device, which is used to step-wise change number
of turns within one power transformer winding. Consequently the power transformer
overall turns ratio is changed. Typically the load tap changer is located within the HV
winding (that is, winding 1, W1) of the power transformer. By operating load tap
changer, it is possible to step-wise regulate voltage on the LV side of the power
transformer. However at the same time the differential protection for power
transformer becomes unbalanced. Differential function in the IED has built-in feature
to continuously monitor the load tap changer position and dynamically compensate
on-line for changes in power transformer turns ratio.
Differential currents are calculated as shown in equation 1 and equation 2. By setting

parameters, the winding location of the OLTC is defined. Also, the voltage change of
each step. Thus, if for example the load tap changer is located within winding 1 the no-
load voltage Vn_W1 will be treated as a function of the actual load tap changer
position in equation 1 and equation 2. Thus for every load tap changer position a
120
Technical manual

corresponding value for Ur_W1 will be calculated and used in the above mentioned
equations. By doing this, complete on-line compensation for load tap changer
movement is achieved. Differential protection will be ideally balanced for every load
tap changer position and no false differential current will appear irrespective of actual
load tap changer position.
Typically the minimum differential protection pickup for power transformer with load
tap changer is set between 30% to 40%. However with this load tap changer
compensation feature it is possible to set the differential protection in the IED more
sensitive with a pickup value of 15% to 20%.
Load tap changer position is measured within the IED by Tap changer control and
supervision, (TCLYLTC). Within this function block, the load tap changer position
value is continuously monitored to insure its integrity.
When any error in the load tap changer position is detected an alarm is given. This
signal shall be connected to the OLTCxAL input of the differential function block.
While OLTCxAL input has a logical value of one the differential protection minimum
pickup, originally defined by setting parameter IdMin, will be increased by the set
range of the load tap changer. Alternatively the differential current alarm feature can
be used to alarm for any problems in the whole load tap changer compensation chain.
It shall be noted that:
• two-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for one
load tap changer within the protected power transformer
• three-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for up to
two load tap changers within the protected power transformer
Differential current alarm

Fundamental frequency differential current level is monitored all the time within the
differential function. As soon as all three fundamental frequency differential currents
are above the set threshold defined by setting parameter IDiffAlarm a delay on pickup
timer is started. When the pre-set time, defined by setting parameter tAlarmDelay, has
expired the differential current alarm is generated and output signal IDALARM is set
to logical value one. This feature can be effectively used to provide alarm when load
tap changer position compensation is used and something in the whole compensation
chain goes wrong. This alarm can be as well used with some additional IED
configuration logic to desensitize the differential function.
Bias current
The bias current is calculated as the highest current amongst all individual winding
current contributions to the total fundamental frequency differential currents, as
shown in equation 1 and equation 2. All individual winding current contributions are
already referred to the power transformer winding one side (power transformer HV
winding) and therefore they can be compared regarding their magnitudes. There are
six (or nine in the case of a three-winding transformer) contributions to the total
fundamental differential currents, which are the candidates for the common bias
current. The highest individual current contribution is taken as a common bias
121
Technical manual

(restrain) current for all three phases. This "maximum principle" makes the
differential protection more secure, with less risk to operate for external faults and in
the same time brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the operate - restrain
characteristic.
It shall be noted that if the zero-sequence currents are subtracted from the separate
contributions to the total differential current, then the zero-sequence component is
automatically eliminated from the bias current as well. This ensures that for secondary
injection from just one power transformer side the bias current is always equal to the
highest differential current regardless of the fault type. During normal through-load
operation of the power transformer, the bias current is equal to the maximum load
current from two (three) -power transformer windings.
The magnitudes of the common bias (restrain) current expressed in HV side amperes
can be read as service value from the function. At the same time it is available as an
output IBIAS from the differential protection function block. It can be connected to
the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal
fault condition.
For application with so called "T" configuration, that is, two restraint CT inputs from
one side of the protected power transformer, such as in the case of breaker-and-a-half
schemes the primary CT ratings can be much higher than the rating of the protected
power transformer. In order to determine the bias current for such T configuration, the
two separate currents flowing in the T-side are scaled down to the protected power
transform level by means of additional settings. This is done in order to prevent
unwanted de-sensitizing of the overall differential protection. In addition to that, the
resultant currents (the sum of two currents) into the protected power transformer
winding, which is not directly measured is calculated, and included in the common
bias calculation. The rest of the bias calculation procedure is the same as in protection
schemes without breaker-and-a-half arrangements.
Optional Elimination of zero sequence currents

To avoid unwanted trips for external earth-faults, the zero sequence currents should be
subtracted on the side of the protected power transformer, where the zero sequence
currents can flow at external earth -faults.
The zero sequence currents can be explicitly eliminated from the differential currents
and common bias current calculation by special, dedicated parameter settings, which
are available for every individual winding.
Elimination of the zero sequence component of current is necessary whenever:
• the protected power transformer cannot transform the zero sequence currents to
the other side.
• the zero sequence currents can only flow on one side of the protected power
transformer.
In most cases, power transformers do not properly transform the zero sequence current
to the other side. A typical example is a power transformer of the star-delta type, for
example YNd1. Transformers of this type do not transform the zero sequence
122
Technical manual

quantities, but zero sequence currents can flow in the earthed star- connected winding.
In such cases, an external earth-fault on the star-side causes zero sequence current to
flow on the star-side of the power transformer, but not on the other side. This results
in false differential currents - consisting exclusively of the zero sequence currents. If
high enough, these false differential currents can cause an unwanted disconnection of
the healthy power transformer. They must therefore be subtracted from the
fundamental frequency differential currents if an unwanted trip is to be avoided.
For delta windings this feature shall be enabled only if an earthing transformer exists
within the differential zone on the delta side of the protected power transformer.
Removing the zero sequence current from the differential currents decreases to some
extent the sensitivity of the differential protection for internal earth -faults. In order to
counteract this effect to some degree, the zero sequence current is subtracted not only
from the three fundamental frequency differential currents, but from the bias current
as well.
Restrained and unrestrained limits of the differential protection

The power transformer differential protection function uses two limits, to which
actual magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency differential currents are
compared at each execution of the function.
The unrestrained (that is, non-stabilized, "instantaneous") part of the differential

protection is used for very high differential currents, where it should be beyond any
doubt, that the fault is internal. This settable limit is constant and not proportional to
the bias current. Neither harmonic, nor any other restrain is applied to this limit, which
is therefore allowed to trip the power transformer instantaneously.
The restrained (stabilized) part of the differential protection compares the calculated
fundamental differential (operating) currents and the bias (restrain) current, by
applying them to the operate - restrain characteristic. Practically, the magnitudes of
the individual fundamental frequency differential currents are compared with an
adaptive limit. This limit is adaptive because it is dependent on the bias (that is,
restrain) current magnitude. This limit is called the operate - restrain characteristic. It
is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint characteristic, as shown in
figure 33. The restrained characteristic is determined by the following 5 settings:
1. IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, multiple of trans. HV side rated current set under
the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
2. EndSection1 (End of section 1, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
3. EndSection2 (End of section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
4. SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
5. SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
The restrained characteristic in figure 33 is defined by the settings:
123
Technical manual

1. IdMin
2. EndSection1
3. EndSection2
4. SlopeSection2
5. SlopeSection3
operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
5
unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
4
Operate
3
conditionally
2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3
SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
EndSection1 restrain current

EndSection2 [ times IBase ]
en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN
Figure 33: Description of the restrained, and the unrestrained operate

characteristics
where:
slope = D Ioperate × 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN
The operate - restrain characteristic is tailor-made and can be designed freely by the
user after his needs. The default characteristic is recommended to be used. It gives
good results in a majority of applications. The operate - restrain characteristic has in
principle three sections with a section-wise proportionality of the operate value to the
bias (restrain) current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic equal to 0.95.
124
Technical manual

Section 1: This is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal
currents flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for
higher false differential currents is relatively low. An un-compensated on-load tap-
changer is a typical reason for existence of the false differential currents in this
section. The slope in section 1 is always zero percent.
Section 2: In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope

with false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the
current transformers.
Section 3: The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher

tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents,
which may be expected in this section.
The operate - restrain characteristic should be designed so that it can be expected that:
• for internal faults, the operate (differential) currents are always with a good
margin above the operate - restrain characteristic
• for external faults, the false (spurious) operate currents are with a good margin
below the operate - restrain characteristic
Fundamental frequency negative sequence differential currents

Existence of relatively high negative sequence currents is in itself a proof of a
disturbance on the power system, possibly a fault in the protected power transformer.
The negative-sequence currents are a measurable indication of an abnormal condition,
similar to the zero sequence current. One of the several advantages of the negative
sequence currents compared to the zero sequence currents is that they provide
coverage for phase-to-phase and power transformer turn-to-turn faults. Theoretically,
the negative sequence currents do not exist during symmetrical three-phase faults,
however they do appear during initial stage of such faults for a long enough time (in
most cases) for the IED to make the proper decision. Further, the negative sequence
currents are not stopped at a power transformer by the Yd, or Dy connection type. The
negative sequence currents are always properly transformed to the other side of any
power transformer for any external disturbance. Finally, the negative sequence
currents are not affected by symmetrical through-load currents.
For power transformer differential protection applications, the negative sequence

based differential currents are calculated by using exactly the same matrix equations,
which are used to calculate the traditional phase-wise fundamental frequency
differential currents. The same equation shall be fed by the negative sequence currents
from the two power transformer sides instead of individual phase currents, as shown
in matrix equation 23 for a case of two-winding, YNd5 power transformer.
125
Technical manual

é IDL1 _ NS ù é2 -1 -1ù é INS _ W 1 ù é -1 0 1 ù é INS _ W 2 ù

ê IDL 2 _ NS ú = 1 × ê -1 2 -1 × ê a × INS _ W 1 ú +
ú Ur _ W 2
×
1
×ê1 -1 0 ú × ê a × INS _ W 2 ú
ê ú 3 ê ú ê 2 ú Ur _ W 1 3 ê ú ê 2 ú
ëê IDL3 _ NS ûú ëê -1 -1 2ûú ëê a × INS _ W 1ûú ëê 0 1 ú ëê a × INS _ W 2 ûú
-1û
1 2 3
where:
1. is the Negative Sequence Differential Currents
2. is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W1 side
3. is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W2 side
and where:
IDL1_NS is the negative sequence differential current in phase L1 (in
W1 side primary amperes)
INS_W1 is the negative sequence current on the W1 side in primary
amperes (phase L1 reference)
INS_W2 is the negative sequence current on the W2 side in primary
amperes (phase L1 reference)
Ur_W1 is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1
side (setting parameter)
Ur_W2 is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2 side
(setting parameter)
a is the complex operator for sequence quantities,
j ×120
o 1 3
a=e =- + j×
2 2
Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical three phase
current system on each transformer side (that is, negative sequence currents in every
phase will always have the same magnitude and be phase displaced for 120 electrical
degrees from each other), it is only necessary to calculate the first negative sequence
differential current that is, IDL1_NS.
As marked in equation 23, the first term on the right hand side of the equation,
represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from the W1 side
compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right
hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution of the negative sequence
126
Technical manual

current from the W2 side compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and
transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These negative sequence current
contributions are phasors, which are further used in directional comparisons, to
characterize a fault as internal or external. See section "Internal/external fault
discriminator" for more information.
The magnitudes of the negative sequence differential current expressed in the HV side
A can be read as service values from the function. In the same time it is available as
outputs IDNSMAG from the differential protection function block. Thus, it can be
connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external
or internal fault condition.
Internal/external fault discriminator

The internal/external fault discriminator is a very powerful and reliable
supplementary criterion to the traditional differential protection. It is recommended
that this feature shall be always used (that is, On) when protecting three-phase power
transformers. The internal/external fault discriminator detects even minor faults, with
a high sensitivity and at high speed, and at the same time discriminates with a high
degree of dependability between internal and external faults.
The internal/external fault discriminator responds to the magnitudes and the relative
phase angles of the negative-sequence fault currents at the different windings of the
protected power transformer. The negative sequence fault currents must first be
referred to the same phase reference side, and put to the same magnitude reference.
This is done by the matrix expression (see equation 23).
Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator is based on the relative position

of the two phasors representing the winding one (W1) and winding two (W2) negative
sequence current contributions, respectively, defined by expression shown in
equation 23. It performs a directional comparison between these two phasors. First,
the LV side phasor is referred to the HV side (W1 side): both the magnitude, and the
phase position are referred to the HV (W1 side). Then the relative phase displacement
between the two negative sequence current phasors is calculated. In case of three-
winding power transformers, a little more complex algorithm is applied, with two
directional tests. The overall directional characteristic of the internal/external fault
discriminator is shown in figure 34, where the directional characteristic is defined by
two setting parameters:
1. IMinNegSeq
2. NegSeqROA
127
Technical manual

90 deg
120 deg
If one or the Internal/external
other of fault boundary
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
NegSeqROA
is done, and
(Relay
120 degrees
Operate
is mapped
Angle)
180 deg 0 deg
IMinNegSeq
External Internal
fault fault
region region
270 deg en05000188-3-en.vsd

IEC05000188 V3 EN
Figure 34: Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator
In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes must
be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the other hand,
in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault discriminator, the
value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this limit value, called
IminNegSeq, is settable in the range of 0.02 to 0.20 times the IBase of the power
transformer winding one. The default value is 0.04. Note that, in order to enhance
stability at higher fault currents, the relatively very low threshold value IminNegSeq
is dynamically increased at currents higher than normal currents: if the bias current is
higher than 110% of IBase ,then 10% of the bias current is added to the IminNegSeq.
Only if the magnitudes of both negative sequence current contributions are above the
actual limit, the relative position between these two phasors is checked. If either of the
negative sequence current contributions, which should be compared, is too small (less
than the set value for IminNegSeq), no directional comparison is made in order to
avoid the possibility to produce a wrong decision. This magnitude check guarantees
stability of the algorithm, when the power transformer is energized. The setting
NegSeqROA represents the Relay Operate Angle, which determines the boundary
between the internal and external fault regions. It can be selected in a range from ±30
degrees to ±90 degrees, with a step of 0.1 degree. The default value is ±60 degrees. The
default setting ±60 degree favours security in comparison to dependability.
If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault

discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence
current contributions from W1 and W2 sides of the power transformer using the
following two rules:
128
Technical manual

• If the negative sequence current contributions from the W1 and the W2 sides are
in phase, the fault is internal (that is, both phasors are within protected zone)
• If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are 180
degrees out of phase, the fault is external (that is, W1 phasors is outside protected
zone)
For example, for any unsymmetrical external fault, ideally the respective negative
sequence current contributions from the W1 and W2 power transformer sides will be
exactly 180 degrees apart and equal in magnitude, regardless the power transformer
turns ratio and phase displacement. An example is shown in figure 35, which shows
trajectories of the two separate phasors representing the negative sequence current
contributions from the HV and LV sides of an Yd5 power transformer (after
compensation of the transformer turns ratio and phase displacement) by using
equation 23) for an unsymmetrical external fault. Observe that the relative phase angle
between these two phasors is 180 electrical degrees at any point in time. No current
transformer saturation was assumed for this case.
"steady state"
for HV side 90
neg. seq. phasor
60
150 30
10
ms
180 0
0.1 kA
0.2 kA
0.3 kA
10 0.4 kA
ms
210 330
"steady state"
240 for LV side
270 neg. seq. phasor
Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from HV side

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from LV side
en05000189.vsd
IEC05000189 V1 EN
Figure 35: Trajectories of Negative Sequence Current Contributions from HV

and LV sides of Yd5 power transformer during external fault
Under external fault conditions, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180
degrees. During internal faults, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to possible
129
Technical manual

different negative sequence source impedance angles on the W1 and W2 sides of the
protected power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal zero value.
However, during heavy faults, CT saturation might cause the measured phase angle to
differ from 180 degrees for an external, and from 0 degrees for an internal fault. See
figure 36 for an example of a heavy internal fault with transient CT saturation.
Dire ctiona l Compa ris on Crite rion: Inte rna l fa ult a s s e e n from the HV s ide
90
e xcurs ion
120 60
from 0 de gre e s
35 ms due to CT
s a tura tion
150 30
de finite ly
a n inte rna l
fa ult
180 0
trip c o mmand
in 12 ms
e xte rna l
fa ult Inte rna l fa ult
0.5 kA de cla re d 7 ms
re gion
210 330 a fte r inte rna l
fa ult occure d
1.0 kA
240 300
1.5 kA
270
HV s ide contribution to the tota l ne ga tive s e que nce diffe re ntia l curre nt in kA
Dire ctiona l limit (within the re gion de limite d by ± 60 de gre e s is inte rna l fa ult)
en05000190.vsd
IEC05000190 V1 EN
Figure 36: Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator for internal fault
with CT saturation
It shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the internal/
external fault discriminator algorithm in order to guarantee proper operation with
heavily saturated current transformers. The trustworthy information on whether a
fault is internal or external is typically obtained in about 10ms after the fault inception,
depending on the setting IminNegSeq, and the magnitudes of the fault currents. During
heavy faults, approximately 5ms time to full saturation of the main CT is sufficient in
order to produce a correct discrimination between internal and external faults.
Unrestrained, and sensitive negative sequence protections

Two sub functions, which are based on the internal/external fault discriminator with
the ability to trip a faulty power transformer, are parts of the traditional power
transformer differential protection.
The unrestrained negative sequence differential protection

The unrestrained negative sequence protection is activated if one or more start signals
have been set by the traditional differential protection algorithm. This happens
130
Technical manual

because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents entered the
operate region on the operate - restrain characteristic. So, this protection is not
independent of the traditional restrained differential protection - it is activated after
the first start signal has been placed.
If the same fault has been positively recognized as internal, then the unrestrained
negative sequence differential protection places its own trip request.
Any block signals by the harmonic and/or waveform criteria, which can block the
traditional differential protection are overridden, and the differential protection
operates quickly without any further delay.
This logic guarantees a fast disconnection of a faulty power transformer for any
internal fault.
If the same fault has been classified as external, then generally, but not
unconditionally, a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, the
further analysis of the fault conditions is initiated. If all the instantaneous differential
currents in phases where start signals have been issued are free of harmonic pollution,
then a (minor) internal fault, simultaneous with a predominant external fault can be
suspected. This conclusion can be drawn because at external faults, major false
differential currents can only exist when one or more current transformers saturate. In
this case, the false instantaneous differential currents are polluted by higher harmonic
components, the 2nd, the 5th etc.
Sensitive negative sequence based turn-to-turn fault protection

The sensitive, negative sequence current based turn-to-turn fault protection detects
the low level faults, which are not detected by the traditional differential protection
until they develop into more severe faults, including power transformer iron core. The
sensitive protection is independent from the traditional differential protection and is a
very good complement to it. The essential part of this sensitive protection is the
internal/external fault discriminator. In order to be activated, the sensitive protection
requires no start signal from the traditional power transformer biased differential
protection. If magnitudes of HV and LV negative sequence current contributions are
above the set limit for IminNegSeq, then their relative positions are determined. If the
disturbance is characterized as an internal fault, then a separate trip request will be
placed. Any decision on the way to the final trip request must be confirmed several
times in succession in order to cope with eventual CT transients. This causes a short
additional operating time delay due to this security count. For very low level turn-to-
turn faults the overall response time of this protection is about 30ms.
Instantaneous differential currents

The instantaneous differential currents are calculated from the instantaneous values of
the input currents in order to perform the harmonic analysis and waveform analysis
upon each one of them (see section "Harmonic and waveform block criteria" for more
information).
The instantaneous differential currents are calculated using the same matrix
expression as shown in equation 1 and equation 2. The same matrices A, B and C are
131
Technical manual

used for these calculations. The only difference is that the matrix algorithm is fed by
instantaneous values of currents, that is, samples.
Harmonic and waveform block criteria

The two block criteria are the harmonic restrain and the waveform restrain. These two
criteria have the power to block a trip command by the traditional differential
protection, which produces start signals by applying the differential currents, and the
bias current, to the operate - restrain characteristic.
Harmonic restrain
The harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal is to prevent an unwanted trip command
due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, or due to magnetizing
currents at over-voltages.
The magnetizing currents of a power transformer flow only on one side of the power
transformer and are therefore always the cause of false differential currents. The
harmonic analysis (the 2nd and the 5th harmonic) is applied to the instantaneous
differential currents. Typical instantaneous differential currents during power
transformer energizing are shown in figure 37. The harmonic analysis is only applied
in those phases, where start signals have been set. For example, if the content of the 2nd
harmonic in the instantaneous differential current of phase L1 is above the setting I2/
I1Ratio, then a block signal is set for that phase, which can be read as BLK2HL1
output of the differential protection.
Waveform restrain
The waveform restrain criterion is a good complement to the harmonic analysis. The
waveform restrain is a pattern recognition algorithm, which looks for intervals within
each fundamental power system cycle with low instantaneous differential current.
This interval is often called current gap in protection literature. However, within
differential function this criterion actually searches for long-lasting intervals with low
rate-of-change in instantaneous differential current, which are typical for the power
transformer inrush currents. Block signals BLKWAVLx are set in those phases where
such behavior is detected. The algorithm does not require any end user settings. The
waveform algorithm is automatically adapted dependent only on the power
transformer rated data.
132
Technical manual

IEC05000343 V1 EN
Figure 37: Inrush currents to a transformer as seen by a protective IED. Typical

is a high amount of the 2nd harmonic, and intervals of low current, and
low rate-of-change of current within each period.
Cross-blocking between phases

The basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block
operation (that is, tripping) of the other two phases due to the harmonic pollution of the
differential current in that phase (that is, waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic content). In
differential algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between the phases via
the setting parameter CrossBlockEn=On.
When parameter CrossBlockEn=On cross blocking between phases is introduced.

There is no time settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the set
bias characteristic (in the operate region) will be able to cross-block the other two
phases if it is itself blocked by any of the previously explained restrained criteria. As
soon as the operating point for this phase is below the set bias characteristic (that is,
in the restrain region) cross blocking from that phase will be inhibited. In this way
cross-blocking of the temporary nature is achieved. It should be noted that this is the
default setting value for this parameter.
When parameter CrossBlockEn=Off, any cross blocking between phases will be

disabled. It is recommended to use the value Off with caution in order to avoid the
unwanted tripping during initial energizing of the power transformer.
Switch onto fault feature

The transformer differential function has a built-in, advanced switch onto fault
feature. This feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter SOTFMode.
When enabled this feature ensures quick differential protection tripping in cases
where a transformer is energized with an internal fault (for example, forgotten
earthing on transformer LV side). Operation of this feature is based on the fact that a
current gap (term current gap is explained under waveblock feature above) will exist
within the first power system cycle when healthy power transformer is energized. If
this is not the case the waveblock criterion will reset quickly. This quick reset of the
133
Technical manual

waveblock criterion will temporarily disable the second harmonic blocking feature of
the differential protection function. This consequently ensures fast operation of the
transformer differential function for a switch onto a fault condition. It shall be noted
that this feature is only active during initial power transformer energizing, under the
first 50 ms. When the switch onto fault feature is disabled by the setting parameter
SOTFMode, the waveblock and second harmonic blocking features work in parallel
and are completely independent from each other.
Open CT detection feature

differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature.
A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted

operation of the differential protection under normal load conditions. Damage of
secondary equipment may occur due to high voltage from open CT circuit outputs. It
is always an advantage, from the point of view of security and reliability, to have the
open CT detection function to block the differential protection function in case of an
open CT condition, and produce an alarm signal to the operational personnel to
quickly correct the open CT condition.
The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Off/On). When enabled, this feature tries to prevent mal-operation
when a loaded main CT connected to differential protection is by mistake open
circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect interruption of
one CT phase current at a time. If two or even all three-phase currents of one set of CTs
are accidentally interrupted at precisely the same time, this feature cannot operate.
differential protection generates a trip signal if the false differential current is
sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is typically detected in 12–14 ms, and if the load
in the protected circuit is relatively high, about the nominal load, the unwanted trip
cannot always be prevented. Still, the information about what was the cause of the
open CT secondary circuit, is vital.
The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method,

similar to the waveform check used by the Power Transformer Differential Protection
in order to detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle
is based on the fact that for an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT
suddenly drops to zero (that is, as seen by the protection), while the currents of the
other two phases continue as before.
The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that
is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...120% of the rated
load). If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be
detected. In addition to load condition requirement, Open CT function also checks the
differential current on faulty phase. If the differential current is lower than 10% of
IBase, the open CT condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the Open CT algorithm
only detects an open CT if the load on the power transformer protected object is
10...120% of rated load and the differential current is higher than 10% of IBase on that
phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds (50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) after
the bias current has entered the 10...120% range. The Open CT detection feature can
also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Off).
134
Technical manual

If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm
signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to
operational personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When
the open CT condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is reconnected), the
functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also defined by a
setting (tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the
reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit.
The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the
defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT input
and phase in which an open CT condition has been detected. These indications are
provided via the following outputs from the differential protection function:
1. Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT circuit

has been detected.
2. Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has
been detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
3. Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding
which open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
4. Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in
which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase L2; 3=
Phase L3).
Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further open
CT circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note that once
the open CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically within the
differential function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT condition. To
reset the open CT circuit alarm automatically, the following conditions must be
fulfilled:
• Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 120%

• The open CT condition in the defective CT circuit has been corrected (for
example, current asymmetry disappears)
• The above two conditions are fulfilled for a longer time than defined by the
setting parameter tOCTResetDelay
If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is reset
either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three currents
become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for
open CT circuits within the protected zone.
6.1.7.2 Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for transformer differential protection are shown in the
following figures.
135
Technical manual

ADM Differential function

Trafo
Data
A/D conversion scaling with CT
Phasor calculation of individual
Open CT logic on W1 side

Instantaneous (sample based) IDL1
Phasors & samples

phase current
Differential current, phase L1
ratio
IDL2
Derive equation to calculate differential currents

Instantaneous (sample based)
Instantaneous (sample based) IDL3

Negative sequence diff current IDNSMAG

& NS current contribution from
A/D conversion scaling with CT
Phasor calculation of individual
individual windings
Open CT logic on W2 side
phase current
IDL1MAG
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase L1 &
ratio
phase current contributions from

individual windings
Phasors & samples
IDL2MAG
individual windings
IDL3MAG
individual windings
MAX IBIAS
Settings for Zer. Seq.

Current Reduction
en06000554-3-en.vsd
IEC06000544 V3 EN
Figure 38: Treatment of measured currents within IED for transformer differential function
Figure 38 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done in case of a two-
winding transformer.
The following currents are inputs used in the power transformer differential protection
function. They must all be expressed in power system (primary) A.
136
Technical manual

1. Instantaneous values of currents (samples) from the HV, and LV sides for two-
winding power transformers, and from the HV, the first LV, and the second LV
side for three-winding power transformers.
2. Currents from all power transformer sides expressed as fundamental frequency
phasors with their real and imaginary parts. These currents are calculated within
the protection function by the fundamental frequency Fourier filters.
3. Negative sequence currents from all power transformer sides expressed as
phasors. These currents are calculated within the protection function by the
symmetrical components module.
The power transformer differential protection:
1. Calculates three fundamental frequency differential currents and one common

bias current. The zero-sequence component can optionally be eliminated from
each of the three fundamental frequency differential currents and at the same time
from the common bias current.
2. Calculates three instantaneous differential currents. They are used for harmonic,
and waveform analysis. Instantaneous differential currents are useful for post-
fault analysis using disturbance recording
3. Calculates negative-sequence differential current. Contributions to it from both
(all three) power transformer sides are used by the internal/external fault
discriminator to detect and classify a fault as internal or external.
BLKUNRES
IdUnre a TRIPUNREL1
b>a AND
b
IDL1MAG
IBIAS STL1
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES
TRIPRESL1
AND
OR 1
IDL1
to fault logic
2nd BLK2HL1
Switch on
Harmonic
Wave BLKWAVL1
block
5th BLK5HL1
Harmonic
Cross Block
Cross Block to L2 or L3
from L2 or L3 AND
OR
AND
OpCrossBlock=On
en06000545.vsd
IEC06000545 V1 EN
Figure 39: Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for Phase
L1
137
Technical manual

Internal/ EXTFAULT
Neg.Seq. Diff External INTFAULT
Current Fault
Contributions discrimin
ator TRNSSENS
t
&
OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS
a
b>a
b
Constant
TRNSUNR
STL1 &
STL2
>1
STL3
IEC05000167-TIFF V2 EN
Figure 40: Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for

external/internal fault discriminator
TRIPRESL1
TRIPRESL2 TRIPRES
OR
TRIPRESL3
TRIPUNREL1
TRIPUNREL2 TRIPUNRE
OR
TRIPUNREL3
TRIP
TRNSSENS OR
TRNSUNR
en05000278.vsd
IEC05000278 V1 EN
Figure 41: Transformer differential protection internal grouping of tripping

signals
138
Technical manual

STL1
STL2 START
OR
STL3
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2 BLK2H
OR
BLK2HL3
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2 BLK5H
OR
BLK5HL3
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2 BLKWAV
OR
BLKWAVL3
IEC05000279-TIFF V2 EN
Figure 42: Transformer differential protection internal grouping of logical signals
Logic in figures 39, 40, 41 and 42 can be summarized as follows:
1. The three fundamental frequency differential currents are applied in a phase-wise

manner to two limits. The first limit is the operate-restrain characteristic, while
the other is the high-set unrestrained limit. If the first limit is exceeded, a start
signal START is set. If the unrestrained limit is exceeded, an immediate
unrestrained trip TRIPUNRE and common trip TRIP are issued.
2. If a start signal is issued in a phase the harmonic and the waveform block signals
are checked. Only a start signal, which is free of all of its block signals can result
in a trip command. If the cross-block logic scheme is applied, then only if all
phases with set start signal are free of their respective block signals, a restrained
trip TRIPRES and common trip TRIP are issued
3. If a start signal is issued in a phase, and the fault has been classified as internal,
then any eventual block signals are overridden and unrestrained negative-
sequence trip TRNSUNR and common trip TRIP are issued without any further
delay. This feature is called the unrestrained negative-sequence protection 110%
bias.
4. The sensitive negative sequence differential protection is independent of any start
signals. It is meant to detect smaller internal faults such as turn-to-turn faults,
which are often not detected by the traditional differential protection. The
sensitive negative sequence differential protection starts whenever both
contributions to the total negative sequence differential current (that must be
compared by the internal/external fault discriminator) are higher than the value of
the setting IMinNegSeq. If a fault is positively recognized as internal, and the
condition is stable with no interruption for at least one fundamental frequency
cycle the sensitive negative sequence differential protection TRNSSENS and
common trip TRIP are issued. This feature is called the sensitive negative
sequence differential protection.
5. If a start signal is issued in a phase (see signal STL1), even if the fault has been
classified as an external fault, the instantaneous differential current of that phase
(see signal IDL1) is analyzed for the 2nd and the 5th harmonic contents (see the
139
Technical manual

blocks with the text inside: 2nd Harmonic; Wave block and 5th Harmonic). If
there is less harmonic pollution. than allowed by the settings I2/I1Ratio, and I5/
I1Ratio, (then the outputs from the blocks 2nd harmonic and 5th harmonic is 0)
then it is assumed that a minor simultaneous internal fault must have occurred.
Only under these conditions a trip command is allowed (the signal TRIPRESL1
is = 1). The cross-block logic scheme is automatically applied under such
circumstances. (This means that the cross block signals from the other two phases
L2 and L3 is not activated to obtain a trip on the TRIPRESL1 output signal in
figure 39)
6. All start and blocking conditions are available as phase segregated as well as
common (that is three-phase) signals.
IDL1 MAG
a
a>b
I Diff Alarm b
IDL2 MAG tAlarm Delay

a
& IDALARM
a>b t
I Diff Alarm b
IDL3 MAG
a
a>b
I Diff Alarm b
en06000546.vsd
IEC06000546 V1 EN
Figure 43: Differential current alarm logic
6.1.8 Technical data

Table 48: T2WPDIF, T3WPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic Adaptable ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 90% -
Unrestrained differential current limit (100-5000)% ofIBase on high voltage ±1.0% of set value
winding
Minimum pickup (5-60)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Second harmonic blocking (5.0-100.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir
differential current Note: fundamental
magnitude =
100% of Ir
Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0-100.0)% of fundamental ±5.0% of Ir

differential current Note: fundamental
magnitude =
100% of Ir
140
Technical manual


Connection type for each of the Y or D -
windings
Phase displacement between high 0–11 -
voltage winding, W1 and each of the
windings, W2 and W3. Hour notation
*Operate time at 0 to 10 x IdMin, Min. = 25 ms -
restrained function Max. = 35 ms
*Reset time at 10 to 0 x IdMin, restrained Min. = 5 ms -
function Max. = 15 ms
*Operate time at 0 to 10 x Idunre, Min. = 5 ms -
unrestrained function Max. = 15 ms
*Reset time at 10 to 0 x Idunre, Min. = 15 ms -
**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -
sequence function Max. = 20 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -
sequence function Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x IdMin -
*Note: Data obtained with single input current group.
**Note: Data obtained with two input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on both
sides as pre- and after-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double
on one side and decreasing same phase current to zero on the other side.
6.2 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Function description
1Ph High impedance differential Id

HZPDIF 87
protection
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN
6.2.2 Functionality
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF functions can be used when
the involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by wiring.
Actually all CT secondary circuits which are involved in the differential scheme are
connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which
are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.
141
Technical manual

HZPDIF can be used to protect generator stator windings, tee-feeders or busbars,

reactors, motors, auto-transformers, capacitor banks and so on. One such function
block is used for a high-impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such
function blocks are used to form three-phase, phase-segregated differential
protection. Several function block instances (for example, six) can be available in a
single IED.

HZPDIF
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT
IEC05000363 V2 EN
Figure 44: HZPDIF function block
6.2.4 Signals
Table 49: HZPDIF Input signals
ISI GROUP - Single phase current input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
Table 50: HZPDIF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side
6.2.5 Settings
Table 51: HZPDIF Group settings (basic)
On
U>Alarm 5 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip 10 - 900 V 1 100 Operate voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 50 - 20000 Ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms
142
Technical manual


Table 52: HZPDIF Monitored data
MEASVOLT REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage
on CT secondary side

High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all CTs,
used in the protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar
magnetizing characteristic and the same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of
the protected object. In order to make a scheme all CT secondary circuits belonging to
one phase are connected in parallel. From the CT junction points a measuring branch
is connected. The measuring branch is a series connection of one variable setting
resistor (or series resistor) RS with high ohmic value and an over-current element.
Thus, the high impedance differential protection responds to the current flowing
through the measuring branch. However, this current is result of a differential voltage
caused by this parallel CT connection across the measuring branch. Non-linear
resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in order to protect entire scheme from high peak
voltages which may appear during internal faults. Typical high impedance differential
scheme is shown in Figure 45. Note that only one phase is shown in this figure.
RS
3 U
I
1
I> (50) 5
2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN
Figure 45: HZPDIF scheme
Where in the Figure:

1. shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other CTs,
from the same phase, connected to this scheme.
2. shows the scheme earthing point.
143
Technical manual

It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point

exists in such protection scheme.
3. shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.

4. shows the over-current measuring element.
The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current

element is designated as measuring branch.
5. shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).

6. U is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the
measuring branch).
7. I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.
U and I are interrelated in accordance with the following formula

U=RS × I.
Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only
measure one current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there is
no any stabilizing quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential protection
schemes. Therefore in order to guaranty the stability of the differential relay during
external faults the operating quantity must not exceed the set pickup value. Thus, for
external faults, even with severe saturation of some of the current transformers, the
voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise above the relay set pickup value. To
achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected in such a way that the
saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower impedance path for the false
differential current than the measuring branch. In case of an external fault causing
current transformer saturation, the non-saturated current transformers drive most of
the spill differential current through the secondary winding of the saturated current
transformer and not through the measuring brunch of the relay. The voltage drop
across the saturated current transformer secondary winding appears also across the
measuring brunch, however it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-
up value of the relay has to be set above this false operating voltage.
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF, see Figure 46.
The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected to
it. Thus the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to the
HZPDIF function. These current samples are first multiplied with the set value for the
used stabilizing resistor in order to get voltage waveform across the measuring branch.
144
Technical manual

The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get its RMS value. Note that used
filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete removal of the DC current
component which may be present in the primary fault current. The voltage RMS value
is then compared with set Alarm and Trip thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is
intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms within the function. The measured RMS
voltage is available as a service value from the function. The function has block and
trip block inputs available as well.
IEC05000301 V1 EN
Figure 46: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection
HZPDIF

Table 53: HZPDIF technical data
Operate voltage (10-900) V ± 1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
I=U/R ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -

Maximum U>Trip2/SeriesResistor ≤200 W -
continuous power
Operate time at 0 Min = 5 ms
to 10 x Ud Max = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 Min = 75 ms

Critical impulse 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

time
Operate time at 0 Min = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to Min = 50 ms

0 x Ud Max = 70 ms
Critical impulse 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -

time
145
Technical manual

6.3 Generator differential protection GENPDIF
Generator differential protection GENPDIF 87G
Id>
SYMBOL-NN V1 EN
6.3.2 Functionality
Short circuit between the phases of the stator windings causes normally very large
fault currents. The short circuit gives risk of damages on insulation, windings and
stator iron core. The large short circuit currents cause large forces, which can cause
damage even to other components in the power plant, such as turbine and generator-
turbine shaft.
To limit the damage due to stator winding short circuits, the fault clearance must be as
fast as possible (instantaneous). If the generator block is connected to the power
system close to other generating blocks, the fast fault clearance is essential to maintain
the transient stability of the non-faulted generators.
Normally, the short circuit fault current is very large, that is, significantly larger than
the generator rated current. There is a risk that a short circuit can occur between phases
close to the neutral point of the generator, thus causing a relatively small fault current.
The fault current can also be limited due to low excitation of the generator. Therefore,
it is desired that the detection of generator phase-to-phase short circuits shall be
relatively sensitive, detecting small fault currents.
It is also of great importance that the generator differential protection does not trip for
external faults, with large fault currents flowing from the generator.
To combine fast fault clearance, as well as sensitivity and selectivity, the generator
differential protection is normally the best choice for phase-to-phase generator short
circuits.
Generator differential protection GENPDIF is also well suited for protection of shunt
reactors or small busduct.
146
Technical manual


GENPDIF
I3PNCT1* TRIP
I3PNCT2* TRIPRES
I3PTCT1* TRIPUNRE
I3PTCT2* TRNSUNR
BLOCK TRNSSENS
BLKRES START
BLKUNRES STL1
BLKNSUNR STL2
BLKNSSEN STL3
DESENSIT BLKH
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDNSMAG
IBIAS
IEC11000212 V1 EN
Figure 47: GENPDIF function block
6.3.4 Signals
Table 54: GENPDIF Input signals

I3PNCT1 GROUP - Neutral side input1
SIGNAL
I3PNCT2 GROUP - Neutral side input2
SIGNAL
I3PTCT1 GROUP - Terminal side input1
SIGNAL
I3PTCT2 GROUP - Terminal side input2
SIGNAL
BLKRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip command by the restrained diff.
protection
BLKUNRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip by unrestrained "instantaneous" diff.
prot.
feature
feature
DESENSIT BOOLEAN 0 Raise pick up: function temporarily desensitized
147
Technical manual

Table 55: GENPDIF Output signals

BLKH BOOLEAN Common harmonic block signal
delay ...
IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current L1; in primary
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
IDNSMAG REAL Negative Sequence Differential current; in primary
Amperes
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the common Bias current; in primary
Amperes
6.3.5 Settings
Table 56: GENPDIF Group settings (basic)
On
IdMin 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.25 Section 1 sensitivity, multiple of generator
rated current
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of generator
rated current
OpNegSeqDiff Off - - On Negative Sequence Differential Enable
On Off/On
IMinNegSeq 0.02 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Neg. sequence curr. limit, as multiple of
gen. rated curr.
148
Technical manual

Table 57: GENPDIF Group settings (advanced)

EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, multiple of generator
rated current
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, multiple of generator
rated current
OpCrossBlock Off - - On Operation On / Off for cross-block logic
On between phases
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Operate Angle of int/ext neg. seq. fault
discriminator, deg
HarmDistLimit 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 10.0 (Total) relative harmonic distorsion limit,
percent
TempIdMin 1.0 - 5.0 IdMin 0.1 2.0 Temp. Id pickup when input
raisePickUp=1, multiple of IdMin
AddTripDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Additional trip delay, when input
raisePickUp=1
OperDCBiasing Off - - Off Operation DC biasing On / Off
On
OpenCTEnable Off - - Off Open CT detection feature Off/On
On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time to alarm if an open CT is
detected, in sec
is activated
this delay, in s
Table 58: GENPDIF Non group settings (basic)

InvertCT2Curr No - - No Invert CT 2 curr., yes (1) or no (0). Default
Yes is no (0).
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
149
Technical manual


Table 59: GENPDIF Monitored data
IDL1MAG REAL - A Fund. freq. differential
current, phase L1; in
primary A
primary A
primary A
IDNSMAG REAL - A Negative Sequence
Differential current; in
primary Amperes
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the
common Bias current; in
primary Amperes

The task of Generator differential protection GENPDIF is to determine whether a fault
is within the protected zone, or outside the protected zone. The protected zone is
delimited by the position of current transformers, as shown in figure 48.
IEC06000430 V2 EN
Figure 48: Position of current transformers; the recommended (default)

orientation
If the fault is internal, the faulty generator must be quickly tripped, that is,
disconnected from the network, the field breaker tripped and the agent to the prime
mover interrupted.
GENPDIF function always uses reference (default) directions of CTs towards the
protected generator as shown in figure 48. Thus, it always measures the currents on the
two sides of the generator with the same reference direction towards the generator
windings. With the orientation of CTs as in figure 48, the difference of currents
flowing in, and out, of a separate stator winding phase is simply obtained by
summation of the two currents fed to the differential protection function.
Numerical IEDs have brought a large number of advantages and new functionality to
the protective relaying. One of the benefits is the simplicity and accuracy of
calculating symmetrical components from individual phase quantities. Within the
firmware of a numerical IED, it is no more difficult to calculate negative-sequence
150
Technical manual

components than it is to calculate zero-sequence components. Diversity of operation

principles integrated in the same protection function enhances the overall
performance without a significant increase in cost.
A novelty in GENPDIF, namely the negative-sequence-current-based internal-

external fault discriminator, is used advantageously in order to determine whether a
fault is internal or external. Indeed, the internal-external fault discriminator not only
positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can independently
detect minor faults which may not be ascertained (until they develop into more serious
faults) by the "usual" differential protection based only on operate-restrain
characteristic.
GENPDIF is using fundamental frequency phase current phasors and negative

sequence current phasors. These quantities are derived outside the differential
protection function block, in the general pre-processing blocks. GENPDIF is also
using with advantage the DC component of the instantaneous differential current and
the 2nd and 5th harmonic components of the instantaneous differential currents. The
instantaneous differential currents are calculated from the input samples of the
instantaneous values of the currents measured at both ends of the stator winding. The
DC and the 2nd and 5th harmonic components of each separate instantaneous
differential current are extracted inside the differential protection.
6.3.7.1 Function calculation principles
To make a differential protection as sensitive and stable as possible, the restrained

differential characteristic is used. The protection must be provided with a proportional
bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage differential current
related to the current through the generator stator winding. This stabilizes the
protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have
good basic sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these quantities are
calculated.
The fundamental frequency phasors of the phase currents from both sides of the
generator (the neutral side and the terminal side) are delivered to the differential
protection function by the pre-processing module of the IED.
6.3.7.2 Fundamental frequency differential currents
The fundamental frequency RMS differential current is a vectorial sum (that is, sum
of fundamental frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from the two sides
of the protected generator. The magnitude of the fundamental frequency RMS
differential current, in phase L1, is as calculated in equation 25:
Idiff _ L1 = [(Re( IL1n + IL1t ))2 + (Im( IL1n + IL1t )) 2 ]

151
Technical manual

One common fundamental frequency bias current is used. The bias current is the
magnitude of the highest measured current in the protected circuit. The bias current is
not allowed to drop instantaneously, instead, it decays exponentially with a predefined
time constant. These principles make the differential IED more secure, with less risk
to operate for external faults. The “maximum” principle brings as well more meaning
to the breakpoint settings of the operate-restrain characteristic.
Ibias = max( IL1n, IL 2 n, IL3n, IL1t , IL 2t , IL 3t )

IL1n IL1t
IL1t Idiff
IL1n
IEC07000018 V3 EN
Figure 49: Internal fault
IL1n IL1t
External fault: IL1n = - IL1t
IL1t IL1n
Idiff = 0 en07000019-2.vsd
IEC07000019 V2 EN
Figure 50: External fault
152
Technical manual

Generator differential protection GENPDIF function uses two mutually independent

characteristics to which magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency RMS
differential currents are compared at each execution of the differential protection
function. These two characteristics divide, each of them independently, the operate
current – restrain current plane into two regions: the operate (trip) region and the
restrain (block) region, as shown in figure 52. Two kinds of protection are obtained:
• the non-stabilized (instantaneous unrestrained) differential protection

• the stabilized differential protection
The non-stabilized (instantaneous) differential protection is used for very high

differential currents, where it must be beyond any doubt, that the fault is internal. This
limit, (defined by the setting UnrestrainedLimit), is a constant, not proportional
dependent on the bias (restrain) current. No harmonic or any other restrain is applied
to this limit, which is, therefore, called the unrestrained limit. The reset ratio of the
unrestrained characteristic is equal to 0.95.
The stabilized differential protection applies a differential (operate) current, and the
common bias (restrain) current, on the operate-restrain characteristic, as shown in
figure 52. Here, the actual limit, where the protection can operate, is dependent on the
bias (restrain) current. The operate value, is stabilized by the bias current. This operate
– restrain characteristic is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint
characteristic. The restrained characteristic is determined by the following 5 settings:
• IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, set as multiple of generator rated current)

• EndSection1 (End of section 1, set as multiple of generator rated current)
• EndSection2 (End of section 2, set as multiple of generator rated current)
• SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2 of the characteristic, set in percent)
• SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 3 of the characteristic, set in percent)
slope = D Ioperate × 100%

D Irestrain
Note that both slopes are calculated from the characteristics break
points.
The operate-restrain characteristic is tailor-made, in other words, it can be constructed

by the user. A default operate-restrain characteristic is suggested which gives
acceptably good results in a majority of applications. The operate-restrain
characteristic has in principle three sections with a section-wise proportional
dependence of the operate value to the common restrain (bias) current. The reset ratio
is in all parts of the characteristic equal to 0.95.
Section 1 is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal currents
flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for higher false
differential currents is low. With generators, the only cause of small false differential
153
Technical manual

currents in this section can be tolerances of the current transformers used on both sides
of the protected generator. Slope in section 1 is always zero percent. Normally, with
the protected machine at rated load, the restrain, bias current will be around 1 p.u., that
is, equal to the machine rated current.
In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope with false
differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the current
transformers.
The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher tolerance to

substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents, which can be
expected in this section.
Temporarily decreased sensitivity of differential protection is activated if the binary

input DESENSIT is (temporarily) set to 1 (TRUE). In this case, a new, separate limit
is superposed to the otherwise unchanged operate-bias characteristic. This limit is
called TempIdMin and it is available as a setting. The value of the setting TempIdMin
must be given as a multiple of the setting IdMin. In this case no trip command can be
issued if all fundamental frequency differential currents are below the value of the
setting TempIdMin.
AddTripDelay: If the input DESENSIT is activated also the operation time of the
protection function can be increased by using the setting AddTripDelay.
154
Technical manual

operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
5
unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
4
Operate
3
conditionally
2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3
SlopeSection3
1
TempIdMin
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
EndSection1 restrain current

EndSection2 [ times IBase ]
en06000637.vsd
IEC06000637 V2 EN
Figure 52: Operate-restrain characteristic
GENPDIF can also be temporarily ‘desensitized’ if the Boolean setting

OperDCBiasing is set to 1 (TRUE). In this case, the DC component is extracted on-
line from the instantaneous differential currents. The highest DC component is taken
as a kind of bias in the sense that the highest sensitivity of the differential protection
is inversely proportional to the ratio of this DC component to the maximum
fundamental frequency differential current. Similar to the ‘desensitization’ described
above, a separate (temporary) additional limit is activated. The value of this limit is
bounded to either the generator rated current, or 3 times IdMin, whichever is smaller.
This temporary extra limit decays exponentially from its maximum value with a time
constant equal to T = 1 second. This feature must be used when unmatched CTs are
used on the generator or shunt reactor, especially where a long DC time constant can
be expected. The new limit is superposed on the otherwise unchanged operate-bias
characteristic, and temporarily determines the highest sensitivity of the differential
protection. This temporary sensitivity must be lower than the sensitivity in section 1
of the operate-bias characteristic.
This DC desensitization is not active, if a disturbance has been

detected and characterized as internal fault.
155
Technical manual

6.3.7.3 Supplementary criteria
To relieve the burden of constructing an exact optimal operate-restrain characteristic,

two special features supplement the basic stabilized differential protection function,
making Generator differential protection GENPDIF a very reliable one.
The supplementary criteria are:
• Internal/external fault discriminator (enhances, or blocks, the trip command)

• Harmonic restrain (blocks only)
The internal/external fault discriminator is a very reliable supplementary criterion. It

discriminates with a high speed between internal and external faults. The
discriminator is the main part of what is here called the negative-sequence-current-
based differential protections. It is recommended that this feature is always used (that
is, enabled, OpNegSeqDiff = On).
If a fault is classified as internal, then any eventual block signals by the harmonic
criterion are ignored, and the differential protection can operate very quickly without
any further delay.
If a fault (disturbance) is classified as external, then generally, but not

unconditionally, a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external,
harmonic analysis of the fault conditions is initiated.
If all the differential currents which caused their respective start signals to be set, are
free of harmonic pollution, that is, if no harmonic block signal has been set, then a
(minor) internal fault, simultaneous with a predominant external fault, can be
suspected. This conclusion can be drawn because at external faults, major false
differential currents can only exist when one or more current transformers saturate
transiently. In this case, the false instantaneous differential currents are highly
polluted by higher harmonic components, the 2nd, and the 5th.
The existence of relatively high negative-sequence currents is in itself an indication of

a disturbance, as the negative-sequence currents are superimposed, pure-fault
quantities. The negative-sequence currents are measurable indications of abnormal
conditions. The negative sequence currents are particularly suitable for directional
tests. The negative sequence internal or external fault discriminator works
satisfactorily even in case of three-phase faults. Because of the fundamental frequency
components (50/60 Hz) of the decaying DC offset of the fault currents, the system is
not fully symmetrical immediately after the fault. Due to the transient existence of the
negative sequence system, faults can be distinguished as internal or external, even for
three-phase faults.
The internal or external fault discriminator responds to the relative phase angles of the
negative sequence fault currents at both ends of the stator winding. Observe that the
source of the negative sequence currents at unsymmetrical faults is at the fault point.
• If the two negative sequence currents, as seen by the differential relay, flow in the
same direction (that is with the CTs oriented as in figure 48), the fault is internal.
156
Technical manual

If the two negative sequence currents flow in opposite directions, the fault is
external.
• Under external fault condition, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180°.
Under internal fault condition, the angle is ideally 0°, but due to possible different
negative-sequence impedance angles on both sides of the internal fault, it may
differ somewhat from 0°.
The setting NegSeqROA, as shown in figure 53, represents the so called Relay Operate
Angle, which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions.
It can be selected in the range ±30° to ±90°, with a step of 1°. The default value is ±60°.
The default setting, ±60°, favors somewhat security in comparison to dependability.
Magnitudes of both negative-sequence currents which are to be compared as to their

phase positions in the complex plane must be high enough so that one can be sure that
they are due to a fault. The limit value IMinNegSeq is settable in the range [0.02 – 0.20]
of the protected generator rated current. Adaptability is introduced if the bias current
is higher than 150 % rated current. Adaptability is introduced 10 ms after this limit of
150 % rated current has been crossed so that the internal/external discriminator is
given the time to detect correctly a fault before an eventual CT saturation sets in. The
threshold IMinNegSeq is dynamically increased by 4 % of the bias current, in case of
internal faults, and by 8 % of the bias current in case of external faults. Only if
magnitudes of both currents are above the limit IMinNegSeq, the angle between the
two currents is calculated. If any of the two currents is too small, no decision is taken
regarding the relative position of the fault, and this feature then remains inactive rather
than to produce a wrong decision. The relative angle is then assigned the value of 120°
(2.094 radians). If this value persists, then this is an indication that no directional
comparison has been made. Neither internal, nor external fault (disturbance) is
declared in this case.
157
Technical manual

90 deg
120 deg
NegSeqROA
Angle could not be (Relay Operate Angle)
measured. One or both
currents too small
Internal fault
region
180 deg 0 deg
IminNegSeq
External fault
region
Internal /
external fault
boundary.
Default ± 60 deg
The characteristic is defined by the
settings:
IMinNegSeq and NegSeqROA
270 deg
en06000433-2.vsd
IEC06000433 V2 EN
Figure 53: NegSeqROA determines the boundary between the internal and
external fault regions
Unrestrained negative sequence differential protection

If one or more start signals have been set by the restrained differential protection
algorithm, because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents
entered the “operate” region of the restrained differential protection, then the internal/
external fault discriminator can enhance the final, common, trip command by the
differential protection. If a fault is classified as internal, then any eventual block
signals by the harmonic criterion are ignored, and the differential protection operates
immediately without any further delay. This makes the overall generator differential
protection very fast. Operation of this protection is signaled on the output of
GENPDIF as TRNSUNRE.
Sensitive negative sequence differential protection

The difference from the unrestrained negative sequence differential protection,
described above, is that the sensitive one does not require any start signal to be set. It
is enough that both of the negative sequence currents, contributions to the total
negative sequence differential current, which should be compared, are above the
setting IMinNegSeq. Thus, this protection can be made very sensitive. Further, an
intentional delay of one cycle is added in order not to inadvertently operate for some
eventual transients. Further, the sensitive negative sequence differential protection is
automatically disabled when the bias current exceeds 1.5 times the rated current of the
protected generator. Operation of this protection is signaled on the output of the
function as TRNSENS.
158
Technical manual

6.3.7.4 Harmonic restrain
Harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal there was to prevent an unwanted trip
command due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, due to
magnetizing currents at over-voltages, or external faults. Harmonic restrain is just as
useful with Generator differential protection GENPDIF. The harmonic analysis is
only executed in those phases, where start signals have been set.
There is no magnetizing inrush to a generator, but there may be some in case of shunt
reactors. The false initial differential currents of a shunt reactor have an appreciable
amount of higher harmonic currents.
At external faults dangerous false differential currents can arise for different reasons,
mainly due to saturation of one or more current transformers. The false differential
currents display in this case a considerable amount of higher harmonics, which can,
therefore, be used to prevent an unwanted trip of a healthy generator or shunt reactor.
If a fault is recognized as external by the internal/external fault discriminator, but

nevertheless one or more start signals have been set, the harmonic analysis is initiated
in the phases with start signal, as previously described. If all of the instantaneous
differential currents, where trip signals have been set, are free of higher harmonics
(that is the cross-block principle is imposed temporarily), a (minor) internal fault is
assumed to have happened simultaneously with a predominant external one. A trip
command is then allowed.
6.3.7.5 Open CT detection feature
Transformer differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection

feature.
A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted

operation of the Transformer differential protection under normal load conditions.
Damage of secondary equipment may occur due to high voltage from open CT circuit
outputs. It is always an advantage, from the point of view of security and reliability,
to have the open CT detection function to block the transformer differential protection
function in case of an open CT condition, and produce an alarm signal to the
operational personnel to quickly correct the open CT condition.
The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Off/On). When enabled, this feature tries to prevent mal-operation
when a loaded main CT connected to Transformer differential protection is by mistake
open circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect interruption
of one CT phase current at a time. If two or even all three-phase currents of one set of
CTs are accidentally interrupted at precisely the same time, this feature cannot
operate. Transformer differential protection generates a trip signal if the false
differential current is sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is typically detected in 12–
14 ms, and if the load in the protected circuit is relatively high, about the nominal load,
159
Technical manual

the unwanted trip cannot always be prevented. Still, the information about what was
the cause of the open CT secondary circuit, is vital.
The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method,

similar to the waveform check used by the Power transformer differential protection
in order to detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle
is based on the fact that for an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT
suddenly drops to zero (that is, as seen by the protection), while the currents of the
other two phases continue as before.
The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that
is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...110% of the rated
load). If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be
detected. In addition to load condition requirement, Open CT function also checks the
differential current on faulty phase. If the differential current is lower than 50% of
IdMin, the open CT condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the Open CT algorithm
only detects an open CT if the load on the power transformer is 10...110% of rated load
and the differential current is higher than 50% of IdMin on that phase. The search for
an open CT starts 60 seconds (50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) after the transformer is
energized. The Open CT detection feature can also be explicitly deactivated by
setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Off).
If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm
signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to
operational personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When
the open CT condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is reconnected), the
functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also defined by a
setting (tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the
reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit.
The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the
defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT input
and phase in which an open CT condition has been detected. These indications are
provided via the following outputs from the Transformer differential protection
function:
1. Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT circuit

has been detected.
2. Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has
been detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
3. Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding
which open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
4. Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in
which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase L2; 3=
Phase L3).
Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further open
CT circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note that once
160
Technical manual

the open CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically within the
differential function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT condition. To
reset the open CT circuit alarm automatically, the following conditions must be
fulfilled:
• Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 110%

• The open CT condition in the defective CT circuit has been corrected (for
example, current asymmetry disappears)
• The above two conditions are fulfilled for a longer time than defined by the
setting parameter tOCTResetDelay
If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is reset
either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three currents
become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for
open CT circuits within the protected zone.
6.3.7.6 Cross-block logic scheme
According to the cross-block logic, to issue a common trip command, the harmonic
contents in all phases with a start signal set (start = TRUE) must be below the limit
defined with the setting HarmDistLimit. In the opposite case, no trip command is
issued.
The cross-block logic is active if the setting OpCrossBlock = Yes. By always using the
cross-block logic, the false trips can be prevented for external faults in cases where the
internal or external fault discriminator should for some reason fail to declare an
external fault. For internal faults, the higher frequency components of an
instantaneous differential current are most often relatively low, compared to the
fundamental frequency component. While for an external (heavy) fault, they can be
relatively high. For external faults with moderate fault currents, there can be little or
no current transformer saturation and only small false differential currents.
The principle design of the Generator differential protection GENPDIF is shown in

figure 54.
161
Technical manual

TRIP
Signals
Start
Phasors IL1N, IL2N,IL3N Magnitude phase
Calculation Idiff and Ibias Diff.prot. selective
Idiff and Ibias characteristic
Phasors IL1T, IL2T,IL3T
START
Signals
BLOCK
Signals
Samples IL1N, IL2N,IL3N Harm.

Calculation Samples Idiff Hamonic Block Start and INTFAULT
instantaneous analysis: DC, trip logic EXTFAULT
Samples IAT, IBT,ICT Idiff 2nd and 5th OPENCT
OPENCTAL
The sensitive protection is deactivated

above bias current > 150 % rated
current.
Internal/ Intern/ Analog

Phasor IL1N (neg.seq.) External Fault extern Outputs
Calculation
Discriminator Fault
negative
sequence and Sensitive
Phasor IL1T (neg.seq.) Idiff differential
protection
en06000434-2.vsd
IEC06000434 V3 EN
Figure 54: Simplified principle design of the Generator differential protection GENPDIF
Simplified logic diagrams of the function are shown in figures 55, 56, 57 and 58.
162
Technical manual

BLKUNRES
IdUnre a TRIPUNREL1
b>a AND
b
IDL1MAG
IBIAS STL1
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES
INTFAULT TRIPRESL1
AND
OR 1
IDL1 2nd and BLKHL1

5th
Harmonic
Cross Block
Cross Block to L2 or L3
from L2 or L3 AND
AND
OpCrossBlock=On
en07000020.vsd
IEC07000020 V2 EN
Figure 55: Generator differential logic diagram 1
Internal/ EXTFAULT
Neg.Seq. Diff External INTFAULT
Current Fault
Contributions discrimin
ator TRNSSENS
AND
OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS
a
b>a
b
Constant
BLKNSSEN
BLKNSUNR
BLOCK
TRNSUNR
STL1 AND
STL2
OR
STL3
en07000021.vsd
IEC07000021 V2 EN
163
Technical manual

STL1
STL2 START
OR
STL3
BLKHL1
BLKHL2 BLKH
OR
BLKHL3
en07000022.vsd
IEC07000022 V1 EN
TRIPRESL1
TRIPRESL2 TRIPRES
OR
TRIPRESL3
TRIPUNREL1
TRIPUNREL2 TRIPUNRE
OR
TRIPUNREL3
TRIP
TRNSSENS OR
TRNSUNR
en07000023.vsd
IEC07000023 V1 EN

Table 60: GENPDIF technical data
Unrestrained differential current limit (1-50)p.u. of IBase ±1.0% of set value
Reset ratio > 95% -
Minimum pickup (0.05–1.00)p.u. of ±1.0% of Ir
IBase
Negative sequence current level (0.02–0.20)p.u. of ±1.0% of Ir
IBase
Operate time at 0 to 2 x IdMin Min. = 25 ms -
Reset time at 2 to 0 x IdMin Min. = 10 ms -
Operate time at 0 to 5 x IdUnre Min. = 5 ms -
164
Technical manual


Reset time at 5 to 0 x IdUnre Min. = 15 ms -
Critical impulse time, unrestrained function 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x -
IdUnre
Impulse margin time unrestrained function 10 ms typically -
Operate time at 0 to 5 x IMinNegSeq Min. = 25 ms -
Negative sequence unrestrained function Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 5 to 0 x IMinNegSeq Min. = 30 ms -
Negative sequence unrestrained function Max. = 45 ms
6.4 Low impedance restricted earth fault protection

REFPDIF
Restricted earth-fault protection, low REFPDIF 87N
impedance
IdN/I
SYMBOL-AA V1 EN
6.4.2 Functionality
Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedance function REFPDIF can be used on
all directly or low-impedance earthed windings. The REFPDIF function provides
high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding separately and thus
does not need inrush stabilization.
The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function with an additional zero

sequence current directional comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity and
stability during through faults.
REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five currents are measured at the most
complicated configuration as shown in Figure 59.
165
Technical manual

CT CT
YNdx
CT CB CB
Y d
CB CB
Autotransformer
CT
IED
The most typical CT CB CB CT

application
The most complicated
application - autotransformer
IEC05000058-2 V1 EN
Figure 59: Examples of applications of the REFPDIF

REFPDIF
I3P* TRIP
I3PW1CT1* START
I3PW1CT2* DIROK
I3PW2CT1* BLK2H
I3PW2CT2* IRES
BLOCK IN
IBIAS
IDIFF
ANGLE
I2RATIO
IEC06000251 V2 EN
Figure 60: REFPDIF function block
6.4.4 Signals
Table 61: REFPDIF Input signals
I3P GROUP - Group signal for neutral current input
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Group signal for primary CT1 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2 GROUP - Group signal for primary CT2 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Group signal for secondary CT1 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2 GROUP - Group signal for secondary CT2 current input
SIGNAL
166
Technical manual

Table 62: REFPDIF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by restricted earth fault protection function
START BOOLEAN Start by restricted earth fault protection function
DIROK BOOLEAN Directional Criteria has operated for internal fault
BLK2H BOOLEAN Block due to 2-nd harmonic
IRES REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. residual current
IN REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. neutral current
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current
IDIFF REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current
ANGLE REAL Direction angle from zerosequence feature
I2RATIO REAL Second harmonic ratio
6.4.5 Settings
Table 63: REFPDIF Group settings (basic)
On
IdMin 4.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 10.0 Maximum sensitivity in % of IBase
CTFactorPri1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for HV side CT1 (CT1rated/
HVrated current)
CTFactorPri2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for HV side CT2 (CT2rated/
HVrated current)
CTFactorSec1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for MV side CT1 (CT1rated/
MVrated current)
CTFactorSec2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for MV side CT2 (CT2rated/
MVrated current)
Table 64: REFPDIF Group settings (advanced)

ROA 60 - 90 Deg 1 60 Relay operate angle for zero sequence
directional feature
Table 65: REFPDIF Non group settings (basic)

groups
167
Technical manual


Table 66: REFPDIF Monitored data
IRES REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
residual current
IN REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
neutral current
current
IDIFF REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
ANGLE REAL - deg Direction angle from
zerosequence feature
I2RATIO REAL - - Second harmonic ratio
6.4.7.1 Fundamental principles of the restricted earth-fault protection
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF) detects earth

faults on earthed power transformer windings, most often an earthed star winding.
REFPDIF is a unit protection of the differential type. Since REFPDIF is based on the
zero sequence current, which theoretically only exists in case of an earth fault,
REFPDIF can be made very sensitive regardless of normal load currents. It is the
fastest protection a power transformer winding can have. The high sensitivity and the
high speed tend to make such a protection unstable. Special measures must be taken
to make it insensitive to conditions for which it should not operate, for example, heavy
through faults of phase-to-phase type or heavy external earth faults.
REFPDIF is a differential protection of the low impedance type. All three-phase

currents, and the neutral point current, must be fed separately to REFPDIF. The
fundamental frequency components of all currents are extracted from all input
currents, while other eventual zero sequence components, such as the 3rd harmonic
currents, are fully suppressed. Then the residual current phasor is calculated from the
three line current phasors. This zero sequence current phasor is added to the neutral
current vectorially, in order to obtain differential current.
The following facts may be observed from Figure 61 and Figure 62, where the three
line CTs are shown as connected together in order to measure the residual 3Io current,
for the sake of simplicity.
168
Technical manual

These three zone of protection

zero-sequence
currents are not measured
Izs1
L1 L1
Power Izs1
L2 L2
system
Izs1 L3
L3
3Izs1
Uzs Current in the neutral

IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0 (measured as IN ) serves
3I0 = 3Izs1 IN = -3Izs1 as a directional reference
Ifault (Summation in the IED) because it has the same
direction for both internal
Return path through
transformer and external faults.
Return path via
power system
External
fault
block operate Zero-sequence differential
region
IN current for external fault
3I0
Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
block Idiff = 3Izs1 - 3Izs1 = 0
ROA
External Internal
fault block fault
ROA = Relay Operate Angle
region region
IEC09000107-3 V1 EN
Figure 61: Zero sequence currents at an external earth fault
zone of protection
Izs2 Izs1
L1 L1
Power Izs2 Izs1
L2 L2
system
Izs2 Izs1 L3
L3
3Izs1
Uzs Current in the neutral

IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0 (measured as IN ) serves
IN = -3Izs1 as a directional reference
3I0 = -3Izs2 Ifault
(Summation in the IED) because it has the same
direction for both internal
and external faults.
Return path via Return path
power system through transformer
External
Zero-sequence differential
fault
block operate
region current for internal fault
3I0 Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
Idiff = 3Izs2 + 3Izs1 > 0
block IN (reference) Idiff = Ifault
ROA
External Internal
fault
block fault ROA = Relay Operate Angle
region region
IEC09000108-3 V1 EN
Figure 62: Zero sequence currents at an internal earth fault
1. For an external earth fault (Figure 61), the residual current 3Io and the neutral
current IN have equal magnitude, but they are seen within the IED as 180 degrees
out-of-phase if the current transformers are connected as in Figure 61, which is
169
Technical manual

the ABB recommended connection. The differential current becomes zero as

both CTs ideally measure exactly the same component of the earth- fault current.
2. For an internal fault, the total earth- fault current is composed generally of two
zero sequence currents. One zero sequence current (3IZS1) flows towards the
power transformer neutral point and into the earth, while the other zero sequence
current (3IZS2) flows into the connected power system. These two primary
currents can be expected to have approximately opposite directions (about the
same zero sequence impedance angle is assumed on both sides of the earth fault).
However, on the secondary CT sides of the current transformers, they will be
approximately in phase if the current transformers are oriented as in Figure 59,
which is the orientation recommended by ABB. The magnitudes of the two
currents may be different, dependent on the magnitudes of zero sequence
impedances of both sides. No current can flow towards the power system, if the
only point where the system is earthed, is at the protected power transformer.
Likewise, no current can flow into the power system, if the winding is not
connected to the power system (circuit breaker open and power transformer
energized from the other side).
3. For both internal and external earth faults, the current in the neutral connection IN
always has the same direction, which is towards the earth (except in case of
autotransformers where the direction can vary).
4. The two internally processed zero sequence currents are 3Io and IN. The vectorial
sum is the REFPDIF differential current, which is equal to Idiff = IN +3Io .
The line zero sequence (residual) current is calculated from 3 line (terminal) currents.
A bias quantity must give stability against false operations due to high through fault
currents. To stabilize REFPDIF at external faults, a fixed bias characteristic is
implemented.
REFPDIF should also be stable against heavy phase-to-phase internal faults, not
including earth. These faults may also give false zero sequence currents due to
saturated line CTs. Such faults, however are without neutral current, and can thus be
eliminated as a source of danger.
As an additional measure against unwanted operation, a directional check is made in

agreement with the above points 1 and 2. Operation is only allowed if the currents 3Io
and IN (as shown in Figure 61 and Figure 62) are both within the operating region. By
taking a smaller ROA, REFPDIF can be made more stable under heavy external fault
conditions, as well as under the complex conditions, when external faults are cleared
by other protections.
6.4.7.2 Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance differential protection
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance (REFPDIF) is a protection of

differential type, a unit protection, whose settings are independent of any other
protection. It has some advantages compared to the transformer differential
protection. It is less complicated, as no current phase correction or magnitude
correction are needed, not even in the case of an eventual on-load tap changer (OLTC).
170
Technical manual

REFPDIF is not sensitive to inrush and overexcitation currents. The only danger is an
eventual current transformer saturation.
REFPDIF has only one operate-bias characteristic, which is described in the table 67
and shown in Figure 63.
Table 67: Data of the operate-bias characteristic of REFPDIF
Default sensitivity Idmin Max. base Min. base sensitivity End of zone First slope Second
(zone 1) sensitivity Idmin Idmin (zone 1) 1 slope
(zone 1)
% IBase % IBase % IBase % IBase % %
30 5 100 125 70 100
The differential protection REFPDIF calculates a differential current and a bias

current. In case of internal earth faults, the differential current is theoretically equal to
the total earth-fault current. The bias current is supposed to give stability to REFPDIF.
The bias current is a measure of how high the currents are and how difficult the
conditions are under which the CTs operate. With a high bias, difficult conditions can
be suspected, and it will be more likely that the calculated differential current has a
component of a false current, primarily due to CT saturation. This “law” is formulated
by the operate-bias characteristic. This characteristic divides the Idiff - Ibias plane in
two areas. The area above the operate-bias characteristic is the operate area, while the
one below is the block area, see Figure 63.
Zero-
sequence
diff. current 5
in per unit Characteristic if
IdMin = 1.0 pu
D I operate
slope = ----------------* 100 % 4
D I restrain Operate
conditionally
3
IdMin range: 0.04 –1.00 IBase
Slope 100%
Reset Ratio in all sections: 2
0.95 (a constant) Section 1 Sec. 2 Section 3
1
The characteristic
IdMin Restrain
can be moved Slope 70%
up and down 0
(vertically) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
by changing End Section 1 bias current
the setting IdMin in per unit
End Section 2
IEC98000017-5 V1 EN
Figure 63: Operate - bias characteristic of the Restricted earth-fault protection,

low impedance REFPDIF
171
Technical manual

6.4.7.3 Calculation of differential current and bias current
The differential current (operate current), as a fundamental frequency phasor, is

calculated as (with designations as in Figure 61 and Figure 62):
Idiff = IN + 3 Io
where:
IN is current in the power transformer neutral as a fundamental frequency phasor.
3Io is residual current of the power transformer terminal currents as a phasor.
If there are two three-phase CT inputs, as in breaker-and-a-half configurations, see

figure 10, then their respective residual currents are added within the REFPDIF
function so that:
I3PW1 = I3PW1CT1 + I3PW1CT2
where the signals are defined in the input and output signal tables for REFPDIF.
The bias current is a measure (expressed internally as a true fundamental frequency

current in Amperes) of how difficult the conditions are under which the instrument
current transformers operate. Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current, the
corresponding zone (section) of the operate-bias characteristic is applied, when
deciding whether to trip, or not to trip. In general, the higher the bias current, the higher
the differential current required to produce a trip.
The bias current is the highest current of all separate input currents to REFPDIF, that
is, of current in phase L1, phase L2, phase L3, and the current in the neutral point
(designated as IN in Figure 61 and in Figure 62).
If there are two feeders included in the zone of protection of REFPDIF, as in case of
an auto-transformer with two feeders included on both sides, then the respective bias
current is found as the relatively highest of the following currents:
1
current[1] = max (I3PW1CT1) ×
CTFactorPri1
1
CTFactorPri2
1
CTFactorSec1
172
Technical manual

1
CTFactorSec2
current[5] = IN
The bias current is thus generally equal to none of the input currents. If all primary
ratings of the CTs were equal to IBase, then the bias current would be equal to the
highest current in Amperes. IBase shall be set equal to the rated current of the
protected winding where REFPDIF function is applied.
6.4.7.4 Detection of external earth faults
External faults are more common than internal earth faults for which the restricted
earth-fault protection should operate. It is important that the restricted earth-fault
protection remains stable during heavy external earth and phase-to-phase faults, and
also when such a heavy external fault is cleared by some other protection such as
overcurrent, or earth-fault protection. The conditions during a heavy external fault,
and particularly immediately after the clearing of such a fault may be complex. The
circuit breaker’s poles may not open exactly at the same moment, some of the CTs
may still be highly saturated, and so on.
The detection of external earth faults is based on the fact that for such a fault a high
neutral current appears first, while a false differential current only appears if one or
more current transformers saturate.
An external earth fault is thus assumed to have occurred when a high neutral current
suddenly appears, while at the same time the differential current Idiff remains low, at
least for a while. This condition must be detected before a trip request is placed within
REFPDIF. Any search for external fault is aborted if a trip request has been placed. A
condition for a successful detection is that it takes not less than 4ms for the first CT to
saturate.
For an internal earth fault, a true differential current develops immediately, while for
an external fault it only develops if a CT saturates. If a trip request comes first, before
an external fault could be positively detected, then it must be an internal fault.
If an external earth fault has been detected, then the REFPDIF is temporarily
desensitized.
Directional criterion
The directional criterion is applied in order to positively distinguish between internal
and external earth faults. This check is an additional criterion, which should prevent
malfunctions at heavy external earth faults, and during the disconnection of such
faults by other protections. Earth faults on lines connecting the power transformer
occur much more often than earth faults on a power transformer winding. It is
important therefore that the Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance
173
Technical manual

(REFPDIF) must remain stable during an external fault, and immediately after the
fault has been cleared by some other protection.
For an external earth faults with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines
(3Io) and the neutral current (IN in Figure 61) are theoretically equal in magnitude and
are 180 degrees out-of-phase. The current in the neutral (IN) serves as a directional
reference because it has the same direction for both internal and external earth faults.
The directional criterion in REFPDIF protection makes it a current-polarized
protection.
However, if one or more CTs saturate under external fault conditions, then the
measured currents 3Io and IN may no longer be equal, nor will their positions in the
complex plane be exactly 180 degrees apart. There is a risk that the resulting false
differential current Idiff enters the operate area of the operate-restrain characteristic
under external fault conditions. If this happens, a directional test may prevent a
malfunction.
A directional check is only executed if:
1. a trip request signal has been issued (REFPDIF function START signal set to 1)
2. the residual current in lines (3Io) is at least 3% of the IBase current.
If a directional check is either unreliable or not possible to do, due to too small
currents, then the direction is cancelled as a condition for an eventual trip.
If a directional check is executed, the REFPDIF protection operation is only allowed

if currents 3Io and IN (as seen in Figure 61 and Figure 62) are both within the operating
region determined by the set value of ROA, in degrees.
ROA = 60 to 90 degrees; where ROA stands for Relay Operate Angle.
Second harmonic analysis

When energizing a transformer a false differential current may appear in earth fault
protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF). The phase CTs may saturate due to
a high DC component with a long duration, but the current through the neutral CT does
not have either the same DC component or the same amplitude and the risk for
saturation of this CT is not as high. As a result the differential current due to the
saturation may be so high that it reaches the operate characteristic. A calculation of the
content of 2nd harmonic in the neutral current is made when the neutral current,
residual current and bias current are within some windows and some timing criteria
are fulfilled. If the ratio between second and fundamental harmonic exceeds 40%,
REFPDIF is blocked.
174
Technical manual

6.4.7.5 Algorithm of the restricted earth-fault protection
1. Check if current in the neutral Ineutral (IN) is less than 50% of the base sensitivity
Idmin. If yes, only service values are calculated, then REFPDIF algorithm is not
used.
2. If current in the Ineutral (IN) is more than 50% of Idmin, then determine the bias
current Ibias.
3. Determine the differential (operate) current Idiff as a phasor, and calculate its
magnitude.
4. Check if the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is above the operate-bias characteristic. If yes,
increment the trip request counter by 1. If the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be
below the operate-bias characteristic, then the trip request counter is reset to zero.
5. If the trip request counter is still zero, search for an eventual heavy external earth
fault. The search is only made if the neutral current is at least 50% of the Idmin
current. If an external earth fault has been detected, a flag is set which remains set
until the external fault has been cleared. The external fault flag is reset to zero
when Ineutral falls below 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. Any search for an
external fault is aborted if trip request counter is more than zero.
6. As long as the external fault persists, an additional temporary trip condition is
introduced. This means that REFPDIF is temporarily desensitized.
7. If point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be above the operate-bias characteristic), so that
trip request counter is more than zero, a directional check can be made. The
directional check is made only if Iresidual (3Io) is more than 3% of the IBase
current. If the result of the check means “external fault”, then the internal trip
request is reset. If the directional check cannot be executed, then direction is no
longer a condition for a trip.
8. When neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows
and some timing criteria are fulfilled, the ratio of 2nd to fundamental harmonic is
calculated. If it is found to be above 60% the trip request counter is reset and TRIP
remains zero.
9. Finally, a check is made if the trip request counter is equal to, or higher than 2. If
yes, and at the same instance of time tREFtrip, the actual bias current at this instance
of time tREFtrip is at least 50% of the highest bias current Ibiasmax (Ibiasmax is the
highest recording of any of the three phase currents measured during the
disturbance), then REFPDIF sets output TRIP to 1. If the counter is less than 2,
the TRIP signal remains zero.

Table 68: REFPDIF technical data
Operate characteristic Adaptable ± 1.0% of Ir for I ≤ Ir
± 1.0% of I for I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% -

Minimum pickup (4.0-100.0)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir
175
Technical manual


Directional characteristic Fixed 180 degrees or ± 60 to ± 90 ± 2.0 degrees
degrees
Operate time, trip at 0 to 10 x Min = 15 ms -
IdMin Max = 30 ms
Reset time, trip at 10 to 0 x IdMin Min = 15 ms -
Max = 30 ms
Second harmonic blocking 60.0% of fundamental (hidden ± 1.0% of Ir
setting)
176
Technical manual

Section 7 Impedance protection
7.1 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic

ZMHPDIS
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE
identification C37.2 device
number
Full-scheme distance protection, mho ZMHPDIS 21
characteristic
S00346 V1 EN
7.1.2 Functionality
The numerical mho line distance protection is a, up to four zone full scheme protection
for back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults.
The full scheme technique provides back-up protection of power lines with high
sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication.
The four zones have fully independent measuring and settings, which gives high
flexibility for all types of lines.
Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the function.
The function can be used as under impedance back-up protection for transformers and
generators.
177
Technical manual


ZMHPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
CURR_INP* TRL2
VOLT_INP* TRL3
POL_VOLT* TRPE
BLOCK TRPP
BLKZ START
BLKZMTD STL1
BLKHSIR STL2
BLKTRIP STL3
BLKPE STPE
BLKPP STPP
EXTNST STTIMER
INTRNST
DIRCND
STCND*
LDCND
IEC06000423 V3 EN
Figure 64: ZMHPDIS function block
7.1.4 Signals
Table 69: ZMHPDIS Input signals

I3P GROUP - Connection for current sample signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Connection for voltage sample signals
SIGNAL
CURR_INP GROUP - Connection for current signals
SIGNAL
VOLT_INP GROUP - Connection for voltage signals
SIGNAL
POL_VOLT GROUP - Connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPE BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-earth operation
BLKPP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-phase operation
EXTNST BOOLEAN 0 External start
INTRNST BOOLEAN 0 Internal start
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
LDCND INTEGER 0 External load condition (loop enabler)
178
Technical manual

Table 70: ZMHPDIS Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip General
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip phase L1
TRPE BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-earth
TRPP BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-phase
START BOOLEAN Start General
STL1 BOOLEAN Start phase L1
STPE BOOLEAN Start phase-to-earth
STPP BOOLEAN Start phase-to-phase
STTIMER BOOLEAN Start timer
7.1.5 Settings
Table 71: ZMHPDIS Group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
DirMode Off - - Forward Direction mode
Offset
Forward
Reverse
LoadEncMode Off - - Off Load encroachment mode Off/On
On
ReachMode Overreach - - Overreach Reach mode Over/Underreach
Underreach
ZnTimerSel Timers seperated - - Timers seperated Zone timer selection
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
OpModePE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
ZPE 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Positive sequence impedance setting for
Phase-Earth loop
ZAngPE 10 - 90 Deg 1 85 Angle for positive sequence line
impedance for Phase-Earth loop
KN 0.00 - 3.00 - 0.01 0.80 Magnitude of earth return compensation
factor KN
KNAng -180 - 180 Deg 1 -15 Angle for earth return compensation
factor KN
179
Technical manual


ZRevPE 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to earth
loop(magnitude)
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to earth
elements
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to earth current
OpModePP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase
On loops
ZPP 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Impedance setting reach for phase to
phase elements
ZAngPP 10 - 90 Deg 1 85 Angle for positive sequence line
impedance for Phase-Phase elements
ZRevPP 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to phase
loop(magnitude)
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to phase
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to phase
current
Table 72: ZMHPDIS Group settings (advanced)

OffsetMhoDir Non-directional - - Non-directional Direction mode for offset mho
Forward
Reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-ph
Table 73: ZMHPDIS Non group settings (basic)

groups
7.1.6.1 Full scheme measurement
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults are
executed in parallel for all zones.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.
180
Technical manual

7.1.6.2 Impedance characteristic
The Mho distance function ZMHPDIS is present with four instances so that four
separate zones could be designed. Each instance can be selected to be either forward
or reverse with positive sequence polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self
polarized offset mho characteristics is also available. One example of the operating
characteristic is shown in Figure 65 A) where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
The directional mho characteristic of Figure 65 has a dynamic expansion due to the
source impedance. Instead of crossing the origin as for the mho to the left of Figure
65, which is only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is
moved to the coordinates of the negative source impedance giving an expansion of the
circle of Figure 65 D) .
C D
jx X
Mho, zone4
Mho, zone3 Zs=0
Mho, zone2 R
Mho, zone1
Zs=Z1
Zs=2Z1
IEC11000223 V2 EN
Figure 65: Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic
The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults than a plain cross polarized characteristic. However, if the source
impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security
of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions.
The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a section
of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting
parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment function
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load
impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the Faulty phase
181
Technical manual

identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS, where also the
relevant settings can be found. Information about the load encroachment from
FMPSPDIS to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the input signal
LDCND.
7.1.6.3 Basic operation characteristics
Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter
Operation.
Each zone can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter
DirMode .
The mho characteristics can be classified into - Offset or Directional. The directional
mho characteristics can be set to Offset, Forward or Reverse by the setting parameter
DirMode. The offset mho characteristic can be set to Forward or Reverse or Non-
Directional by the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir.
The operation for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase fault can be individually

switched On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible
to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this
mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering
is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set to
Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced.
The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3
elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either
because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these
elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.
The offset Mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by

the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a
directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the
directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the
input DIRCND.
When DirMode is set to offset and offsetMhoDir is set as Non-Directional, ZDMRDIR

does not have any effect on the measurement loop and operation of the function. When
DirMode is selected as Forward or Reverse, a directional line is introduced.
Information about the directional line is given from the directional element
(ZDMRDIR) and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input
DIRCND.
The zone reach for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually in
polar coordinates.
The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the corresponding
arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP.
182
Technical manual

Compensation for earth -return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
parameter KN and KNAng where KN is the magnitude of the earth -return path and
KNAng is the argument of the earth-return path.
Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 × Z1
IECEQUATION14023 V1 EN (Equation 35)
KNAng = arg
( Z 0 - Z1
3 × Z1
)
where
Z0 is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase
Z1 is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase
The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time
delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be set
to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation. In instantaneous case, the
timers tPE and tPP need to be set as zero.
The operate timers triggering input depends on the parameter ZnTimerSel setting. The
parameter ZnTimerSel can be set to:
• Timers separated: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

respective measuring loop start signals.
• Timers linked: Start of any of the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase loops will
trigger both the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase timers.
• Internal start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the
INTRNST input.
• Start from PhSel: The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by
the STCND and LDCND inputs. Each of the two inputs consist binary status
information related to the six measuring loops. Hence if any of the measuring
loop status is high in both two inputs STCND and LDCND, then the timers will be
triggered. In case when LoadEnchMode is off then only STCND enables the timer.
It is not recommended to use this timer setting for the Zone

instance where LoadEnchMode is off.
• External start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

EXTNST input.
183
Technical manual

The function can be blocked in the following ways:
• activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

• activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
• activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based time domain algorithm
• activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the algorithm
for high SIR values
• activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
• activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs
• activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs
The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function or
from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both
cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input
BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS)
The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected
by ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be connected
to the BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.
At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built-
in resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The
input BLKHSIR is connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC for increasing
of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive underreach
scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.
7.1.6.4 Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor by
90 degrees or more, the function operates and gives a trip output.
Phase-to-phase fault
Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in Figure 66. The condition for deriving
the angle β is according to equation 37.
184
Technical manual

where
U L1L2 is the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1790 V2
EN
I L1L2 is the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1791 V2
EN
ZPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault

Upol is the polarizing voltage
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage

(UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the
Mho circle for close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270
IL1L2·X
Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 • ZPP
IL1L2 • ZPP
ß
Upol
UL1L2
IL1L2·R
en07000109.vsd
IEC07000109 V1 EN
Figure 66: Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-to-L2
fault
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the
settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180°.
185
Technical manual

The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle β between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater than or equal to 90° (figure
67). The angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle β for L1-to-L2 fault can be defined according to equation 38.
æ U -IL1L2 × ZPP ö
b = arg ç ÷
è U-(-IL1L2 × ZRevPP) ø
where
U is the UL1L2 voltage

EQUATION1800 V1 EN
ZRevPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction
IL1L2jX
Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 • ZPP

IL1L2 • ZPP
U
Ucomp2 = U = IF•ZF=UL1L2
IL1L2R
- IL1L2 • Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd
IEC07000110 V1 EN
Figure 67: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase L1-
to-L2 fault.
Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270.
Offset mho, forward direction

When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside
the one for offset mho (90<β<270) is introduced, that is the angle φ between the
186
Technical manual

voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth
quadrant. See figure 68. Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270 and ArgDir≤φ≤ArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
β is calculated according to equation 38
The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho
directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) for information
about the mho directional element.
IL1L2jX
ZPP
UL1L2
ArgNegRes f
IL1L2
ArgDir
en07000111.vsd
IEC07000111 V1 EN
Figure 68: Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase L1-
to-L2 fault
Offset mho, reverse direction

The operation area for offset mho in reverse direction is according to figure 69. The
operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180°.
Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270 and 180° - ArgDir ≤φ ≤ ArgNegRes + 180°
The β is derived according to equation 38 for the mho circle and φ is the angle between
the voltage and current.
187
Technical manual

ZPP
ArgNegRes
ϕ
IL1L2
ArgDir R
UL1L2
ZRevPP
en06000469.eps
IEC06000469 V1 EN
Figure 69: Operation characteristic for reverse phase L1-to-L2 fault
Phase-to-earth fault
Mho
The measuring of earth faults uses earth-return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence
from the earth-return path.
For an earth fault in phase L1, the compensation voltage Ucomp can be derived, as
shown in Figure 70.
188
Technical manual

Ucomp = U pol - I L1 × Z loop

where
Upol is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1-to- earth fault)
Zloop is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as
(
Z1+ZN = Z 1 × 1 + KN )
where
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)
KN is the zero-sequence compensator factor
The angle β between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1-to-earth fault
is
β = arg U L1 − I L1 + 3I 0 ⋅ KN ⋅ ZPE  − arg (Upol )

( )
 
GUID-A9492CDF-D3B7-4DC5-8E06-6638BEE2540B V2 EN (Equation 40)
where
UL1 is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1
IL1 is the phase current in faulty phase L1
3I0 is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase L1
KN Z0-Z1
3 × Z1
the setting parameter for the zero sequence
compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and
the angle KNAng.
Upol is the 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage
UL1
189
Technical manual

IL1·X
IL1·ZN
Ucomp
IL1 • Zloop
IL1·ZPE
Upol
f
IL1 (Ref) IL1·R
en06000472_2.vsd
IEC06000472 V2 EN
Figure 70: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-
to-earth fault
Offset mho
The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the setting reach for the
positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector ZPE
in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP is
AngZPE+180°.
The condition for operation at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle β between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90° see figure 71.
The angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle β for L1-to-earth fault can be defined as
æ UL1- IL1L × ZPE ö

b = arg ç ÷
è UL1-(- IL1 × Z Re vPE ) ø
is the phase L1 voltage

U L1
EQUATION1
805 V1 EN
190
Technical manual

IL1L 2 • jX
U comp1 = UL1 - I L1• ZPE

IL1 • ZPE
UL1
U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 • ZRevPE)
IL1L2 • R
- I L1 • Z Re vPe
en 06000465.vsd
IEC06000465 V1 EN
Figure 71: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1-
to-earth fault
Offset mho, forward direction

In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset
mho will introduce an extra criterion for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset
mho according to equation 41 and 90≤β≤270, also the criteria that the angle φ between
the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth
quadrant. See figure 72. Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270 and ArgDir≤φ≤ArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
β is calculated according to equation 41
191
Technical manual

IL1 jX
UL1
ArgNegRes f
IL1 IL1·R
ArgDir
en 06000466.vsd
IEC06000466 V1 EN
Figure 72: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1-to-
earth fault
Offset mho, reverse direction

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in
reverse direction will introduce an extra criterion for operation compare to the normal
offset mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current
shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in
second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180° -ArgDir and in fourth
quadrant ArgNegRes+180°, see figure 73.
The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for L1-to-earth fault is
90≤β≤270 and 180°-Argdir≤φ≤ArgNegRes+180°.
The β is derived according to equation 41 for the offset mho circle and φ is the angle
between the voltage and current.
192
Technical manual

ZPE
ArgNegRes
ϕ
IL
1
ArgDir R
UL1
ZRevPE
en06000470.eps
IEC06000470 V1 EN
Figure 73: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for L1-to-
earth fault
7.1.6.5 Simplified logic diagrams
Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:
• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
• Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 74.
The ZMHPDIS function block is used in the IED for each zone.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
Phase selection with load encroachment function FMPSPDIS within the IED, which
193
Technical manual

are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean
expressions for each condition separately. Input signal STCND is connected from
FMPSPDIS function output signal STCNDPHS.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal DIRCND must be
configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR function.
OffsetMhoDir=
Non-directional
AND AND
DirMode=Offset
STCND T
AND F
AND
LoadEnchMode=
On/Off
LDCND
T
True F
AND Release
DIRCND
OffsetMhoDir=
Forward/Reverse
AND
DirMode=
Forward/Reverse
BLKZ
BLOCK OR
IEC11000216 V1 EN
Figure 74: Simplified logic for release start signal
When load encroachment mode is switched on (LoadEnchMode=On), start signal

STCND is also checked against LDCND signal.
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 74.
Composition of the phase start signals is presented in figure 75.
194
Technical manual

Release STPE
OR
AND
STL1N STL1
OR
AND
STL2N
AND
STL3N
STL2
OR
AND
STL1L2
AND
STL2L3
STL3
OR
AND
STL3L1
START
OR
STPP
OR
IEC11000217 V1 EN
Figure 75: Composition of starting signals
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 76.
195
Technical manual

Timer tPP=On tPP

AND t
STPP
OR
Timer tPE=On tPE
AND t
STPE
15ms
BLKTRIP AND t
TRIP
STL1 AND TRL1
AND TRL2
STL2
STL3 AND TRL3
IEC11000218 V1 EN
Figure 76: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone
Zone timer logic for the distance protection is symbolically presented in figure 77.
STPE
BLOCK
TRPE
&
tON
& ³1 t
a
Internal a=b
start b STTIMER
&
Internal
a
a<b
start b
tON
³1 t && TRPP
&
STPP
ZnTimerSel
FALSE 1 timers seperated
³1 2 timers linked
internalCommonStart
3 internal start
phSelStart 4 start from phSel
externalCommonStart
5 external start
IEC12000463 V2 EN
Figure 77: Zone timer logic
196
Technical manual


Table 74: ZMHPDIS technical data
Number of zones, Ph-E Max 4 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (10–30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence impedance, (0.005–3000.000) W/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy
Ph-E loop Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence impedance (10–90) degrees
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
angle, Ph-E loop
Angle: 85 degrees
Reverse reach, Ph-E loop (0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase
(Magnitude)
Magnitude of earth return (0.00–3.00)
compensation factor KN
Angle for earth compensation (-180–180) degrees
factor KN
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and Ph- (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 60 ms whichever is
E operation greater
Operate time 22 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.5 to 1.5 x Zreach Min = 30 ms -
Max = 45 ms
7.2 Directional impedance element for mho

characteristic ZDMRDIR
Directional impedance element for mho ZDMRDIR 21D
characteristic
S00346 V1 EN
7.2.2 Functionality
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be supervised by a phase unselective
directional function based on symmetrical components (option).
197
Technical manual


ZDMRDIR
I3P* DIR_CURR
U3P* DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND
IEC06000422 V2 EN
Figure 78: ZDMRDIR function block
7.2.4 Signals
Table 75: ZDMRDIR Input signals
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
Table 76: ZDMRDIR Output signals

CURR GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current signals to Mho function
VOLT GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage signals to Mho function
POL GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for polarization voltage signals to Mho
function
STFW BOOLEAN Start in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring
loop
Table 77: ZDARDIR Input signals

I3P GROUP - Current signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage signals
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Polarisation current signals
SIGNAL
DIRCND INTEGER 0 Binary coded directional signal
198
Technical manual

Table 78: ZDARDIR Output signals

STFWPE BOOLEAN Forward start signal from phase-to-ground
directional element
STRVPE BOOLEAN Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground
directional element
DIREFCND INTEGER Start direction Binary coded
7.2.5 Settings
Table 79: ZDMRDIR Group settings (basic)
DirEvalType Impedance - - Comparator Directional evaluation mode Impedance /
Comparator Comparator
Imp/Comp
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
Table 80: ZDMRDIR Non group settings (basic)

groups
Table 81: ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)

PolMode -3U0 - - -3U0 Polarization quantity for opt dir function for
-U2 P-E faults
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-U2comp
AngleRCA -90 - 90 Deg 1 75 Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or base
angle)
I> 5 - 200 %IB 1 5 Minimum operation current in % of IBase
UPol> 4 - 100 %UB 1 4 Minimum polarizing voltage in % of UBase
IPol> 5 - 100 %IB 1 10 Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase
199
Technical manual

Table 82: ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)

AngleOp 90 - 180 Deg 1 160 Operation sector angle
Kmag 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Boost-factor in -U0comp and -U2comp
polarization
Table 83: ZDARDIR Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 84: ZDMRDIR Monitored data
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
7.2.7.1 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance element for
mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR). Equation 42 and equation 43 are used to classify that
the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault
respectively.
0.85 × U1L1 + 0.15 × U1L1M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
200
Technical manual

0.85 × U1L1L 2 + 0.15 × U1L1L 2M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
Where:
ArgDir Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15
(= -15 degrees)
ArgNegRes Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 79 for mho characteristics.
U1L1 Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U1L1M Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
IL1 Phase current in phase L1
U1L1L2 Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U1L1L2M Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
IL1L2 Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 79) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.
If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the mho
characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type
calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite
radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the directional
lines are implemented based on an impedance calculation equivalent to the one used
for the quadrilateral impedance characteristics.
When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic

(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection,
mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for parameter
DirEvalType is vital:
• alternative Comparator is strongly recommended
• alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used
• alternative Impedance should not be used. This altenative is
intended for use together with Distance protection zone,
quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)
201
Technical manual

X
Zset reach point
ArgNegRes
-ArgDir R
-Zs
en06000416.vsd
IEC06000416 V1 EN
Figure 79: Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STDIRCND
= L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32
Example: If only L1Nstart, the value is 1, if start in L1N and L3N are detected, the
value is 1+4=5.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

5% of the set base voltage UBase, thus the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:
• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip continues.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operate value, no directional
indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its
rated value.
202
Technical manual

The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function has
the following output signals:
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and
is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6

(2048) (1024) (512) (256) (128) (64)
STRVL3L1= STRVL2L3= STRVL1L2= STRVL3N=1 STRVL2N=1 STRVL1N=1
1 1 1
bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
(32) (16) (8) (4) (2) (1)
STFWL3L1= STFWL2L3= STFWL1L2= STFWL3N=1 STFWL2N=1 STFWL1N=1
1 1 1
The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function

of all the forward starting conditions, that is, STFWL1N, STFWL2N, STFWL3N,
STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is similar to the STFW
output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all the reverse
starting conditions, that is, STRVL1N, STRVL2N, STRVL3N, STRVL1L2,
STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1.
7.3 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS
High speed distance protection zone ZMFPDIS 21
(zone 1)
S00346 V1 EN
7.3.2 Functionality
The High speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) is providing sub-cycle, down
towards half-cycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and up
to around SIR 5. At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care during
difficult conditions in high voltage transmission networks, like faults on long heavily
loaded lines and faults generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled
with outmost security and dependability, although sometimes with reduced operating
speed.
203
Technical manual

The ZMFPDIS function is a six zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for
phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of the
independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-
phase autoreclosing.
The zones can operate independently of each other in directional (forward or reverse)
or non-directional mode. However, zone1 and zone2 is designed to measure in
forward direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in the reverse
direction. This makes them suitable, together with a communication scheme, for
protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as
parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.
A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the

distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.
The ZMFPDIS function-block itself incorporates a phase-selection element and a

directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 670-series, where these
elements were represented with separate function-blocks.
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria (i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. There is also
a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only on
voltage and current phasors.
The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast and
correct directional decision during various power system operating conditions,
including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-
sequence in-feed.
204
Technical manual


ZMFPDIS
I3P* TRIPZ1
U3P* TRL1Z1
BLOCK TRL2Z1
VTSZ TRL3Z1
BLKZ1 TRIPZ2
BLKZ2 TRL1Z2
BLKZ3 TRL2Z2
BLKZ4 TRL3Z2
BLKZ5 TRIPZ3
BLKZRV TRIPZ4
BLKTRZ1 TRIPZ5
BLKTRZ2 TRIPZRV
BLKTRZ3 STARTZ1
BLKTRZ4 STNDZ1
BLKTRZ5 STARTZ2
BLKTRZRV STL1Z2
STL2Z2
STL3Z2
STNDZ2
STARTZ3
STNDZ3
STARTZ4
STNDZ4
STARTZ5
STNDZ5
STARTZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STARTND
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
IEC11000433 V1 EN
Figure 80: ZMFPDIS function block
7.3.4 Signals
Table 85: ZMFPDIS Input signals
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
205
Technical manual


BLKZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone
BLKTRZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone
Table 86: ZMFPDIS Output signals

TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 - forward
direction
TRL1Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction
direction
TRIPZ3 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
direction
direction
TRIPZRV BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV - reverse
dir.
STARTZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - forward
direction
STNDZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any
direction
direction
STL1Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
206
Technical manual


direction
STARTZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
direction
direction
direction
direction
direction
STARTZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse dir.
STL1ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse direction
STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any
direction
STARTND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases - any
direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - forward
direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - reverse
direction
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
STPE BOOLEAN Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction
STPP BOOLEAN Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction
207
Technical manual

7.3.5 Settings
Table 87: ZMFPDIS Group settings (basic)
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
RLdFw 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - forward
RLdRv 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - reverse
XLd 0.01 - 10000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 400.00 Reactance determining the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load impedance
area
CVTtype Any - - Passive type CVT selection determining filtering of the
Passive type function
None (Magnetic)
OpModeZ1 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1PPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1
R1PPZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 1
X1PEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 1
R1PEZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 1
X0Z1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 1
R0Z1 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 1
RFPPZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1
RFPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1
tPPZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1
tPEZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1
IMinOpPPZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 1
IMinOpPEZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 1
Enable Ph-E zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1Z2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, zone
2
R1Z2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 2
208
Technical manual


Enable Ph-E zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ3 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 3 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 3)
Reverse
3
Enable Ph-E zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
Reverse
4
209
Technical manual


Enable Ph-E zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
Reverse
5
OpModeZRV Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1ZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, zone
RV
R1ZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone
RV
X0ZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone RV
R0ZRV 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone RV
RFPPZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV
RFPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV
tPPZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV
tPEZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPEZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone RV
210
Technical manual

Table 88: ZMFPDIS Group settings (advanced)

ZoneLinkStart Phase Selection - - Phase Selection Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked
1st starting zone trip delay timers
INReleasePE 5 - 400 %IPh 1 400 3I0 limit for releasing Phase-to-Earth
measuring loops
TimerModeZ1 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ1 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 1
ZoneLink
No Links
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
ZoneLink
No Links
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
ZoneLink
No Links
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
ZoneLink
No Links
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZRV Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZRV LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone RV
ZoneLink
No Links
211
Technical manual

Table 89: ZMFPDIS Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 90: ZMFPDIS Monitored data
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L1L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text
without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is equally
valid for all zones.
7.3.7.1 Filtering
Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half cycle
filter.
212
Technical manual

The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.
A half cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while odd
harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach however;
instead there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the
magnitude ratio between the harmonic and fundamental component.
7.3.7.2 Distance measuring zones
Th different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which means that earth
fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for forward and reverse
faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 81 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.
L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1
L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV
IEC05000458 V2 EN
Figure 81: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault
Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection
function with six measuring elements.
Tansients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of a
distance protection. At the same time these transients can be very diverse in nature
from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be distinguished by the
algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting (CVTtype) is
introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of CVT applied and thus
providing the advantage of knowing how performance should be optimized, even
during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.
There are basically two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and
the active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is
employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a negative
213
Technical manual

impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher source
impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.
The IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or no use in this connection. It is

not primarily the damping of transients that is important; it is the frequency content of
the transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency.
So, even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active type, comply with the same
transient class, the active type requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid
transient overreach.
For avoiding overreach and at the same time achieving fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing is
implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for every measuring loop and
quadrilateral characteristic. There are no specific reach settings for this circular zone.
It uses the normal quadrilateral zone settings to determine a reach that will be
appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic will always have somewhat
shorter reach than the quadrilateral zone.
7.3.7.3 Phase-selection criteria

criteria (i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. Naturally,
there is also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation
only on voltage and current phasors.
The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is not
restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change phase. This
significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded lines. One exception however is three-phase faults, for which the load
encroachment characteristic always has to be applied, in order to distinguish fault
from load.
The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and carry
on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not be
sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the load
area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the indication will
be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.
Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. Measurement in two phase-to-earth
loops at the same time is associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth
faults at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the zero
sequence current is relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio. In fact, in
these situations zone measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-earth
loops and the phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous
faults closer to the remote bus will gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-
214
Technical manual

phase-earth fault and the function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone
measurements also here.
In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely of zero sequence
nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-
to-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.
However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth) zone

measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, there is a setting INReleasePE that can
be lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-earth
measurement should be activated.
7.3.7.4 Directional criteria
Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a sum of positive sequence voltage and memory voltage with
phase currents. For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this
method is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase
current, the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence
directional evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during high load
condition. Finally, a zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever there is
more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.
The directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per measuring loop, are
defined by the following equations.
−15° < arg

( (1 − k ) ⋅U1 L1 + k ⋅ U 1L1M )
< 120°
I L1
−15° < arg

( (1 − k ) ⋅U1 L1L 2 + k ⋅ U 1L1L 2 M )
< 120°
I L1L 2
Where:
U1L1 is the positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1.
U1L1M is the positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1.
IL1 is the phase current in phase L1.
U1L1L2 is the voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).
U1L1L2M is the memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).
IL1L2 is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).
k is the factor determining the amount of memory voltage.
The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees. The
value of the k factor determining the amount of memory voltage used is normally 0.8.
215
Technical manual

However, if the ‘SeriesComp’ option is chosen (only available in ZMFCPDIS) the

value is changed to 0.95.
7.3.7.5 Fuse failure
The ZMFPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.
7.3.7.6 Power swings
There is need for external blocking of the ZMFPDIS function during power swings,
either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external device.
7.3.7.7 Measuring principles
All ZMFPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in Figure 82 and Figure 83. The phase-to-earth characteristic
is given in ohms-per-loop domain while the phase-to-phase characteristic is given in
ohms-per-phase domain.
216
Technical manual

X (Ohm/loop)
R1PE+Rn
RFPE RFPE
X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE RFPE
X1PE+Xn
RFPE RFPE
R1PE+Rn
IEC11000415 V1 EN
Figure 82: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop

domain
217
Technical manual

X (Ohm/phase)
RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE PG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XXX00PE
0PE-
PG -
X-1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW===
XNFW
XNFW
3
X1PP 3 3
j j
R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP RFPP
2 2
X1PP
RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
IEC11000416 V1 EN
Figure 83: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring, ohm/loop

domain
The faulty loop in relation to the fault type can be presented as in Figure 84. The main
intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach should be
interpreted and set. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents the total
fault resistance of the loop, regardless the fact that the fault resistance (arc) may be
divided into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase faults. The R1 + jX1 represent
the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location.
218
Technical manual

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element
Phase-to-earth
RFPE
fault in phase L1
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1
IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault or Phase-to-
phase-earth fault IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP
IEC11000419 V2 EN
Figure 84: Fault loop model
7.3.7.8 Load encroachment
In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic
without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment
and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is
transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the
left in Figure 85. A load impedance within the characteristic would cause an unwanted
trip. The traditional way of avoiding this situation is to set the distance zone resistive
reach with a security margin to the minimum load impedance. The drawback with this
approach is that the sensitivity of the protection to detect resistive faults is reduced.
The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the
characteristic shown in Figure 85. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the
possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at
remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd, the resistive
blinder for the zone measurement can be set according to Figure 85 affording higher
fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load
219
Technical manual

encroachment. Separate resistive blinder setting is available in forward and reverse

direction.
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded, medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get
sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem. See
section "".
X X
Z1 Z1
Load impedance
area in forward ArgLd
R
direction R
RLdRv RLdFw
IEC09000248 V2 EN
Figure 85: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic
7.3.7.9 Simplified logic schemes
PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-
selection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones and
determine which loops should be released to operate.
FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary

signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is activated if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.
The internal input 'IN present' is activated if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 10% of
the maximum phase current magnitude and at the same time is above 5% of IBase.
However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is changed to
residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.
220
Technical manual

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z1
RV(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)ZRV
DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1) Non-directional
FW(Ln & LmLn) Forward DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z3-5
RV(Ln & LmLn) Reverse
IEC12000137 V2 EN
Figure 86: Connection of directional signals to Zones
PEZx
OR
ZML1Zx
PHSL1 AND
DIRL1Zx AND
ZML2Zx
PHSL2 AND
DIRL2Zx AND
ZML3Zx L1Zx
OR
PHSL3 AND
DIRL3Zx AND
ZML1L2Zx L2Zx
OR
PHSL1L2 AND
DIRL1L2Zx AND
ZML2L3Zx L3Zx
PHSL2L3 AND OR
DIRL2L3Zx AND
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1 AND
DIRL3L1Zx AND
PPZx
OR
NDZx
OR
IEC12000140 V1 EN
Figure 87: Intermediate logic
221
Technical manual

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-E
PPZx AND tPPZx

OR AND
AND t
TZx
PEZx AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
STPHS Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
LNKZ1 FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZRV LNKZx
AND
LNKZ3 OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5
IEC12000139-3-en.vsdx
IEC12000139 V3 EN
Figure 88: Logic for linking of timers
222
Technical manual

15 ms
TZx
t TRIPZx
AND
BLKTRZx
TRL1Zx
OR AND
BLOCK
VTSZ TRL2Zx
OR AND
BLKZx
TRL3Zx
AND
15 ms
L1Zx
t STL1Zx
AND
15 ms
L2Zx
t STL2Zx
AND
15 ms
L3Zx
t STL3Zx
AND
PPZx 15 ms
PEZx OR t STARTZx
AND
15 ms
NDZx
t STNDZx
AND
IEC12000138 V1 EN
Figure 89: Start and trip outputs
223
Technical manual

15 ms
OR t STPE
AND
PHSL1
15 ms
PHSL2 OR t
AND
PHSL3
15 ms
OR t
PHSL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
OR t
AND
PHSL3L1
15 ms
OR t STPP
AND
BLOCK STARTND
OR
VTSZ OR
STPHS
IEC12000133 V1 EN
Figure 90: Additional start outputs 1
224
Technical manual

PHSL1
FWL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
FWL2 AND OR t STFWL1
AND
PHSL3
FWL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STFWL2
AND
FWL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
FWL2L3 AND OR t STFWL3
PHSL3L1 AND
FWL3L1 AND
OR
STFWPE
IN present AND
STFW1PH
=1
BLOCK
VTSZ OR
STFW2PH
=2
STFW3PH
=3
IEC12000134 V1 EN
PHSL1
RVL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
RVL2 AND OR t STRVL1
AND
PHSL3
RVL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STRVL2
AND
RVL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
RVL2L3 AND OR t STRVL3
PHSL3L1 AND
RVL3L1 AND
OR
STRVPE
IN present AND
BLOCK
VTSZ OR
IEC12000141 V1 EN
225
Technical manual


Table 91: ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS technical data
Number of zones 3 selectable -
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) ohm/
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop phase
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00) ohm/
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop phase
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00) ohm/p ±2.0% of static accuracy
±2.0 deg static angular accuracy
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00) ohm/p Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E and (0.01 -9000.00) ohm/l
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Ph-Ph
Angle: At 0 deg and 85 deg
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000-60.000) s ±2.0% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms -
Max = 35 ms
7.4 High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS
High speed distance protection zone ZMFCPDIS 21
(zone 1-6)
S00346 V1 EN
7.4.2 Functionality
High speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS) provides sub-cycle, down towards half-
cycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and up to around SIR
5. At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care during difficult conditions
in high voltage transmission networks, like faults on long heavily loaded lines and
226
Technical manual

faults generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled with outmost
security and dependability, although sometimes with reduced operating speed.
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is fundamentally the same function as

ZMFPDIS but provides more flexibility in zone settings to suit more complex
applications, such as series compensated lines. In operation for series compensated
networks, the parameters of the directional function are altered to handle voltage
reversal.
The ZMFCPDIS function is a six-zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of the
independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-
phase autoreclosing.
The zones can operate independently of each other in directional (forward or reverse)
or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with a communication
scheme, for protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations,
such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.
A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the

distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.
The ZMFCPDIS function block incorporates a phase-selection element and a

directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 670–series, where these
elements were represented with separate function blocks.

criteria, with significant increased dependability. Naturally, there is also a part
operating with continuous criteria that operates in parallel
The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast and
correct directional evaluation during various conditions, including close-in three-
phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.
227
Technical manual

ZMFCPDIS
I3P* TRIPZ
U3P* TRIPZ1
BLOCK TRL1Z1
VTSZ TRL2Z1
BLKZ1 TRL3Z1
BLKZ2 TRIPZ2
BLKZ3 TRL1Z2
BLKZ4 TRL2Z2
BLKZ5 TRL3Z2
BLKZRV TRIPZ3
BLKTRZ1 TRIPZ4
BLKTRZ2 TRIPZ5
BLKTRZ3 TRIPZRV
BLKTRZ4 STARTZ
BLKTRZ5 STARTZ1
BLKTRZRV STNDZ1
STARTZ2
STL1Z2
STL2Z2
STL3Z2
STNDZ2
STARTZ3
STNDZ3
STARTZ4
STNDZ4
STARTZ5
STNDZ5
STARTZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STARTND
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
ZL1
ZL1RANG
ZL1ANGL
ZL2
ZL2RANG
ZL2ANGL
ZL3
ZL3RANG
ZL3ANGL
IEC11000422.vsdx
IEC11000422 V2 EN
Figure 93: ZMFCPDIS function block
228
Technical manual

7.4.4 Signals
Table 92: ZMFCPDIS Input signals
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
BLKZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone
BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone
Table 93: ZMFCPDIS Output signals

direction
direction
direction
direction
229
Technical manual


direction
TRIPZRV BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV - reverse
dir.
direction
direction
direction
direction
direction
direction
direction
direction
direction
direction
STARTZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse dir.
STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any
direction
STARTND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases - any
direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - forward
direction
230
Technical manual


STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - reverse
direction
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
STPE BOOLEAN Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction
STPP BOOLEAN Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction
7.4.5 Settings
Table 94: ZMFCPDIS Group settings (basic)
On
OperationSC NoSeriesComp - - NoSeriesComp Selection of series compensation
SeriesComp operation Off / On
RLdFw 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - forward
RLdRv 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - reverse
XLd 0.01 - 10000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 400.00 Reactance determining the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load impedance
area
CVTtype Any - - Passive type CVT selection determining the filtering of
Passive type the function
None (Magnetic)
Enable Ph-E zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1FwPPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 1, forward dir.
R1FwPPZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone
1, forward dir.
RFPPZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,
forw & rev dir.
X1RvPPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,
reverse direction
X1FwPEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
1, forward dir.
R1FwPEZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
1, forward dir.
X0FwPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone 1,
forward direction
231
Technical manual


R0FwPEZ1 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 1,
forward direction
RFPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1, forw
& rev dir.
X1RvPEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 1,
reverse direction
Enable Ph-E zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
zone 2, forward dir.
2, forward dir.
RFPPZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2,
forw & rev dir.
reverse direction
2, forward dir.
2, forward dir.
forward direction
forward direction
RFPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2, forw
& rev dir.
reverse direction
Enable Ph-E zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
Reverse
232
Technical manual


zone 3, zone direction
3, zone direction
RFFwPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
zone direction
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
opposite to zone dir.
3, zone direction
3, zone direction
zone direction
zone direction
RFFwPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
zone direction
RFRvPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
Enable Ph-E zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
Reverse
4, zone direction
zone direction
4, zone direction
233
Technical manual


4, zone direction
zone direction
zone direction
zone direction
Enable Ph-E zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
Reverse
5, zone direction
zone direction
5, zone direction
5, zone direction
zone direction
zone direction
zone direction
234
Technical manual


OpModeZRV Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1FwPPZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone RV, reverse dir.
R1FwPPZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone
RV, reverse dir.
RFPPZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,
rev & forw dir.
X1RvPPZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,
forward direction
X1FwPEZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
reverse direction
R1FwPEZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
RV, reverse dir.
X0FwPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
RV, reverse direction
R0FwPEZRV 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
reverse direction
RFPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
rev & forw dir.
X1RvPEZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
forward direction
tPPZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV
tPEZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPEZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone RV
Table 95: ZMFCPDIS Group settings (advanced)

ZoneLinkStart Phase Selection - - Phase Selection Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked
1st starting zone trip delay timers
INReleasePE 5 - 400 %IPh 1 400 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
235
Technical manual


ZoneLink
No Links
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
ZoneLink
No Links
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
ZoneLink
No Links
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
ZoneLink
No Links
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZRV Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZRV LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone RV
ZoneLink
No Links
Table 96: ZMFCPDIS Non group settings (basic)

groups
236
Technical manual


Table 97: ZMFCPDIS Monitored data
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction

Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text
without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is equally
valid for all zones.
7.4.7.1 Filtering
Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFCPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half-cycle
filter.
The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.
A half-cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while
odd harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach; instead
237
Technical manual

there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the
magnitude ratio between the harmonic and the fundamental component.
7.4.7.2 Distance measuring zones
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for
forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 81 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.
L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV
IEC05000458 V2 EN
Figure 94: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection function with six measuring elements.
It is well-known that transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the
transient overreach of a distance protection. At the same time these transients can be
very diverse in nature from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be
distinguished by the algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting
is introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of CVT applied and thus
providing the advantage of knowing how performance should be optimized, even
during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.
There are basically two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and
the active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is
employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a negative
impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher source
impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.
It is worth mentioning here that the IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or
no use in this connection. It is not primarily the damping of transients that is important;
238
Technical manual

it is the frequency content of the transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to
filter out the specific frequency. So, even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active
type, comply with the same transient class, the active type requires more extensive
filtering in order to avoid transient overreach.
For avoiding overreach and at the same time achieving fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing
(retained from REL 531) is implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for
every measuring loop and quadrilateral characteristic. There are no specific reach
settings for this circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral zone settings to
determine a reach that will be appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic
will always have somewhat shorter reach than the quadrilateral zone.
7.4.7.3 Phase-selection element

criteria. The current change criteria itself can however only be relied on for a short
period following the fault inception (during what we will call the current change
phase). Subsequent switching in the network may render the change in current invalid.
So, naturally, the phase-selection element also operates on continuous criteria.
The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is not
restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change phase. This
significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded lines. One exception, however, is three-phase faults, for which the load
encroachment characteristic always has to be applied, in order to distinguish fault
from load.
The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and carry
on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not be
sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the load
area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the indication will
be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.
Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference compared
to the previous phase selection function in the 500- and 600-series (that is,
FDPSPDIS). Measurement in two phase-to-earth loops at the same time is associated
with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth faults at the same time, one each on the
two circuits of a double line, or when the zero sequence current is relatively high due
to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio.In fact, in these situations zone measurement will be
released both for the related phase-to-earth loops and the phase-to-phase loop
simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous faults closer to the remote bus will
gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-phase-earth fault and the function will
eventually use phase-to-phase zone measurements also here.
239
Technical manual

In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely lack of zero sequence
nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-
to-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.
However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth) zone

measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, the setting INReleasePE can be lowered
from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-earth measurement
should be activated.
7.4.7.4 Directional element
Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a sum of positive sequence voltage and memory voltage with
phase currents. This has been the standard method up to now in the 600-series
(ZDRDIR). For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this method
is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase current,
the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence directional
evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during high load condition.
Finally, zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever there is more or less
exclusive zero sequence in-feed.
Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per
measuring loop, are defined by the following equations (examples for L1and L1L2
only):
−15° < arg

( (1 − k ) ⋅U1 L1 + k ⋅ U 1L1M )
< 120°
I L1
−15° < arg

( (1 − k ) ⋅U1 L1L 2 + k ⋅ U 1L1L 2 M )
< 120°
I L1L 2
Where:
U1L1 is the positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1.
U1L1M is the positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1.
IL1 is the phase current in phase L1.
U1L1L2 is the voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).
U1L1L2M is the memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).
IL1L2 is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).
k is the factor determining the amount of memory voltage.
The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees. The
value of the k factor determining the amount of memory voltage used is normally 0.8.
240
Technical manual

However, if the SeriesComp option is chosen (only available in ZMFCPDIS) the value
is changed to 0.95.
7.4.7.5 Fuse failure
The ZMFCPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.
However, to guarantee that also very fast operation is blocked in a fuse failure
situation, there is a built-in supervision based on change in current that will delay
operation before the FUFSPVC blocking signal is received. The delay will be
introduced if no (vector) magnitude change greater than 5% of IBase has been
detected in any of the phase currents.
7.4.7.6 Power swings
There is need for external blocking of the ZMFCPDIS function during power swings,
either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external device.
7.4.7.7 Measuring principles
All ZMFCPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in figure 95 and figure 96. The phase-to-earth characteristic
is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents
the per-phase reach.
241
Technical manual

X (Ohm/loop)
R1PE+RNFw
X 0 PE - X 1FwPE
RFRvPE RFFwPE XNFw =
3
PG- -
XX00PE 1RVPGX 1RvPE
X 1XRVPE
XNRVXNRv
XNRV == = XNFw ×
33 X 1FwPE
XX0 PE - X-1X
0 PG FWPE
1FWPG
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FwPE+XNFw 3 3R0 PE - R1PE
RNFw =
jN jN 3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPE RFFwPE
X1RvPE+XNRv
jN
RFRvPE RFFwPE
R1PE+RNRv IEC11000417-1-en.vsd
IEC11000417 V1 EN
Figure 95: ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/

loop domain
242
Technical manual

X (Ohm/phase)
RFRvPP R1PP RFFwPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE PG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XXX00PE
0PE-
PG -
X-1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW===
XNFW
XNFW
3
X1FwPP 3 3
j j
jN R (Ohm/phase)
RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2
X1RvPP
jN
RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2
IEC11000418 V1 EN
Figure 96: ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops
Note that for ZMFCPDIS, the reverse zone ZRV, as well as any of
zones 3-5, that are set to DirMode=Reverse will get their operating
impedances inverted (rotated 180 degrees) internally in order to make
use of the main settings, which are the settings designated ‘Fw’.
Therefore, a reverse zone will have its Fw-settings (RFFwPPZRV,
X1FwPEZ3, and so on) applied in the third quadrant, that is, towards
the busbar instead of the line.
The fault loop reach in relation to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 84.
The main intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach
should be interpreted. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents the
total fault resistance of the loop, even while the fault resistance (arc) may be divided
into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase-to-earth faults. The R1 and jX1
represent the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault
location.
243
Technical manual

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element
Phase-to-earth
RFPE
fault in phase L1
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1
IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault or Phase-to-
phase-earth fault IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP
IEC11000419 V2 EN
Figure 97: Fault loop model
7.4.7.8 Simplified logic schemes
PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-
selection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones and
determine which loops should be released to possibly issue a start or a trip.
FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary

signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is set true if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.
The internal input 'IN present' is true if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 7% of IBase.
However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is changed to
residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.
244
Technical manual

15 ms
OR t STPE
AND
PHSL1
15 ms
PHSL2 OR t
AND
PHSL3
15 ms
OR t
PHSL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
OR t
AND
PHSL3L1
15 ms
OR t STPP
AND
BLOCK STARTND
OR
VTSZ OR
STPHS
IEC12000133 V1 EN
245
Technical manual

PHSL1
FWL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
FWL2 AND OR t STFWL1
AND
PHSL3
FWL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STFWL2
AND
FWL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
FWL2L3 AND OR t STFWL3
PHSL3L1 AND
FWL3L1 AND
OR
STFWPE
IN present AND
STFW1PH
=1
BLOCK
VTSZ OR
STFW2PH
=2
STFW3PH
=3
IEC12000134 V1 EN
RV(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)ZRV
DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1) Non-directional
FW(Ln & LmLn) Forward DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z3-5
RV(Ln & LmLn) Reverse
IEC12000137 V2 EN
Figure 100: Connection of directional signals to zones
246
Technical manual

15 ms
TZx
t TRIPZx
AND
BLKTRZx
TRL1Zx
OR AND
BLOCK
VTSZ TRL2Zx
OR AND
BLKZx
TRL3Zx
AND
15 ms
L1Zx
t STL1Zx
AND
15 ms
L2Zx
t STL2Zx
AND
15 ms
L3Zx
t STL3Zx
AND
PPZx 15 ms
PEZx OR t STARTZx
AND
15 ms
NDZx
t STNDZx
AND
IEC12000138 V1 EN
Figure 101: Start and trip outputs
247
Technical manual

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-E
PPZx AND tPPZx

OR AND
AND t
TZx
PEZx AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
STPHS Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
LNKZ1 FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZRV LNKZx
AND
LNKZ3 OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5
IEC12000139 V3 EN
Figure 102: Logic for linking of timers
248
Technical manual

PHSL1
RVL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
RVL2 AND OR t STRVL1
AND
PHSL3
RVL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STRVL2
AND
RVL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
RVL2L3 AND OR t STRVL3
PHSL3L1 AND
RVL3L1 AND
OR
STRVPE
IN present AND
BLOCK
VTSZ OR
IEC12000141 V1 EN
249
Technical manual

PEZx
OR
ZML1Zx
PHSL1 AND
DIRL1Zx AND
ZML2Zx
PHSL2 AND
DIRL2Zx AND
ZML3Zx L1Zx
OR
PHSL3 AND
DIRL3Zx AND
ZML1L2Zx L2Zx
OR
PHSL1L2 AND
DIRL1L2Zx AND
ZML2L3Zx L3Zx
PHSL2L3 AND OR
DIRL2L3Zx AND
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1 AND
DIRL3L1Zx AND
PPZx
OR
NDZx
OR
IEC12000140 V1 EN
Figure 104: Intermediate logic
250
Technical manual


Table 98: ZMFCPDIS technical data
Number of zones 3 selectable -
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5 - 6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of In
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (30 - 3000) Ω/phase
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
Positive sequence resistance (30 - 3000) Ω/phase
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
Zero sequence reactance reach (100.00 - 9000.00) Ω/p " +- 2.0% static accuracy +- 2.0 deg static
angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage
Zero sequence resistive reach (15.00 - 3000.00) Ω/p range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5
- 30) x Ir Angle: At 0 deg and 85 deg"
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E and (1.00 - 9000.00) Ω/l
Ph-Ph
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVT's
and 0.5 < SIR <30
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000 - 60.000) s
±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms
-
Max = 35 ms
7.5 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM Ucos 78
7.5.2 Functionality
The phenomenon pole slip, also named out of step conditions, occurs when there is
phase opposition between different parts of a power system. This is often shown in a
simplified way as two equivalent generators connected to each other via an equivalent
transmission line and the phase difference between the equivalent generators is 180°.
251
Technical manual

Angle = 90° Angle = -90°
Centre of Pole Slip

en07000003.vsd
IEC07000003 V1 EN
Figure 105: The centre of pole slip
The centre of the pole slip can occur in the generator itself or somewhere in the power
system. When a pole slip occurs within the generator it is essential to trip the
generator. If the centre of pole slip occurs outside any generator the power system
should be split into two different parts that could have the ability to get stable
operating conditions.
Pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) function in the IED can be used both for generator
protection application as well as, line protection applications.
The situation with pole slip of a generator can be caused by different reasons.
A short circuit may occur in the external power grid, close to the generator. If the fault
clearing time is too long, the generator will accelerate so much, that the synchronism
cannot be maintained.
Undamped oscillations occur in the power system, where generator groups at different
locations, oscillate against each other. If the connection between the generators is too
weak the magnitude of the oscillations will increase until the angular stability is lost.
The operation of a generator having pole slip will give risk of damages to the
generator, shaft and turbine.
• At each pole slip there will be significant torque impact on the generator-turbine
shaft.
• In asynchronous operation there will be induction of currents in parts of the
generator normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The
consequence can be damages on insulation and stator/rotor iron.
The Pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) function shall detect pole slip conditions and trip
the generator as fast as possible if the locus of the measured impedance is inside the
generator-transformer block. If the centre of pole slip is outside in the power grid, the
252
Technical manual

first action should be to split the network into two parts, after line protection action. If
this fails there should be operation of the generator PSPPPAM in zone 2, to prevent
further damages to the generator, shaft and turbine.

PSPPPAM
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLKGEN START
BLKMOTOR ZONE1
EXTZONE1 ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
UCOS
UCOSPER
IEC10000045 V1 EN
Figure 106: PSPPPAM function block
7.5.4 Signals
Table 99: PSPPPAM Input signals
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 with zone2 region
Table 100: PSPPPAM Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
START BOOLEAN Common start signal
ZONE1 BOOLEAN First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2 BOOLEAN First slip in zone2 region
GEN BOOLEAN Generator is faster than the system
MOTOR BOOLEAN Generator is slower than the system
253
Technical manual


SFREQ REAL Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM REAL Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER REAL Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
UCOS REAL UCosPhi voltage
UCOSPER REAL UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase
7.5.5 Settings
Table 101: PSPPPAM Group settings (basic)
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
OperationZ1 Off - - On Operation Zone1 On / Off
On
OperationZ2 Off - - On Operation Zone2 On / Off
On
ImpedanceZA 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Forward impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Reverse impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi 72.00 - 90.00 Deg 0.01 85.00 Angle of the slip impedance line
StartAngle 0.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 110.0 Rotor angle for the start signal
TripAngle 0.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 90.0 Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit 1 - 20 - 1 1 Count limit for the trip1 signal
N2Limit 1 - 20 - 1 3 Count limit for the trip2 signal
Table 102: PSPPPAM Group settings (advanced)

ResetTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time without slip to reset all signals
Table 103: PSPPPAM Non group settings (basic)

MeasureMode PosSeq - - PosSeq Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,
L1L2 L3L1)
L2L3
L3L1
InvertCTcurr No - - No Invert current direction
Yes
groups
254
Technical manual


Table 104: PSPPPAM Monitored data
SFREQ REAL - Hz Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM REAL - Ohm Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER REAL - % Slip impedance in
percent of ZBase
UCOS REAL - kV UCosPhi voltage
UCOSPER REAL - % UCosPhi voltage in
percent of UBase

If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance
and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signaled. If the generator is
slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring
is signaled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor).
The movements in the impedance plane can be seen in Figure 107. The transient
behavior is described by the transient EMF's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.
255
Technical manual

Zone 1 Zone 2
EB X’d XT XS EA
IED
B A
jX
XS
Pole slip
impedance XT
d Apparent generator
movement impedance R
X’d
IEC06000437 V2 EN
Figure 107: Movements in the impedance plain
where:
X'd = transient reactance of the generator
XT = short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer
ZS = impedance of the power system A
The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:
• the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
• the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase
• the voltage Ucosφ (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular
velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
• the corresponding direction is not blocked.
256
Technical manual

en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN
Figure 108: Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the
equivalent generators
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds
the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.
Slipping is detected when:
• a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

• the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone
1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when
signal EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the centre of
slipping).
After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and – depending on the direction of
slip - either GEN or MOTOR are issued.
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is
crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor
movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the
opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-
ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.
257
Technical manual

The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated after
N2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.
All signals are reset if:
• the direction of movement reverses

• the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
• no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime.
Imin > 0.10 IBase
Ucos< 0.92 UBase AND
START
AND
0.2  Slip.Freq.  8 Hz
  startAngle
ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB
ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC
Counter
a
ab
N1Limit b TRIP1
AND
  tripAngle OR
TRIP
Counter
a
ab
N2Limit b TRIP2
AND
IEC07000005.vsd
IEC07000005 V2 EN
Figure 109: Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection PSPPPAM
258
Technical manual


Table 105: PSPPPAM technical data
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/Ir
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -
7.6 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 78
<
7.6.2 Functionality
The out-of-step protection OOSPPAM function in the IED can be used for both
generator protection and as well for line protection applications.
The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect, evaluate, and take the
required action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system.
The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and trips the generator as fast as
possible, after the first pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in zone 1,
which normally includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the center
of oscillation is found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, more than one
pole-slip is usually allowed before the generator-transformer unit is disconnected. A
parameter setting is available to take into account the circuit breaker opening time. If
there are several out-of-step relays in the power system, then the one which finds the
center of oscillation in its zone 1 should operate first.
Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in OOSPPAM function to allow the
direct connection of two groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for very
powerful generators, with stator windings split into two groups per phase, when each
group is equipped with current transformers. The protection function performs a
simple summation of the currents of the two channels I3P1 and I3P2.
259
Technical manual


OOSPPAM
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRIPZ1
U3P* TRIPZ2
BLOCK START
BLKGEN GENMODE
BLKMOT MOTMODE
EXTZ1 R
X
SLIPFREQ
ROTORANG
UCOSPHI
IEC12000188 V3 EN
Figure 110: OOSPPAM function block
7.6.4 Signals
Table 106: OOSPPAM Input signals
I3P1 GROUP - Group connection for three-phase current input 1
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Group connection for three-phase current input 2
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for three-phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOT BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction
EXTZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 reach to zone2 settings
Table 107: OOSPPAM Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip, issued when either zone 1 or zone 2
give trip
TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Zone 1 trip
TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Zone 2 trip
START BOOLEAN Set when measured impedance enters lens
characteristic
GENMODE BOOLEAN Generator rotates faster than the system during
pole slip
MOTMODE BOOLEAN Generator rotates slower than the system during
pole slip
R REAL Real part of measured positive-sequence
impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
X REAL Imaginary part of measured positive-seq
impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
260
Technical manual


SLIPFREQ REAL Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG REAL Rotor angle as estimated by the out-of-step
function
UCOSPHI REAL Estimated Ucos(Phi) voltage during pole slip, in V
7.6.5 Settings
Table 108: OOSPPAM Group settings (basic)
On
OperationZ1 Off - - On Operation Zone1 Off / On
On
ReachZ1 1.00 - 100.00 % ZFw 0.01 50.00 Percentage part of total forward
impedance; defines Z1 reach
OperationZ2 Off - - On Operation Zone2 Off / On
On
tBreaker 0.000 - 1.000 s 0.001 0.040 Breaker opening time; use default 0s
value if it is unknown
Table 109: OOSPPAM Group settings (advanced)

NoOfSlipsZ1 1 - 20 - 1 1 Number of pole-slips in zone 1 required to
get zone 1 trip
NoOfSlipsZ2 1 - 60 - 1 3 Number of pole-slips in zone 2 required to
get zone 2 trip
tReset 1.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 6.000 Time without any slip required to
completely reset function
Table 110: OOSPPAM Non group settings (basic)

groups
ForwardR 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 1.00 Real part of total forward impedance for
Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ForwardX 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 10.00 Imag. part of total forward impedance for
Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ReverseR 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 1.00 Real part of source impedance behind
relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ReverseX 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 10.00 Imag. part of source impedance behind
relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
InvertCTCurr No - - No Invert current direction
Yes
261
Technical manual

Table 111: OOSPPAM Non group settings (advanced)

StartAngle 90.0 - 130.0 Deg 0.1 110.0 Angle between two rotors to get the start
signal, in deg
TripAngle 15.0 - 90.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Maximum rotor angle to allow trip signals,
in deg

Table 112: OOSPPAM Monitored data
CURRENT REAL - A Magnitude of the
measured positive-
sequence current, in A
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Magnitude of the
measured positive-
sequence voltage, in V
R REAL - % Real part of measured
positive-sequence
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)
X REAL - % Imaginary part of
measured positive-seq
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)
SLIPFREQ REAL - Hz Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG REAL - deg Rotor angle as estimated
by the out-of-step
function
UCOSPHI REAL - kV Estimated Ucos(Phi)
voltage during pole slip,
in V

General
Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor angle
(power angle), delivering active electrical power to the power system, which is
approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis.The currents
and voltages are constant and stable. An out-of-step condition is characterized by
periodic changes in the rotor angle, that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing
power; so there are also periodic changes of rotational speed, currents and voltages.
When displayed in the complex impedance plane, these changes are characterized by
a cyclic change in the complex load impedance Z(R, X) as measured at the terminals
of the generator, or at the location of the instrument transformers of a power line
connecting two power subsystems. This is shown in Figure 111.
262
Technical manual

1.5 ← trajectory
of Z(R, X)
to the 3rd
The 2nd pole-slip
Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

1 The 1st X in Ohms
pole slip
pole slip
occurred Pre-disturbance
occurred
RE normal load
- - - - -
- - - - ----------- - - - - Z(R, X)
0.5 - ---
3 ----
---- --
Zone 2 -- - 1 ---- - 0
- - 2 -- -
- --- -
^ --^ ^ ^ ^ --^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ---- -
-
- -- ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
Zone 1
0 -
- ---- --- -
-
- -
-- relay --
- -
- --- -- - R in Ohms
limit of reach → -- -- -- -
-
-- --- -- -
--
lens determined - - →----- ------ 0- - - pre-disturbance Z(R, X)
- -
------
- -- - - - --- - →
-0.5 by the setting - 1 → Z(R, X) under 3-phase fault
StartAngle = 120° SE 2 → Z(R, X) when fault cleared
3 → Z when pole-slip declared
-1
-1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000109 V1 EN
Figure 111: Loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for a typical case of generator
losing step after a short circuit that was not cleared fast enough
Under typical, normal load conditions, when the protected generator supplies the
active and the reactive power to the power system, the complex impedance Z(R, X) is
in the 1st quadrant, point 0 in Figure 111. One can see that under a three-phase fault
conditions, the centre of oscillation is at the point of fault, point 1, which is logical, as
all three voltages are zero or near zero at that point. Under the fault conditions the
generator accelerated and when the fault was finally cleared, the complex impedance
Z(R, X) jumped to the point 2. By that time, the generator has already lost its step, Z(R,
X) continues its way from the right-hand side to the left-hand side, and the 1st pole-
slip cannot be avoided. If the generator is not immediately disconnected, it will
continue pole-slipping — see Figure 111, where two pole-slips (two pole-slip cycles)
are shown. Under out-of-step conditions, the centre of oscillation is where the locus of
the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the (impedance) line connecting the points
SE (Sending End), and RE (Receiving End). The point on the SE – RE line where the
trajectory of Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line can change with time and is mainly
a function of the internal induced voltages at both ends of the equivalent two-machine
system, that is, at points SE and RE.
Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance

relative to a generator’s terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable means
of detecting whether machines are out-of-step and pole-slipping is taking place.
Measurement of the rotor (power) angle δ is important as well.
Rotor (power) angle δ can be thought of as the angle between the two lines, connecting
point 0 in Figure 111, that is, Z(R, X) under normal load, with the points SE and RE,
respectively. These two lines are not shown in Figure 111. Normal values of the power
angle, that is, under stable, steady-state, load conditions, are from 30 to 60 electrical
263
Technical manual

degrees. It can be observed in Figure 112 that the angle reaches 180 degrees when the
complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line SE – RE. It then changes the
sign, and continues from -180 degrees to 0 degrees, and so on. Figure 112 shows the
rotor (power) angle and the magnitude of Z(R, X) against time for the case from Figure
111.
4
|Z| in Ohms
rotor (power)
3 normal angle in rad
angle
Impe dance Z in Ohm and rotor a ngle in radian ®
load
Z(R, X) unde r fa ult lies |Z|
2
on the impe dance line
or nea r (for 3-ph faults )
1
0
0
fault 500 ms
-1 fa ult
occ urrs
Unde r 3-pha s e fa ult
condition rotor a ngle 3
-2
of a pp. ±180 de gre e s
is m e a s ure d ...
2
-3 Z(R,X) cros s e d
1 1 the im pe da nce line , Z-line ,
conne cting points S E - RE
-4
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Time in millis econds ®
IEC10000110 V2 EN
Figure 112: Rotor (power) angle and magnitude of the complex impedance Z(R,
X) against the time
In order to be able to fully understand the principles of OOSPPAM, a stable case, that
is, a case where the disturbance does not make a generator to go out-of-step, must be
shown.
264
Technical manual

1
SE RE
G X [Ohm]
0.8 Z(R,X) 20 ms
fault
relay after line out
- - - RE - - -
0.6 - - -- -
-- ---- ----- 4 - - pre-fault
Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms →

- -- ---
zone 2 - - - - -
-- --- - Z(R,X)
0.4 - ---- --- 2 -
- -
- -- -1 5
- ---- fault→ --- -
0.2 X-line → ^ -^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^ 3 -- -
- ^ ^ -
^ ^ ^ ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
-
--
- --- Z-line→ -- - 0
- --- --- - 6
0 - -- -- -
- --
- --- - R
limit of - -
-- relay lens → - -- -
-- -
-0.2 reach - -- 110° ---- -
zone 1- - --- - -
--- --- -
- --- --- -
-0.4 -- --- ------ -
-- -- -- --
- - -- - - -- - -
-0.6 SE
0 → pre-fault Z(R, X)
this circle forms 3 → Z(R, X) under fault
-0.8 the right-hand side 5 → Z 20 ms after line out
edge of the lens 6 → pow er line reclosed
-1
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms → IEC10000111-1-en.vsd
IEC10000111 V1 EN
Figure 113: A stable case where the disturbance does not make the generator to
go out-of-step
It shall be observed that for a stable case, as shown in Figure 113, where the
disturbance does not cause the generator to lose step, the complex impedance Z(R, X)
exits the lens characteristic on the same side (point 4) it entered it (point 2), and never
re-enters the lens. In a stable case, where the protected generator remains in
synchronism, the complex impedance returns to quadrant 1, and, after the oscillations
fade, it returns to the initial normal load position (point 0), or near.
7.6.7.1 Lens characteristic
A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that the

power system in which OOSPPAM is installed, is modeled as a two-machine
equivalent system, or as a single machine – infinite bus equivalent power system.
Then the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM in the direction of the normal
load flow (that is from the measurement point to the remote system) can be taken as
forward. The lens characteristic, as shown in Figure111 and Figure113, is obtained so
that two equal in size but differently offset Mho characteristics are set to overlap. The
resultant lens characteristic is the loci of complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the
rotor (power) angle is constant, for example 110 degrees or 120 degrees; if the rotor
(power) angle approaches this value, then there is a high risk to have an out of step
condition. The limit-of- reach circle is constructed automatically by the algorithm; it
is about 10% wider than the the circle that has the line SE-RE as diameter (that is the
out-of-step characteristic which corresponds to the rotor (power) angle of 90 degrees).
Figure 114 illustrates construction of the lens characteristic for a power system.
265
Technical manual

X
Position of the OOS
- - - RE- - -
0.6 - - - - relay is the origin of
- - --
- -- ----
- -- -the R - X plane
- - --- Ze --
---
-
- Zone 2 -- -
0.4 X-line - - - - -
Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

--
- --
- -
-- -
determined -- Zline
- - -- -
by the → ^ ^- ^ -
- --
0.2 ^ ^ ^-- ^ - -
setting - - ^ ^ ^ ^ - -
--- ^ ^ ^ --- ^
ReachZ1 - -- -- ^ ^ ^-
Ztr
- --- -- - R
0 - Zone 1 -- --
- -
-- relay -
- -- 120° -- Z(R,X) -
- -- -- -
- ← Z-line ---
-0.2 - -- Zgen -
-- --
limit-of-reach → -
-
-- --- -
-- Lens is the - locus
-- ←
--
circle depends on - --
-- -- of constant
-
rotor (power)
-0.4 - -- --- -
the position of the -
- - -- - --- angle,
-
- e.g. 120°.
-
points SE and RE - - -- - - - - - -Lens' width determined
SE
-0.6 by the setting StartAngle
-0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000112 V1 EN
Figure 114: Construction of the lens characteristic for a power system
ReverseZ
ReverseZ(ReverseR, ReverseX)) ForwardZ(ForwardR, ForwardX)
Zgen(Rgen , Xgen) Ztr(Rtr, Xtr) Zline(Rline, Xline) Zeq(Req, Xeq)
Generator Transformer Infinite power

13.8 kV 13.8 / 220 kV system
Power line System
13.8 kV 220 kV equivalent
G d Y
SE RE
Out-Of-Step ReverseR = Rg ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req

REG ReverseX = Xd’ ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq
protection
OOSPPAM
All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13.8 kV
IEC10000113 V2 EN
Figure 115: Example of an actual power system
To be able to automatically construct the lens characteristic for a system shown in

Figure 115, the actual power system must be modeled as a two-machine equivalent
system, or as a single machine – infinite bus equivalent system, the following
information is necessary: Zgen(Rgen, Xgen), Ztr(Rtr, Xtr), Zline(Rline, Xline),
Zeq(Req, Xeq), and the setting StartAngle , for example 120 degrees. All impedances
must be referred to the voltage level where the out-of-step protection relay is placed;
in the case shown in Figure 115 the relay is connected to the terminals of the generator
and, therefore, the previous quantities shall be referred to the generator nominal
266
Technical manual

voltage and nominal current. The impedances from the position of the out-of-step
protection in the direction of the normal load flow can be taken as forward.
The out-of-step relay, as in Figure 115 looks into the system and the impedances in
that direction are forward impedances:
• ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq (All values referred to generator voltage)
• ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req (All values referred to generator voltage)
The impedances that can be measured in the reverse direction are:

• ReverseX = Xd' (Generator transient reactance suitable for this protection)
• ReverseR = Rg (Relatively very small, can often be neglected)
Resistances are much smaller than reactances, but in general can not be neglected. The
ratio (ForwardX + ReverseX) / (ForwardR + ReverseR) determines the inclination of
the Z-line, connecting the point SE (Sending End) and RE (Receiving End), and is
typically approximately 85 degrees. While the length of the Z-line depends on the
values of ForwardX, ReverseX, ForwardR, and ReverseR, the width of the lens is a
function of the setting StartAngle .The lens is broader for smaller values of the
StartAngle , and becomes a circle for StartAngle = 90 degrees.
When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens, pole slipping is imminent, and a
start signal is issued. The angle recommended to form the lens is 110 or 120 degrees,
because it is this rotor (power) angle where problems with dynamic stability usually
begin. Rotor (power) angle 120 degrees is sometimes called “the angle of no return”
because if this angle is reached under generator power swings, the generator is most
likely to lose step.
7.6.7.2 Detecting an out-of-step condition
An out-of-step condition is characterized by periodic changes of the rotor angle, that

leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing power; so there are also periodic changes of
rotational speed, currents and voltages. When displayed in the complex impedance
plane, these changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the complex load
impedance Z(R, X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or at the location of
the instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power sub-systems. This
was shown in Figure 111. When a synchronous machine is out-of-step, pole-slips
occur. To recognize a pole-slip, the complex impedance Z(R,X) must traverse the lens
from right to left in case of a generator and in the opposite direction in case of a motor.
Another requirement is that the travel across the lens takes no less than a specific
minimum traverse time, typically 40...60 milliseconds. The above timing is used to
discriminate a fault from an out-of-step condition. In Figure 111, some important
points on the trajectory of Z(R, X) are designated. Point 0: the pre-fault, normal load
Z(R, X). Point 1: impedance Z under a three-phase fault with low fault resistance: Z
lies practically on, or very near, the Z-line. Transition of the measured Z from point 0
to point 1 takes app. 20 ms, due to Fourier filters. Point 2: Z immediately after the fault
has been cleared. Transition of the measured Z from point 1 to point 2 takes
approximately 20 ms, due to Fourier filters. The complex impedance then travels in
267
Technical manual

the direction from the right to the left, and exits the lens on the opposite side. When the
complex impedance exits the lens on the side opposite to its entrance, the 1st pole-slip
has already occurred and more pole-slips can be expected if the generator is not
disconnected. Figure 111 shows two pole-slips. Figures like Figure 111 and Figure
113 are always possible to draw by means of the analog output data from the pole-slip
function, and are of great help with eventual investigations of the performance of the
out-of-step function.
7.6.7.3 Maximum slip frequency
A pole-slip may be detected if it has a slip frequency lower than a maximum value
fsMax. The specific value of fsMax depends on the setting (parameter) StartAngle
(which determines the width of the lens characteristic). A parameter in this calculation
routine is the value of the minimum traverse time, traverseTimeMin. The minimum
traverse time is the minimum time that the travel of the complex impedance Z(R, X)
through the lens, from one side to the other, must last in order to recognize that a pole-
slip has occurred. The value of the internal constant traverseTimeMin is a function of
the set StartAngle.For values of StartAngle <= 110°, traverseTimeMin = 50 ms. For
values StartAngle > 110°, traverseTimeMin = 40 ms. The expression which relates the
maximum slip frequency fsMax and the traverseTimeMin is as follows:
1000  StartAngle [°] 

fsMax [ Hz ] ≅ ⋅  1.000 - 
traverseTimeMin [ ms ]  180 [°] 
The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 50 ms is:
StartAngle = 90° → fsMax = 20 × 0.500 = 10.000 Hz

StartAngle = 110° → fsMax = 20 × 0.388 = 7.777 Hz (default 110°)
The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 40 ms is:

The minimum value of fsMax is 6.994 Hz. When StartAngle = 110 degrees, fsMax =
7.777 Hz. This implies, that the default StartAngle = 110 degrees covers 90% of cases
as, the typical final slip frequency is between 2 - 5Hz. In practice, however, before the
slip frequency, for example 7.777 Hz, is reached, at least three pole-slips have
occurred. In other words, if we consider a linear increase of frequency from 50 Hz to
57.777 Hz, at least three pole-slips will occur (in fact: (57.777 - 50) / 2 = 3.889). The
exact instantaneous slip-frequency expressed in Hz (corresponding to number of pole
slips per second) is difficult to calculate. The easiest and most exact method is to
measure time between two successive pole slips. This means that, the instantaneous
slip-frequency is measured only after the second pole-slip, if the protected machine is
268
Technical manual

not already disconnected after the first pole-slip. The measured value of
slipsPerSecond (SLIPFREQ) is equal to the average slip-frequency of the machine
between the last two successive pole-slips.
7.6.7.4 Taking care of the circuit breaker
Although out-of-step events are relatively rare, the out-of-step protection should take
care of the circuit breaker health. The electromechanical stress to which the breaker is
exposed shall be minimized. The maximum currents flowing under out-of-step
conditions can be even greater that those for a three-phase short circuit on generator
terminals; see Figure 117. The currents flowing are highest at rotor angle 180 degrees,
and smallest at 0 degrees, where relatively small currents flow. To open the circuit
breaker at 180 degrees, when not only the currents are highest, but the two internal
(that is, induced) voltages at both ends are in opposition, could be fatal for the circuit
breaker. There are two methods available in order to minimize the stress; the second
method is more advanced than the first one.
The first method

The circuit breaker is only allowed to break the current when the rotor angle has
become less than the set value TripAngle, on its way to 0 electrical degrees. A
recommended value for the setting TripAngle is 90 degrees or less, for example 60
degrees. Figure 116 illustrates the case with TripAngle = 90 degrees. The offset Mho
circle represents loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the rotor (power)
angle is 90 degrees. If the circuit breaker must not open before the rotor angle has
reached 90 degrees on its way towards 0 degrees, then it is clear that the circle delimits
the R – X plane into a “no trip” and a “trip” region. For TripAngle = 90 degrees, the
trip command will be issued at point 3 when the complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the
circle. By that time the relay logic had already ascertained the loss of step, and the
general decision to trip the generator has already been taken.
The second method

This method is more exact. If the break-time of the circuit breaker is known, (and
specified as the setting tBreaker) than it is possible to initiate a trip (break) command
almost exactly tBreaker milliseconds before the rotor (power) angle reaches 0
degrees, where the currents are at their minimum possible values. The breaker
contacts open at almost exactly 0 degrees, as illustrated in Figure 117 for tBreaker =
0.060 s. The point in time when the breaker opening process must be initiated is
estimated by solving on-line the so called “synchronizer” differential equation. Note
that if tBreaker is left on the initial (default) value, which is zero (0), then the
alternative setting TripAngle decides when the trip command is given. If specified
tBreaker > 0, for example tBreaker = 0.040 second, then automatically, the TripAngle
is ignored and the second, more exact method applied.
269
Technical manual

X[Ohm]
0.6 trip RE - Receiving End (infinite bus)
region
loci of Z(R, X)
0.4 3
Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms →

no trip
region 1
here rotor here
0.2 2
angle rotor angle
is -90° no trip is +90°
rotor angle
region
= ±180°
0 no trip
relay
region R[Ohm]
inside ← Z - line connects
points SE & RE
-0.2 circle
← this circle
is loci of
outside the
the rotor
-0.4 circle is the trip
angle = 90°
region for
TripAngle <= 90° SE - Sending End (generator)
-0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

Real part (R) of Z in Ohms →
IEC10000114 V1 EN
Figure 116: The imaginary offset Mho circle represents loci of the impedance
Z(R, X) for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees
35
very high currents due
Current in kA, trip command to CB, rotor angle in rad →
pos. seq. current in kA

to out-of-step condition
30 trip command to CB
rotor angle in radian
← after 1st
fault cleared → pole slip
25
← 2nd
20 current increases under

fault conditions
current decreases
15
fault
occurs
10 ← min. current
trip command →
normal load current issued here
← → ← tBreaker = 60 ms
5
← rotor angle
0
angle towards 0°
-5
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
Time in milliseconds →
IEC10000115 V1 EN
Figure 117: Trip initiation when the break-time of the circuit breaker is known
270
Technical manual

7.6.7.5 Design
At every execution of the function the following is calculated: active power P, reactive
power Q, rotor angle ROTORANG, quantity UCOSPHI, the positive-sequence current
CURRENT and voltage VOLTAGE. All other quantities, that can as well be read as
outputs, are only calculated if the Z(R, X) enters the limit of reach zone, which is a
circle in the complex (R – X) plane. When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the
limit-of-reach region, the algorithm:
• determines in which direction the impedance Z moves, that is, the direction the
lens is traversed
• measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the other one
If the traverse time is more than the limit 40 or 50 ms, a pole-slip is declared. If the
complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens on the same side it entered, then it is a stable
case and the protected machine is still in synchronism. If a pole-slip has been detected,
then it is determined in which zone the centre of oscillation is located. If the number
of actual pole-slips exceeds the maximum number of allowed pole-slips in either of
the zones, a trip command is issued taking care of the circuit breaker safety.
R R
UPSRE Calculation of X X
UPSIM R and X parts
of the complex Z(R,X)
UPSMAG
positive-
IPSRE
sequence Z(R,X) NO
IPSIM
impedance within limit of Return
Z(R, X) reach?
YES UCOSPHI
Z(R,X) ROTORANG
within lens NO
Function alert
characteristic?
SLIPFREQ
YES GENMODE
Z(R,X) MOTMODE
LEFT Z(R,X) RIGHT NO
exited lens
entered lens
on the left- hand
from?
Motor losing Generator losing side?
step ? step ?
YES
Was
traverse time NO
more than
Calculation of 50 ms?
P
positive- sequence YES (pole- slip!)
active power P, Q TRIP
>= 1
reactive power Q, Number
ZONE 2 NO
rotor angle UCOSPHI
of pole- slips
ROTORANG exceeded in TRIPZ1
a zone? Open
and
ROTORANG circuit
UCOSPHI ZONE 1 TRIPZ2
breaker
safely
IEC10000116 V3 EN
Figure 118: OOSPPAM Simplified function block
271
Technical manual


Table 113: OOSPPAM technical data
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/(√3 ⋅ Ir)
Rotor start angle (90.0 - 130.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees

Rotor trip angle (15.0 - 90.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -
7.7 Loss of excitation LEXPDIS
Loss of excitation LEXPDIS 40
<
SYMBOL-MM V1 EN
7.7.2 Functionality
There are limits for the under-excited operation of a synchronous machine. A
reduction of the excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the
stator. The machine may lose the synchronism and start to operate like an induction
machine. Then, the reactive power consumption will increase. Even if the machine
does not loose synchronism it may not be acceptable to operate in this state for a long
time. Reduction of excitation increases the generation of heat in the end region of the
synchronous machine. The local heating may damage the insulation of the stator
winding and the iron core.
To prevent damages to the generator it should be tripped when excitation is lost.
272
Technical manual


LEXPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRZ1
BLOCK TRZ2
BLKTRZ1 START
BLKTRZ2 STZ1
STZ2
XOHM
XPERCENT
ROHM
RPERCENT
IEC07000031 V2 EN
Figure 119: LEXPDIS function block
7.7.4 Signals
Table 114: LEXPDIS Input signals
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLKTRZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Block trip of zone Z1
BLKTRZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Block trip of zone Z2
Table 115: LEXPDIS Output signals

TRZ1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from impedance zone Z1
TRZ2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from impedance zone Z2
STZ1 BOOLEAN Start signal from impedance zone Z1
STZ2 BOOLEAN Start signal from impedance zone Z2
XOHM REAL Reactance in Primary Ohms
XPERCENT REAL Reactance in percent of Zbase
ROHM REAL Resistance in Primary Ohms
RPERCENT REAL Resistance in percent of Zbase
273
Technical manual

7.7.5 Settings
Table 116: LEXPDIS Group settings (basic)
On
OperationZ1 Off - - On Operation Off/On zone Z1
On
XoffsetZ1 -1000.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 -10.00 Offset of Z1 circle top point along X axis in
% of Zbase
Z1diameter 0.01 - 3000.00 % 0.01 100.00 Diameter of impedance circle for Z1 in %
of Zbase
tZ1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.01 Trip time delay for Z1
OperationZ2 Off - - On Operation Off/On zone Z2
On
XoffsetZ2 -1000.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 -10.00 Offset of Z2 circle top point along X axis in
% of Zbase
Z2diameter 0.01 - 3000.00 % 0.01 200.00 Diameter of impedance circle for Z2 in %
of Zbase
tZ2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip time delay for Z2
Table 117: LEXPDIS Group settings (advanced)

DirSuperv Off - - Off Operation Off/On for additional directional
On criterion
XoffsetDirLine -1000.00 - 3000.00 % 0.01 0.00 Offset of directional line along X axis in %
of Zbase
DirAngle -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 -13.0 Angle between directional line and R-axis
in degrees
Table 118: LEXPDIS Non group settings (basic)

groups
MeasureMode PosSeq - - PosSeq Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,
L1L2 L3L1)
L2L3
L3L1
Table 119: LEXPDIS Non group settings (advanced)

InvertCTcurr No - - No Invert CT current
Yes
274
Technical manual


Table 120: LEXPDIS Monitored data
XOHM REAL - Ohm Reactance in Primary
Ohms
XPERCENT REAL - % Reactance in percent of
Zbase
ROHM REAL - Ohm Resistance in Primary
Ohms
RPERCENT REAL - % Resistance in percent of
Zbase

The Loss of excitation (LEXPDIS) protection in the IED measures the apparent
impedance seen out from the generator.The measurement loop of apparent impedance
can be chosen as the positive sequence loop or any one of the three phase-to-phase
loops depending on the available current and voltage signals. It is recommended to use
positive sequence quantities for function operation.
Measured mode Measured apparent impedance
Zposseq U posseq
=
I posseq
ZL1L2 U L1 - U L 2
=
I L1 - I L 2
ZL2L3 U L 2 - U L3
=
I L 2 - I L3
ZL3L1 U L 3 - U L1
=
I L 3 - I L1
There are three characteristics in LEXPDIS protection as shown in figure 120.
Naimly:
275
Technical manual

• Offset mho circle for Z1

• Offset mho circle for Z2
• Directional blinder
UnderexitationProtection
Underexcitation protection
Restrainarea
Restrain area
R
Directional
blinder
Z1, Fast zone
Z2, Slow zone
IEC06000455 V2 EN
Figure 120: Three characteristics in LEXPDIS protection
When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z1 this zone will operate, normally
with a short delay. The zone is related to the dynamic stability of the generator.
When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z2 this zone will operate, normally
with a longer delay. The zone is related to the static stability of the generator.
LEXPDIS protection also has a directional blinder (supervision). See figure 120.
In LEXPDIS function the zone measurement is done as shown in figure 121.
276
Technical manual

Offset
R
XoffsetZ1
Z (apparent impedance)
Z1 = Z - (XoffsetZ1 +
Z1diameter Z1diameter/2)
Z1 or Z2
en06000456-2.vsd
IEC06000456 V2 EN
Figure 121: Zone measurement in LEXPDIS protection function
The impedance Z1 is constructed from the measured apparent impedance Z and the
impedance corresponding to the centre point of the impedance characteristic (Z1 or
Z2). If the amplitude of this impedance is less than the radius (diameter/2) of the
characteristic, this part of the protection will operate.
If the directional restrain is set Off the impedance zone operation will start the
appropriate timer and LEXPDIS will trip after the set delay (tZ1 or tZ2).
If the directional restrain is set On the directional release function must also operate
to enable operation. A new impedance is constructed from the measured apparent
impedance Z and the XoffsetDirLine point on the y-axis. If the phase angle of this
impedance is less than the set DirAngle LEXPDIS function will be released, see
figure 122.
277
Technical manual

Underexcitation Protection
Restrain area
R
XoffsetDirLine
DirAngle
Z (apparent impedance)
en06000457.vsd
IEC06000457 V1 EN
Figure 122: Impedance constructed as XoffsetDirLine in LEXPDIS protection
LEXPDIS function is schematically described in figure 123.
Positive tZ1
sequence Z in startZ1 t TripZ1
&
current Z1 char.
phasor
Positive Apparent tZ2

Z Z in
sequence startZ2 t TripZ2
impedance &
voltage Z2 char.
calculation
phasor
Dir.
Restrain
Dir.Restrain ON ³1
en06000458-2.vsd
IEC06000458 V3 EN
Figure 123: Simplified logic diagram of LEXPDIS protection
278
Technical manual


Table 121: LEXPDIS technical data
X offset of Mho top point for Zone (–1000.00–1000.00)% of ZBase ±5.0% of Ur/Ir
1 and Zone 2
Diameter of Mho circle for Zone 1 (0.0–3000.00)% of ZBase ±5.0% of Ur/Ir
and Zone 2
Independent time delay for Zone (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±60 ms whichever is
1 when impedance jumps from greater
the outside the set circle to the
center of the set circle
Independent time delay for Zone (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±60 ms whichever is
2 when impedance jumps from greater
the outside the set circle to the
center of the set circle
Operate time, start when Min. = 35 ms -
impedance jumps from the Max. = 50 ms
outside the set circle to the center
of the set circle
7.8 Sensitive rotor earth fault protection, injection based

ROTIPHIZ
Sensitive rotor earth fault protection, ROTIPHIZ Rre< 64R
injection based
7.8.2 Functionality
The sensitive rotor earth fault protection (ROTIPHIZ) is used to detect earth faults in
the rotor windings of generators. ROTIPHIZ is applicable for all types of synchronous
generators.
To implement the above concept, a separate injection box is required. The injection
box generates a square wave voltage signal at a certain preset frequency which is fed
into the rotor winding.
The magnitude of the injected voltage signal and the resulting injected current is
measured through a resistive shunt located within the injection box. These two
measured values are fed to the IED. Based on these two measured quantities, the
protection IED determines the rotor winding resistance to ground. The resistance
value is then compared with the preset fault resistance alarm and trip levels.
279
Technical manual

The protection function can detect earth faults in the entire rotor winding and
associated connections.
Requires injection unit REX060 and a coupling capacitor unit REX061 for correct
operation.
7.8.3 Description of input signals

The inputs to the sensitive rotor earth-fault protection function block are as shown in
table 122.
Table 122: Description of various inputs
Input signal Description
USU The measured injection voltage. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI
output. The analog voltage input AI1 is linked to the phase L1 in the pre-processor block
in the Signal Matrix tool.
USI The measured injection current. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI
output. In the pre-configured version, the analog voltage input AI2 is linked to the phase
L2 in the pre-processor block in the Signal Matrix tool.
BLOCK Input to block the function
ZREFSEL The selection of any of the predefined reference impedances. There is a possibility to
change from one set reference impedance to another. Two different reference
impedances are available.
7.8.4 Description of output signals

The outputs of the sensitive rotor earth-fault protection function block are as shown in
table 123.
Table 123: Description of various outputs
Output signal Description
TRIP Common trip command signal
TRIPDC is the trip command signal at DC-side earth fault
TRIPAC is the trip command signal at AC-side earth fault
START is a common signal for both AC and DC side of exciter
STARTDC is the start signal at DC-side earth fault
STARTAC is the start signal at AC-side earth fault
ALARM Signal activated after a set time delay, if the calculated fault resistance gets lower than
the set alarm level
ERROR Error signal which is boolean with values 0 and 1
ERRSTAT Status coded signal giving type of error. See table 124
RAVE Measured resistance to earth in Ω at an injected frequency (real part of the complex
impedance)
XAVE Measured reactance to earth in Ω at the injected frequency (imaginary part of the
complex impedance)
280
Technical manual


FREQU Measured frequency of the injected voltage
RFAULT Estimated fault resistance in Ω
ZREF Selected reference impedance number
ZREFRE The real part (resistance) of the used reference impedance
ZREFIM The imaginary part (reactance) of the used reference impedance
URMSSTAT This signal is set true, if the measured RMS voltage is larger than the set limit
ULimRMS
ERRSTAT output signal
Convert the integer output signal to binary and see table below for interpretation of
individual bits:
Table 124: Definition of errors
ERRSTAT output integer
Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 1
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Interfer- Under- Under- Over- Over- Frequ- No No
ence current voltage current voltage ency current voltage
detected difference
The ERRSTAT description will be shown in clear text in ICT.
The priority of the signals is set that the group priority 1 overrides the group priority
2 and 3, and priority 2 overrides priority 3. Note that the ERRSTAT signal can enable
several error cases at the same time.
Following errors is detected and derived in the Error block:
• B0 = Injected voltage signal not found

• B1 = Injected current signal not found
• B2 = Voltage and current signal frequency differs
• B3 = Measured total RMS voltage too high
• B4 = Measured total RMS current too high
• B5 = Injected voltage signal too low
• B6 = Injected current signal too low
• B7 = External interference voltage detected
ERRSTAT = BitToInt[B7,…,B1,B0] The priority of the error conditions that will be

flagged out:
• Prio1 = B0, B1
• Prio2 = B3, B4, B5, B6
• Prio3 = B2, B7
RFAULT output signal
281
Technical manual

The injection equipment provides calculation of the fault resistance:
• If the fault resistance is equal or below 10 kΩ, RFAULT is displayed in Ω

• If the fault resistance is above 10 kΩ, RFAULT is initially displayed as -1000
until the fault resistance has reached a stable value and then displayed in Ω
• RFAULT displayed as -2000 means error

ROTIPHIZ
USU* TRIP
USI* TRIPDC
BLOCK TRIPAC
ZREFSEL START
STARTDC
STARTAC
ALARM
ERROR
ERRSTAT
RAVE
XAVE
FREQU
RFAULT
ZREF
ZREFRE
ZREFIM
URMSSTAT
IEC10000297 V1 EN
Figure 124: ROTIPHIZ function block
7.8.6 Signals
Table 125: ROTIPHIZ Input signals

USU GROUP - Injected voltage signal
SIGNAL
USI GROUP - Injected current signal (voltage over shunt)
SIGNAL
ZREFSEL INTEGER 1 Reference impedance selection
Table 126: ROTIPHIZ Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip (common AC and DC side of exciter)
TRIPDC BOOLEAN Trip for DC side of exciter
TRIPAC BOOLEAN Trip for AC side of exciter
282
Technical manual


START BOOLEAN Start (common AC and DC side of exciter)
STARTDC BOOLEAN Start for DC side of exciter
STARTAC BOOLEAN Start for AC side of exciter
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm
ERROR BOOLEAN Error
ERRSTAT INTEGER Error indication
RAVE REAL Measured resistance to earth in Ohm at inj freq
XAVE REAL Measured reactance to earth in Ohm at inj freq
FREQU REAL Measured frequency of injected voltage into rotor
RFAULT REAL Estimated fault resistance in Ohm
ZREF INTEGER Selected reference impedance number
ZREFRE REAL Used reference impedance real part in Ohm
ZREFIM REAL Used reference impedance imaginary part in Ohm
URMSSTAT BOOLEAN RMS voltage status, TRUE when > ULimRMS
7.8.7 Settings
Table 127: ROTIPHIZ Group settings (basic)
On
RTrip 100 - 100000 Ohm 1 1000 Trip limit of fault resistance in Ohm
RAlarm 100 - 1000000 Ohm 1 10000 Alarm limit of fault resistance in Ohm
tAlarm 0.00 - 600.00 s 1.00 30.00 Alarm time delay
FactACLim 0.01 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.25 Scale factor for rotor earth fault on AC side
of exciter
tTripAC 0.000 - 60.000 s 1.000 10.000 Time delay for trip on AC side of exciter
ULimRMS 1 - 1000 V 1 100 RMS voltage level
Table 128: ROTIPHIZ Group settings (advanced)

FreqInjected 75.000 - 250.000 Hz 0.001 113.000 Injected frequency
283
Technical manual

Table 129: ROTIPHIZ Non group settings (basic)

k1Real -10000000000.000 - 0.001 10000.000 Multiplication factor k1 for calibration, real
- 10000000000.000 part
k1Imag -10000000000.000 - 0.001 0.000 Multiplication factor k1 for calibration,
- 10000000000.000 imaginary part
k2Real -10000000000.000 Ohm 0.001 0.000 Addition factor k2 for calibration, real part
- 10000000000.000 in Ohm
k2Imag -10000000000.000 Ohm 0.001 0.000 Addition factor k2 for calibration,
- 10000000000.000 imaginary part in Ohm
RefR1 0.001 - Ohm 0.001 1000000.000 Reference resistance R1 in ohm
1000000000.000
RefX1 -1000000.000 - Ohm 0.001 2000.000 Reference reactance X1 in ohm
1000000.000
1000000000.000
1000000.000
Table 130: ROTIPHIZ Non group settings (advanced)

FilterLength 1s - - 1s Length of filter buffer
2s

Table 131: ROTIPHIZ Monitored data
RAVE REAL - Ohm Measured resistance to
earth in Ohm at inj freq
XAVE REAL - Ohm Measured reactance to
FREQU REAL - Hz Measured frequency of
injected voltage into rotor
RFAULT REAL - Ohm Estimated fault
resistance in Ohm
ZREF INTEGER - - Selected reference
impedance number
ZREFRE REAL - Ohm Used reference
impedance real part in
Ohm
ZREFIM REAL - Ohm Used reference
impedance imaginary
part in Ohm
URMSSTAT BOOLEAN - - RMS voltage status,
TRUE when > ULimRMS
284
Technical manual


The protection principle is based on injection of voltage to the exciter point of the field
circuit.
4 Step-up
Transformer
U> 3
Uinj 1
Rshunt
7 R C
~ Generator
5
6
REX061 2
ROTOR EF
I
RN
REX060/RIM module
REG670
Generator Protection Panel
IEC11000014 V1 EN
Figure 125: Example installation for rotor injection
1 Generator unit consisting of a synchronous generator and a step-up transformer

2 Generator field winding
3 Capacitor coupling unit which is used to provide insulation barrier between rotor circuit and injection
equipment
4 Cable used to inject the square-wave signal into the rotor circuit
5 Connection for measurement of injected current. This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is
passed on to IED for evaluation.
6 Connection for measurement of injected voltage. This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is
passed on to IED for evaluation.
7 Two VT inputs into IED which are used to measure injected current and voltage
8 Protection for excessive over-voltages posed by generator. REX060 can withstand without damage
maximum voltage of 120V and when used together with REX062 up to 240V.
The injection signals are generated in a separate unit, REX060. The signals have
square wave form and are injected to the generator via the coupling capacitor unit
REX061 to the excitation circuit.
In the REX060 unit the injection voltage and current signals are amplified to a level
adapted to the analogue voltage inputs of IED. In IED the measured signals evaluated
to detect rotor earth faults.
285
Technical manual

7.8.9.1 The injection unit REX060
IED and
Injection Top view Power Back view Front view
connectors connector Keylock
LED
X11 X61 X81
1 1 1
Injection Stator
Injection Rotor
18 18
X62 X82
PSM
1 1
5 5
Power
Stator
Rotor
Backplane
Front-plate Injection LED Injection switch

HMI with logic
IEC11000015 V1 EN
Figure 126: Injection unit REX060
The REX060 unit is a common unit that can be configured for either rotor or stator
earth fault protection, or for both. The REX060 have separate modules for rotor and
stator protection. The REX060 generate square wave signals, where one is used for
injection to the stator neutral point and the other to the field winding circuit (rotor
circuit), if configured for both stator and rotor protection. The injected voltage and
currents are measured by the unit and amplified, resulting in voltage signals both for
the injected voltage and current, and adapted to the analogue inputs of IED. The
injection unit REX060 shall be located close to the IED, preferably in the same
cubicle.
For the Sensitive rotor earth fault protection, there are some settings necessary for
REX060:
• System frequency: 50/60 Hz

• Injected frequency for rotor circuit injection is settable in 1 Hz steps 75 – 250 Hz.
• Gain factor in four steps
REX060 will also continuously check the measured signal for detection of saturation
which could cause error in the evaluation in IED. If saturation level is reached a binary
signal, connected to IED, is activated. Also other errors in the injection circuit will
initiate a binary signal to IED for blocking of the function.
Rotor injection output is protected against high voltages by a relay blocking the
injection circuit. This blocking remains blocked by stored status in non-volatile
memory.
The output is also protected by a fuse. If this fuse is blown, it is caused by external
voltage source, since the injection unit cannot provide enough energy to blow this
fuse.
Refer to the Hardware section in this manual for a detailed description of REX060.
286
Technical manual

7.8.9.2 Rotor Earth Fault Protection function
The injection to the rotor is schematically shown in figure 127.
Iinj
+
DC
Crot
Rf Crot Uinj
AC
REX061 -
Rf Iinj
+
Rotor Reference
U inj
Im pedance
-
IEC11000065 V1 EN
Figure 127: Equivalent diagram for Sensitive rotor earth fault protection principle
The impedance ZMeasured is equal to the capacitive reactance between the rotor
winding and earth (1/ωCrot) and the earth fault resistance (Rf). The series resistance in
the injection circuit is eliminated. Rf is very large in the non-faulted case and the
measured impedance, called the rotor reference impedance and can be calculated as :
1
Z ref = - j
wCrot
EQUATION2510 V1 EN
alternative
1
= jwCrot
Z ref
EQUATION2511 V1 EN
Where
w = 2p × finj
EQUATION2512 V1 EN
The injected frequency finj of the square wave, is a set value, deviating from the
fundamental frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The injected frequency can be set within the
range 75 – 250 Hz with the recommended value 113 Hz in 50 Hz systems and 137 Hz
in 60 Hz systems.
Rseries is a resistance in the REX061 unit used to protect against overvoltage to the
injection unit. Such overvoltages can occur if the unit is fed from static excitation
system.
287
Technical manual

The injection unit REX060 is connected to the generator and to IED as shown in figure
125.
7.8.9.3 General measurement of earth fault impedance
From the REX060 the injected voltage and current are delivered as AC voltages to
IED. The injected voltage and current is measured and analyzed in the protection
function software within IED. The measured injected voltage and current are first
processed by means of special filtering so that the signals are referred to the injected
frequency only.
The bare complex impedance is, see fig 128:
U Inj
Z bare =
I Inj
EQUATION2500 V1 EN
An equivalent circuit for the measured impedance is shown in figure 128.
ZMeasured ZBare
Z series Iinj
Rf Z shunt Uinj
IEC11000003 V1 EN
Figure 128: Equivalent of the impedance measurement
In non-faulted operation Rf is very large. A “healthy” impedance is calculated as:
Z Measured = k1 × Z bare + k 2
EQUATION2501 V1 EN
For definition of k1 and k2, see figure 129
The factors k1 and k2 [Ω] are derived from measurements during commissioning,
where calibration to known fault resistance will be used to convert the measurement
to true primary impedance. The factor k1 will compensate for transformer ratio and
288
Technical manual

other factors to achieve impedance values related to the primary system. The factor k2
[Ω] will compensate for the series impedance Zseries
The healthy impedance measured at non-faulted conditions is referred to as the

reference impedance in further text.
In IED the measured impedance is compared to the reference impedance. In case of an

earth fault, the fault impedance is estimated and compared to the set values RAlarm
and RTrip.
The measured values are transferred to the primary impedance values by taking the
actual impedance value through the complex transformation given by the equation.
Ztrue = k1 × Z measured + k2
GUID-20ADF3F6-6A89-4B5F-B0DA-9740C4FD5482 V1 EN
The factors k1 and k2 [Ω] are derived during the calibration measurements under
commissioning. As support for the calibration, the Injection Commissioning tool must
be used. This tool is an integrated part of the PCM600 tool.
In connection to this calibration, the reference impedance is also derived. In case of a

rotor earth fault with fault impedance Zf, the measured admittance is:
1 1 1
= +
Z Z ref Z f
=
1 1 1
= -
Zf Z Z ref
EQUATION2405 V1 EN
The real part gives the fault conductance.
1 æ1 1 ö
= Re ç - ÷
Rf ç ÷
è Z Z ref ø
EQUATION2421 V1 EN
RAlarm and RTrip are the two resistance levels given in the settings. The values of
RAlarm and RTrip are given in Ω.
An alarm signal ALARM is given after a set delay tAlarm if Rf < RAlarm
A start signal START is given if Rf < RTrip
See figure 131
289
Technical manual

7.8.9.4 Simplified logic diagram
ROTIPHIZ
Uinj
Rshunt
2
1
3
4
6 5
I Inj u_i_ref
Z Measured
Z Bare
¸ I
Rf X
Compare & S U Inj u_u_ref
Evaluate
7
K2
K1
U
ZRef1
ZRef2 REX060
REG670
IEC10000327 V1 EN
Figure 129: Simplified logic diagram for sensitive rotor earth fault protection,
injection based ROTIPHIZ
1 The sensitive rotor earth fault protection function receives amplified injected voltage and
current via the REX060 unit as two voltages signals. (Voltage inputs in the IED)
2 The phasor of injected voltage UInj and phasor of injected current IInj is calculated by using
special filter from raw samples. Observe that phasors are calculated for the injected
frequency.
3 The complex bare impedance is calculated from Uinj / Iinj.
4, 5 The complex measured impedance is derived as ZMeasured = Zbare*k1 + k2 [Ω].
6 The fault resistance (Rf) is calculated from the complex measured impedance and a selected
complex reference.
7 Selection of one (out of maximum 2) ZRef.
290
Technical manual

Rf
OR
Alarm
Adaptive
TripDelay
Trip
IEC10000326-3.vsd
IEC10000326 V2 EN
Figure 130: ROTIPHIZ Alarm and trip logic
If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RAlarm and longer than alarm delay (using
delay-on), output ALARM is set. If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RTrip, using
internal trip time characteristic, output signal TRIP is set after the calculated time. For
trip time delay, see fig 131
When 1s filter length is used and the fault resistance is equal to the set value RTrip, the
trip time is about 10 s. If the fault resistance is estimated to be 0 Ω, the trip delay is 2
s. For values in between, the delay follows the linear interpolation describing the fault
resistance time characteristic.
291
Technical manual

Trip time
10 × FilterLength
2 × FilterLength
Fault resistance
RTrip RAlarm
IEC11000002 V1 EN
Figure 131: Trip time characteristic as function of fault resistance
A third high level step for the detection of excitation system earth faults on the AC side
of the excitation rectifier is available. This step uses the network frequency (50 or 60
Hz) for the evaluation. If an earth fault occurs at the AC side of the excitation system
rectifier, there is a fundamental frequency component at the measured voltage and
current injection points.
The third high level step is not applicable if mixed signals are used, that is when the
REX060 is used for both rotor and stator earth fault protection and only two, instead
of four, analog inputs on the IED are used.

Table 132: ROTIPHIZ technical data
Fault resistance sensitivity Can be reached at 500 kΩ
steady state operating
condition of the
machine
Typically 20 - 50 kΩ
Injection frequency (75.000 - 250.000) Hz ±0.1 Hz
Trip limit of fault resistance (100 - 100000)Ω 5% of 1 kΩ at Rf ≤ 1 kΩ
5% of set value at 1 kΩ < Rf ≤ 20 kΩ
10% of set value at Rf > 20 kΩ
292
Technical manual


Alarm limit of fault resistance (100 - 1000000)Ω 5% of 1 kΩ at Rf ≤ 1 kΩ
5% of 10 kΩ at 1 kΩ < Rf ≤ 20 kΩ
10% of set value at 20 kΩ < Rf ≤ 200 kΩ
Operate time, start at Rf ~ 0 Ω 1.00 s typically -

and filter length = 1 s
Operate time, trip at Rf ~ 0 Ω and 3.00 s typically -
filter length = 1 s
Alarm time delay at Rf ~ 0 Ω and (0.00 - 600.00) s ±0.2% or ±2.00 s whichever is greater
filter length = 1 s
7.9 100% stator earth fault protection, injection based

STTIPHIZ
100% stator earth fault protection, STTIPHIZ Rse< 64S
injection based
7.9.2 Functionality
The 100% stator earth-fault protection STTIPHIZ is used to detect earth faults in the
stator windings of generators and motors. STTIPHIZ is applicable for generators
connected to the power system through a unit transformer in a block connection. An
independent signal with a certain frequency different from the generator rated
frequency is injected into the stator circuit. The responce of this injected signal is used
to detect stator earth faults.
To implement the above concept, a separate injection box is required. The injection
box generates a square wave voltage signal which for example can be fed into the
secondary winding of the generator neutral point voltage transformer or grounding
transformer. This signal propagates through this transformer into the stator circuit.
The magnitude of the injected voltage signal is measured on the secondary side of the
neutral point voltage transformer or grounding transformer. In addition, the resulting
injected current is measured through a resistive shunt located within the injection box.
These two measured values are fed to the IED. Based on these two measured
quantities, the IED determines the stator winding resistance to ground. The resistance
value is then compared with the preset fault resistance alarm and trip levels.
The protection function can not only detect the earth fault at the generator star point,
but also along the stator windings and at the generator terminals, including the
connected components such as voltage transformers, circuit breakers, excitation
transformer and so on. The measuring principle used is not influenced by the generator
293
Technical manual

operating mode and is fully functional even with the generator at standstill. It is still
required to have a standard 95% stator earth-fault protection, based on the neutral
point fundamental frequency displacement voltage, operating in parallel with the
100% stator earth-fault protection function.
Requires injection unit REX060 and optional shunt resistor unit REX062 for correct
operation.
7.9.3 Description of input signals

The inputs to the 100% stator earth fault protection function block are as shown in the
table.
Table 133: Description of various inputs
Input signal Description
USU The measured injection voltage. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI
output. The analog voltage input AI1 is linked to the phase L1 in the pre-processor block
in the Signal Matrix tool.
USI The measured injection current. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI
output. In the pre-configured version, the analog voltage input AI2 is linked to the phase
L2 in the pre-processor block in the Signal Matrix tool.
BLOCK Input to block the function
ZREFSEL The selection of any of the pre-defined reference impedances. The reference impedance
can differ, for example, with the generator breaker open or closed. Therefore, there is a
possibility to change from one set reference impedance to another. Five different
reference impedances are available.
7.9.4 Description of output signals

The outputs of the 100% stator earth fault protection function block are as shown in
the table.
Table 134: Description of various outputs
TRIP Trip command signal
START Signal activated, if the calculated fault resistance gets lower than the set level
ALARM Signal activated after a set time delay, if the calculated fault resistance gets lower than
the set alarm level
OPCIRC Signal indicating open stator injection circuit (interruption)
ERROR Error signal which is boolean with values 0 and 1
ERRSTAT Status coded signal giving type of error. See below table
RAVE Measured stator resistance to earth in Ω at an injected frequency (real part of the
complex impedance)
XAVE Measured stator reactance to earth in Ω at the injected frequency (imaginary part of the
complex impedance)
FREQU Measured frequency of the injected voltage
294
Technical manual


RFAULT Estimated fault resistance in Ω
ZREF Selected reference impedance number
ZREFRE The real part (resistance) of the used reference impedance
ZREFIM The imaginary part (reactance) of the used reference impedance
URMSSTAT This signal is set true, if the measured RMS voltage is larger than the set limit ULimRMS
IRMSSTAT This signal is set true, if the measured RMS current is larger than the set limit ILimRMS
ERRSTAT output signal
Convert the integer output signal to binary and see table below for interpretation of
individual bits:
Table 135: Definition of errors
ERRSTAT output integer
Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 1
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Interfer- Under- Under- Over- Over- Frequ- No No
ence current voltage current voltage ency current voltage
detected difference
The ERRSTAT description will be shown in clear text in ICT.
The priority of the signals is set that the group priority 1 overrides the group priority
2 and 3, and priority 2 overrides priority 3. Note that the ERRSTAT signal can enable
several error cases at the same time.
Following errors is detected and derived in the Error block:
• B0 = Injected voltage signal not found

• B1 = Injected current signal not found
• B2 = Voltage and current signal frequency differs
• B3 = Measured total RMS voltage too high
• B4 = Measured total RMS current too high
• B5 = Injected voltage signal too low
• B6 = Injected current signal too low
• B7 = External interference voltage detected
ERRSTAT = BitToInt[B7,…,B1,B0] The priority of the error conditions that will be

flagged out:
• Prio1 = B0, B1
• Prio2 = B3, B4, B5, B6
• Prio3 = B2, B7
RFAULT output signal
295
Technical manual

The injection equipment provides calculation of the fault resistance:
• If the fault resistance is equal or below 10 kΩ, RFAULT is displayed in Ω

• If the fault resistance is above 10 kΩ, RFAULT is initially displayed as -1000
until the fault resistance has reached a stable value and then displayed in Ω
• RFAULT displayed as -2000 means error

STTIPHIZ
USU* TRIP
USI* START
BLOCK ALARM
ZREFSEL OPCIRC
ERROR
ERRSTAT
RAVE
XAVE
FREQU
RFAULT
ZREF
ZREFRE
ZREFIM
URMSSTAT
IEC10000298 V1 EN
Figure 132: STTIPHIZ function block
7.9.6 Signals
Table 136: STTIPHIZ Input signals
USU GROUP - Injected voltage signal
SIGNAL
USI GROUP - Injected current signal (voltage over shunt)
SIGNAL
ZREFSEL INTEGER 1 Reference impedance selection
Table 137: STTIPHIZ Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm
OPCIRC BOOLEAN Injection circuit open
ERROR BOOLEAN Error
ERRSTAT INTEGER Error indication
296
Technical manual


RAVE REAL Measured resistance to earth in Ohm at inj freq
XAVE REAL Measured reactance to earth in Ohm at inj freq
FREQU REAL Measured frequency of injected voltage into stator
RFAULT REAL Estimated fault resistance in Ohm
ZREF INTEGER Selected reference impedance number
ZREFRE REAL Used reference impedance real part in Ohm
ZREFIM REAL Used reference impedance imaginary part in Ohm
URMSSTAT BOOLEAN RMS voltage status, TRUE when > ULimRMS
7.9.7 Settings
Table 138: STTIPHIZ Group settings (basic)
On
RTrip 100 - 10000 Ohm 1 1000 Trip limit of fault resistance in Ohm
RAlarm 100 - 100000 Ohm 1 5000 Alarm limit of fault resistance in Ohm
tAlarm 0.00 - 600.00 s 1.00 30.00 Alarm time delay
OpenCircLim 100 - 10000000 Ohm 1 10000000 Open circuit limit in Ohm
ULimRMS 1 - 1000 V 1 100 RMS voltage level
Table 139: STTIPHIZ Group settings (advanced)

FreqInjected 50.000 - 250.000 Hz 0.001 87.000 Injected frequency
Table 140: STTIPHIZ Non group settings (basic)

k1Real -10000000000.000 - 0.001 10000.000 Multiplication factor k1 for calibration, real
- 10000000000.000 part
k1Imag -10000000000.000 - 0.001 0.000 Multiplication factor k1 for calibration,
- 10000000000.000 imaginary part
k2Real -10000000000.000 Ohm 0.001 0.000 Addition factor k2 for calibration, real part
- 10000000000.000 in Ohm
k2Imag -10000000000.000 Ohm 0.001 0.000 Addition factor k2 for calibration,
- 10000000000.000 imaginary part in Ohm
1000000000.000
1000000.000
1000000000.000
297
Technical manual


1000000.000
1000000000.000
1000000.000
1000000000.000
1000000.000
1000000000.000
1000000.000
Table 141: STTIPHIZ Non group settings (advanced)

FilterLength 1s - - 1s Length of filter buffer
2s

Table 142: STTIPHIZ Monitored data
RAVE REAL - Ohm Measured resistance to
XAVE REAL - Ohm Measured reactance to
FREQU REAL - Hz Measured frequency of
injected voltage into
stator
RFAULT REAL - Ohm Estimated fault
resistance in Ohm
ZREF INTEGER - - Selected reference
impedance number
ZREFRE REAL - Ohm Used reference
impedance real part in
Ohm
ZREFIM REAL - Ohm Used reference
impedance imaginary
part in Ohm
URMSSTAT BOOLEAN - - RMS voltage status,
TRUE when > ULimRMS
298
Technical manual


The protection function is based on signal injection into a stator winding. These square
wave signals are generated in a separate injection unit REX060.
The injection signals are connected to the stator winding via:

• secondary winding of a voltage transformer (VT) located at the stator neutral
point
• open delta winding of a three-phase VT set located at generator terminals
• secondary winding of a distribution transformer (DT) located at the stator neutral
point; note that REX062 is typically required for such arrangement
• open delta winding of a three-phase grounding transformer (GT) located at
generator terminals; note that REX062 is typically required for such arrangement
In the REX060 unit the injection voltage and current signals are amplified to a level
adapted to the analogue voltage inputs of IED. In IED the measured signals are
processed and evaluation will give detection of stator faults.
7.9.9.1 Configuration principle
Figure 133 shows a typical installation for stator injection.
299
Technical manual

10
4 Step-up
Transformer
U>
Uinj 1
Rshunt
7 5
~ Generator
100% SEF
I
RN
U
2
9 REX060/SIM module 8
95 % SEF
REG670 IEC11000067-2-en.vsd
Generator Protection Panel
IEC11000067 V1 EN
Figure 133: Example installation for stator injection
1 Generator unit consisting of a synchronous generator and a step-up transformer

2 Grounding resistor for the stator winding
3 Neutral point VT which is used as injection point and also to provide galvanic separation between
primary circuit and injection equipment
4 Cable used to inject the square-wave signal into the stator circuit
5 Connection for measurement of injected current. This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is
given to REG670 for evaluation.
6 Cable for measurement of injected voltage at the injection point. This signal is amplified in REX060
before it is given to REG670 for evaluation.
7 Two VT inputs into REG670 which are used to measure injected current and voltage
8 Cable for 95% stator earth-fault protection
9 Separate VT input in REG670 used for 95% stator earth-fault protection
10 Protection for excessive over-voltages posed by generator. REX060 can withstand without
damage maximum voltage of 120V and when used together with REX062 up to 240V.
300
Technical manual

The injection unit REX060

IED and
Injection Top view Power Back view Front view
connectors connector Keylock
LED
X11 X61 X81
1 1 1
Injection Stator
Injection Rotor 18 18
X62 X82
PSM
1 1
5 5
Power
Stator
Rotor
Backplane
Front-plate Injection LED Injection switch

HMI with logic
IEC11000015 V1 EN
Figure 134: Injection unit REX060
The REX060 unit is a common unit with it's own built-in Power Supply Module
(PSM) of the same type as used in the IED that can be equipped for either rotor or stator
earth fault protection, or for both. The REX060 has specific injection modules for
rotor and stator protection. The REX060 generates square wave signals, where one is
used for injection to the stator neutral point and the other to the field winding circuit
(rotor circuit), if configured for both stator and rotor protection. The injected voltages
and currents are measured by the unit and amplified, giving voltage signals both for
the injected voltage and current, and adapted to the analogue inputs of IED. The
injection unit REX060 shall be located close to the IED.
For the stator earth fault protection, there are some settings necessary for REX060:
• System frequency: 50/60 Hz

• Injected frequency for stator neutral point is settable in 1 Hz steps 50 – 250 Hz.
• VT/DT maximum fundamental frequency voltage during earth fault in the stator
winding
REX060 will also continuously check the measured signal for detection of saturation
which could cause error in the evaluation in IED. If saturation level is reached, a
binary output contact is activated, which is connected to IED. Also other errors in
injection will activate another output contact to IED for blocking the function.
Stator injection output is protected against voltages exceeding maximum operating

range (10% of rated VT/DT) by a relay blocking the injection circuit. This blocking
remains blocked by stored status in non-volatile memory. Note REX060 is designed
to cope with such voltages of up to 120V. When optional REX062 resistor unit is used,
REX060 can cope with voltages of up to 240V at injection point.
The output is also protected by a fuse. If this fuse is blown, it is caused by external
voltage source, since the injection unit cannot provide enough energy to blow this
fuse.
301
Technical manual

Refer to the Hardware section in this manual for a detailed description of REX060.
7.9.9.2 Generator system earthing methods
There are several principles for system earthing of synchronous generators. The
choice of earthing method depends on different factors:
• Limitation of earth fault current at stator earth fault

• Damping of transient overvoltages in the generator system
• Required insulation level to withstand overvoltage in “healthy” phases at single
phase earth fault
• Δ or Y coupled stator windings
• Connection of a single generator via a step up transformer or connection of more
than one generator via a common step up transformer
Normally the generator system has some kind of high resistance earthing, giving earth
fault current within the range 5 – 20 A, thus preventing serious damages in case of
stator earth faults. Direct earthing will give too high earth fault current level. Isolated
generator system will give risk of transient overvoltages.
Below some alternatives for generator system earthing are shown;
A B C
IEC110000066-1-en.vsd
IEC11000066 V1 EN
Figure 135: Generator earthing alternatives
A High-resistance earthing with a neutral point resistor

B Effective high-resistance earthing via a distribution transformer
C High-resistance earthing via a delta, grounded-wye transformer
302
Technical manual

These earthing alternatives are characterized by the following properties:
A: High-resistance earthing with a neutral point resistor
This earthing method utilizes a high resistance in the primary circuit by inserting
resistor RN between the generator neutral and the ground. The actual resistance value
of RN is generally in order of kΩ. Such high resistance is required in order to limit the
primary earth fault current to a quite small value (i.e. always < 20A and quite often <
10A primary). Actual primary earth fault current can be calculated as follows:
U G _ Ph - Ph
I =
3 × RN
EF_Max
EQUATION2515 V1 EN
where:
RN is the ohmic value of the primary resistor
UG_Ph-Ph is the protected generator rated phase-to-phase voltage
Typically a VT is connected in parallel with this resistor in order to measure voltage

in the stator neutral point.
The VT must have a rating of at least 100VA and a rated secondary

winding voltage of up to 120V. It must adhere to IEC 61869-3:2011
section 5.5.301 Rated Output Values and the standard values
specified according to burden range II.
The maximum voltage on the secondary side of the VT for an earth fault at generator
terminals can be calculated as:
U G _ Ph - Ph U2
U EF_Max = ×
3 U1
EQUATION2516 V1 EN
where:
U2/U1 is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of the VT
UG_Ph-Ph is the protected generator rated phase to phase voltage
B: Effective high-resistance earthing via a distribution transformer
This earthing method utilizes a distribution transformer that provides high resistance
in the primary circuit by utilizing a small resistor RN connected to the secondary
winding of the distribution transformer. The primary winding of the distribution
transformer is connected between the generator neutral and ground. The actual
303
Technical manual

resistance value RN is generally extremely small (i.e. typically < 1Ω); however, the
imposed ohmic value to the primary circuit becomes quite high (i.e. in the order of
kΩ). The equivalent resistance in the primary circuit can be calculated as follows:
2
æ U1 ö
REq = ç ÷ × RN
èU2 ø
EQUATION2517 V1 EN
where:
U1/U2 is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of the distribution transformer
RN is the ohmic value of the resistor connected to the secondary winding
The distribution transformer typically has rating of several kVA (e.g. 33kVA) and
rated secondary winding voltage of up to 240V. Note that maximum voltage on the
secondary side of the distribution transformer for an earth fault at generator terminals
can be calculated as follows:
U G _ Ph - Ph U2
U EF_Max = ×
3 U1
EQUATION2516 V1 EN
where:
U2/U1 is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of the distribution transformer
Note that in case of an earth fault in the stator, the secondary current through the RN
resistor will be often in order of couple of hundred amperes. This maximum secondary
current can be calculated as follows:
U EF _ Max
I EF _ Sec =
RN
EQUATION2518 V1 EN
C: High-resistance earthing via a delta, grounded-wye transformer
This earthing method utilizes a specially constructed three-phase, five-limb power

transformer that provides high resistance in the primary circuit by utilizing a relatively
small resistor RN connected to the secondary open-delta connected windings. The
primary windings of this transformer is star (i.e. wye) connected and this neutral point
is directly connected to ground. The actual resistance value RN is relatively small (i.e.
typically < 5Ω); however, the imposed ohmic value to the primary circuit becomes
304
Technical manual

quite high (i.e. in the order of kΩ). The equivalent resistance in the primary circuit can
be calculated as follows:
2
æ U1 ö
REq = ç ÷ × RN
è 3 ×U 2 ø
EQUATION2519 V1 EN
where:
U1/U2 is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of one phase of the power transformer, e.g.
8 kV
3
500V
3
EQUATION2521 V1 EN
RN is the ohmic value of a resistor connected to the secondary open-delta windings
The three-phase power transformer typically has rating of several tens of kVA (e.g.
129kVA) and rated secondary winding voltage of up to 550V. Note that maximum
voltage across secondary resistor RN for an earth fault at generator terminals can be
calculated as follows:
U2
U EF_Max = 3 ×U G _ Ph - Ph ×
U1
EQUATION2520 V1 EN
where:
U2/U1 is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of one phase of the power transformer, e.g.
500V
3
8 kV
3
EQUATION2522 V1 EN
Note that in case of an earth fault in the stator, the secondary current through the RN
resistor will be often in order of couple of hundred amperes. This maximum secondary
current can be calculated as follows:
U EF _ Max
I EF _ Sec =
RN
EQUATION2518 V1 EN
305
Technical manual

For all the alternatives the 100% stator earth fault protection can be applied.
7.9.9.3 100% Stator earth fault protection function
The injection to the stator is schematically shown in figure 136. It should be observed
that in this figure injection equivalent circuit is also shown with all impedances and
injection generator related to the primary side of the neutral point voltage transformer.
Points a & b indicate connection terminals for the injection equipment. Similar
equivalent circuit can be drawn for all other types of generator stator earthing shown
in latter figures.
Z Bare
Z Measured
Z series Iinj
Cstat
a +
R fault
Û UN
Rf Cstat RN ZmT Uinj
-
b
Iinj
Stator Reference
+ a Impedance Z Ref
RN Uinj
- b
IEC11000008 V1 EN
Figure 136: High-resistance generator earthing with a neutral point resistor
There are some alternatives for connection of the neutral point resistor as shown in
figure 137 (low voltage neutral point resistor connected via a DT).
306
Technical manual

Cstat
Iinj
a
+
RN Uinj
-
b
IEC11000009 V1 EN
Figure 137: Effective high-resistance generator earthing via a distribution

transformer
Another alternative is shown in figure 138 (High-resistance earthing via a delta,

grounded-wye transformer). In this case the transformer must withstand the large
secondary current caused by primary earth fault. The resistor typically has to be
divided as shown in figure 138 to limit the voltage to the injection equipment in case of
earth fault at the generator terminal. This voltage is often in the range 400 – 500 V. As
the open delta connection gives three times the zero sequence phase voltage this gives
too high voltage at the injection point if the resistance is not divided as shown in the
figure 138 . By dividing the resistor in two parts it shall be ensured that maximum
voltage imposed back on injection equipment is equal to or less than 240V.
307
Technical manual

I inj
a
+
RN
C stat U inj
-
b
IEC11000010 V1 EN
Figure 138: High-resistance generator earthing via a delta, grounded-wye

transformer
It is also possible to make the injection via VT open delta connection, as shown in
figure 139.
308
Technical manual

U1 / U2
Y
Y
Y
I inj
a
+
Rd U inj
-
C stat b
2
æU ö
R d >>çç 1 ÷÷ × R N
èU2 ø
RN
IEC11000011 V1 EN
Figure 139: Injection via open delta VT connection
It must be observed that the resistor Rd is normally applied for ferro-resonance

damping. The resistance Rd is will have very little contribution to the earth fault
current as it has high resistance. This injection principle can be used for applications
309
Technical manual

with various generator system earthing methods. It is therefore recommended to make

the injection via the open delta VT on the terminal side in most applications.
Accuracy for STTIPHIZ is installation dependent and it mainly depends on the

characteristic of grounding or voltage transformer used to inject signal into the stator.
Note that large variation of the ambient temperature and variation of stator
capacitance and conductance to ground between standstill and fully loaded machine
will also limit the possible setting level for the alarm stage. As a consequence 10 kΩ
sensitivity can be typically reached without problem. Depending on particular
installation alarm sensitivity of up to 50 kΩ may be reached at steady state operating
condition of the machine.
Note that it is possible to connect two REG670 in parallel to the REX060 injection unit
in order to obtain redundant measurement in two separate IEDs. However, at
commissioning both REG670 IEDs must be connected during calibration procedure.
7.9.9.4 General measurement of earth fault impedance
From the REX060 the injected voltage and current are delivered as AC voltages to
IED. The injected voltage and current is measured and analyzed in the protection
function software within IED. The measured injected voltage and current are first
processed by means of special filtering so that the signals are referred to the injected
frequency only.
The bare complex impedance is, see fig 136:
U Inj
Z bare =
I Inj
EQUATION2500 V1 EN
An equivalent circuit for the measured impedance is shown in figure 128.
310
Technical manual

ZMeasured ZBare
Z series Iinj
Rf Z shunt Uinj
IEC11000003 V1 EN
Figure 140: Equivalent of the impedance measurement
In non-faulted operation Rf is very large. A “healthy” impedance is calculated as:
Z Measured = k1 × Z bare + k 2
EQUATION2501 V1 EN
For definition of k1 and k2, see figure 129
The factors k1 and k2 [Ω] are derived from measurements during commissioning,
where calibration to known fault resistance will be used to convert the measurement
to true primary impedance. The factor k1 will compensate for transformer ratio and
other factors to achieve impedance values related to the primary system. The factor k2
[Ω] will compensate for the series impedance Zseries
The healthy impedance measured at non-faulted conditions is referred to as the

reference impedance in further text.
In IED the measured impedance is compared to the reference impedance. In case of an

earth fault, the fault impedance is estimated and compared to the set values RAlarm
and RTrip.
If the measured impedance is larger than the setting openCircuitLimit, the output
OPCIRC is set TRUE. If OPCIRC is set, it means there is a strong likelihood that the
generator neutral resistor is not anymore connected to ground, since only the
capacitive part in the circuit is left. The open circuit is only applied on the stator
winding protection. To make the open circuit limit more stable a hysteresis is added.
If OPCIRC is TRUE, the measured fault impedance must drop below open circuit
limit * (1 - OpenCircLim) to reset. The hysteresis is hidden and set to a default value
of 10% of open Circuit limit for the stator.
311
Technical manual

Open- circuit
characteristics
no open- circuit open- circuit
Open Circuit
Hysteresis
{Z } re
0 Measured
openCircuitLimit
IEC11000073 V1 EN
Figure 141: Open circuit characteristics
Blocking: The output OPCIRC is blocked during an error occurring and during
initialization of function.
Detailed Set: If the total measured real part of the impedance is greater than the setting
OpenCircLim the output OPCIRC is TRUE, see figure 128.
7.9.9.5 Measuring reference impedance
The healthy impedance is equal to the parallel connection of the neutral point resistor
(RN), the capacitive reactance between the stator windings and earth (1/ωCstat), the
transformer magnetization impedance (ZmT) and the earth fault resistance (Rf). The
series resistance in the injection circuit is eliminated by k2. Rf is very large in the non-
faulted case and the measured impedance is equal to the stator reference impedance:
1 1 1
= + jw C stat +
Z ref RN Z mT
EQUATION2502 V1 EN
Where
w = 2p × finj
EQUATION2503 V1 EN
The injected frequency finj of the square wave, is a set value, deviating from the
fundamental frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The injected frequency can be set within the
range 50 – 250 Hz with recommend value 87 Hz in 50 Hz systems and 103 Hz in 60
Hz systems.
The reference impedance can vary depending on the operational state. The reason for
this can be the following:
312
Technical manual

• The influence from the impedance ZmT will be different when the generator is
stand-still and when it is in operation
• The capacitance to earth will vary if the generator breaker is open or closed
• The capacitance will vary if the generator is energized or not depending on stator
end winding corona protection
• Non-linearity of used injection transformer, different properties at low and high
total voltage and temperature changes
• Impedance to ground is affected by auxiliary loads connected between generator
and unit transformer. If these loads vary, the estimated earth fault resistance will
be affected.
The difference from the first reference impedance is identified by monitoring

impedance (RAVE + jXRAVE) during different operation modes. This impedance is
available as a service value from the stator function both on built-in HMI and in ICT
tool. If the difference is significant more than one reference impedance is required. In
the ICT up to five different sets of reference impedances can be derived during
commissioning for different states of operation and downloaded to the protection
function as different values of the reference impedance; RefRn and RefXn where n =
1, 2, and up to 5. Switching of reference impedance can be made automatically.
During commissioning ICT also makes “cross-calculations” between acquired

references, giving basically the calculated fault resistance between each existing
reference combination. This would be the fault resistance measured by the function
when the reference change occurs from one reference to another if the real generator
impedance stays the same, in other words a worst case scenario.
RMS voltage (rmsVolt) value at the injection point can be used for detecting when a
reference needs to be changed and logical outputs can be set to reflect whether the
RMS voltage is higher or lower than a prescribed value. There is one such output for
the voltage signal and one for the current signal. It is advantageous to use RMS to
determine a change of machine condition because the RMS makes a distinction
between the measured values and the total amplitude of the signal. The standstill
condition only contains the injected frequency, while the full load condition and full
speed condition contains other frequencies, which amplitudes may change under
varying machine conditions.
In case of a stator earth fault with fault impedance Zf the measured admittance will be:
1 1 1
= +
Z Z ref Zf
EQUATION2513 V1 EN
and this gives:
1 1 1
= -
Zf Z Z ref
EQUATION2514 V1 EN
313
Technical manual

and the real part gives the fault conductance:
1 æ1 1 ö
= Re ç - ÷
Rf ç Z Z ref ÷
è ø
EQUATION2421 V1 EN
In the settings there are given two resistance levels:
• RAlarm given in Ω. If
R f < RAlarm
EQUATION2524 V1 EN
an alarm signal ALARM is given after a set delay tAlarm.

• RTrip given in Ω. If
R f < RTrip
EQUATION2523 V1 EN
a start signal START is given.
If the fault resistance is slightly below the set value RTrip the trip time will be about
10 s with default filter length of 1 s. If the fault resistance is estimated to 0 Ω the trip
delay will be 2 s with default filter length of 1 s. For values in between the delay will
follow linear interpolation describing the fault resistance time relation, as shown in
figure 142.
Note that actual tripping time is dependent on the set parameter FilterLength which
has default value of 1s.
314
Technical manual

Trip time
10 × FilterLength
2 × FilterLength
Fault resistance
RTrip RAlarm
IEC11000002 V1 EN
Figure 142: Trip time characteristic as function of fault resistance
During run-up and shut down of the generator, i.e. when the rotational speed of the
generator changes, there will occur harmonic voltages with varying frequency at the
injection equipment connection point (for example see voltage generator Un in Figure
136). If such frequencies interfere with the injected frequency this might create an
error in the fault resistance estimation. Such situations are identified in the function
and the function is automatically stabilized to prevent unwanted operation of the
protection.
In connection with this calibration the reference impedance is also derived.
It is possible to have up to five different reference impedances. The need to change

reference impedance is due to different operating conditions for the generator, for
instance:
1. Generator stand still
2. Generator running, not synchronized to the power network
3. Generator in normal operation, synchronized to the power network
The following automatic choice for the actual reference impedance can for example
be made:
315
Technical manual

• Generator voltage < set value and generator circuit breaker open: Reference
impedance 1
• Generator voltage > set value and generator circuit breaker open: Reference
impedance 2
• Generator voltage > set value and generator circuit breaker closed: Reference
impedance 3
The monitoring, enabled in ICT, will give indication if several reference impedance
values are needed.
From the measured impedance the stator earth fault resistance can be estimated since
the reference impedance is known. An alarm level (Ω) is set at a higher value and the
ALARM signal is activated after a set alarm delay time. A trip level (Ω) is also set at
a lower value. When the trip level is reached a TRIP signal is activated as shown in
figure 142.
316
Technical manual

7.9.9.6 Simplified logic diagram
STTIPHIZ
Uinj
Rshunt
2
1
3
4
6 5
I Inj u_i_sef
Rf Z Measured
Z Bare I
X
Compare & S U Inj u_u_sef
Evaluate
K2 K1
U
ZRef1
7 ZRef2
ZRef3 REX060
ZRef4
SELECT REFERENCE
ZRef5
tON=0.5s UN un
95% Trip a U
t a>b
b
UN> = 5% 8
9
95% Stator earth fault protection
REG670
IEC10000325 V1 EN
Figure 143: Simplified logic diagram for 100% stator earth fault protection
STTIPHIZ
1 The 100% stator earth fault protection function receives amplified injected voltage and current
via the REX060 unit as two voltage signals. (Voltage inputs in the REG670).
2 The phasor of injected voltage UInj and phasor of injected current IInj is calculated by using
special filter from raw samples. Observe that phasors are calculated for the injected
frequency.
3 The complex bare impedance is calculated from Uinj / Iinj.
4, 5 The complex measured impedance is derived as ZMeasured = Zbare*k1 + k2.
6 The fault resistance (RFault) is calculated from the complex measured impedance and a
selected complex reference.
7 Selection of one (out of maximum 5) ZRef.
8 Fourier filter to derive the phasor of zero sequence voltage at fundamental frequency
9 The 95% stator earth fault zero sequence over voltage function must operate in parallel with
STTIPHIZ.
317
Technical manual

Rf
OR
Alarm
Adaptive
TripDelay
Trip
IEC10000326-3.vsd
IEC10000326 V2 EN
Figure 144: STTIPHIZ alarm and trip logic
If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RAlarm and last longer than set alarm delay,
output ALARM is set. If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RTrip, output signal
TRIP is set after the calculated time. For trip time delay, see fig 142

Table 143: STTIPHIZ technical data
Fault resistance sensitivity Can be reached at 50 kΩ
steady state operating
condition of the
machine
Typically 10 kΩ
Injection frequency (50.000 - 250.000) Hz ±0.1 Hz
Injection voltage 240 V
Trip limit of fault resistance (100 - 10000)Ω ±5% of 1 kΩ at Rf ≤ 1 kΩ
±10% of set value at Rf > 1 kΩ
Alarm limit of fault resistance (100 - 100000)Ω ±5% of 1 kΩ at Rf ≤ 1 kΩ

±10% of 10 kΩ at 1 kΩ < Rf ≤ 10 kΩ
±50% of set value at Rf > 10 kΩ
Operate time, start at Rf ~ 0Ω 1.00 s typically -

and filter length = 1 s
Operate time, trip at Rf ~ 0Ω and 3.00 s typically -
filter length = 1 s
Alarm time delay at Rf ~ 0Ω and (0.00 - 600.00) s ±0.2% or ± 2.00 s whichever is greater
filter length = 1 s
318
Technical manual

7.10 Under impedance protection for generators and

transformers ZGVPDIS
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/
identification identification IEEEidentification
Under impedance function for ZGVPDIS 21G
generators and transformers
S00346 V1 EN
7.10.2 Functionality
The under impedance protection is a three zone full scheme impedance protection
using offset mho characteristics for detecting faults in the generator, generator-
transformer and transmission system. The three zones have fully independent
measuring loops and settings. The functionality also comprises an under voltage seal-
in feature to ensure issuing of a trip even if the current transformer goes into saturation
and, in addition, the positive-sequence-based load encroachment feature for the
second and the third impedance zone. Built-in compensation for the step-up
transformer vector group connection is available.

ZGVPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRZ1
BLOCK TRZ2
BLKZ TRZ3
BLKUV TRUV
START
STZ1
STZ2
STZ3
STUV
IEC14000018 V1 EN
Figure 145: ZGVPDIS function block
319
Technical manual

7.10.4 Signals
Table 144: ZGVPDIS Input signals
I3P GROUP - Connection for current sample signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Connection for voltage sample signals
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to fuse failure
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of the under voltage seal in
Table 145: ZGVPDIS Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip
TRZ1 BOOLEAN Trip signal Zone 1
TRUV BOOLEAN Trip from Under voltage seal in
START BOOLEAN General start
STZ1 BOOLEAN Start signal Zone 1
STUV BOOLEAN Start of under voltage seal in
7.10.5 Settings
Table 146: ZGVPDIS Group settings (basic)
On
ImpedanceAng 5 - 90 Deg 1 80 Impedance angle in degrees, common for
all zones
IMinOp 5 - 80 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current
OpModeZ1 Off - - PP Loops Operation mode of Zone 1: Off/Ph-Ph
PP Loops loops
Z1Fwd 3.0 - 100.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 1 forward reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
Z1Rev 3.0 - 100.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 1 reverse reach in % of rated
tZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate for Zone 1
320
Technical manual


OpModeZ2 Off - - EnhancedReach Operation mode of Zone 2: Off/Ph-Ph/
PP Loops EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
OpModeZ3 Off - - EnhancedReach Operation mode of Zone 3: Off/Ph-Ph/
PP Loops EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
OpModeU< Off - - Off Enable under voltage seal in (Off/Z2Start/
Z2Start Z3Start)
Z3Start
U< 5 - 90 %UB 1 70 Start value of under voltage seal in
tU< 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to operate for under voltage
seal in
Table 147: ZGVPDIS Group settings (advanced)

RLd 5 - 120 % Zb 1 50 Resistive reach in % for load
encroachment charateristics
ArgLd 5 - 85 Deg 1 38 Load encroachment inclination of load
angular sector
LoadEnchModZ2 Off - - Off Enable load encroachement for Zone 2
On Off/On
LoadEnchModZ3 Off - - On Enable load encroachement for Zone 3
On Off/On
Table 148: ZGVPDIS Non group settings (basic)

groups
321
Technical manual


Table 149: ZGVPDIS Monitored data
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1

The full scheme backup distance element constitutes of three operating zones. Zone1
has only the phase-to-phase loops enabled. Zone2 and zone3 can be selected for phase
–to-phase or Enhanced reach loop. Each measuring loop use the offset mho
characteristic
The base value of impedance can be calculated according to equation 53.
UBase
ZBase =
3 IBase
Where,
ZBase is the base value of impedance
UBase is the line-to-line voltage rating at the generator terminal
IBase is the line current rating at the generator terminal
The minimum operating current is provided using the setting IMinOp.
All the outputs will be blocked by activation of the BLOCK or BLKZ input.
Offset mho characteristic

ZGVPDIS consists of three distance elements operated for three zones separately.
Each zone consists of measuring loops which uses self-polarized offset mho
characteristics with both forward and reverse reach settings for the detection of the
fault in the respective zone. The operating characteristics of all the three zones are
shown in Figure 146. The ImpedanceAngle setting is common to all three zones.
322
Technical manual

jX
Offset Mho, Zone3
Offset Mho, Zone2
Offset Mho, Zone1

ImpedanceAng
IEC11000294 V2 EN
Figure 146: Offset mho characteristics of three zones
The complete functionality is shown in figure 147.
323
Technical manual

U3P STZ1
I3P ZONE 1 TRZ1
BLKZ OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd
BLOCK Z1Rev
tZ1 START
³1
ZONE 2 STZ2
OpModeZ2
Z2Fwd TRZ2
Z2Rev
tZ2
LoadEnchModZ2
OPERATE
³1
³1
STZ3
ZONE 3
OpModeZ3
Z3Fwd
Z3Rev
tZ3 TRZ3
LoadEnchModZ3
LoadEnch
RLd
ArgLd
UVSealIn TRUV
OpModeU< STUV
U<
tU<
BLCKUV
IEC11000295 V2 EN
Figure 147: Block diagram of ZGVPDIS
7.10.7.1 Operation principle of zone 1
In general, the zone 1 must cover the generator winding, the cables or busbars and step
up transformer.
Under impedance functionality is provided as selective protection for the phase-to-

phase faults in zone 1. Hence the functionality of zone 1 includes only phase-to-phase
measuring loops.
Zone 1 functionality can be set to PP Loops or Off using the setting OpModeZ1.
Figure 148 shows the functionality of zone 1.
324
Technical manual

BLOCK
BLKZ
U3P Comparator
ZL1L2 <
I3P
OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd STZ1
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng
tZ1
Comparator
³1 t TRZ1
ZL2L3 <
OPModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng
Comparator
ZL3L1 <
OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng
IEC11000297 V3 EN
Figure 148: Block diagram of zone 1
The functionality included in zone 1:
• Comparator to detect, if the operating impedance has entered inside zone 1 offset
mho characteristic.
• All three phase-to-phase loops are implemented separately.
• Forward and reverse reach values are provided in percentage of impedance base
value at generator.
• Operate time delay is provided.
Comparator characteristics
The comparator consists of offset mho characteristics. Three individual comparators
are provided in the three phase-to-phase loops. The offset mho characteristic is as
shown in figure 149.
325
Technical manual

IL1L2 · jX
IL1L2 · Z 1Fwd
Ucomp1=UL1L2 - I L1L2 · Z1Fwd
Ucomp2=UL1L2 + IL1L2 · Z1REV
IL1L2 · R
- IL1L2· Z1REV
IEC11000296 V2 EN
Figure 149: Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-L2 fault in zone 1
Criteria: Operation occurs if 90° ≤ β ≤ 270°.
In the above characteristics, Z1Fwd and Z1Rev are the forward and reverse reach
percentage values and ImpedanceAng is the characteristic angle provided for the zone
1 operation region.
Z 1Fwd = Z 1Fwd Ð ImpedanceAng

Z 1Rev = Z 1revÐ ImpedanceAng

Voltage and current phasors selected for phase-to-phase loops are:

Sl.No Phase-to-phase loop Voltage phasor Current phasor
L1-L2
1 UL1L 2 IL1L 2
L2-L3
2 UL 2 L3 IL 2 L3
L3-L1
3 UL3L1 IL3L1
Operate time
The operate time delay for zone 1 can be provided using the setting tZ1.
Figure 150 shows the function block diagram describing the functionality of zone 2.
326
Technical manual

Zero
sequence
Voltage
Compensation
U3P
Measuring Loop
I3P EnhancedReach
BLOCK OpModeZ2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
BLKZ ImpedanceAng
1
Measuring Loop
phase-to-phase STZ2
(ZL1L2<,ZL2L3<,ZL3L1<) &
OpModeZ2
tZ2
Z2Fwd
t TRZ2
Z2Rev
ImpedanceAng
LoadEnchModZ2
Load
Encroachment T
1 F
RLd
ArgLd
IEC11000298 V3 EN
Figure 150: Block diagram of zone 2
Zone 2 can be used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer and the HV bus bar.
It also covers to some degree, the stator winding. The time to trip is provided in order
to coordinate with the zone 1 element on the shortest outgoing line from the bus.
Zone 2 coverage provides backup for the phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in
generator. It also protects LV winding of generator transformer and phase-to-earth,
phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in the HV side of transformer and the bus. A
separate maximum current feature is provided in phase-to-earth loop selection which
gives correct reach measurement for phase-to-phase fault on HV side. Zero sequence
compensation for the phase voltages is given in phase-to-earth measuring loops in
order to prevent operation for the stator earth faults.
Zone 2 can be selected for different measuring loops using the setting OpModeZ2. The
OpModeZ2 can be selected as Off or PP Loops or EnhancedReach. If the OpModeZ2
is selected as EnhancedReach, the loop used for measurements is the phase-to-earth
measuring loop (L1E, L2E and L3E) which is with maximum phase current of all the
three phase currents.
Figure 151 shows the logic to detect the phase to earth loop with maximum phase
current.
327
Technical manual

A startPh1 &
i1Mag a
a==b
b
startPh2 & ³1 start
&
B
i2Mag a
a==b
b startPh3 &
&
³1
C
i3Mag a
a==b
b
MAX
IEC11000307 V1 EN
Figure 151: Logic diagram for the selection of the maximum current loop
The phase-to-earth voltage is compensated with zero sequence voltage in order to

avoid the function operating for earth faults in zone 1, that is, complete generator
stator winding and LV winding of the power transformer.
The reach settings for zone 2 can be provided using the Z2Fwd, Z2Rev and
ImpedanceAng settings. The Z2Fwd is forward reach setting and Z2Rev is reverse
reach setting. The offset mho characteristic for phase-to-earth loop is shown in Figure
152. The offset mho characteristics for phase-to-phase loop is shown in Figure 153.
IL1  jX
IL1  Z 2 Fwd
Ucomp1  UL1E  U 0  IL1  Z 2 Fwd
Ucomp 2  U L1E  U 0  IL1  Z 2 REV
IL1  R
 IL1  Z 2 REV
IEC11000299 V2 EN
Figure 152: Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-to-E fault in zone 2
328
Technical manual

IL1L 2  jX
IL1L2  Z 2 Fwd
Ucomp1  UL1L2  IL1L2  Z 2 Fwd
Ucomp 2  UL1L 2  IL1L 2  Z 2 REV
IL1L 2  R
 IL1L 2  Z 2 REV
IEC11000300 V2 EN
Figure 153: Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-to-L2 fault in zone 2
Operation occurs if 90° ≤ β ≤ 270°.
Impedance defined in the Figure 152 and 153 is described in equation 56.
Z 2 Fwd = Z 2 Fwd Ð ImpedanceAng
Z 2 Rev = Z 2 RevÐ ImpedanceAng

GUID-007D6357-B7CF-4C21-B772-2245F06C83A2 V2 EN (Equation 56)
Voltage and current phasors selected for different measuring loops:
Phase Phase:
Sl.No Measuring Loop Voltage Phasor Current Phasor
L1-L2
1 UL1L 2 IL1L 2
L2-L3
2 UL 2 L3 IL 2 L3
L3-L1
3 UL3L1 IL3L1
Enhanced Reach:
329
Technical manual

Sl.No Measuring Loop Voltage Phasor Current Phasor

IL1
1 UL1E - U 0 IL1
IL2
2 UL 2 E - U 0 IL2
IL3
3 UL3 E - U 0 IL3
Operate time
The operate time delay for zone 2 can be provided using the setting tZ2.
Zone 2 is provided load encroachment detection feature based on positive sequence

components measurements.. This feature avoids the function from operating due to
load encroachment. The load encroachment feature for zone 2 can be set using
LoadEnchModZ2 to On or Off.
Zone 3 is used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer, interconnecting bus

network and outgoing lines. The time to trip should be provided in order to coordinate
with the transmission line protection.
The zone 3 will provide protection from phase-to-earth, phase-phase and three-phase
faults on the HV side of the system. The zone 3 functionality is same as zone 2 hence
the explanation of zone 2 applies except the zone 3 has separate reach (Z3Fwd,
Z3Rev), operate timer (tZ3) and load encroachment enable (LoadEnchModZ3)
settings.
7.10.7.4 Load encroachment
The load encroachment characteristics can be set for zone2 and zone3. Load
encroachment can be enabled for zone 2 by setting LoadEnchModZ2 to On. Similarly
the load encroachment for zone 3 can be enabled by setting LoadEnchModZ3 to On.
The load encroachment characteristic is based on positive sequence quantities and can
be set using the settings RLd and ArgLd.
RLd is the positive sequence resistive reach value in percentage. ArgLd is angle in
degrees from the origin to the resistive axis as shown in Figure 154.
330
Technical manual

Load encroachment characteristic
jX
ArgLd ArgLd
-RLd RLd R
ArgLd ArgLd
IEC11000304_1_en
IEC11000304 V1 EN
Figure 154: Load encroachment characteristics
7.10.7.5 Under voltage seal-in
The under voltage seal-in logic ensures the trip under fault condition, where as under
impedance function will reset due to CT saturation. The start signal of zone 2 and zone
3 elements trigger the under voltage seal-in. This can be selected using the setting
OpModeU< . The setting OpModeU< can be selected as Off or Z2Start or Z3Start.
Select Z2Start to choose zone 2 for triggering the seal-in logic. Similarly, select
Z3Start to choose zone 3 for triggering the seal-in logic.
Under voltage seal-in is activated from the criterion based on line-to-line voltage
magnitude. The voltage criteria checks by comparing all three line-to-line voltage
levels with the level given by the setting parameter U<. If any loop detects lower
voltage, the under voltage seal-in logic gets triggered, provided the respective selected
zone start is also high. Once the under voltage seal-in logic is triggered, the pick-up
signal STUV becomes high. If it is constantly high for a time longer than the setting
tU<, the tripping signal TRUV is issued as a pulse signal with a duration of one
second.
Figure 155 shows the functionality of under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3.
331
Technical manual

- STUV
q1
BLOCK
BLKUV 1 tU<
TRUV
Zone 2 Start & t
tPulse = 1sec
&
OpModeU< =
10 ms -
0 = Off b0 1 q1
int 1 t
1 = Z2Start
2 = Z3Start b1
Drop-Off
& timer
Zone 3 Start
uP1P2 a
a<b
U< b
uP2P3 a
a<b 1
U< b
uP3P1 a
a< b
U< b
IEC11000306 V3 EN
Figure 155: Under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3

Table 150: ZGVPDIS Technical data
Number of zones 3 -
±5.0% of set impedance
(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zr Conditions:
Forward reach Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur
where Zr=UBase/√3∗IBase
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir
±5.0% of set impedance

(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zr Conditions:
Reverse reach Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur
where Zr=UBase/√3∗IBase
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir
Impedance angle (5 - 90) degrees -

Start time at 1.2 to 0.8 x set Min. = 15 ms

-
impedance Max. = 35 ms
Independent time delay to
±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
operate at 1.2 to 0.8 x set (0.000 – 60.000) s
greater
impedance
332
Technical manual

Current protection
Section 8 Current protection
8.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output PHPIOC
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN
8.1.2 Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

PHPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
ENMULT TRL2
TRL3
IEC04000391 V2 EN
Figure 156: PHPIOC function block
8.1.4 Signals
Table 151: PHPIOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase current
SIGNAL
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current start value multiplier
333
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 152: PHPIOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
8.1.5 Settings
Table 153: PHPIOC Group settings (basic)

On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out of
1 out of 3 3
IP>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
Table 154: PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level
Table 155: PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 156: PHPIOC Monitored data

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental
frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase
current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase
334
Technical manual

Current protection
output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set
operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the
TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter

is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out
of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

Table 157: PHPIOC technical data
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of -

IBase
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15ms -
Max. = 25ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25ms -
Max. = 40 ms
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -
8.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output OC4PTOC
335
Technical manual

Current protection
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51/67
3-phase output
TOC-REVA V2 EN
8.2.2 Functionality
The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC has an inverse
or definite time delay independent for step 1 to 4 separately.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined time characteristic.
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the
steps.
Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block
each step individually
336
Technical manual

Current protection
OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
ST2NDHRM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
IEC06000187 V3 EN
Figure 157: OC4PTOC function block
8.2.4 Signals
Table 158: OC4PTOC Input signals
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
337
Technical manual

Current protection

ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
step2
step3
step4
Table 159: OC4PTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
338
Technical manual

Current protection

ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1
8.2.5 Settings
Table 160: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)
On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
339
Technical manual

Current protection

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step
ANSI Very inv. 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1 in
% of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of
IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step
1
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv. 2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
% of IBase
340
Technical manual

Current protection

for step 2
IBase
for step 2
2
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv. 3
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
% of IBase
for step 3
IBase
for step 3
3
Forward
Reverse
341
Technical manual

Current protection

ANSI Very inv. 4
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
% of IBase
for step 4
IBase
for step 4
4
Table 161: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in %
of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in % of
fundamental curr
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
342
Technical manual

Current protection

tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
HarmBlock1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
On restrain
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
On restrain
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
343
Technical manual

Current protection

curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
On restrain
Table 162: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
groups

Table 163: OC4PTOC Monitored data
DIRL1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
344
Technical manual

Current protection

The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC is divided into four different
sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an
operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.
The protection design can be divided in four parts:
• The direction element

• The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
• The four step over current function
• The mode selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter

DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
4 step over current

Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START
U3P
TRIP
Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
en05000740-2-en.vsd
IEC05000740 V2 EN
Figure 158: Functional overview of OC4PTOC
345
Technical manual

Current protection
A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3
or 3 out of 3.
The sampled analogue phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function

block. Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step
phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC, it is possible to
select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to
select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS
option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition
to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current
DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values
are fed to OC4PTOC.
In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the
set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current
is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2 and STL3
are, without delay, activated. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are common for
all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation. The START
signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be noted that the selection
of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional part of
OC4PTOC.
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local
HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service
operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the
pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current
angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the
directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement
at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a
combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The
following combinations are used.
346
Technical manual

Current protection
Phase-phase short circuit:
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
Phase-earth short circuit:
U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:
• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and
an angle window AngleROA.
347
Technical manual

Current protection
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN
Figure 159: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection
The default value of AngleRCA is –65°. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.
If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available.
It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for
inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse characteristics".
All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary
input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.
348
Technical manual

Current protection
Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
tx TRx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b
AND
STx
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse
Characteristx=Inverse
DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC12000008.vsd
IEC12000008.vsd
IEC12000008 V2 EN
Figure 160: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC
Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse

characteristics".
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set

operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the
operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching
state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from
the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
8.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC can
be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental
frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by
parameter 2ndHarmStab setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can be selectively
blocked by parameter HarmRestrainx setting. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is
active, the OC4PTOC function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value
one.
349
Technical manual

Current protection
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
IEC13000014 V2 EN
Figure 161: Second harmonic blocking

Table 164: OC4PTOC technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of -

lBase
Min. operating current (1-10000)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
2nd harmonic blocking (5–100)% of ± 2.0% of Ir
fundamental
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2 % or ± 35 ms whichever is
Iset greater
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 2.0 % or ± 40 ms whichever is

greater
Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 959, table 960 and table
table 959, table 960 and table 961 961
Operate time, start non-directional Min. = 15 ms
at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at Min. = 15 ms
2 to 0 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x -
Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
350
Technical manual

Current protection
8.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

EFPIOC
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>
IEF V1 EN
8.3.2 Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at
minimum source impedance. EFPIOC is configured to measure the residual current
from the three-phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the current from
a separate current input.

EFPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTEN
IEC06000269 V2 EN
Figure 162: EFPIOC function block
8.3.4 Signals
Table 165: EFPIOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLKAR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for auto reclose
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier
351
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 166: EFPIOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
8.3.5 Settings
Table 167: EFPIOC Group settings (basic)

On
IN>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
Table 168: EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level
Table 169: EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 170: EFPIOC Monitored data
IN REAL - A Residual current

The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as
well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current
value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC). In a
comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the
function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal
from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output
signal TRIP.
352
Technical manual

Current protection
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via
a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from
the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated
during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

Table 171: EFPIOC technical data
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of -

lBase
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Iset

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Iset
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -
8.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero

sequence or negative sequence directionality)
EF4PTOC
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N/67N
4(IN>)
protection
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN
353
Technical manual

Current protection
8.4.2 Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite
time delay independent for each step.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.
EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.
Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
EF4PTOC can be used as main protection for phase-to-earth faults.
EF4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of the
primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer
circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication

logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end
infeed functionality are available as well.
Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking the
input from neutral CT

EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIN1
I3PPOL* TRIN2
I3PDIR* TRIN3
BLOCK TRIN4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 STIN1
BLKST3 STIN2
BLKST4 STIN3
ENMULT1 STIN4
ENMULT2 STSOTF
ENMULT3 STFW
ENMULT4 STRV
CBPOS 2NDHARMD
CLOSECB
OPENCB
IEC06000424 V4 EN
Figure 163: EF4PTOC function block
8.4.4 Signals
354
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 172: EF4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
step1
step2
step3
step4
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command
Table 173: EF4PTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STIN1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault
function
355
Technical manual

Current protection

STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal
8.4.5 Settings
Table 174: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in
% of IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used for
current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for
current polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in % of
fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Off - - Off Enable blocking at energizing of parallel
On transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - - IN4> Current level blk at parallel transf (step1,
IN2> 2, 3 or 4)
IN3>
IN4>
SOTF Off - - Off SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/
SOTF Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-Open/
Closed -Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start SOTF
Step 3
HarmBlkSOTF Off - - Off Enable harmonic restrain function in
On SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
356
Technical manual

Current protection

ActUnderTime CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time (CB
CB command Pos / CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step 1 in
% of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time
char. is selected
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time
characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for step
1 in % of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
Forward
Reverse
357
Technical manual

Current protection

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
% of IBase
char. is selected
characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for step
2 in % of IBase
value for step 2
On restrain
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
% of IBase
358
Technical manual

Current protection

char. is selected
characteristic
3 in % of IBase
value for step 3
On restrain
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
% of IBase
char. is selected
characteristic
4 in % of IBase
value for step 4
On restrain
359
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 175: EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
ANSI reset
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
360
Technical manual

Current protection

ANSI reset
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
Table 176: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional
Neg seq current
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq current
SeqTypeUPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq voltage

Table 177: EF4PTOC Monitored data
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between
voltage and current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle
361
Technical manual

Current protection

This function has the following three “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the
configuration tool:
1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
2. U3P, input used for “Voltage Polarizing Quantity”. Supply either zero or
negative sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3PPOL, input used for “Current Polarizing Quantity”. Provide polarizing
current to the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the
grounding of a power transformer.
4. I3PDIR, input used for “Directional detection”. Supply either zero or negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
8.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function
The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:
1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example,
connected to:
• parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
• one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and earth (that is, current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).
• one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two star
points of double star shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function Analog
Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such
case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the
pre-processing block by using the following formula (will take I2 from SMAI
AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was connected to I3P input also):
If zero sequence current is selected,
Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

362
Technical manual

Current protection
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation
current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the residual current is
larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a
signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay,
activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common START
signal.
8.4.7.2 Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction
to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current
(3I0) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically
connected to one single current transformer located between power system star
point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a star connected
transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input
can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three
phases (Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function analog input
I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In
such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs
into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where:
363
Technical manual

Current protection
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is
then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to
calculate equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the following
formula:
UIPol = Z 0s × IPol = (RNPol + j × XNPol) × IPol

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be

bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UTotPol=UUPol + UIPol=UPol + Z 0s × IPol = UPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) × Ipol

UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence
component depending upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (Forward/
Reverse).
8.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx to provide
external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the
following functions if available in the IED:
1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose
protection function.
8.4.7.4 Directional detection for earth fault function
Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for earth fault
function. In some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong.
Negative sequence quantities will be used in such scenario. The user can select either
zero sequence components or negative sequence components for detecting
directionality with the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input always connected to the
same source as I3P input.
364
Technical manual

Current protection
8.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection
The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base
current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in
primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase
voltage of the protected object in primary kV.
8.4.7.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking
during switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.
Each part is described separately in the following sections.
8.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps
Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in
facilities:
• Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted that
the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual
overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
“directional supervision element”.
• Residual current start value.
• Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault
protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section
"Inverse characteristics".
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the
complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "".
365
Technical manual

Current protection
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay
and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup
value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 164.
BLKTR
EMULTX
IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b
a>b
F a
tx TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR t
a>b
b
STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
AND Inverse
BLKSTx
AND
BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse
txmin
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
OR t
HarmRestrainx=Off
DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC10000008.vsd
IEC10000008 V5 EN
Figure 164: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary
input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary
input BLKTR.
8.4.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function
It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps
shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the
366
Technical manual

Current protection
directional supervision element and the integrated directional

comparison function.
The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current lop
is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:
1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 165, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.
Operating area
STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg
RCA
65° Upol = -3U 0
-RCA +85 deg
RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR
STFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai
IEC11000243 V1 EN
Figure 165: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the
zero sequence components
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
367
Technical manual

Current protection
• Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger

than 40% of I>Dir and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC function output binary signals:
1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger

than setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in
forward direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger
than 60% of setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects
fault in reverse direction.
These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 166:
368
Technical manual

Current protection
| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND STFW
I>Dir b
FORWARD_Int
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin
Characteristic
Directional
polMethod=Dual UPol IPolMin
T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F
UIPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
RNPol Complex X T STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
IEC07000067 V5 EN
Figure 166: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step
8.4.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element
A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC

can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of the
2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the
residual current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab) then
2NDHARMD function output signal is set to logical value one and harmonic
restraining feature to the function block will be applicable.
Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:
369
Technical manual

Current protection
1. Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk

2. Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk
3. Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter
2ndHarmStab setting
If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then 2NDHARMD function output signal
is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block is
applicable.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can
be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be
required to stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers in the
station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If
one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the
asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation
of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd
harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers is in phase opposition. The
summation of the two currents thus gives a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual
fundamental current is however significant. The inrush current of the transformer in
service before the parallel transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the
first transformer. Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially.
After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic
blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain
signal is latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a
selected step current level by using setting UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-
in feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously
fulfilled:
1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible to
select which one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or IN3>
or IN4>).
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by
parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 167.
370
Technical manual

Current protection
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
q-1
t=70ms OR
t AND OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int
BlkParTransf=On
a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000015 V3 EN
Figure 167: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature
8.4.7.10 Switch on to fault feature
Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic
(SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either
SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk
to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The
SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during
which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the
setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by
setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from change
in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting
parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB
position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current start from
371
Technical manual

Current protection
step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF.
This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-Time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function.
The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This
enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker
closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately
after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command
pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start
from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is
normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time
logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active
immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in
solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
SOTF
Open
t4U
Closed
ActivationSOTF
Close command
tSOTF
AND
AND t
STIN2
StepForSOTF
STIN3
OperationMode
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME TRIP
UnderTime
tUnderTime
SOTF or
AND
2nd Harmonic
HarmResSOFT t UnderTime
OR
Open
Close OR
t4U
ActUnderTime
Close command AND
STIN4
IEC06000643 V4 EN
Figure 168: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features
EF4PTOC Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC
function is shown in figure 169:
372
Technical manual

Current protection
signal to
commu nica tion
sche me
Directio nal Che ck
Elemen t
4 step over current

INP ol Directio n
ope ratin gCurrent elemen t TRIP
Elemen t
3U0 One ele me nt fo r ea ch
earthFaultDir ection step
3I0
ang leValid
I3PDIR
DirMode
ena bleDir
harmRestrB lock
3I0 Harmonic
Restrain t 1
Elemen t
star t step 2, 3 and 4
Blocking at par allel

transfor mer s
SwitchO nTo Fa ult
TRIP
CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
ena bleDir
Mode
Sele ction ena bleStep1-4
Directio nalMode1-4
IEC06000376 V3 EN
Figure 169: Functional overview of EF4PTOC

Table 178: EF4PTOC technical data
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I < Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (1-2500)% of lBase -

Operate current for directional (1–100)% of lBase For RCA ± 60 degrees:
comparison ± 2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 2.5% of I < Ir
Independent time delay for step (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is

1, 2, 3, and 4 greater at 0 to 2 x Iset
Inverse characteristics, see table 18 curve types See table 959, table 960 and table
959, table 960 and table 961 961
Second harmonic restrain (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of Ir
operation
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir
373
Technical manual

Current protection

Real part of source Z used for (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -
current polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
for current polarization
Operate time, start function at 0 to Min 18 ms -
2 x Iset Max 28 ms
Reset time, start function at 2 to 0 Min 18 ms -

x Iset Max 28 ms
8.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4
IEC10000053 V1 EN
8.5.2 Functionality
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized.
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.
NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short
circuits, phase-phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of the
primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer
circuit failure.
374
Technical manual

Current protection
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication

logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for
directional zero sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weak-end infeed
functionality are available.

NS4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TR1
U3P* TR2
BLOCK TR3
BLKTR TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ENMULT1 ST4
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4
IEC10000054 V2 EN
Figure 170: NS4PTOC function block
8.5.4 Signals
Table 179: NS4PTOC Input signals
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
step1
step2
step3
step4
375
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 180: NS4PTOC Output signals

TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal
8.5.5 Settings
Table 181: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
Forward
Reverse
376
Technical manual

Current protection

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for
step 1 in % of IBase
char. is selected
characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 1
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
char. is selected
377
Technical manual

Current protection

characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
value for step 2
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
char. is selected
characteristic
value for step 3
Forward
Reverse
378
Technical manual

Current protection

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
char. is selected
characteristic
value for step 4
Table 182: NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

ANSI reset
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
time curve for step
379
Technical manual

Current protection

ANSI reset
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
ANSI reset
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
380
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 183: NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 184: NS4PTOC Monitored data
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between
voltage and current

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the
following three “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the configuration tool:
1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. U3P, input used for “Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
8.5.7.1 Operating quantity within the function
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always uses
negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence
current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-
processing block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block
by using the following formula:
381
Technical manual

Current protection
1
I2 = (
× IL1 + a × IL 2 + a × IL 3
2
)
3
where:
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1∠120 deg
a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1∠240 deg
The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the negative
sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-
directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal,
without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this step and a common
START signal.
8.5.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the
fault (Forward/Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the
voltage polarizing method.
NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P. This
voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-
processing block calculates -U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:
1
UPol = -U 2 = - × (UL1 + a 2 × UL 2 + a × UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing
382
Technical manual

Current protection
the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by
setting UpolMin.
Note that –U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.
8.5.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if
available in the IED:
• Distance protection directional function

• Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose
protection function
8.5.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
• Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

• Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative
sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)
Each part is described separately in the following sections.
8.5.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages
Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as

measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:
• Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter

setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional
decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself. The
direction of the fault is determined in common “Directional Supervision
Element” described in the next paragraph.
• Negative sequence current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence
overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics
are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves, refer to Chapter ""
383
Technical manual

Current protection
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this

parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For
the complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter ""
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay
and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by
external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative
sequence current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has
logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the
following figure:
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRx
|IOP| AND
tx
a OR
a>b
ENMULTx b
STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse
Characteristx=Inverse
DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC09000683.vsd
IEC09000683 V3 EN
Figure 171: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.
8.5.7.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function
At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be

set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional
384
Technical manual

Current protection
supervision element and the integrated directional comparison

function.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 165, to determine the direction of the fault.
Reverse
Area
AngleRCA Upol=-U2
Forward
Area
Iop = I2
IEC10000031 V1 EN
Figure 172: Operating characteristic for fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
• Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than

40% of I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC output binary signals:
385
Technical manual

Current protection
1. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area,

see fig 165 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
2. STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 165. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
I>Dir)
These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 166:
|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b REVERSE_Int
AND
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l
UPolMin
IPolMin
t
Iop
UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
IEC07000067-4.vsd
IEC07000067-4 V2 EN
Figure 173: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step
386
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 185: NS4PTOC technical data
Operate value, negative (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
sequence current, step 1-4 ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is
step 1, 2, 3, and 4 at 0 to 2 x Iset greater
Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 959, table 960 and table
table 959, table 960 and table 961
961
Minimum operate current for (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
steps 1 - 4 ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate value, negative (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ± 60 degrees:
current for directional release ± 2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 2.5% of I at I > Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Real part of negative (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Imaginary part of negative (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Operate time, start function at Min = 15 ms -
0 to 2 x Iset Max = 30 ms
Reset time, start function at 2 Min = 15 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max = 30 ms
Critical impulse time, start 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

function
Impulse margin time, start 15 ms typically -
function
Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -
8.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection
387
Technical manual

Current protection
8.6.2 Functionality
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and
the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively,
the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle φ.
Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-
to-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
power component 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current
and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.
A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.
A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional residual
overvoltage protection.
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90º phase
shift compared to the residual voltage ( 3U0). The characteristic angle is chosen to -90º
in such a network.
In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor, the
active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used
for the earth fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen to 0º.
As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the
following:
• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase,
1 A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network
applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse
time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks,
with large capacitive earth fault currents. In such networks, the active fault
current would be small and by using sensitive directional residual power
protection, the operating quantity is elevated. Therefore, better possibility to
detect earth faults. In addition, in low impedance earthed networks, the inverse
388
Technical manual

Current protection
time characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of high zero-resistive fault

currents.
Phase
currents
IN
Phase-
ground
voltages
UN
IEC13000013 V1 EN
Figure 174: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block
Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3.
For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.
Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to

GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2
and GRPxL3 the internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0) will be used.

SDEPSDE
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKTR TRUN
BLKTRDIR START
BLKNDN STDIRIN
BLKUN STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL
IEC07000032 V2 EN
Figure 175: SDEPSDE function block
389
Technical manual

Current protection
8.6.4 Signals
Table 186: SDEPSDE Input signals
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the trip outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the directional operate outputs of the
function
BLKNDN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs
Table 187: SDEPSDE Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current function
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current
TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage
START BOOLEAN General start of the function
STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual over current
function
STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over current
STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over voltage
STFW BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in forward
direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in reverse
direction
STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault. A general signal common to all
three mode of residual over current protection
UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of all
directional modes
390
Technical manual

Current protection
8.6.5 Settings
Table 188: SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for protection
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
Reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release in
phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over
current in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time
count in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual over
current prot in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of res power for inverse
time count in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non directional residual over
current in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
over current, in sec
TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT
ANSI Very inv. operation
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
391
Technical manual

Current protection

tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN 0.05 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current
protection
OpUN> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overvoltage protection
UN> 1.00 - 200.00 %UB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-directional residual over
voltage in % of UBase
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual
over voltage, in sec
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all directional
modes in % of IBase
UNRel> 1.00 - 300.00 %UB 0.01 3.00 Residual release voltage for all direction
modes in % of UBase
Table 189: SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay used for reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Setting P for customer programmable
curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting A for customer programmable
curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Setting B for customer programmable
curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting C for customer programmable
curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - - IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off.
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Setting PR for customer programmable
curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting TR for customer programmable
curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting CR for customer programmable
curve
Table 190: SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selection for function groups
Table 191: SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

RotResU 0 deg - - 180 deg Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
180 deg necessary
392
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 192: SDEPSDE Monitored data
INCOSPHI REAL - A Magnitude of residual
current along the
polarizing quantity
3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN REAL - A Measured magnitude of
the residual current 3I0
UN REAL - kV Measured magnitude of
the residual voltage 3U0
SN REAL - MVA Measured magnitude of
residual power
3I03U0cos(Fi-RCA)
ANG FI-RCA REAL - deg Angle between 3U0 and
3I0 minus RCA (Fi-RCA)
8.6.7.1 Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from pre-
processor blocks.
The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0·cos φ

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (|
φ=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)|). The reference voltage (Uref) is the polarizing quantity which
is used for directionality and is defined as Uref = -3U0 e—jRCADir, that is -3U0 inversely
rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir. RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in
a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current
component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90° in
an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when
3I0·cos φ gets larger than the set value.
393
Technical manual

Current protection
RCADir = 0o,ROADir = 90o
3I0
j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cosj
IEC06000648 V4 EN
Figure 176: RCADir set to 0°
Uref
RCADir = −90 , ROADir = 90
3I0
3I0 ⋅ cos ϕ
ϕ = ang (3I0 ) − ang (Uref )
−3U0
IEC06000649 V3 EN
Figure 177: RCADir set to -90°
For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos φ, the residual current 3I0, and the residual
voltage 3U0 must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhi>, INRel> and UNRel>.
Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 181.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay
tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip from this
sub-function has definite time delay.
394
Technical manual

Current protection
ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the

reference direction in order to detect directionality. Figure 178 shows the restrictions
made by the ROADir.
RCADir = 0o
3I0
Operate area
j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cos j
ROADir
IEC06000650 V2 EN
Figure 178: Characteristic with ROADir restriction
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as 3I0·cos (φ + 180°) ≥ the set value.
It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle
error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 179:
395
Technical manual

Current protection
RCADir = 0º
Operate area
-3U0 =Uref
Instrument
transformer
angle error 
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation
3I0 (prim) 3I0 (to prot)
IEC06000651 V3 EN
Figure 179: Explanation of RCAComp
Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
(Uref = -3U0 e-jRCA) compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (|
φ=ang(3I0)—ang(Uref)|). The function operates when 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ gets larger than
the set value SN>. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 181.
For trip, the residual power 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ, the residual current 3I0 and the release
voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).
tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and
TRDIRIN get activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as 3I0 · 3U0·cos (φ + 180°) ³ the set value.
396
Technical manual

Current protection
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
kSN × (3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(reference))

t inv =
3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(measured)
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and φ

The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the
angle |φ = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)| is within the sector RCADir ± ROADir
RCADir = 0º
ROADir = 80º
Operate area
3I0
-3U0
IEC06000652 V3 EN
Figure 180: Example of characteristic
For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel> and INDir>, and
residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel>. In addition, the angle φ shall be
in the set area defined by ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical diagram
in Figure 181.
tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as φ is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180° ± ROADir
397
Technical manual

Current protection
This variant has definite time delay.
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the
forward direction, and STRV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction, a fault in the reverse
direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction will give the
start signal STFW.
Non-directional earth fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The
function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or backup to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.
The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum
of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with
high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive earth fault
protection will saturate.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay (TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC
60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the output
signal STNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time
delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.
Residual overvoltage release and protection

All the directional functions shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher
than a set level UNRel>.
In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection,

with its own definite time delay tUN and set level UN>.
For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output
signal STUN is active for the set delay tUNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP
and TRUN get activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown
in Figure 181.
398
Technical manual

Current protection
OpINNonDir> = On
STNDIN
&
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
TimeChar IN
OpUN> = On
STUN
&
UN>
tUN TRUN
t
OpMode = 3I0Cosfi
INRel>
UNRel> & &

tDef
INCosPhi> t
OpMode = 3I0 and fi

& ³ STDIRIN
INDir> &
1
tDef ³ TRDIRIN
t 1
OpMode = 3I03U0Cosfi
& &
SN>
t
³ S
1 N
STFW
RCADir Direction &
Detection
RCAComp Logic STRV
&
ROADir
DirMode = Forward
DirMode = Reverse
IEC06000653.vsd
IEC06000653 V4 EN
Figure 181: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection

Table 193: SDEPSDE technical data
Operate level for 3I0·cosj (0.25-200.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
directional residual ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
overcurrent
Operate level for ·3I0·3U0 cosj (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ± 1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr
directional residual power ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr
Operate level for 3I0 and j (0.25-200.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at £ Ir

residual overcurrent ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
399
Technical manual

Current protection

Operate level for non- (1.00-400.00)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
directional overcurrent ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate level for non- (1.00-200.00)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

directional residual ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
overvoltage
Residual release current for all (0.25-200.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
directional modes ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Residual release voltage for (1.00-300.00)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

all directional modes ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Operate time for non- Min = 40 ms

directional residual
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Max = 65 ms
Reset time for non-directional Min = 40 ms

residual overcurrent at 2 to 0 x
Iset Max = 65 ms
Operate time for directional Min = 115 ms

Iset Max = 165 ms
Reset time for directional Min = 25 ms

Iset Max = 65 ms
Independent time delay for (0.000 – 60.000) sec ±0.2% or ± 80 ms whichever is

non-directional residual greater
overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Uset
non-directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Inverse characteristics 16 curve types See table 959, table 960 and table
961
RCA
Relay Open angle ROA (0 to 90) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
8.7 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR
400
Technical manual

Current protection
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants
SYMBOL-A V1 EN
8.7.2 Functionality
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be
damaged. The insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a
consequence of this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults will
increase.
The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer
(temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the
transformer with two time constants, which is based on current measurement.
Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be done
before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to
the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.
The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.

TRPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
COOLING ALARM1
ENMULT ALARM2
RESET LOCKOUT
WARNING
IEC06000272 V2 EN
Figure 182: TRPTTR function block
401
Technical manual

Current protection
8.7.4 Signals
Table 194: TRPTTR Input signals
SIGNAL
COOLING BOOLEAN 0 Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and time
constant
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
Table 195: TRPTTR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip Signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
ALARM1 BOOLEAN First level alarm signal
ALARM2 BOOLEAN Second level alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal: Trip within set warning time
8.7.5 Settings
Table 196: TRPTTR Group settings (basic)
On
IRef 10.0 - 1000.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Reference current in % of IBase
IRefMult 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplication Factor for reference current
IBase1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current,IBase1 without Cooling
input in % of IBase
IBase2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input
ON in % of IBase
Tau1 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant without cooling input in
min, with IBase1
Tau2 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant with cooling input in min,
with IBase2
IHighTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-IHIGH
Tau1High 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is >
IHIGH-TC1
ILowTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-ILOW
402
Technical manual

Current protection

Tau1Low 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is <
ILOW-TC1
IHighTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-IHIGH
Tau2High 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is
>IHIGH-TC2
ILowTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is <
ILOW-TC2
ITrip 50.0 - 250.0 %IBx 1.0 110.0 Steady state operate current level in % of
IBasex
Alarm1 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 80.0 First alarm level in % of heat content trip
value
Alarm2 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 90.0 Second alarm level in % of heat content
trip value
ResLo 10.0 - 95.0 %Itr 1.0 60.0 Lockout reset level in % of heat content
trip value
ThetaInit 0.0 - 95.0 % 1.0 50.0 Initial Heat content, in % of heat content
trip value
Warning 1.0 - 500.0 Min 0.1 30.0 Time setting, below which warning would
be set (in min)
tPulse 0.01 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec).
Table 197: TRPTTR Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 198: TRPTTR Monitored data
HEATCONT REAL - % Percentage of the heat
content of the
transformer
I-MEASUR REAL - % Current measured by the
function in % of the rated
current
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
403
Technical manual

Current protection

TRESLO INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset of
the function (in min)
TTRIPCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to
1=Long Time trip: not active/long time/
2=Active active
TRESCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to
1=Long Time reset: not active/long
2=Active time/active

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the
true RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed
to the protection function.
From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content)
is calculated according to the expression:
2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷
ç I ref
è ø
where:
I is the largest phase current
Iref is a given reference current
If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current, then the start output signal START will
be activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
If Q final > Q n
æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-
è ø
If Q final < Qn
404
Technical manual

Current protection
Dt
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Qn -1 ) × e
-
t
where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature
Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step
Qfinal is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current
Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
t is the set thermal time constant Tau1 or Tau2 for the protected transformer
The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported

from the function as a real figure HEATCONT.
When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or
Alarm2 the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When
the temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to
continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.
There is also a calculation of the time to operation with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:
æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as an
integer output TTRIP.
After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The output
lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is above the
set lockout release temperature setting ResLo.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q final - Q n
è ø
In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 70.
The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the
function as a real figure, TRESLO.
405
Technical manual

Current protection
When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated time
to trip is continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this
calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output
WARNING is activated.
In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.
Final Temp START

> TripTemp
RESET HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content
I3P
Calculation
ENMULT of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >
Alarm1,Alarm2
ALARM2
Temp
Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp
S LOCKOUT
Management of R
COOLING setting
parameters: Tau,
Actual Temp
IBase Tau used
< Recl
Temp
TTRIP
Calculation
of time to
WARNING
trip
Calculation
of time to TRESCAL
reset of
lockout
IEC05000833 V2 EN
Figure 183: Functional overview of TRPTTR
406
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 199: TRPTTR technical data
Base current 1 and 2 (30–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate time: Ip = load current before overload ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever

occurs is greater
æ I 2 - I p2 ö Time constant τ = (0.10–500.00)
t = t × ln ç ÷ minutes
ç I 2 - I ref 2 ÷
è ø
I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
Iref = reference load current
Alarm level 1 and 2 (50–99)% of heat content operate ±2.0% of heat content trip
value
Operate current (50–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reset level temperature (10–95)% of heat content trip ±2.0% of heat content trip
8.8 Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and

output CCRBRF
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
8.8.2 Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based,
contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve
high security against inadvertent operation.
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
407
Technical manual

Current protection
CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria can
be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase plus the
residual current start. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command.
CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of the

own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.

CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT
IEC06000188 V2 EN
Figure 184: CCRBRF function block
8.8.4 Signals
Table 200: CCRBRF Input signals
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start of breaker failure protection
function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L1
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip
instantaneously
408
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 201: CCRBRF Output signals

TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection
function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase
L1
L2
L3
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
8.8.5 Settings
Table 202: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)
On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection for trip based on Current/
Contact Contact/Current&Contact
Current/Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out of 3
1 out of 3 or 1 out of 4
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos
CB Pos Check Check/No CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase
start
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration
Table 203: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

I>BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase block operation using
Function Mode Contact
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay to t2 for a second
back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit
breaker indicated
409
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 204: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 205: CCRBRF Monitored data
IL1 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
IN REAL - A Measured residual
current

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from protection trip command, either
from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective
start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to
open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For
transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function
can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The re-trip
function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip
is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate
current level.
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected
by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation and a
special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication. The special algorithm
enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the
current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not detected breaker
opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
• The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up
trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up
trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed
breaker.
• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4
410
Technical manual

Current protection
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high
residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or
residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
• It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and for
multi-phase faults.
• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the
circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
START 30 ms
STL1 OR BFP Started L1

150 ms
AND S
SR Q t Time out L1
R AND
BLOCK
OR
Reset L1
Retrip Time Out L1
BackupTrip L1 OR
IEC09000976 V1 EN
Figure 185: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic
IP>
a
a>b
b
FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR
Contact
1 Time out L1
Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1
IL1 CB Closed L1
AND
OR
BFP Started L1
a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b
CBCLDL1 Contact Closed L1

AND
IEC09000977 V1 EN
Figure 186: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF, CB position evaluation
411
Technical manual

Current protection
t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1 TRRETL2 TRRET
phases OR
tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRETL1
OR
1
OR AND
CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed L1
CBFLT
IEC09000978 V3 EN
Figure 187: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function
BFP Started L1
BFP Started L2 AND
BFP Started L3
AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b
BUTripMode Contact Closed L1

2 out of 4
1 out of 4 OR
1
1 out of 3 OR
Current High L2
From other
Current High L3
phases
Current High L1 AND
CBFLT
AND
t2
BFP Started L1 Backup Trip L1
t AND
OR
t2MPh
AND t
AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
From other BFP Started L2 2 of 3
phases BFP Started L3 tPulse
t3
OR
TRBU2
S Q t
R SR
AND
IEC09000979 V3 EN
Figure 188: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function
Internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, Current High L3 have
logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting
parameter IP>.
412
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 206: CCRBRF technical data
Operate phase (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
current ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, phase > 95% -

current
Operate residual (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
current ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, residual > 95% -

current
Phase current level (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
for blocking of ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
contact function
Reset ratio > 95% -
Operate time for 10 ms typically -
current detection
Reset time for current 15 ms maximum -
detection
Time delay for re-trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
at 0 to 2 x Iset greater
Time delay for back- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is

up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset greater
Time delay for back- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is

up trip at multi-phase greater
start at 0 to 2 x Iset
Additional time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is

for a second back-up greater
trip at 0 to 2 x Iset
Time delay for alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is

for faulty circuit greater
breaker
8.9 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN
413
Technical manual

Current protection
8.9.2 Functionality
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal
stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation persists
the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.
The Pole discordance protection function CCPDSC operates based on information

from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional
criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

CCPDSC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL
IEC13000305 V1 EN
Figure 189: CCPDSC function block
8.9.4 Signals
Table 207: CCPDSC Input signals
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing
cycle
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three closed indication from CB
414
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 208: CCPDSC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
START BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay
8.9.5 Settings
Table 209: CCPDSC Group settings (basic)
On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and trip
signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase
Table 210: CCPDSC Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 211: CCPDSC Monitored data
IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 190.
415
Technical manual

Current protection
circuit breaker
Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker
en05000287.vsd
IEC05000287 V2 EN
Figure 190: Pole discordance external detection logic
This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 191.
C.B.
poleOneClosed from C.B.
poleTwoClosed from C.B.
poleThreeClosed from C.B.
+
poleOneOpened from C.B.
poleTwoOpened from C.B.
poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
IEC05000288 V1 EN
Figure 191: Pole discordance signals for internal logic
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay.
Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current

measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the
largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the setting
CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is
started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse
150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either
continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.
416
Technical manual

Current protection
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with
a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance
protection function CCPDSC is shown in figure 192.
BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR
PolPosAuxCont
AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR
PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN
Figure 192: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCPDSC -

contact and current based
CCPDSC is blocked if:
• The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
• The input signal BLOCK is high
• The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on
SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external device, then
BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this binary input is
connected to a signalization “1phase autoreclosing in progress” from the external
autoreclosing device.
417
Technical manual

Current protection
If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate
a trip signal TRIP:
• Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical current detection.
8.9.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker
If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discordance status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact
for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase
connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip
pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.
8.9.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection
Unsymmetrical current indicated if:
• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
three phases.
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time
delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has
received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms
limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.
The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can
be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field
(that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software
connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close command from a
control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

Table 212: CCPDSC technical data
Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Independent time delay between (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 25 ms whichever is

trip condition and trip signal greater
418
Technical manual

Current protection
8.10 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect
the generator itself.
Figure 193 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for
unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set
the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about
2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to
the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
419
Technical manual

Current protection
Underpower IED Overpower IED
Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line
Margin Margin
P P
Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque
IEC06000315 V2 EN
Figure 193: Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

GUPPDUP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
IEC07000027 V2 EN
Figure 194: GUPPDUP function block
8.10.4 Signals
Table 213: GUPPDUP Input signals
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
420
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 214: GUPPDUP Output signals

TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBase
8.10.5 Settings
Table 215: GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
On
OpMode1 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase
senistivity stage 2
Table 216: GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
421
Technical manual

Current protection

UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
angles at 30% of Ir
angles at 100% of Ir
Table 217: GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

Table 218: GUPPDUP Monitored data
P REAL - MW Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of
SBase

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 195. The function has two stages with individual settings.
422
Technical manual

Current protection
Chosen current
phasors P
Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) < t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1
S(angle) < t TRIP2

Power2
START2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
IEC09000018 V2 EN
Figure 195: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 219.
Table 219: Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
423
Technical manual

Current protection

L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90° the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is
activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For
directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay
TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip
from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For
generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down
to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a
smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 ·
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out and
that the timer of the stage will reset.
8.10.7.1 Low pass filtering
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
424
Technical manual

Current protection
S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
TD
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k=0.92
in case of slow operating functions.
8.10.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 196.
425
Technical manual

Current protection
IEC05000652 V2 EN
Figure 196: Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or
in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent
of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in
percent of base power: QPERCENT.

Table 220: GUPPDUP technical data
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr
where
S r = 1.732 × U r × I r
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to (0.01-6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 40 ms whichever is
operate for Step 1 and Step 2 at greater
2 to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000
426
Technical manual

Current protection
8.11 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.
Figure 197 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for
unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set
the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about
2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to
the generator is higher than 1%.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
427
Technical manual

Current protection
Underpower IED Overpower IED
Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line
Margin Margin
P P
Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque
IEC06000315 V2 EN
Figure 197: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

GOPPDOP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
IEC07000028 V2 EN
Figure 198: GOPPDOP function block
8.11.4 Signals
Table 221: GOPPDOP Input signals
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
428
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 222: GOPPDOP Output signals

START BOOLEAN Common start
P REAL Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in % of SBase
8.11.5 Settings
Table 223: GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
On
OpMode1 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1
senistivity stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2
senistivity stage 2
429
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 224: GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of
SBase
angles at 5% of Ir
angles at 30% of Ir
angles at 100% of Ir
Table 225: GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
430
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 226: GOPPDOP Monitored data
P REAL - MW Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power P in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power Q in
MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power Q in % of
SBase

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 199. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Chosen current
phasors P
Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) > t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1
S(angle) > t TRIP2

Power2
START2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
IEC06000567 V2 EN
Figure 199: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 227.
431
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 227: Complex power calculation

L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90° the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component
is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2)
signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages
a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a
common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) – drop-power1(2)). For
generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to
0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller
432
Technical manual

Current protection
value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) – Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 ·
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant
that the timer of the stage will reset.
8.11.7.1 Low pass filtering
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k =
0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
8.11.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 200.
433
Technical manual

Current protection
IEC05000652 V2 EN
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.
434
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 228: GOPPDOP technical data
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Start value P=0.5% of Sr
When measuring transformer Pickup accuracy of ±0.20% of
inputs are used, the following Sr*)
accuracy can be obtained for
Start value P=0.2% of Sr
low pickup settings which are
Pickup accuracy of ±0.15% of
typical for reverse power
Sr*)
protection application:
where
S r = 1.732 × U r × I r
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Operate time, start at 0.5 to 2 x Min. =10 ms
Sr and k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0.5 x Sr Min. = 35 ms
and k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms
Independent time delay to (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
operate for Step 1 and Step 2 at greater
0.5 to 2 x Sr and k=0.000
*) To achieve this accuracy for reverse power protection it is also recommended to apply settings
k=0.990 and Mode=PosSeq. These settings will help to minimize the overall measurement error
ensuring the best accuracy for this application.
8.12 Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for

machines NS2PTOC
Negative sequence time overcurrent NS2PTOC 2I2> 46I2
protection for machines
Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC is intended
primarily for the protection of generators against possible overheating of the rotor
caused by negative sequence current in the stator current.
The negative sequence currents in a generator may, among others, be caused by:
435
Technical manual

Current protection
• Unbalanced loads
• Line to line faults
• Line to earth faults
• Broken conductors
• Malfunction of one or more poles of a circuit breaker or a disconnector
NS2PTOC can also be used as a backup protection, that is, to protect the generator in
case line protections or circuit breakers fail to clear unbalanced system faults.
To provide an effective protection for the generator for external unbalanced

conditions, NS2PTOC is able to directly measure the negative sequence current.
NS2PTOC also has a time delay characteristic which matches the heating
2
characteristic of the generator I 2 t = K as defined in standard IEEE C50.13.
where:
I2 is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated
generator current
t is operating time in seconds
K is a constant which depends of the generators size and design
NS2PTOC has a wide range of K settings and the sensitivity and capability of
detecting and tripping for negative sequence currents down to the continuous
capability of a generator.
In order to match the heating characteristics of the generator a reset time parameter can
be set.
A separate definite time delayed output is available as an alarm feature to warn the
operator of a potentially dangerous situation.
NS2PTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKST1 TR2
BLKST2 START
BLKTR ST1
ST2
ALARM
NSCURR
IEC08000359.vsdx
IEC08000359-1-EN V3 EN
Figure 201: NS2PTOC function block
436
Technical manual

Current protection
8.12.4 Signals
Table 229: NS2PTOC Input signals
I3P GROUP - Group connection for neg seq.
SIGNAL
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signals
Table 230: NS2PTOC Output signals

ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
NSCURR REAL Negative sequence current in primary amps
8.12.5 Settings
Table 231: NS2PTOC Group settings (basic)
On
tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 3.00 Time delay for Alarm (operated by START
signal), in sec
OpStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
I2-1> 3 - 500 %IB 1 10 Negative sequence current level for step 1
in % of IBase
CurveType1 Definite - - Definite Selection of definite or inverse time-
Inverse characteri. for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Definite time delay for trip of step 1, in sec
tResetDef1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset of definite timer of
step 1, in sec
K1 1.0 - 99.0 s 0.1 10.0 Neg. seq. capability value of generator for
step 1, in sec
for step 1
437
Technical manual

Current protection

t1Max 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1000.00 Maximum trip delay for step 1, in sec
ResetMultip1 0.01 - 20.00 - 0.01 1.00 Reset multiplier for K1, defines reset time
of inverse curve
OpStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
I2-2> 3 - 500 %IB 1 10 Negative sequence current level for step 2
in % of IBase
CurveType2 Definite - - Definite Selection of definite or inverse time-
Inverse characteri. for step 2
t2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Definite time delay for trip of step 2, in sec
tResetDef2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset of definite timer of
step 2, in sec
K2 1.0 - 99.0 s 0.1 10.0 Neg. seq. capability value of generator for
step 2, in sec
for step 2
t2Max 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1000.00 Maximum trip delay for step 2, in sec
ResetMultip2 0.01 - 20.00 - 0.01 1.00 Reset multiplier for K2, defines reset time
of inverse curve
Table 232: NS2PTOC Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 233: NS2PTOC Monitored data
NSCURR REAL - A Negative sequence
current in primary amps

The negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC)
function directly measures the amplitude of the negative phase sequence component
of the measured current. NS2PTOC sets the START, ST1 or ST2 outputs active and
starts to count trip time only when the measured negative sequence current value rises
above the set value of parameters I2-1> or I2-2> respectively.
To avoid oscillation in the output signals, a certain hysteresis has been included. For
both steps, the reset ratio is 0.97.
438
Technical manual

Current protection
Step 1 of NS2PTOC can operate in the Definite Time (DT) or Inverse Time (IDMT)
mode depending on the selected value for the CurveType1 parameter. If CurveType1=
Definite, NS2PTOC operates with a Definite Time Delay characteristic and if
CurveType1 = Inverse, NS2PTOC operates with an Inverse Time Delay
characteristic. Step 2 is operating in an analogous way as Step 1.
Definite time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of measured negative sequence
current. Once the measured negative sequence current exceeds the set level, the
settable definite timer t1 or t2 respectively, starts to count and the corresponding trip
signal gets activated after the pre-set definite time delay has elapsed. Reset time in
definite time mode is determined by the setting parameters tResetDef1 or tResetDef2
respectively. If NS2PTOC has already started but not tripped and measured negative
sequence current drops below the start value, the start outputs remains active for the
time defined by the resetting parameters.
A BLOCK input signal resets NS2PTOC momentarily.
When the parameter CurveType1 is set to Inverse, an inverse curve is selected

according to selected value for parameter K1. The minimum trip time setting of
parameter t1Min and reset time parameter ResetMultip1 also influence step operation.
However, to match the heating characteristics of the generator, the reset time is
depending on the setting of parameter K1, which must be set according to the
generators negative sequence current capacity.
K = I 2 2t
EQUATION2112 V1 EN
Where:
I2 is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current
t is operating time in seconds

K is a constant [s], which depends on generator size and design
439
Technical manual

Current protection
Operate
time
t1Max
(Default= 1000 s)
t1Min
(Default= 5 s)
K1
Current I2-1>
IEC09000691 V2 EN
Figure 202: Inverse time characteristic with t1Min and t1Max
For a detailed description of inverse time characteristic, see chapter "Inverse

characteristics".
The reset time is exponential and is given by the following expression:
 
 
 ResetMultip 
ResetTime [ s ] = ⋅K
  I 2 
 − 1
NS

  I Start  
Where
INS is the measured negative sequence current
IStart is the desired start level in pu of rated generator current
ResetMultip is multiplier of the generator capability constant K equal to setting K1 and thus defines
reset time of inverse time characteristic
8.12.7.1 Start sensitivity
The trip start levels Current I2-1> and I2-2> of NS2PTOC are freely settable over a
range of 3 to 500 % of rated generator current IBase. The wide range of start setting
is required in order to be able to protect generators of different types and sizes.
440
Technical manual

Current protection
After start, a certain hysteresis is used before resetting start levels. For both steps the
reset ratio is 0.97.
8.12.7.2 Alarm function
The alarm function is operated by START signal and used to warn the operator for an
abnormal situation, for example, when generator continuous negative sequence
current capability is exceeded, thereby allowing corrective action to be taken before
removing the generator from service. A settable time delay tAlarm is provided for the
alarm function to avoid false alarms during short-time unbalanced conditions.
CurveType1=Definite
AND t1 TR1
OR
Negative sequence current a
a>b
b Inverse
I2-1>
Operation=ON AND
t1Min AND
BLKST1
BLOCK
CurveType1=Inverse
t1Max
AND
ST1
IEC08000466-1-EN V4 EN
Figure 203: Simplified logic diagram for step 1 of Negative sequence time
overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC)
Step 2 for Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC)
is similar to step 1.
ST1
START
ST2 OR
tAlarm ALARM
TR1
TRIP
TR2 OR
IEC09000690 V2 EN
Figure 204: Simplified logic diagram for the START, ALARM and TRIP signals for
NS2PTOC
441
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 234: NS2PTOC technical data
Operate current, step 1 - 2 (3-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio >95% -

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Time characteristics Definite or Inverse -
Inverse time characteristic, step 1 - 2 K=1.0-99.0 ±2.0% or ±40 ms whichever is
2 greater
I2 t = K
Reset time, inverse characteristic, Reset Multiplier = 0.01-20.00 ±5.0% or ±40 ms whichever is
step 1 - 2 greater
I 22t = K
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
time characteristic, step 1 - 2 greater
Maximum trip delay at 0.5 to 2 x Iset, (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
step 1 - 2 greater
Independent time delay at 0.5 to 2 x (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

Iset, step 1 - 2 greater
Independent time delay for Alarm at (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

0.5 to 2 x Iset greater
8.13 Accidental energizing protection for synchronous

generator AEGPVOC
Accidental energizing protection for AEGPVOC U 50AE
synchronous generator
442
Technical manual

Current protection
Inadvertent or accidental energizing of off-line generators has occurred often enough

due to operating errors, breaker head flashovers, control circuit malfunctions, or a
combination of these causes. Inadvertently energized generator operates as induction
motor drawing a large current from the system. The voltage supervised overcurrent
protection is used to detect the inadvertently energized generator.
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator (AEGPVOC) takes the

maximum phase current input and maximum phase to phase voltage inputs from the
terminal side. AEGPVOC is enabled when the terminal voltage drops below the
specified voltage level for the preset time.
8.13.1.2 Function block

AEGPVOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK ARMED
BLKTR
IEC13000198 V1 EN
Figure 205: AEGPVOC Function block
8.13.1.3 Signals
Table 235: AEGPVOC Input signals
I3P GROUP - Three Phase Current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three Phase Voltage input
SIGNAL
Table 236: AEGPVOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from accidental energizing of generator
protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal from accidental energizing of generator
protection
ARMED BOOLEAN True when accidental energizing of generator
protection is armed
443
Technical manual

Current protection
8.13.1.4 Settings
Table 237: AEGPVOC Group settings (basic)
On
I> 5 - 900 %IB 1 120 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
tOC 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Trip time delay for over current level
ArmU< 2 - 150 %UB 1 50 Under-voltage level to arm protection in %
of UBase
tArm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to arm protection with U< level
DisarmU> 2 - 200 %UB 1 80 Over-voltage level to disarm protection in
% of UBase
tDisarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Time delay to disarm protection with U>
level
Table 238: AEGPVOC Non group settings (basic)

groups
8.13.1.5 Monitored data

Table 239: AEGPVOC Monitored data
IMAX REAL - A Maximum value of
current
UMAX REAL - kV Maximum value of phase
to phase voltage
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator AEGPVOC function is

connected to three phase current input either from the generator terminal side or from
generator neutral point side and three phase voltage from the generator terminals. The
maximum of the three phase-to-phase voltages and maximum of the three phase
currents are measured.
When the maximum phase-to-phase voltage is less than the ArmU< for the period
tArm, it is ensured that the generator is off-line. The ARMED signal will initiate the
overcurrent function. If the calculated maximum current of the three phases is larger
than I> for the period tOC then the TRIP signal becomes activated. Also START
signal becomes activated when overcurrent is detected.
444
Technical manual

Current protection
When the maximum phase-to-phase voltage is larger than DisarmU> for the period
tDisarm, it is ensured generator is on line. During this state, undervoltage operation is
disarmed, blocking the overcurrent operation and thus the function becomes
inoperative.
BLOCK input can be used to block AEGPVOC . In addition, the BLKTR input that
blocks the TRIP signal is also present. The input BLKTR can be used if AEGPVOC
is to be used only for monitoring purposes.
Imax_DFT
a
a>b
I> b
tOC
AND TRIP
Operation = ON t
BLOCK
START
ARMED
Uph-ph_max_DFT tArm
a
ab
DisarmU> b
ON - Delay
IEC09000784 V2 EN
Figure 206: AEGPVOC logic diagram
8.13.1.7 Technical data

Table 240: AEGPVOC technical data
Operate value, (5-900)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir
overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I>Ir
Reset ratio, overcurrent >95% at (20–900)% of IBase -

Transient overreach, <10% at τ = 100 ms -
overcurrent function
Critical impulse time, 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
overcurrent
Impulse margin time, 15 ms typically -
overcurrent
Operate value, (2-150)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
undervoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Critical impulse time, 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset -

undervoltage
445
Technical manual

Current protection

Impulse margin time, 15 ms typically -
undervoltage
Operate value, (2-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Definite time delay, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

overcurrent, at 0 to 2 x greater
Iset

undervoltage, at 1.2 x greater
Uset to 0.8 x Uset

overvoltage, at 0.8 x greater
Uset to 1.2 x Uset
8.14 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC) function can be used as
generator backup protection against short-circuits.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used either
with definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be voltage
controlled/restrained.
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the
function in order to provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage
seal-in.
446
Technical manual

Current protection

VRPVOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC
BLOCK TRUV
BLKOC START
BLKUV STOC
STUV
IEC12000184 V1 EN
Figure 207: VRPVOC function block
8.14.4 Signals
Table 241: VRPVOC Input signals
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function both stages
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage (ANSI
51V)
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function
Table 242: VRPVOC Output signals

TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
TRUV BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function
STOC BOOLEAN Start signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
STUV BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function
447
Technical manual

Current protection
8.14.5 Settings
Table 243: VRPVOC Group settings (basic)
On
StartCurr 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Start current level in % of IBase
Characterist ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Time delay curve type for 51V Voltage
ANSI Very inv. restrained overcurrent
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
tDef_OC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay for Over Current
k 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for Inverse Definite
Minimum Time curves
tMin 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse Definite
Minimum Time curve
Operation_UV Off - - Off Operation of under-voltage stage (ANSI
On 27) Off / On
StartVolt 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage for start of under-voltage stage in
% of UBase
tDef_UV 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time time delay when used for
Under-Voltage
EnBlkLowV Off - - Off Enable internal low voltage level blocking
On for Under-Voltage
BlkLowVolt 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 3.0 Internal low voltage level for blocking of
UV in % of UBase
Table 244: VRPVOC Group settings (advanced)

VDepMode Step - - Slope Voltage dependent mode OC (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Start current level in % of pickup when U<
25% of UBase
UHighLimit 30.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting in % of UBase
Table 245: VRPVOC Non group settings (basic)

groups
448
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 246: VRPVOC Monitored data
IMAX REAL - A Maximum phase current
magnitude
UUMIN REAL - kV Minimum ph-to-ph
voltage magnitude
8.14.7.1 Measured quantities
The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC function is always

connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration
tool (ACT), but it will always measure the maximum of the three-phase currents and
the minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages. If frequency tracking mode for
preprocessing blocks is used, then the function operates properly in wide frequency
range (e.g. 10-90 Hz).
8.14.7.2 Base quantities
GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base
quantities of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:
IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes.
UBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in

primary kV.
8.14.7.3 Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
with the set start level. The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the measured
current quantity is higher than the set level.
Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection operation is made dependent of a measured voltage
quantity. This means that the start level of the overcurrent step is not constant but
decreases with the decrease in magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. This
feature affects the start current value of both definite time and inverse time IDMT
overcurrent protection; in particular the overcurrent with IDMT curve operates faster
during low voltage conditions. Two different types of dependencies are available:
• Voltage restrained overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Slope); the

start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 208. The
voltage restrained characteristic is defined by the two points: (0.25*UBase ;
449
Technical manual

Current protection
VDepFact *StartCurr/100*IBase) and (UHighLimit/100*UBase; StartCurr/

100*IBase). In the first point the factor 0.25 that multiply UBase cannot be
changed.
Start level of the current
StartCurr
VDepFact * StartCurr
0,25 UHighLimit
UBase
IEC10000123 V2 EN
Figure 208: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
• Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Step); the

start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 209.
Start level of the current
StartCurr
VDepFact * StartCurr
UHighLimit UBase
IEC10000124 V2 EN
Figure 209: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
450
Technical manual

Current protection
DEF time
selected
TROC
OR
MaxPhCurr
a STOC
a>b
b
StartCurr
X Inverse
Inverse
Voltage time
control or selected
restraint
feature
MinPh-PhVoltage
IEC10000214 V1 EN
Figure 210: Simplified internal logic diagram for overcurrent function
DEF time
selected TRUV
MinPh-phVoltage a
b>a
b STUV
AND
StartVolt
Operation_UV=On
BLKUV
IEC10000213 V1 EN
Figure 211: Simplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function
8.14.7.5 Undervoltage protection
The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the lowest measured phase-
phase voltage quantity with the set start level. The undervoltage step starts if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is lower than the set level.
451
Technical manual

Current protection
The start signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the start signal is logical
TRUE for longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to
logical TRUE.
This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to
provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.

Table 247: VRPVOC technical data
Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio, > 95% -

overcurrent
Operate time, start Min. = 15 ms -
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start Min. = 15 ms -

overcurrent at 2 to 0 x
Iset Max. = 30 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 10 Max. = 20 ms
x Iset

overcurrent at 10 to 0 Max. = 35 ms
x Iset
Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

delay to operate at 0 to greater
2 x Iset
Inverse time 13 curve types See tables 959 and 960

characteristics,
see tables 959 and
960
Minimum operate time (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
for inverse time greater
characteristics
High voltage limit, (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur
voltage dependent
operation
Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, < 105% -

undervoltage
Operate time start Min. = 15 ms -
undervoltage at 2 to 0
x Uset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time start Min. = 15 ms -

x Uset Max. = 30 ms
452
Technical manual

Current protection

delay to operate, greater
x Uset
Internal low voltage (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur

blocking
Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
8.15 Generator stator overload protection, GSPTTR
Generator stator overload protection GSPTTR 49S
The generator overload function, GSPTTR is used to protect the stator winding
against excessive temperature as a result of overcurrents. The functions operating
characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard IEEE-C50.13.
If internal generator components exceed its design temperature limit, damage can be
the result. Damage to generator insulation can range from minor loss of life to
complete failure, depending on the severity and duration of the temperature excursion.
Excess temperature can also cause mechanical damage due to thermal expansion.
Since temperature increases with current, it is logical to apply overcurrent elements
with inverse time characteristics.
For its operation the function either measures the true RMS current of the stator
winding or waited sum of the positive and negative sequence components in the stator
winding.
The function is designed to work on 50/60 Hz systems.
453
Technical manual

Current protection

GSPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
SETLKOUT LOCKOUT
RESET BLKRECL
IBASE
IEC12000027 V1 EN
Figure 212: GSPTTR function block
8.15.4 Signals
Table 248: GSPTTR Input signals
I3P GROUP - Current Group Connection
SIGNAL
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for forcing the output LOCKOUT
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the output LOCKOUT and theta to 0%
Table 249: GSPTTR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal from the function
START BOOLEAN General start signal from the function
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Trip lockout output (latched)
BLKRECL BOOLEAN Block machine closing command
8.15.5 Settings
Table 250: GSPTTR Group settings (basic)
On
I> 105.0 - 900.0 % 0.1 110.0 Current pickup value for overload
protection
ReclsLevTheta 1.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 70.0 Level for theta in percent below which the
generator can be reconnected to grid
k1 1.00 - 200.00 s 0.01 37.50 Time multiplier for thermal charact.
operate time delay
AutoLockout Off - - Off Auto lockout enables activation of
On LOCKOUT when TRIP is set
tPulse 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Minimum pulse length of the trip signal
454
Technical manual

Current protection

tMin 1.0 - 120.0 s 0.1 10.0 Minimum time, used in operate
characteristic
tMax 100.0 - 2000.0 s 0.1 300.0 Maximum time, used in operate
characteristic
tCutOff 10.0 - 2000.0 s 0.1 120.0 Cut-off time, used in operate
characteristic
tReset 10.0 - 2000.0 s 0.1 120.0 Time required for Theta to reset from
100% to 0%
Table 251: GSPTTR Group settings (advanced)

PosSeqFactor 0.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Weighting factor for the positive sequence
current
NegSeqFactor 0.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 6.0 Weighting factor for the negative
sequence current
Table 252: GSPTTR Non group settings (basic)

MeasurCurrent RMS - - RMS Measured current quantity (RMS or
PosSeqNegSeq weighted sum of positive and negative
sequence)
groups

Table 253: GSPTTR Monitored data
IMEAS REAL - A Measured current, used
for calculation of operate
time
THETA REAL - % Overload in percent of set
trip level (i.e. Trip=100%)

The stator overload protection can be illustrated in three separate sub-blocks, see
Figure213.
455
Technical manual

Current protection
block
Current Overload
measurement characteristic Trip logic
IEC12000013 V1 EN
Figure 213: Representation of the stator overload protection
Current measurement
Three phase currents are measured either on the high voltage (HV) side of the
generator or on the neutral side of the stator winding, see Figure214
Step-up
transformer
HV- side
I L1 IL2 IL3
Two Excitation
alternative transformer
measurement
points
for the stator G
overload
function
Field breaker
Neutral side
IEC12000012 V1 EN
Figure 214: Measurement of stator current
The selection of current measurement is done by using the parameter

MeasurCurrent::
456
Technical manual

Current protection
• When MeasurCurrent = RMS (default); the maximum true RMS current value
from the three-phase input currents is used as the measured quantity for the stator
overload protection.
• When MeasurCurrent = PosSeqNegSeq; the weighted sum of positive and
negative sequence stator currents in primary amperes is used as the measured
quantity for the stator overload protection. This current value is calculated from
the connected three-phase input currents, see Figure214.
The weighted sum of positive and negative sequence stator currents is calculated as
per the following equation.
I = PosSeqFactor × I12 + NegSeqFactor × I 22

GUID-8768BBBF-3EF7-4D4A-9FF6-DF4A07272812 V1 EN (Equation 99)
Where:
I is current value in primary amperes used by the overload function

I1 is stator positive sequence current in primary amperes
I2 is stator negative sequence current in primary amperes
PosSeqFactor is a setting factor to multiply the positive sequence current and its default value is 1.0
NegSeqFactor is a setting factor to multiply the negative sequence current and its default value is 6.0
The measured current used by the function is available as a service value.
Overload characteristics
Stator winding temperature increases with the current. Thus, it is logical to apply over
current elements with inverse time-current characteristics for overload protection.
The function operating characteristic is designed in accordance with the American
standard IEEE-C50.13. This standard specifies the following operating points:
Table 254: Operate time in accordance with IEEE-C50.13 standard
Current (% of IBase) Trip time (s)

116 120
130 60
154 30
226 10
In order to obtain such operating characteristic the stator overload function utilizes the
following formula in order to calculate the operate time:
457
Technical manual

Current protection
k1
top = 2
æ I ö
ç ÷ -1
è IBase ø
GUID-E050AB5E-B2A4-4838-9E0F-C8133A63DF54 V1 EN (Equation 100)
Where:
top is operate time in seconds
k1 is a multiplier (it shall have default value of 41.4 in order to get the operating points as prescribed by
the standard, see Table254)
I is measured current by the function
IBase is base current (stator winding rated current)
In addition to this equation based operating characteristic, the stator overload function
has some additional cut-off features. The actual overall operating characteristic of the
stator overload function is shown in Figure215
458
Technical manual

Current protection
t (s)
tMax
tCutOff
k1
t op = 2
æ I ö
ç ÷ -1
è IBase ø
tMin
I (A)
IBase i> IEC12000009-1-en.vsd
IEC12000009 V1 EN
t (s)
t_MaxTripDelay
tCutOff
TD1
t tr 2
I
1
IBase
t_MinTripDelay
I (A)
IBase IPickup ANSI12000009-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000009 V1 EN
Figure 215: Operating characteristic for overload function
As shown in Figure 215 it is possible to define the maximum (tMax) and minimum
(tMin) operate time for the function regardless of the level of the measured current. In
459
Technical manual

Current protection
addition to this it is also possible to specify the cut-off time below which the IDMT
curve defined by the above equation will be used. Note that tCutOff shall be always set
to the smaller value than tMax.
The operate time of the stator overload function is calculated by using the integration
principle (see Chapter “Inverse time characteristics” in the Technical Manual for
more information). As a service value from the stator overload function regarding this
integration process the Theta parameter, proportional to the stator heating content, is
provided. This parameter has value of 100% when function gives the trip signal. Thus,
in simple words, it represent a percentage of the function trip level. As soon as the
measured current is above the pick-up level I> and no block signal is present, the
output signal START is activated and the Theta parameter is incremented following
the inverse characteristic given in Figure215. When Theta has reached value 100%,
the output signal TRIP is set. The minimum trip signal duration is defined by the
parameter tPulse. Note also that the BLKRECL signal will remain one as long as
Theta > ReclsLevTheta. Thus the parameter ReclsLevTheta represents the Theta value
below which is safe again to re-connect the tripped generator to the network.
The output signal START will reset if the measured current falls below reset level or
if BLOCK signal is set to one. However the Theta value is stored in the IED memory
and it starts to decay slowly following a linear reset characteristic defined by the
parameter tReset. The parameter tReset actually defines the rest time for Theta from
value 100 to zero. Note that if an overload condition happens again, the last Theta
value is used as a starting point for the calculation. Thus the stator winding will be
properly protected against varying current levels.
460
Technical manual

Current protection
Imeasured
IBase * I>
Pickup hysteresis
THETA
100
ReclsLevTheta
TRIP
START
t
tReset
IEC12000014 V1 EN
Figure 216: Operating principles of the stator overload function
461
Technical manual

Current protection
Tripping logic
This tripping logic provides some additional features regarding blocking and tripping
options available within the function. The list below describes functionality of every
binary input and output from the function which influence the trip logic.
Available binary inputs:
BLOCK prevents operation of overload feature, at the same time all binary outputs are
forced to zero.
SETLKOUT forces lockout operation (output LOCKOUT) by external signal
RESET resets lockout and forces Theta value to zero
Available binary outputs:
TRIP, operation of the overload feature
START, current bigger than I> level
LOCKOUT, sealed-in TRIP output signal from the function. Note that lockout feature
is only enabled by setting AutoLockout = “On”
BLKRECL, output signal active as long as Theta > ReclsLevTheta, which can be used
to block closing of the generator CB
Simplified logic diagram for lockout functionality is shown in Figure217.
AutoLockout
TRIP AND OR AND LOCKOUT

AND
SETLKOUT
RESET
NOT
BLOCK
IEC12000010 V1 EN
Figure 217: Trip Lockout logic
462
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 255: GSPTTR technical data
Current start level for overload (105.0–900.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
protection ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95%

Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 50 ms
Max. = 170 ms
Thermal time characteristic According to ±1.5% or ±200 ms
IEEE Std C50.13–2005 whichever is greater
Minimum operate time for thermal (1.0–120.0) s ±1.5% or ±200 ms
characteristic whichever is greater
Maximum operate time for (100.0–2000.0) s ±1.5% or ±200 ms
thermal characteristic whichever is greater
8.16 Generator rotor overload protection, GRPTTR
Generator rotor overload protection GRPTTR 49R
The generator overload function, GRPTTR is used to protect the rotor winding against
excessive temperature as a result of overcurrents. The functions operating
characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard IEEE-C50.13.
If internal generator components exceed its design temperature limit, damage can be
the result. Damage to generator insulation can range from minor loss of life to
complete failure, depending on the severity and duration of the temperature excursion.
Excess temperature can also cause mechanical damage due to thermal expansion.
Rotor components such as bars and end rings are vulnerable to this damage. Since
temperature increases with current, it is logical to apply overcurrent elements with
inverse time characteristics.
For its operation the function either measures the true RMS current of the excitation
transformer or calculates the DC current in the rotor winding. The rotor winding DC
current can be calculated from the AC currents measured on either high voltage side
(HV) or low voltage side (LV) side of the excitation transformer. For the HV side
measurement ratings of the excitation transformer shall be given. The use of the DC
463
Technical manual

Current protection
current is default (i.e. recommended) measurement for generators with static

excitation system. When the DC current is used, the function can provide a DC current
ripple alarm, due to possible problem with the static excitation equipment. The rotor
DC current can be also sent to the plant supervisory system via communication
channel or displayed on the IED built-in HMI.
The function can also detect undercurrent condition in the rotor winding which
indicates either under-excitation or loss of excitation condition of the generator.
The function is designed to work on 50/60 Hz systems.

GRPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRIPUC
BLOCKUC START
SETLKOUT STARTUC
RESET LOCKOUT
BLKRECL
ALRIPPLE
IMEAS
IEC12000028 V1 EN
Figure 218: GRPTTR function block
8.16.4 Signals
Table 256: GRPTTR Input signals
I3P GROUP - Current Group Connection
SIGNAL
BLOCKUC BOOLEAN 0 Block under-current protection feature
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for forcing the output LOCKOUT
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the output LOCKOUT and theta to 0%
Table 257: GRPTTR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal from the function
TRIPUC BOOLEAN Trip signal from under-current feature
START BOOLEAN General start signal from the function
STARTUC BOOLEAN Start signal from under-current feature
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Trip lockout output (latched)
464
Technical manual

Current protection

BLKRECL BOOLEAN Block machine closing command
ALRIPPLE BOOLEAN Ripple alarm, is set (with delay-on 20ms) if
instRippleAlarm is active longer than tAlarmRipple
IMEAS REAL Measured current, used for calculation of operate
time
8.16.5 Settings
Table 258: GRPTTR Group settings (basic)
On
I> 105.0 - 900.0 % 0.1 110.0 Current pickup value for overload
protection
ReclsLevTheta 1.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 70.0 Level for theta in percent below which the
generator can be reconnected to grid
k1 1.00 - 200.00 s 0.01 33.75 Time multiplier for thermal charact.
operate time delay
AutoLockout Off - - Off Auto lockout enables activation of
On LOCKOUT when TRIP is set
tPulse 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Minimum pulse length of the trip signal
tMin 1.0 - 120.0 s 0.1 10.0 Minimum time, used in operate
characteristic
tMax 100.0 - 2000.0 s 0.1 300.0 Maximum time, used in operate
characteristic
tCutOff 10.0 - 2000.0 s 0.1 120.0 Cut-off time, used in operate
characteristic
tReset 10.0 - 2000.0 s 0.1 120.0 Time required for Theta to reset from
100% to 0%
OpAlarmRipple On - - Off Operation Off / On of alarmRipple feature
Off
AlmRippleLev 10.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Alarm ripple level in percent
tAlarmRipple 0.1 - 600.0 s 0.1 5.0 Alarm ripple time, the alarm ripple has to
be active longer than the specified time to
set output al
Operation_I< Off - - Off Operation Off / On for under-current
On protection feature
I< 5.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 10.0 Under-current feature pickup level
tTrip_I< 0.0 - 600.0 s 0.1 1.0 Under-current feature trip delay
465
Technical manual

Current protection
Table 259: GRPTTR Non group settings (basic)

MeasurCurrent RMS - - DC Measured current quantity (RMS or
DC Calculated DC)
CT_Location LV_winding - - LV_winding Excitation transformer winding where
HV_winding used CT is located
groups
UrLV 10.0 - 3000.0 V 0.1 400.0 Excitation transformer LV winding rated
Ph-Ph voltage in V
UrHV 0.10 - 100.00 kV 0.01 11.00 Excitation transformer HV winding rated
Ph-Ph voltage in kV
PhAngleShift -180 - 180 Deg 30 30 Phase angle shift across excitation
transformer (degrees)

Table 260: GRPTTR Monitored data
IMEAS REAL - A Measured current, used
for calculation of operate
time
IDC REAL - A Average DC current
value, used for alarm and
trip logic
THETA REAL - % Overload in percent of set
trip level (i.e. Trip=100%)
RIPPLVAL REAL - % DC ripple as percent of
measured DC current

The rotor overload protection GRPTTR can be illustrated in five separate sub-blocks,
see Figure213.
466
Technical manual

Current protection
block
Overload
Current
characteristic Trip logic
measurement
block
Undercurrent
protection for rotor
winding
block
Alarm Ripple
Detection
IEC12000016 V1 EN
Figure 219: Representation of the rotor overload protection
Each of these five sub-blocks will be described in the following sections of this
document.
Current measurement
Three phase currents are measured either on the high voltage side (HV) or on the low
voltage side (LV) of the excitation transformer, see Figure220.
467
Technical manual

Current protection
Step-up
transformer
Pri-side (HV)
I L1 IL2 IL3
Two alternative
Excitation measurement points
transformer for the rotor overload
UA Ua
function
Sec-side (LV)
iL1 iL2 iL3
G
Field breaker
IEC12000019 V1 EN
Figure 220: Measurement of rotor currents
The selection of current measurement is done by using the parameter

MeasurCurrent:
• When MeasurCurrent = RMS; The maximum true RMS current value from the
three-phase input currents is used as the measured quantity for the rotor overload
protection.
• MeasurCurrent = DC (default); The calculated rotor winding DC current in
primary amperes is used as the measured quantity for the rotor overload
protection. The DC current is calculated from the connected three-phase input
currents, see Figure220. This DC current calculation is valid for any type of three
phase rectifier bridge (i.e. either diode or thyristor based).
In order to properly calculate the rotor winding DC current the physical location of the
used CT is defined by the parameter CT_Location
• When CT_Location = LV_winding (default) is selected, it means that the used CT

is located on the secondary, low-voltage side (LV) of the excitation transformer
which directly feeds into the rectifier bridge, see Figure220. In that case the rotor
winding instantaneous DC current iDC is calculated as per the following equation
iL1 + iL 2 + iL3
iDC =
2
GUID-17CD8C1A-C1C2-4A9C-9339-2C99C3A3F120 V2 EN (Equation 101)
468
Technical manual

Current protection
where iL1, iL2 and iL3 are instantaneous sampled values of the three-phase currents
from LV side of the excitation transformer. Note that this calculation is done twenty
times per power system cycle. After that the average DC current value IDC is
calculated over one power system cycle by using the following formula:
20
åi DC
I DC = 1
20
GUID-5D825381-66DE-404D-B3E9-471B13A394A5 V1 EN (Equation 102)
The average DC current value IDC is used further within the rotor overload function
for the operating characteristic calculations and for the service value.
• When CT_Location = HV_winding is selected, it means that the used CT is

located on the primary, high-voltage side (HV) of the excitation transformer, see
Figure220. In that case the measured HV side three-phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)
are first transferred to the LV side currents (iL1, iL2, iL3) by using the rating data
of the excitation transformer. The excitation transformer ratings are specified by
the following three setting parameters:
UrLV: LV winding rated ph-ph voltage in Volts.

UrHV: HV winding rated ph-ph voltage in kV.
PhAngleShift: HV side to LV side phase angle shift in degrees (it has value of +30º for Dy1 excitation
transformer and -30º for Dy11 excitation transformer)
Once the measured currents are transferred from the HV side to the LV side of the
excitation transformer the same calculations are performed as in case when CT is
located on the LV side.
The measured current used by the function is available as a service value.
Overload characteristics
Rotor winding temperature increases with the current. Thus, it is logical to apply over
current elements with inverse time-current characteristics for overload protection.
The function operating characteristic is designed in accordance with the American
standard IEEE-C50.13. This standard specifies the following operating points:
Table 261: Operate time in accordance with IEEE-C50.13 standard
Current (% of IBase) Trip time (s)

113 120
125 60
146 30
209 10
469
Technical manual

Current protection
In order to obtain such operating characteristic the rotor overload function utilizes the
following formula in order to calculate the operate time:
k1
top = 2
æ I ö
ç ÷ -1
è IBase ø
GUID-E050AB5E-B2A4-4838-9E0F-C8133A63DF54 V1 EN (Equation 103)
Where:
top is operate time in seconds
k1 is a multiplier (it shall have default value of 33.8 in order to get the operating points as prescribed by
the standard, see Table254)
I is measured current by the function
IBase is base current (rotor winding rated current when DC current is used as measured current)
In addition to this equation based operating characteristic, the rotor overload function
has some additional cut-off features. The actual overall operating characteristic of the
rotor overload function is shown in Figure221.
t (s)
tMax
tCutOff
k1
t op = 2
æ I ö
ç ÷ -1
è IBase ø
tMin
I (A)
IBase i> IEC12000011-1-en.vsd
IEC12000011 V1 EN
Figure 221: Operating characteristic for the overload function
470
Technical manual

Current protection
As shown in Figure 221 it is possible to define the maximum (tMax) and minimum
(tMin) operate time for the function regardless of the level of the measured current. In
addition to this it is also possible to specify the cut-off time below which the IDMT
curve defined by the above equation will be used. Note that tCutOff shall be always set
to the smaller value than tMax.
The operate time of the rotor overload function is calculated by using the integration
principle (see Chapter “Inverse time characteristics” in the Technical Manual for
more information). As a service value from the rotor overload function regarding this
integration process the Theta parameter, proportional to the rotor heating content, is
provided. This parameter has value of 100% when function issues the trip signal.
Thus, in simple words, it represent a percentage of the function trip level. As soon as
the measured current is above the pick-up level I> and no block signal is present, the
output signal START is activated and the Theta parameter is incremented following
the inverse characteristic given in Figure 222. When theta has reached value 100%, the
output signal TRIP is set. The minimum trip signal duration is defined by the
parameter tPulse. Note also that the BLKRECL signal will remain one as long as
Theta > ReclsLevTheta. Thus the parameter ReclsLevTheta represents the Theta value
below which is safe again to re-connect the tripped generator to the network.
The output signal START will reset if the measured current falls below reset level or
if BLOCK signal is set to one. However the Theta value is stored in the IED memory
and it starts to decay slowly following a linear reset characteristic defined by the
parameter tReset. The parameter tReset actually defines the rest time for Theta from
value 100% to zero. Note that if an overload condition happens again, the last theta
value is used as a starting point for the calculation. Thus the rotor winding will be
properly protected against varying current levels.
471
Technical manual

Current protection
Imeasured
IBase * I>
Pickup hysteresis
THETA
100
ReclsLevTheta
TRIP
START
t
tReset
IEC12000015 V1 EN
Figure 222: Operating principles of the rotor overload function
472
Technical manual

Current protection
Under current protection of rotor winding

One undercurrent protection level with definite time delay is available within the
function. It can be used to either alarm or trip for low-excitation/loss-of-excitation
condition of the machine. This built-in feature monitors the level of the measured
current. As soon as it is lower than the pre-set value (i.e. parameter I<) it will start a
timer (i.e defined by parameter tTrip_I<). Once this timer has expired the signal
TRIPUC will be given. In order to avoid unwanted tripping of this undercurrent
feature when machine is disconnected from the network it shall be supervised by
appropriate signal (e.g. blocked when generator CB is open). Simplified logic
diagram of this feature is given in Figure223.
Operation_I<
MeasurCurrent tTrip_I<
< TRIPUC
AND t
I<
x
IBase
BLOCKUC NOT
BLOCK
NOT
IEC12000021 V1 EN
Figure 223: Undercurrent protection feature
Tripping logic
This tripping logic provides some additional features regarding blocking and tripping
options available within the function. The list below describes functionality of every
binary input and output from the function which influence the trip logic.
Available binary inputs:
BLOCK prevents operation of overload and undercurrent features, at the same time all
binary outputs are forced to zero.
BLOCKUC prevents operation of undercurrent feature only
SETLKOUT forces lockout operation (output LOCKOUT) by external signal
RESET resets lockout and forces Theta value to zero
Available binary outputs:
TRIP, operation of the overload feature
473
Technical manual

Current protection
TRIPUC, operation of the undercurrent feature
START, current bigger than I> level
STARTUC, current smaller than I< level
LOCKOUT, sealed-in TRIP output signal from the function. Note that lockout feature
is only enabled by setting AutoLockout = “On”
BLKRECL, output signal active as long as Theta > ReclsLevTheta, which can be used
to block closing of the generator CB
Simplified logic diagram for lockout functionality is shown in Figure224.
AutoLockout
TRIP AND OR AND LOCKOUT

AND
SETLKOUT
RESET
NOT
BLOCK
IEC12000020 V1 EN
Figure 224: Trip Lockout logic
Alarm ripple detection

The rotor winding is provided with DC excitation current through the rectifier bridge
and the excitation transformer. In case a fault happens in the rectifier circuit, for
example a short circuit or broken diode/thyristor, the rotor system is endangered, due
to asymmetry in the three phase currents. This asymmetry will cause a ripple in the
rotor DC current. This alarm method estimates the ripple of the rotor DC current and
if it exceed the preset level (parameter AlmRippleLev) it will start a timer (defined by
parameter tAlarmRipple). Once this timer has expired the signal ALRIPPLE will be
given.
The service value for the ripple level is provided. It is recommended to check the
natural ripple of the rotor DC current at site before the level for parameter
AlmRippleLev is set. Note that this ripple supervision shall only be used if the rotor DC
current is used as measured quantity.
474
Technical manual

Current protection

Table 262: GRPTTR technical data
Overcurrent start level for (105.0–900.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
overload protection ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, overcurrent >95% —

Start time, overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Min = 50 ms —
Iset
Max = 170 ms
Thermal time characteristic According to ±1.5% or ±200 ms
IEEE Std C50.13–2005 whichever is greater
Minimum operate time for thermal (1.0–120.0) s ±1.5% or ±200 ms
characteristic whichever is greater
Maximum operate time for (100.0–2000.0) s ±1.5% or ±200 ms
thermal characteristic whichever is greater
Undercurrent start level (5.0–500.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Start time, undercurrent at 2 to 0 x Min = 15 ms —

Iset
Max = 30 ms
Independent time delay for (0.0–600.0) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever
undercurrent function at 2 to 0 x is greater
Iset
475
Technical manual

476

Voltage protection
Section 9 Voltage protection
9.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27
3U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN
9.1.2 Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed
back-up to primary protection.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
477
Technical manual

Voltage protection

UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
IEC06000276 V2 EN
Figure 225: UV2PTUV function block
9.1.4 Signals
Table 263: UV2PTUV Input signals
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
Table 264: UV2PTUV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
478
Technical manual

Voltage protection

9.1.5 Settings
Table 265: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
for step 1
for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of
UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
On
Inverse curve A 2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
479
Technical manual

Voltage protection

3 out of 3
U2< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 2
for step 2
for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of
UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking
for step 2
Table 266: UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
Time curve step 2
Linearly decreased
curve for step 2
480
Technical manual

Voltage protection

curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2
Table 267: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
groups

Table 268: UV2PTUV Monitored data

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one,
two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding START
signal is generated. UV2PTUV can be set to START/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage
remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay,
the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection
of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is
available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is
blocked and no START or TRIP signal is generated.The time delay characteristic is
individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time
delay.
481
Technical manual

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS value.
The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage related
settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase voltage.
This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:
U < (%) ⋅UBase(kV )

3
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:
U < (%) × UBase(kV)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.
9.1.7.1 Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV measures phase-to-earth or phase-

to-phase voltages and compare against set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters
OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs.
Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
9.1.7.2 Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• customer programmable inverse curve
The type A curve is described as:
k
t=
æ Un < -U ö
ç ÷
è Un < ø
482
Technical manual

Voltage protection
where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
The type B curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Un < - U ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Un < ø
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
é ù
ê ú
ê k×A ú
t=ê pú
+D
ê æ Un < - U ö ú
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè Un < ø û
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un< down to Un< · (1.0 –
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details
of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 25.3 "Inverse
characteristics".
483
Technical manual

Voltage protection
Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
IDMT Voltage
Time
IEC12000186 V1 EN
Figure 226: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the
inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the
undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 227 and figure 228.
484
Technical manual

Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
tIReset1
Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP
U1<
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Frozen Timer
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-4-en.vsd
IEC05000010 V4 EN
Figure 227: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types
485
Technical manual

Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
tIReset1
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-3.vsd
IEC05000011 V3 EN
Figure 228: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Definite timer delay
When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 229.
Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in
figure 230 and figure 231 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.
486
Technical manual

Voltage protection
ST1
U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND
IEC09000785 V3 EN
Figure 229: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
IEC10000039 V3 EN
Figure 230: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset
487
Technical manual

Voltage protection
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
IEC10000040 V3 EN
Figure 231: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation
9.1.7.3 Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or

completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked. The
characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking
can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings
and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get
very low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the blocking
function, as seen in figure 232. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than
the time delay of under voltage function.
488
Technical manual

Voltage protection
U Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN
Figure 232: Blocking function
9.1.7.4 Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the
set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration.
A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria
to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection
UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 233.
489
Technical manual

Voltage protection
UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode1 ST1L2
UL2 Comparator Phase 2
1 out of 3
UL2 < U1< 2 out of 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 < U1< IntBlkStVal1 &
OR ST1
Trip
Output
START Logic TR1L1
Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1
Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
IEC05000834 V2 EN
Figure 233: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
490
Technical manual

Voltage protection

Table 269: UV2PTUV technical data
Operate voltage, low (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
and high step
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Internal blocking (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

level, step 1 and step
2
Inverse time - See table 971
characteristics for
step 1 and step 2, see
table 971
Definite time delay, (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is
step 1 at 1.2 to 0 x greater
Uset
Definite time delay, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is

step 2 at 1.2 to 0 x greater
Uset
Minimum operate (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is

time, inverse greater
characteristics
Operate time, start at Min= 15 ms -
2 to 0 x Uset Max= 30 ms
Reset time, start at 0 Min= 15 ms -

to 2 x Uset Max= 30 ms
Operate time, start at Min= 5 ms -

1.2 to 0 x Uset Max= 25 ms
Reset time, start at 0 Min= 15 ms -

to 1.2 x Uset Max= 35 ms
Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0 x Uset -
9.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59
3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN
491
Technical manual

Voltage protection
9.2.2 Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
IEC06000277 V2 EN
Figure 234: OV2PTOV function block
9.2.4 Signals
Table 270: OV2PTOV Input signals
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
Table 271: OV2PTOV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
492
Technical manual

Voltage protection

9.2.5 Settings
Table 272: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
On
On
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 1
for step 1
for step 1
On
493
Technical manual

Voltage protection

Inverse curve A 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 2
for step 2
for step 2
Table 273: OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Time curve step 1
Linearly decreased
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT
curve, step 1
Time curve step 2
Linearly decreased
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
494
Technical manual

Voltage protection

curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve, step 2
Table 274: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
groups

Table 275: OV2PTOV Monitored data

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-
phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is issued.
OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of
the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip
signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage UBase,
which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.
495
Technical manual

Voltage protection
The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase
voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of
the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage over:
U > (%) × UBase( kV )

3
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:
U > (%) × UBase(kV)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> for Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2
influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3
or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to
issue the corresponding START signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.
9.2.7.2 Time delay
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
496
Technical manual

Voltage protection
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  
The type C curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U n > ø
The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B, C,

D, k and p are settings:
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 235. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
497
Technical manual

Voltage protection
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
Time
IEC05000016 V2 EN
Figure 235: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the
inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the
inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the
START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only
return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable
HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to allow a high and accurate reset
of the function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend
on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways
to reset the timer: either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen
during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time.
498
Technical manual

Voltage protection
tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055 V2 EN
Figure 236: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types
499
Technical manual

Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd
IEC05000020 V3 EN
Figure 237: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Definite time delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 238.
figure 230 and figure 231 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s (where n
means either 1 or 2 respectively), instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage
is ensured.
500
Technical manual

Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
IEC10000100 V2 EN
Figure 238: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
IEC10000037 V2 EN
Figure 239: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
501
Technical manual

Voltage protection
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
IEC10000038 V2 EN
Figure 240: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation
9.2.7.3 Blocking
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or

completely, by binary input signals where:

9.2.7.4 Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually compared
to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3
criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection
(OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 241.
502
Technical manual

Voltage protection
UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
Start ST1L3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 > U1> & ST1
OR
Trip
START Output TR1L1
Logic
Time integrator Step 1 TR1L2

TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
OR TR1
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic
Time integrator Step 2 TR2L2

MaxVoltSelect tIreset2 TRIP
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN
Figure 241: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
503
Technical manual

Voltage protection

Table 276: OV2PTOV technical data
Operate (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
voltage, step 1 ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
and 2
Absolute (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
hysteresis ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

characteristics
for steps 1 and
2, see table 970
Definite time (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is
delay, low step greater
(step 1) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset
Definite time (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is

delay, high step greater
(step 2) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset
Minimum (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

operate time,
Inverse
characteristics
Operate time, Min. = 15 ms -
start at 0 to 2 x Max. = 30 ms
Uset

at 2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, Min. = 20 ms -

start at 0 to 1.2 x Max. = 35 ms
Uset

at 1.2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

time
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time
504
Technical manual

Voltage protection
9.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0
TRV V1 EN
9.3.2 Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV function calculates the

residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from
a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.
ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.

ROV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKTR2 ST1
BLKST2 ST2
IEC06000278 V2 EN
Figure 242: ROV2PTOV function block
9.3.4 Signals
Table 277: ROV2PTOV Input signals
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
505
Technical manual

Voltage protection

Table 278: ROV2PTOV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
9.3.5 Settings
Table 279: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
On
On
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step
1 in % of UBase
for step 1
for step 1
On
Inverse curve A 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step
2 in % of UBase
506
Technical manual

Voltage protection

for step 2
for step 2
Table 280: ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Time curve step 1
Linearly decreased
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2
Linearly decreased
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve, step 2
507
Technical manual

Voltage protection
Table 281: ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 282: ROV2PTOV Monitored data
ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured
voltage

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect high single-
phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage can
be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer
or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are
connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three-phase voltages
and internally in the IED calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this
calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV. ROV2PTOV has two steps with separate
time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a
time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is
issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV,
phase-phase.
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.
9.3.7.2 Time delay
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
508
Technical manual

Voltage protection
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  
The type C curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
509
Technical manual

Voltage protection
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT).
If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for
the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding
START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period.
However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value
is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 236 and figure 237.
510
Technical manual

Voltage protection
tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055 V2 EN
Figure 243: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
511
Technical manual

Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd
IEC05000020 V3 EN
Figure 244: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite timer delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 245.
figure 230 and figure 231 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.
512
Technical manual

Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
IEC10000100 V2 EN
Figure 245: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
IEC10000039 V3 EN
Figure 246: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
513
Technical manual

Voltage protection
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
IEC10000040 V3 EN
Figure 247: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation
9.3.7.3 Blocking
It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV partially

or completely, by binary input signals where:

BLKST2: blocks all START and trip inputs related to step 2
9.3.7.4 Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.

Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) is
schematically described in figure 248.
514
Technical manual

Voltage protection
UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
Start TR1
START t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP
Logic
ResetTypeCrv1
Step 1
ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR
IEC05000748 V2 EN
Figure 248: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

Table 283: ROV2PTOV technical data
Operate voltage, (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
step 1 and step 2 ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

hysteresis ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 972
Definite time delay (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is
low step (step 1) at greater
0 to 1.2 x Uset
Definite time delay (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is

high step (step 2) greater
at 0 to 1.2 x Uset
515
Technical manual

Voltage protection

Minimum operate (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is
time greater
at 0 to 2 x Uset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at Min. = 15 ms -

2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at Min. = 5 ms -

1.2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

time
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time
9.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 24
U/f >
SYMBOL-Q V1 EN
9.4.2 Functionality
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated
components that are not designed to carry flux. This will cause eddy currents to flow.
These eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and
adjacent parts in a relatively short time. The function has settable inverse operating
curves and independent alarm stages.

OEXPVPH
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK ALARM
RESET
IEC05000329 V3 EN
Figure 249: OEXPVPH function block
516
Technical manual

Voltage protection
9.4.4 Signals
Table 284: OEXPVPH Input signals
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset operation
Table 285: OEXPVPH Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip from overexcitation function
START BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set operate level
(instantaneous)
ALARM BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)
9.4.5 Settings
Table 286: OEXPVPH Group settings (basic)
On
V/Hz> 100.0 - 180.0 %UB/f 0.1 110.0 Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated
freq in % of (UBase/frated)
V/Hz>> 100.0 - 200.0 %UB/f 0.1 140.0 High level of V/Hz above which tMin is
used, in % of (UBase/frated)
XLeak 0.000 - 200.000 Ohm 0.001 0.000 Winding leakage reactance in primary
ohms
TrPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec)
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve,
in sec
tMax 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1800.00 Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse
curve, in sec
tCooling 0.10 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1200.00 Transformer magnetic core cooling time
constant, in sec
CurveType IEEE - - IEEE Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor
Tailor made made
kForIEEE 1 - 60 - 1 1 Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type
curve
AlarmLevel 50.0 - 120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Alarm operate level as % of operate level
tAlarm 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Alarm time delay, in sec
517
Technical manual

Voltage protection
Table 287: OEXPVPH Group settings (advanced)

t1Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 7200.00 Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made
curve, in sec
t2Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 3600.00 Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec
t6Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 225.00 Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made
curve, in sec
Table 288: OEXPVPH Non group settings (basic)

MeasuredU PosSeq - - L1L2 Selection of measured voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
MeasuredI L1L2 - - L1L2 Selection of measured current
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
groups

Table 289: OEXPVPH Monitored data
TMTOTRIP REAL - s Calculated time to trip for
overexcitation, in sec
VPERHZ REAL - V/Hz Voltage to frequency ratio
in per-unit
THERMSTA REAL - % Overexcitation thermal
status in % of trip level

The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH) function is growing as the
power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate near their
designated limits most of the time.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. If an
emergency that causes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged
518
Technical manual

Voltage protection
unless corrective action is taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an

overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.
Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with

below-normal frequency. Such conditions may occur when a transformer unit is
loaded, but are more likely to arise when the transformer is unloaded, or when loss of
load occurs. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to
experience overexcitation conditions. It follows from the fundamental transformer
equation, see equation 122, that the peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to
induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f and turns n.
E = 4.44 × f × n × B max× A
The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 123.
E f
M ( p.u.) =
( Ur ) ( fr )
Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If

the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9
Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into other
(non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current
circulations.
Overexcitation will result in:
• overheating of the non-laminated metal parts

• a large increase in magnetizing currents
• an increase in core and winding temperature
• an increase in transformer vibration and noise
Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per hertz
(V/Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or if this is
not possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the source after a
delay ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.
Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected

generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected
to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine.
In such cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-up of a
machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not possible, the
power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP
signal.
The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not
more than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the
519
Technical manual

Voltage protection
ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed
1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained
basis, see equation 124.
E
---- £ 1.1 × Ur
------
f fr
or equivalently, with 1.1 · Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 125.
E V Hz >
£
f fr
where:
V/Hz> is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.
V/Hz> is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does not
know exactly what to set, then the default value for V/Hz> = 110 % given by the IEC
60076-1 standard shall be used.
In OEXPVPH, the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 126.
E f
M ( p.u.) =
Ur fr
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for
any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Ur/fr. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M ≤ V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in % of
Ur/fr.
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in

general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no
load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the
internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage U which is
measured and fed to OEXPVPH , depending on the direction of the power flow
through the power transformer, the power transformer side where OEXPVPH is
applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important
to specify in the application configuration on which side of the power transformer
OEXPVPH is placed.
As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load,
0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer
core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated
frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided
520
Technical manual

Voltage protection
between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 = Xleak2 = Xsc / 2
= 0.075 pu.
OEXPVPH calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage
reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH is connected) is known to the user. The
assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is
unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the leakage
reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core
with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the
situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance,
then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2.
OEXPVPH protection will then take the given measured voltage U, as the induced
voltage E.
It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such

as loss-of-load, etc. A high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean overexcitation. For
example, in an unearthed power system, a single phase-to-earth fault means high
voltages of the “healthy” two phases-to-earth, but no overexcitation on any winding.
The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important
voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.
9.4.7.1 Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation

protection is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH shall be set to
measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines the
two currents that must be used. This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.
It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI are set to

same value.
If, for example, voltage UL1L2 is fed to OEXPVPH, then currents IL1, and IL2 must
be applied. From these two input currents, current IL1L2 = IL1 - IL2 is calculated
internally by the OEXPVPH algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher
than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm exits without
calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of
relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.
If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is
connected, then OEXPVPH shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and
current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current
are used by OEXPVPH. A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher
than 70% of rated phase-to-earth voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH exits
immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.
521
Technical manual

Voltage protection
• OEXPVPH can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from

the power flow.
• The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.
9.4.7.2 Operate time of the overexcitation protection
The operate time of OEXPVPH is a function of the relative overexcitation.
Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:
• the so called IEEE law, and

• a tailor-made law.
The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers’ overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match the transformer core capability well.
The square law is according to equation 127.
0.18 × k 0.18 × k
top = 2
= 2
æ M ö overexcitation
ç V Hz> - 1 ÷
è ø
where:
M the relative excitation
V/Hz> is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
k is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 251.
Parameter k (“time multiplier setting”) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.
The relative excitation M is calculated using equation128
æ Umeasured ö
ç ÷ Umeasured frated
=è
fmeasured ø
M = ×
æ UBase ö UBase fmeasured
ç ÷
è frated ø
An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral

expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to
equation 129.
522
Technical manual

Voltage protection
top
ò (M (t) - V Hz > ) dt ³ 0.18 × k

2
A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it
becomes true that:
n
2
Dt × å ( M(j) – V/Hz> ) ³ 0.18 × k
j=k
where:
Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH and
M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given
as Ur/fr.
As long as M > V/Hz> (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be
larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be
tripped at j = n.
Inverse delays as per figure 251, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 250.
delay in s
tMax
under - inverse delay law

excitation
overexcitation
tMin
0 Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz>
M=V/Hz> Mmax Excitation M
V/Hz> Emax E (only if f = fr = const)
99001067.vsd
IEC99001067 V1 EN
Figure 250: Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax and tMin
A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees
of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In case the
inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEXPVPH trips after tMax seconds.
523
Technical manual

Voltage protection
A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees
of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin, OEXPVPH function
trips after tMin seconds. The inverse delay law is not valid for values exceeding
Mmax. The delay will be tMin, irrespective of the overexcitation level, when values
exceed Mmax (that is, M>V/Hz>).
Time (s) IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES
1000
100
k = 60
k = 20
k = 10
10 k=9
k=8
k=7
k=6
k=5
k=4
k=3
k=2
k=1
1
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40
OVEREXCITATION IN % (M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373.vsd
IEC01000373 V1 EN
Figure 251: Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation
The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH setting V/

Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where the
inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example, V/
Hz>> = 140 %, then M is according to equation 131.
(V Hz>> ) / f
M= = 1.40
Ur/fr
524
Technical manual

Voltage protection
The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this
case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into
five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as shown in
figure 252. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
delay in s
tMax
under- tMin
excitation Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
0 Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M
Emaxcont Mmax
99001068.vsd
IEC99001068 V1 EN
Figure 252: An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic
Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear
interpolation.
Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual
delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.
9.4.7.3 Cooling
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH is basically a thermal protection; therefore a

cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied.
Parameter Setting tool is an OEXPVPH setting, with a default time constant tCooling
of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous
normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be
reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an overexcitation
condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be
otherwise.
9.4.7.4 Overexcitation protection function measurands
A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in PCM600.
This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if the
overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This
information can be useful during small or moderate overexcitation situations.
If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is tMax, then the estimation of the
remaining time to trip is done against tMax.
The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a monitored
data value VPERHZ and is calculated from the expression:
525
Technical manual

Voltage protection
E f
M ( p.u.) =
Ur fr
If VPERHZ value is less than setting V/Hz> (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to V/Hz> (in %), the excitation is exactly equal to
the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than V/Hz>, the
protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100, while
V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous
excitation limit.
The monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected
power transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip
value which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same time,
as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some
reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or tMin, then
the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP
reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long
delay is limited by tMax, then the OEXPVPH TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before
the Thermal status reaches 100%.
9.4.7.5 Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set 2%

lower than (V/Hz>) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator
an early warning.
526
Technical manual

Voltage protection
BLOCK
AlarmLevel
tAlarm ALARM
&
t
M>V/Hz>
TRIP
&
V/Hz>
U3P Calculation
Ei k
M
of internal M=
I3P induced (Ei / f) IEEE law &
voltage Ei (Ur / fr) tMax ³1
M t
Tailor-made law
M>V/Hz>>
tMin
Xleak
t
V/Hz>>
M = relative V/Hz as service value

IEC05000162 V3 EN
Figure 253: A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection

OEXPVPH
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.

Table 290: OEXPVPH technical data
Operate value, start (100–180)% of (UBase/frated) ± 0.5% of U
Operate value, alarm (50–120)% of start level ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Operate value, high level (100–200)% of (UBase/frated) ± 0.5% of U
Curve type IEEE or customer defined ± 5.0 % or ± 45 ms,

whichever is greater
(0.18 × k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2
where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)
Minimum time delay for inverse (0.000–60.000) s ± 1.0% or ± 45 ms,
function whichever is greater
Maximum time delay for inverse (0.00–9000.00) s ± 1.0% or ± 45 ms,
function whichever is greater
Alarm time delay (0.00–9000.00) ± 1.0% or ± 45 ms,
527
Technical manual

Voltage protection
9.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60
9.5.2 Functionality
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from
two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one
trip step.

VDCPTOV
U3P1* TRIP
U3P2* START
BLOCK ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF
IEC06000528 V2 EN
Figure 254: VDCPTOV function block
9.5.4 Signals
Table 291: VDCPTOV Input signals
U3P1 GROUP - Bus voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Capacitor voltage
SIGNAL
Table 292: VDCPTOV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection operated
START BOOLEAN Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U1 voltage
528
Technical manual

Voltage protection

U2LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L1
9.5.5 Settings
Table 293: VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)
On
BlkDiffAtULow No - - Yes Block operation at low voltage
Yes
UDTrip 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 5.0 Operate level, in % of UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for voltage differential operate,
in seconds
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for voltage differential reset, in
seconds
UDAlarm 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 2.0 Alarm level, in % of UBase
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay for voltage differential alarm,
in seconds
U1Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
U2Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time for undervoltage block
Table 294: VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)

RFL1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L1
U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
U2L3*RFL3=U1L3
Table 295: VDCPTOV Non group settings (basic)

groups
529
Technical manual

Voltage protection

Table 296: VDCPTOV Monitored data
UL1DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3

The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on comparison
of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences
between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be
compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx. The voltage difference is
evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip level UDATrip signals for
alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm
respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with
undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW
resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual
phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three phases.
Loss of all U1 or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.
VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can, for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision function
FUFSPVC.
To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service

value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance
in normal service.
The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 255.
530
Technical manual

Voltage protection
UDTripL1>
AND
UDTripL2> O tReset tTrip

AND
R t t
AND TRIP
UDTripL3>
AND
AND START
UDAlarmL1>
AND
UDAlarmL2> O tAlarm
AND
R t AND ALARM
UDAlarmL3>
AND
U1<L1
tAlarm
U1<L2 AND t U1LOW
AND
U1<L3 AND
OR
BlkDiffAtULow
U2<L1
t1
U2<L2 AND t U2LOW
AND
U2<L3
BLOCK
en06000382-2.vsd
IEC06000382 V3 EN
Figure 255: Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV

Table 297: VDCPTOV technical data
Voltage difference for alarm and (2.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
trip
Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay for (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is

voltage differential alarm at 0.8 to greater
1.2 x UDAlarm
voltage differential trip at 0.8 to greater
1.2 x UDTrip
voltage differential reset at 1.2 to greater
0.8 x UDTrip
531
Technical manual

Voltage protection
9.6 100% Stator earth fault protection, 3rd harmonic

based STEFPHIZ
100% Stator earth fault protection, 3rd STEFPHIZ - 59THD
harmonic based
9.6.2 Functionality
Stator earth fault is a fault type having relatively high fault rate. The generator systems
normally have high impedance earthing, that is, earthing via a neutral point resistor.
This resistor is normally dimensioned to give an earth fault current in the range 3 – 15
A at a solid earth-fault directly at the generator high voltage terminal. The relatively
small earth fault currents give much less thermal and mechanical stress on the
generator, compared to the short circuit case, which is between conductors of two
phases. Anyhow, the earth faults in the generator have to be detected and the generator
has to be tripped, even if longer fault time compared to internal short circuits, can be
allowed.
In normal non-faulted operation of the generating unit the neutral point voltage is
close to zero, and there is no zero sequence current flow in the generator. When a
phase-to-earth fault occurs the neutral point voltage will increase and there will be a
current flow through the neutral point resistor.
To detect an earth fault on the windings of a generating unit one may use a neutral
point overvoltage protection, a neutral point overcurrent protection, a zero sequence
overvoltage protection or a residual differential protection. These protections are
simple and have served well during many years. However, at best these simple
schemes protect only 95% of the stator winding. They leave 5% close to the neutral
end unprotected. Under unfavorable conditions the blind zone may extend up to 20%
from the neutral.
The 95% stator earth fault protection measures the fundamental frequency voltage
component in the generator star point and it operates when the fundamental frequency
voltage exceeds the preset value. By applying this principle approximately 95% of the
stator winding can be protected. In order to protect the last 5% of the stator winding
close to the neutral end the 3rd harmonic voltage measurement can be performed. In
100% Stator E/F 3rd harmonic protection either the 3rd harmonic voltage differential
principle, the neutral point 3rd harmonic undervoltage principle or the terminal side
3rd harmonic overvoltage principle can be applied. However, differential principle is
strongly recommended. Combination of these two measuring principles provides
coverage for entire stator winding against earth faults.
532
Technical manual

Voltage protection
stator winding CB 1 may not exist

x E3 (1- x) E3 CB 1 CB 2
N T
RN Rf Transformer
uN x 1- x uT
Samples of the Samples of the
neutral voltage 1 or 100 % terminal voltage
from which the from which the
fundamental and 3rd harmonic
3rd harmonic voltage is filtered
Neutral point fundamental frequency
voltages are out
over-voltage protection 5% - 100%
filtered out overvoltage protection 10%– 100%
3rd harmonic
Differential
differential
0% – 30%
0% - 30% IEC10000202-1-en.vsd
IEC10000202 V1 EN
Figure 256: Protection principles for STEFPHIZ function

STEFPHIZ
NEUTVOLT TRIP
TERMVOLT TRIP3H
CBCLOSED TRIPUN
BLOCK START
BLOCK3RD START3H
BLOCKUN STARTUN
UT3
UN3
E3
ANGLE
DU3
BU3
UN
IEC11000211 V1 EN
Figure 257: STEFPHIZ function block
533
Technical manual

Voltage protection
9.6.4 Signals
Table 298: STEFPHIZ Input signals
U3PNEUT GROUP - Voltage connection neutral side
SIGNAL
U3PTERM GROUP - Open-Delta connection on Terminal side
SIGNAL
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 1 TRUE means breaker between gen. & trafo is
closed
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Complete block of the stator earth fault protecion
function
BLOCK3RD BOOLEAN 0 Block of the 3rd harmonic-based parts of the
protection
BLOCKUN BOOLEAN 0 Block of the fund. harmonic-based part of the
protection
Table 299: STEFPHIZ Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Main, common trip command
TRIP3H BOOLEAN Trip by one of two 3rd harmonic voltage-based prot.
TRIPUN BOOLEAN Trip by fund. freq. neutral over-voltage protection
START BOOLEAN Main, common start signal
START3H BOOLEAN Start by one of two 3rd harmonic voltage-based
prot.
STARTUN BOOLEAN Start signal by fund. freq. neutral over-voltage prot.
UT3 REAL Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage at generator terminal
side, Volts
UN3 REAL Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage at generator neutral side,
Volts
E3 REAL Total induced stator 3rd harmonic voltage, primary
Volts
ANGLE REAL Angle between 3rd harmonic votage phasors,
radians
DU3 REAL Diff. between 3rd harm. volt. at both sides of gen.,
Volts
BU3 REAL Bias voltage, a part of voltN3rdHarmonic, primary
Volts
UN REAL Fund. frequency voltage at generator neutral,
primary Volts
534
Technical manual

Voltage protection
9.6.5 Settings
Table 300: STEFPHIZ Group settings (basic)
On
Beta 0.50 - 10.00 - 0.01 3.00 Portion of voltN3rdHarmonic used as bias
CBexists No - - No Defines if generator CB exists (between
Yes Gen & Transformer)
FactorCBopen 1.00 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Beta is multiplied by this factor when CB is
open
UN3rdH< 0.5 - 10.0 % 0.1 2.0 Pickup 3rd Harm U< protection (when
activated) % of UB/1,732
UT3BlkLevel 0.1 - 10.0 % 0.1 1.0 If UT3 is below limit 3rdH Diff is blocked, in
% of UB/1,732
UNFund> 1.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 5.0 Pickup fundamental UN> protection (95%
SEF), % of UB/1,732
t3rdH 0.020 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Operation delay of 3rd harm-based
protection (100% SEF) in s
tUNFund 0.020 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Operation delay of fundamental UN>
protection (95% SEF) in s
Table 301: STEFPHIZ Non group settings (basic)

TVoltType NoVoltage - - ResidualVoltage Used connection type for gen. terminal
ResidualVoltage voltage transformer
AllThreePhases
PhaseL1
PhaseL2
PhaseL3
groups

Table 302: STEFPHIZ Monitored data
UT3 REAL - kV Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage
at generator terminal
side, Volts
UN3 REAL - kV Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage
at generator neutral side,
Volts
E3 REAL - kV Total induced stator 3rd
harmonic voltage,
primary Volts
535
Technical manual

Voltage protection

ANGLE REAL - deg Angle between 3rd
harmonic votage
phasors, radians
DU3 REAL - kV Diff. between 3rd harm.
volt. at both sides of gen.,
Volts
BU3 REAL - kV Bias voltage, a part of
voltN3rdHarmonic,
primary Volts
UN REAL - kV Fund. frequency voltage
at generator neutral,
primary Volts

The protection is a combination of the 95% fundamental frequency earth fault
protection and the 3 rd harmonic based stator earth fault protection, (STEFPHIZ). The
3rd harmonic based 100% stator earth fault protection is using the 3rd harmonic voltage
generated by the generator itself. To assure reliable function of the protection it is
necessary that the 3rd harmonic voltage generation is at least 0.8 V RMS on VT
secondary side.
The 3rd harmonic voltage generated by the generator has the same phase angle in the
three phases. It has the characteristic of a zero sequence component. If the generator
is connected to the power system via a block transformer that cannot transform zero
sequence voltages between the voltage levels, the 3rd harmonic voltage, that is U3N
and U3T in fig 258, in the generator system is not influenced by the external power
system. At normal operation the generator third harmonic voltage characteristic can
be described as in figure 258.
Note that angle between U3N and U3T is typically close to 180°.
536
Technical manual

Voltage protection
- U3 +
- DU3 +
+
U3T,L1
-
+
- U3N + U3T,L2
-
+
U3T,L3
-
U3T
U3N
en06000448.vsd
IEC06000448 V2 EN
Figure 258: Generator 3rd harmonic voltage characteristic at normal operation
The generator is modeled as parts of a winding where a 3rd harmonic voltage is

induced along the winding, represented by the end voltages U3N (voltage drop across
resistor) and U3T in the figure. Via the winding capacitances to earth and the neutral
point resistor there will be a small 3rd harmonic current, giving the voltages U3N and
U3T. The 3rd harmonic voltage in the generator neutral point (U3N) will be close to zero
in case of a stator earth-fault close to the neutral. This fact alone can be used as an
indication of stator earth-fault. To enable better sensitivity and stability also
measurement of the generator's 3rd harmonic voltage U3T is also used. In addition to
the decrease of U3N the generator voltage U3T will increase under the stator earth-fault
close to the generator neutral point. Therefore the 3rd harmonic voltage U3T , (which
is a zero sequence voltage) is used by the protection. In the 3rd harmonic voltage
differential protection algorithm equation 134 is used:
537
Technical manual

Voltage protection
U3N + U3T ³ Beta U 3N

U3N, and U3T are third harmonic phasors with real and imaginary parts. The factor
Beta must be set not to risk operation under non-faulted conditions.
The voltage U3N is measured via a voltage transformer between the generator neutral
point and earth. The voltage U3T can be measured in different ways. The setting
TVoltType defines how the protection function is fed from voltage transformers at the
high voltage side of the generator. If U3T is lower than the set level UT3BlkLevel,
STEFPHIZ function is blocked. The choices of TVoltType are:
NoVoltage: There is no voltage measured from the generator terminal side. This can
be the case when there are only phase-to-phase voltage transformers available at the
generator terminal side. In this case the protection will operate as a simple neutral
point 3rd harmonic undervoltage protection, which must be blocked externally during
generator start-up and shut-down.
ResidualVoltage: The function is fed from an open delta connection of the phase to
earth connected voltage transformers at the generator terminal side,
U3T=(1/3)*U_Open_Delta.
AllThreePhases: The function is fed from the three phase to earth connected voltage
transformers at the generator terminal side. The 3rd harmonic voltage U3T is calculated
in the IED, U3T=(1/3)*(U3L1+U3L2+U3L3).
PhaseL1, PhaseL2, or PhaseL3: The function is fed from one phase voltage
transformer only. The 3rd harmonic zero sequence voltage is assumed to be equal to
any of the phase voltages, as the third harmonic voltage is of zero sequence type,
U3T=U3Lx.
A simplified block diagram describing the stator earth fault protection function shown
in figure 259.
538
Technical manual

Voltage protection
Samples:
Generator 3rd
terminal TRIP
harmonic
voltage Complex UT3 Stator Earth
Fourier
filtering Fault
detection TRIP3H
giving UT3
3rd
harmonic
TRIPUN
based Start
Start
and trip
logic START3H
Samples:
Generator 3rd
neutral point STARTUN
harmonic Complex UN3
voltage Fourier
filtering
giving UN3
Fundamental frequency residual Stator Earth

voltage Fault Start
detection
95 %
CB Status
Block
en06000449.vsd
IEC06000449 V2 EN
Figure 259: Simplified logic diagram for stator earth fault protection
STEFPHIZ function can be described in a simplified logical diagram as shown in

figure 260. Note that the 3rd harmonic numerical filters are not part of the stator earth-
fault protection function.
These third harmonic voltages are calculated by the preprocessing blocks connected
to the function.
539
Technical manual

Voltage protection
IEC07000186 V1 EN
Figure 260: Simplified Start and Trip logical diagram of the 100% Stator earth
fault protection, 3rd harmonic based STEFPHIZ protection
There are two different cases of generator block configuration; with or without
generator circuit breaker. If there is no generator breaker the capacitive coupling to
earth is the same under all operating conditions. When there is a generator breaker, the
capacitive coupling to earth differs between the operating conditions when the
generator is running with the generator breaker open (before synchronization) and
with the circuit breaker closed. This can be shown as in figure 261.
- U3 +
- DU3 +
+ Ctr/3
U3T,L1
-
+
- U3N + Ctr/3
U3T,L2
-
+
U3T,L3 Ctr/3
-
en07000002-2.vsd
IEC07000002 V2 EN
Figure 261: Generator block with generator circuit breaker
With the circuit breaker open, the total capacitance will be smaller compared to
normal operating conditions. This means that the neutral point 3rd harmonic voltage
540
Technical manual

Voltage protection
will be reduced compared to the normal operating condition. Therefore, there is a

possibility to reduce the sensitivity of the protection when the generator circuit
breaker is open.
With the setting CBexists change of the sensitivity is enabled. If the binary input signal
CBCLOSED is activated the set sensitivity is valid. If the generator circuit breaker is
opened the binary input CBCLOSED is deactivated and the sensitivity is changed.
This is done by changing the factor Beta which is multiplied with a set constant
FactorCBopen.
In addition to the binary outputs also some analog outputs are available from the
protection function in order to enable easier commissioning:
E3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage induced in the stator given in primary
volts
UN3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the neutral point of the
generator
UT3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the terminal point of the
generator
ANGLE: the angle between the phasors UN3 and UT3 given in radians
DU3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic differential voltage
BU3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic bias voltage
UN: the fundamental frequency voltage measured in the neutral point of the generator

Table 303: STEFPHIZ technical data
Fundamental frequency level UN (1.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur
(95% Stator EF)
Third harmonic differential level (0.5–10.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur
Third harmonic differential block (0.1–10.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur

level
Independent time delay to (0.020–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
operate for fundamental UN > greater
protection at 0 to 1.2 x UNFund>
Independent time delay to (0.020–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
operate for 3rd harm-based greater
protection at 0 to 5 x UN3rdH<
Filter characteristic: -
Fundamental Reject third harmonic by 1–40
Third harmonic Reject fundamental harmonic by
1–40
541
Technical manual

542

Section 10 Frequency protection
10.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81
f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is

used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so
on. Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore.
SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog
inputs/Setting guidelines

SAPTUF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
FREQ
IEC06000279 V2 EN
Figure 262: SAPTUF function block
543
Technical manual

10.1.4 Signals
Table 304: SAPTUF Input signals
SIGNAL
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output
Table 305: SAPTUF Output signals

RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low voltage
amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency
10.1.5 Settings
Table 306: SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 50.10 Restore frequency value
TimerMode Definite timer - - Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode
Volt based timer
UNom 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 100.0 Nominal voltage for voltage based timer in
% of UBase
UMin 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 90.0 Lower operation limit for voltage based
timer in % of UBase
Exponent 0.0 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 For calculation of the curve form for
voltage based timer
tMax 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Maximum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
tMin 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Minimum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
544
Technical manual

Table 307: SAPTUF Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 308: SAPTUF Monitored data
ULevel REAL - kV Level of measured
voltage
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used to detect low power system frequency.
SAPTUF can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time
delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time delay will be
longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the voltage is lower. If
the frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the
chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip
due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage
controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function, that
is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function,
the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously,

and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is
dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the
setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is described in
the Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage
parameter, SAPTUF gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage
settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase
voltage in kV.
10.1.7.2 Time delay
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay
depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low
545
Technical manual

voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tDelay
sets the time delay.
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 263 and
equation 135. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time delay to
apply.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay tDelay. If the START condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that the defined reset time
has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area.
On the RESTORE output of SAPTUF a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the
level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
10.1.7.3 Voltage dependent time delay
Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to
make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 135. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar
way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage
functions.
Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
ë UNom - UMin úû
where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
U is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
tMax, tMin are time settings.
The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 263, for:
546
Technical manual

UMin = 90%
UNom = 100%
tMax = 1.0 s
tMin = 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4
1
0
1
Exponenent
TimeDlyOperate [s]
2
3
0.5 4
0
90 95 100
U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
IEC05000075 V1 EN
Figure 263: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF. The time delay to operate is plotted as a function
of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.
10.1.7.4 Blocking
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF partially or completely, by

binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
10.1.7.5 Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time
integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage
dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of
547
Technical manual

RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore. The design
of underfrequency protection SAPTUF is schematically described in figure 264.
Block
BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
Comparator
MinValFreqMeas
Voltage Time integrator

Start
TimerOperation Mode & START
Selector START
Frequency Comparator Trip
f < StartFrequency Output
tDelay TRIP Logic
tReset TRIP
Comparator RESTORE
tRestore
f > RestoreFreq
IEC05000726 V2 EN
Figure 264: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF
10.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81
f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN
548
Technical manual

Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.
SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for generation
shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating
load restoring. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog
inputs/Setting guidelines

SAPTOF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
FREQ
IEC06000280 V2 EN
Figure 265: SAPTOF function block
10.2.4 Signals
Table 309: SAPTOF Input signals
SIGNAL
Table 310: SAPTOF Output signals

BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency
549
Technical manual

10.2.5 Settings
Table 311: SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Operate time delay
Table 312: SAPTOF Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 313: SAPTOF Monitored data
ULevel REAL - kV Level of measured
voltage

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function
is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set
blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no START
or TRIP signal is issued.
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. Overfrequency
protection SAPTOF is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude
decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function,
which is discussed in the Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a
global base voltage parameter UBase, SAPTOF is blocked and the output
BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the UBase, which
550
Technical manual

should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output

START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
10.2.7.2 Time delay
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting tDelay.
TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay, tReset. If the START condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that the defined reset time
has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area.
The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus
minimum operate time of the start function (80 - 90 ms).
10.2.7.3 Blocking
It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely, by

binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

preprocessing function both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
10.2.7.4 Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of
overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in figure 266.
551
Technical manual

BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
MinValFreqMeas
Start
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay START START
Frequency Comparator
f > StartFrequency tDelay
TRIP
tReset
TRIP
IEC05000735 V2 EN
Figure 266: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTOF

Table 314: SAPTOF technical data
Operate value, start function (35.00-90.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
at symmetrical three-phase
voltage
Operate time, start at fset - Min. = 80 ms -
fn = 50Hz
0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Max. = 95 ms
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset + 0.02 Min. = 15 ms -
Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s ± 0.2% ± 100 ms

function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset whichever is greater
+ 0.02 Hz
Reset time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s ± 0.2% ± 120 ms,
function at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset whichever is greater
- 0.02 Hz
552
Technical manual

10.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81
df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with high
accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action
schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between a positive or negative change of
frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on

positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-
neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs,
refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.

SAPFRC
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
IEC06000281 V2 EN
Figure 267: SAPFRC function block
10.3.4 Signals
Table 315: SAPFRC Input signals
SIGNAL
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output
553
Technical manual

Table 316: SAPFRC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient
START BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude
10.3.5 Settings
Table 317: SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
On
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value, the sign
defines direction
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in positive / negative
frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay

Table 318: SAPFRC Monitored data
STARTDUR REAL - % Start duration in percents
of the total operation time

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes at an early stage. SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay. If the
rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change,
for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-
of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a
time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an
unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude a
voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing
function. If the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing
function the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued. If the
frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.
554
Technical manual

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. Rate-of-change
frequency protection SAPFRC is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the
voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing
function, which is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC is
blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in
frequency. If SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then
a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a
value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets
SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases.
10.3.7.2 Time delay
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay,

tTrip. .
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues
for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the START condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the
START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only
return back into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the
restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality
is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled
if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by
the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
10.3.7.3 Blocking
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) can be partially or totally blocked,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output
555
Technical manual

preprocessing function, both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
10.3.7.4 Design
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) measuring element continuously

measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power
system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time.
When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE
output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued.
The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used
for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of SAPFRC is schematically
described in figure 268.
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET BLOCK
OR
Voltage Comparator BLKDMAGN

MinValFreqMeas
Start
Rate-of-Change Time integrator &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Definite Time Delay Output
[StartFreqGrad<0 START START
Logic
AND
tDelay
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
tReset
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START
Frequency Comparator RESTORE

tRestore
f > RestoreFreq
IEC05000835 V2 EN
Figure 268: Simplified logic diagram for SAPFRC
556
Technical manual


Table 319: SAPFRC Technical data
Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore (45.00-65.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
enable frequency
Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
greater
Definite time delay for (0.200-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is
frequency gradient trip greater
Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
10.4 Frequency time accumulation protection function

FTAQFVR
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/
identification identification IEEEidentification
Frequency time accumulation protection FTAQFVR f<> 81A
Frequency time accumulation protection FTAQFVR is based on measured system
frequency and time counters. FTAQFVR for generator protection provides the
START output for a particular settable frequency limit, when the system frequency
falls in that settable frequency band limit and positive sequence voltage within
settable voltage band limit. The START signal triggers the individual event timer,
which is the continuous time spent within the given frequency band, and the
accumulation timer, which is the cumulative time spent within the given frequency
band. Once the timers reach their limit, an alarm or trip signal is activated to protect
the turbine against the abnormal frequency operation. This function is blocked during
generator start-up or shut down conditions by monitoring the circuit breaker position
and current threshold value. The function is also blocked when the system positive
sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given voltage band limit which can be
enabled by EnaVoltCheck setting.
It is possible to create functionality with more than one frequency band limit by using
multiple instances of the function. This can be achieved by a proper configuration
based on the turbine manufacturer specification.
557
Technical manual

GUID-E27E0BC3-CB61-4E9E-9117-6AB8906F8362 V1 EN
Figure 269: FTAQFVR function block
10.4.4 Signals
Table 320: FTAQFVR Input signals
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage
SIGNAL
CBCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed status input
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open status input
LOADINIT BOOLEAN 0 Loads the initial accumulation time to the function
HOLDACC BOOLEAN 0 Holds the time accumulation when input is
activated
RESETACC BOOLEAN 0 Resetting the accumulated time of the function
block
Table 321: FTAQFVR Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN Error output for incorrect settings
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal of the function
TRIPACC BOOLEAN Trip signal when accumulation time is exceeded
the set limit
TRIPCONT BOOLEAN Trip signal when continuous time is exceeded the
set limit
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the function
ACCALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for reaching the frequency time
accumulation value
558
Technical manual


STRORHLD BOOLEAN Activated when function starts or HOLDACC input
is active
FREQOK BOOLEAN Indicates the system frequency within the
frequency band limits
VOLTOK BOOLEAN Indicates the system voltage within the voltage
band limits
10.4.5 Settings
Table 322: FTAQFVR Group settings (basic)
On
tContinuous 0.0 - 6000.0 s 0.1 20.0 Continuous time limit for frequency band
limits
tAccLimit 10.0 - 90000.0 s 0.1 600.0 Accumulation time limit for frequency
band limits
FreqHighLimit 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 47.50 Frequency High limit value
FreqLowLimit 30.00 - 85.00 Hz 0.01 47.00 Frequency Low limit value
CBCheck Disable - - Enable Enabling the generator start or stop
Enable detection logic
CurrStartLevel 5.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 10.0 Threshold current value of generator in
percentage of base current
EnaVoltCheck Disable - - Enable Enabling the voltage band limit check
Enable
UHighLimit 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 1.0 200.0 Voltage high limit for voltage band limit
check
ULowLimit 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 1.0 0.0 Voltage low limit for voltage band limit
check
Table 323: FTAQFVR Non group settings (basic)

groups
initTimeAcc 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.0 Initial accumulated time when LOADINIT
command is executed
559
Technical manual


Table 324: FTAQFVR Monitored data
value
ACCTIME REAL - s Accumulated time for
frequency band limits
LASTEVTD REAL - - Accumulation time for
last event of frequency
within band
Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR is used to protect the

turbine against an abnormal frequency operation. During the startup and shutdown of
the turbine-generator set, FTAQFVR is blocked to avoid unnecessary accumulation
of time or tripping of generator. FTAQFVR is also blocked when the system positive-
sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given voltage band limit, which can be
enabled with the EnaVoltCheck setting. The overall logic of FTAQFVR is explained
in Figure 270.
The frequency of the measured input voltage is monitored continuously and compared
to the set frequency band limits FreqHighLimit and FreqLowLimit. When the
measured system frequency is above the FreqLowLimit setting and below the
FreqHighLimit setting, the FREQOK and START signals are activated. The START
signal is controlled by the measured current and voltage input magnitude and the
status of the circuit breaker position.
FTAQFVR function will block START signal activation and Accumulation of time
under two following conditions even if the system frequency falls within set band
limits.
• When the generator is not synchronized as indicated by the CBOPEN signal input:
Generator currents are considered to detect whether the generator is supplying its
unit auxiliary supply transformers or not. FTAQFVR function will be blocked
when the measured current magnitude drops below the setting CurrStartLevel
and CBOPEN input is high. FTAQFVR remains blocked until the generator
returns to the operation condition. It can be verified by using the CBCLOSE
signal. Generator's start and stop detection logics for the START output can be
ignored by disabling the CBCheck setting.
• When the positive-sequence voltage of the measured input voltage is outside the
band limit.
The START output will be blocked if the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled and the
system positive sequence voltage is not within the voltage band limits.
560
Technical manual

Voltage band limit check will be ignored for the START output if the
EnaVoltCheck setting is disabled. The voltage band limits are set with the settings
UHighLimit and ULowLimit.
The output VOLTOK is activated only if the system positive-sequence voltage
falls within the voltage band limits and the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled.
To avoid oscillations of the START output signal, a hysteresis has been added with
current input comparison and voltage input comparison. It is also possible to block
FTAQFVR completely by activating the binary input BLOCK and its function is to
reset all the binary outputs of FTAQFVR and freeze the accumulation time.
Time counters
FTAQFVR uses two time counters.
1. Individual event time: The individual event time counter registers the time
passing if the system frequency falls within the frequency band limits each time.
It resets when the frequency comes out of the frequency band limits and also
when the BLOCK binary input is activated and start from zero when a new start is
activated.
2. Accumulation time: The accumulation time counter registers the time passing
whenever the START output is activated. It holds the registered time value even
when the START signal is deactivated and continues from the registered value
when the START signal is reactivated.
The registration of accumulation time is frozen at its present value when the input
HOLDACC or BLOCK is activated. The accumulation time can be set to the
initTimeAcc parameter value by activating the LOADINT input with the LHMI and it
can be reset to zero by activating the RESETACC input. The RESETACC input can be
activated by a binary input. The accumulated time ACCTIME is provided as a service
output.
The last completed individual event time is updated in the LASTEVTD output. This
output holds the last completed individual event time until the next event to complete.
Trip logic
The individual event and accumulation timer values are compared to the tCont and
tAcclLimit settings respectively. If these counter values exceed their limit values,
TRIPCONT and ACCALARM outputs will be activated. The TRIPACC output is
activated if both the ACCALARM and START signals are activated. A common TRIP
signal is generated when either TRIPCONT or TRIPACC is activated.
561
Technical manual

Comparator
If
FreqHighLimit <= ERROR
FreqLowLimit
Then
ERROR
FREQ FREQ
Comparator
If
FREQOK FREQOK
f <= FreqHighLimit
AND
f > FreqLowLimit
VOLTOK VOLTOK
Then
U3P
START
START
Accumulation time
Comparator
counter
U01 <= UHighLimit TRIPACC
START
AND
Signal Routing Continuous time
U01 >= ULowLimit
Based on counter TRIPCONT
Generator
START
Start or Stop AND
I3P Comparator
Detection Logic TRIP
I < CurrStartLevel
and Start & Trip
Voltage Band Limit
CBOPEN Output Logic
Check Logic
ACCALARM
CBCLOSE
LOADINIT STRORHLD
RESETACC
ACCTIME
HOLDTIME
BLOCK LASTEVTD
IEC12000609 V2 EN
Figure 270: Logical diagram
To achieve a proper operation, the set frequency high limit should be more than the set
frequency low limit. To avoid malfunction, a check is performed that FreqHighLimit
is greater than FreqLowLimit. If not, the ERROR signal is activated.
FTAQFVR can be instantiated with one or more frequency ranges according to the
turbine manufacturer's specification. When the frequency falls in to the common zone
when two frequency ranges overlap it is necessary to block one instance and keep only
one instance of FTAQFVR active. The STRORHLD output is activated when either the
START output is active or when the HOLDACC input signal is on. The STRORHLD
output is connected to the input HOLDACC of the other instance of FTAQFVR.
562
Technical manual

Table 325: FTAQFVR technical data

Operate value, frequency high (35.00 – 90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
limit level at symmetrical three
phase voltage
Operatevalue, frequency low (30.00 – 85.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
limit level at symmetrical three
phase voltage
Operate value, voltage high and (0.0 – 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
low limit for voltage band limit ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
check
Operate value, current start (5.0 – 100.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir or 0.01 A at I≤Ir
level
Independent time delay for the (0.0 – 6000.0) s ±0.2% or ±200 ms whichever is
continuous time limit at fset+0.02 greater
Hz to fset-0.02 Hz
Independent time delay for the (10.0 – 90000.0) s ±0.2% or ±200 ms whichever is
accumulation time limit at fset greater
+0.02 Hz to fset-0.02 Hz
563
Technical manual

564

Section 11 Multipurpose protection
11.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -
The protection module is recommended as a general backup protection with many
possible application areas due to its flexible measuring and setting facilities.
The built-in overcurrent protection feature has two settable current levels. Both of
them can be used either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. The
overcurrent protection steps can be made directional with selectable voltage
polarizing quantity. Additionally they can be voltage and/or current controlled/
restrained. 2nd harmonic restraining facility is available as well. At too low polarizing
voltage the overcurrent feature can be either blocked, made non directional or ordered
to use voltage memory in accordance with a parameter setting.
Additionally two overvoltage and two undervoltage steps, either with definite time or
inverse time characteristic, are available within each function.
The general function suits applications with underimpedance and voltage controlled
overcurrent solutions. The general function can also be utilized for generator
transformer protection applications where positive, negative or zero sequence
components of current and voltage quantities are typically required.
Additionally, generator applications such as loss of field, inadvertent energizing,

stator or rotor overload, circuit breaker head flash-over and open phase detection are
just a few of possible protection arrangements with these functions.
11.1.2.1 Inadvertent generator energization
When the generator is taken out of service, and non-rotating, there is a risk that the
generator circuit breaker flashes over or is closed by mistake.
565
Technical manual

To prevent damages on the generator or turbine, it is essential that high speed tripping
is provided in case of inadvertent energization of the generator. This tripping should
be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms).
There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be
limited so that the “normal” overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect
the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. For
big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should,
therefore, be included in the protective scheme.

CVGAPC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 TRUC1
BLKOC1TR TRUC2
ENMLTOC1 TROV1
BLKOC2 TROV2
BLKOC2TR TRUV1
ENMLTOC2 TRUV2
BLKUC1 START
BLKUC1TR STOC1
BLKUC2 STOC2
BLKUC2TR STUC1
BLKOV1 STUC2
BLKOV1TR STOV1
BLKOV2 STOV2
BLKOV2TR STUV1
BLKUV1 STUV2
BLKUV1TR BLK2ND
BLKUV2 DIROC1
BLKUV2TR DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE
IEC05000372 V2 EN
Figure 271: CVGAPC function block
11.1.4 Signals
Table 326: CVGAPC Input signals
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC1
566
Technical manual


BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2
Table 327: CVGAPC Output signals

TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
STOC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
STUC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND BOOLEAN Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
567
Technical manual


DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current
11.1.5 Settings
Table 328: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
On
CurrentInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select current signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
OperHarmRestr Off - - Off Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off /
On On
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current
harmonic in %
BlkLevel2nd 10 - 5000 %IB 1 5000 Harm analyse disabled above this current
level in % of fundamental current
EnRestrainCurr Off - - Off Enable current restrain function On / Off
On
568
Technical manual


RestrCurrInput PosSeq - - PosSeq Select current signal which will be used for
NegSeq curr restrain
3*ZeroSeq
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 - 5.00 - 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of UBase setting
ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Off - - Off Operation OC1 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC1 in % of
IBase
CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC1
k_OC1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC1
IBase
tMin_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC1
Off function
VDepMode_OC1 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC1 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1 is
U dependent
ULowLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC1 Off - - Off Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,
Forward reverse)
Reverse
569
Technical manual


DirPrinc_OC1 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_OC2 Off - - Off Operation OC2 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC2 in % of
IBase
CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC2
k_OC2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC2
IBase
tMin_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC2
Off function
VDepMode_OC2 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC2 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2 is
U dependent
ULowLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC2 Off - - Off Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,
Forward reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC2
570
Technical manual


ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_UC1 Off - - Off Operation UC1 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC1 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for UC1
in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC1 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in %
of IBase
tDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1 Off - - Off Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_UC2 Off - - Off Operation UC2 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for UC2
in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC2 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in %
of IBase
tDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Off - - Off Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_OV1 Off - - Off Operation OV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV1 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV1
tMin_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for
OV1
k_OV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV1
Operation_OV2 Off - - Off Operation OV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV2 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of
UBase
571
Technical manual


CurveType_OV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV2
tMin_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for
OV2
k_OV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV2
Operation_UV1 Off - - Off Operation UV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV1 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in %
of UBase
CurveType_UV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for
UV1
k_UV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level blocking
On for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1
in % of UBase
Operation_UV2 Off - - Off Operation UV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV2 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in %
of UBase
CurveType_UV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for
UV2
k_UV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level blocking
On for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2
in % of UBase
572
Technical manual

Table 329: CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

CurrMult_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC1
P_OC1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC1
A_OC1 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC1
C_OC1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OC1
PR_OC1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
TR_OC1 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
CR_OC1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
CurrMult_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC2
P_OC2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC2
A_OC2 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC2
C_OC2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OC2
PR_OC2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
TR_OC2 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
CR_OC2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
573
Technical manual


tResetDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV1
A_OV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV1
B_OV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV1
C_OV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for OV1
P_OV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV1
ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV2
A_OV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV2
B_OV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV2
C_OV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OV2
D_OV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for OV2
P_OV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV1
A_UV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV1
B_UV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV1
C_UV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for UV1
P_UV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV1
574
Technical manual


ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV2
A_UV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV2
B_UV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV2
C_UV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for UV2
D_UV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for UV2
P_UV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV2
Table 330: CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

groups

Table 331: CVGAPC Monitored data
DIROC1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC1
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
DIROC2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC2
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL - A Measured current
multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage
and current
575
Technical manual

11.1.7.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC
General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to

three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will
always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in
the setting tool.
The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 332.
Table 332: Current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter Comment
CurrentInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
current phasor
6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0° all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase
L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2)
L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3)
L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the
time
576
Technical manual

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 333:
Table 333: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter Comment
VoltageInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180°
in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for the
directional feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which
the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0° all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase
L2 voltage phasor (UL1-UL2)
L3 voltage phasor (UL2-UL3)
L1 voltage phasor ( UL3-UL1)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which
the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the
time
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 333 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three
phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT
577
Technical manual

connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will
then take automatic care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 334 for built-in current
restraint feature:
Table 334: Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter RestrCurr Comment
current phasor
2 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
current phasor
3 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
11.1.7.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function
The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for every
CVGAPC function.
Base current shall be entered as:
1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 332.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3
(1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as
shown in table 332.
Base voltage shall be entered as:
1. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 333.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 333.
11.1.7.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps
Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 332) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup
if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level.
However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might
578
Technical manual

not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come if all of the
enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.
Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in
the measured current quantity (see table 332). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:
• PosSeq (positive sequence current)

• NegSeq (negative sequence current)
• UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
• UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic
ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant
phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 332) and measured voltage
phasor (see table 333). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent
and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling this
built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current
flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means towards the
protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature
it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see
table 333) and measured current phasor (see table 332) will be used for directional
decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate
current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. CVGAPC
function will NOT do this automatically. It will simply use the current and voltage
phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.
Table 335 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for
these two quantities from traditional directional relays.
Table 335: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45° to
-90° depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45° to
-90° depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0° to -90°
depending on the power system earthing (that is,
solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)
579
Technical manual

Set value for the Set value for the

parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase
is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.
Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and IcosPhi&U.
The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:
• the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
• the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 272).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Ipickup ROADir I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN
Figure 272: I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function
where:
RCADir is -75°
ROADir is 50°
The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks
that:
• that the product I·cos(Φ) is bigger than the set pick-up level, where Φ is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
• that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by
the I·cos(Φ) straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting;
see figure 272).
580
Technical manual

U=-3U0
RCADir
Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN
Figure 273: CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle
where:
RCADir is -75°
ROADir is 50°
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-
set value. User can select one of the following three options:
• Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

• Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
• Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms.
After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during
memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage
goes above set voltage memory limit.
Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured
voltage quantity (see table 333). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:
• Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)
581
Technical manual

OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
IEC05000324 V1 EN
Figure 274: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
• Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude
en05000323.vsd
IEC05000323 V1 EN
Figure 275: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as
well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves
(overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions).
582
Technical manual

Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining
current quantity (see table 334). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the
restraining current.
IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
e ra ff *Ir
Op oe
s trC
e
I>R
IsetHigh
IsetLow
atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN
Figure 276: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude
This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay
in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user
setting.
11.1.7.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps
Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 332) with the set pickup level.
The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start signal will start
definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.
583
Technical manual

11.1.7.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps
Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 333) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
setting.
11.1.7.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps
Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 333) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
setting.
11.1.7.7 Inadvertent generator energizing
The inadvertent energizing function is realized by means of the general current and
voltage protection function (CAGVPC). CVGAPC is configured as shown in
figure 277.
584
Technical manual

CVGAPC
3IP
3UP TROC1
TROV1 S Q
TRUV1 R Q
BLKOC1
en08000288.vsd
IEC08000288 V1 EN
Figure 277: Configuration of the inadvertent energizing function
The setting of the general current and voltage function (typical values) is done as
shown in table 336.
Table 336: The setting of the general current and voltage function
Measured Quantity Pickup in % of generator Time delay in seconds
rating
Undervoltage U< Maximum generator < 70% 10.0 s
Phase to Phase
voltage
Overvoltage U> Maximum generator > 85% 1.0 s
Phase to Phase
voltage
Overcurrent I> Maximum generator > 50% 0.05 s
Phase current
In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip
signal is deactivated. This means that the overcurrent function is blocked.
When the generator is taken out of service the generator voltage gets low. The
overvoltage trip signal will be deactivated and the undervoltage trip signal will be
585
Technical manual

activated after the set delay. At this moment the block signal to the overcurrent
function will be deactivated.
It the generator is energized at stand still conditions, that is, when the voltage is zero,
the overcurrent function will operate after the short set delay if the generator current
is larger than the set value.
When the generator is started the overvoltage trip signal will be activated the set time
delay after the moment when the voltage has reached the set value. At this moment the
blocking of the overcurrent function is activated.
The delay of the undervoltage function will prevent false operation at short circuits in
the external power grid.
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following
figures.
IED
ADM CVGAPC function
Current and voltage selection

settings
Phasor calculation of
scaling with CT ratio
individual currents
A/D conversion
Selection of which current Selected current

and voltage shall be given to
Phasors &
samples
the built-in protection Selected voltage

elements
Restraint current selection
Selected restraint current

A/D conversion scaling
Selection of restraint current

Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
with CT ratio
Phasors &
samples
IEC05000169 V2 EN
Figure 278: Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function
Figure 278 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function
586
Technical manual

The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.
1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-
phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
The multipurpose protection function:
1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 332) for
internally measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 333) for
internally measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 334) for
internally measured restraint current.
587
Technical manual

CURRENT
UC1
nd TRUC1
2 Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
TRUC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
STOC1
OC1 TROC1
2nd Harmonic BLK2ND

restraint ³1
Selected restraint current
Current restraint
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint
STOC2
OC2 TROC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint ³1
UDIRLOW
Directionality DIROC2
Voltage control /
restraint
STOV1
OV1 TROV1
STOV2
OV2 TROV2
STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1
STUV2
UV2 TRUV2
VOLTAGE
en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN
Figure 279: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements
588
Technical manual

Logic in figure 279 can be summarized as follows:
1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its
START and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following
four figures.
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps
(internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
a
a>b AND
BlkLevel2nd b
Enable
second Second harmonic
harmonic check DEF time BLKTRO C1 TROC1
selected DEF AND
OR
a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse
Voltage Directionali ty DIR_OK Inverse

control or time
check selected
restrai nt
feature
Selected v oltage
Curren t
Restrai nt
Feature
Selected restrain current Imea sure d > k Irestra int
IEC05000831 V2 EN
Figure 280: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)
589
Technical manual

Bin input: BLKUC1TR
Selected current a TRUC1

b>a
DEF AND
b
StartCurr_UC1
AND
Operation_UC1=On
STUC1
Bin input: BLKUC1
en05000750.vsd
IEC05000750 V1 EN
Figure 281: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has the
same internal logic)
DEF time BLKTROV1

selected DEF TROV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
a>b
b STOV1
StartVolt_OV1
AND
Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected
en05000751.vsd
IEC05000751 V1 EN
Figure 282: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)
590
Technical manual

DEF time BLKTRUV

selected DEF 1 TRUV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
b>a
b STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1
Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected
en05000752.vsd
IEC05000752 V1 EN
Figure 283: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)

Table 337: CVGAPC technical data
Measuring current phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Measuring voltage phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Start overcurrent, (2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
step 1 - 2 ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Start undercurrent, (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

step 1 - 2 ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

delay, overcurrent at greater
0 to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2

delay, undercurrent greater
at 2 to 0 x Iset, step 1 -
2
Overcurrent (non-
directional):
Start time at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Iset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset Max. = 30 ms
591
Technical manual


Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 Min. = 20 ms -

x Iset Max. = 35 ms
Undercurrent:
Iset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset Max. = 30 ms
Overcurrent:
Inverse time 16 curve types See table 959, 960 and table ""
characteristics, see
table 959, 960 and
table ""
Overcurrent:
Minimum operate (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
time for inverse greater
curves, step 1 - 2
Voltage level where (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
voltage memory
takes over
Start overvoltage, (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
step 1 - 2 ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Start undervoltage, (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

step 1 - 2 ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

delay, overvoltage at greater
0.8 to 1.2 x Uset, step
1-2
delay, undervoltage greater
at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset,
step 1 - 2
Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 to 1.2 Min. = 15 ms -
x Uset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 to Min. = 15 ms -

0.8 x Uset Max. = 30 ms
Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 to 0.8 Min. = 15 ms -
x Uset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 to Min. = 15 ms -

0.8 x Uset Max. = 30 ms
Overvoltage:
Inverse time 4 curve types See table 970
table 970
Undervoltage:
592
Technical manual


Inverse time 3 curve types See table 971
table 971
High and low voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
limit, voltage ±1.0% of U at U > Ur
dependent operation,
step 1 - 2
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse -
Relay characteristic (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
angle
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
overcurrent
undercurrent
overvoltage
undervoltage
Overcurrent:

Undercurrent:

Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset -

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset -
593
Technical manual

594

System protection and control
Section 12 System protection and control
12.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -
The multi-purpose filter function block, SMAIHPAC, is arranged as a three-phase
filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the standard
pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that it can be
used to extract any frequency component from the input signal. Thus it can, for
example, be used to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for synchronous
generator.

SMAIHPAC
BLOCK AI3P
G3P* AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC13000180 V1 EN
12.1.4 Signals
Table 338: SMAIHPAC Input signals

G3P GROUP - Analog input group from SMAI
SIGNAL
595
Technical manual

Table 339: SMAIHPAC Output signals

AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3-phase group
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 1
12.1.5 Settings
Table 340: SMAIHPAC Non group settings (basic)

ConnectionType Ph - Ph - - Ph - N Analogue input connection type
Ph - N
SetFrequency 2.0 - 500.0 Hz 0.1 50.0 Desired frequency to be extracted by the
filter
FreqBandWidth 0.0 - 60.0 Hz 0.1 0.0 Extra added frequency band around the
set frequency
FilterLength 0.1 s - - 1.0 s Approximate length of the filtering window
0.2 s in seconds
0.5 s
1.0 s
2.0 s
4.0 s
OverLap 0 - 95 % 5 20 Filtering window overlap between two
calculations in percent

For all four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual
quantity) the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20
samples per fundamental system cycle are first stored. When enough samples are
available in the internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the
setting parameter SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally
available for each of the calculated phasors:
• Magnitude
• Phase angle
• Exact frequency of the extracted signal
Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This
algorithm is different from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically used
by the numerical IEDs. This filter provides extremely good accuracy of measurement
and excellent noise rejection, but at the same time it has much slower response time.
It is capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle and actual frequency) of
596
Technical manual

any signal (e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the connected CTs and/or VTs.
The magnitude and the phase angle of this phasor are calculated with very high
precision. For example the magnitude and phase angle of the phasor can be estimated
even if it has magnitude of one per mille (i.e. 1‰ ) in comparison to the dominating
signal (e.g. the fundamental frequency component). Several instances of this function
block are provided. These instances are fully synchronized between each-other in
respect of phase angle calculation. Thus if two multi-purpose filters are used for some
application, one for current and the second one for the voltage signals, the power
values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can be calculated from them by the over-/under-
power function or CVMMXN measurement function block.
In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as well:
• Phasors for the individual phases as well as phase-to-phase phasors
• True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory
• Positive sequence phasor
• Negative sequence phasor
• Zero sequence phasor
• etc.
In order to properly calculate phase-to-phase phasors from the individual phase

phasors or vice versa, the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided. It defines
what quantities (i.e. individual phases or phase-to-phase quantities) are physically
connected to the IED analogue inputs by wiring. Then the IED knows which one of
them are the measured quantities and the other one is then internally calculated. This
setting is only important for the VT inputs, because the CTs are typically star
connected all the time.
Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function or
overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-power function many different
protection applications can be arranged. For example the following protection,
monitoring or measurement features can be realized:
• Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators
• Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
• Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and synchronous
generators
• Super-synchronous protection
• Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
• Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-
harmonic, inter-harmonic etc.
• Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-phase
power system
• Sensitive reverse power protection
• Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
• etc.
597
Technical manual

The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU
(Phase-phase voltage measurement), etc.
The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the
extracted signal. Thus the user can check the actual frequency of some phenomenon
in the power system (e.g. frequency of the sub-synchronous currents) and compare it
with expected value obtained previously by either calculation or simulation. For the
whole three-phase filter group the frequency of the signal connected to the first input
(i.e. phase L1) is reported. This value can be then used either by over-/under-
frequency protections or reported to the built-in HMI or any other external client via
the measurement blocks such is the CVMMXN.
How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on the
setting parameter FilterLength. Table 341 gives overview of the used number of
samples for phasor calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of samples is
always a power of number two.
Table 341: Length of the filtering window
Value for parameter Used No of samples for Corresponding length of Corresponding length of
FilterLength calculation (fixed, the input waveform in the input waveform in
independent from rated miliseconds for 50Hz miliseconds for 60Hz
frequency) power system power system
0.1 s 128 = 27 128 ms 107 ms
0.2 s 256 = 28 256 ms 213 ms
0.5 s 512 = 29 512 ms 427 ms
1.0 s 1024 = 210 1024 ms 853 ms
2.0 s 2048 = 211 2048 ms 1707 ms
4.0 s 4096 = 212 4096 ms 3413 ms
Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines
certain filter properties as described below:
First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall
always be longer than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted.
Actually the best results are obtained if at least five complete periods are available
within the filtering window. Thus, this filter feature will limit which filter lengths can
be used to extract low frequency signals. For example if 16,7 Hz signal shall be
extracted the minimum filter length in milliseconds shall be:
1000
3× = 180ms
16.7
Thus based on the data from Table 341 the minimum acceptable value for this
parameter would be “FilterLength = 0.2 s” but more accurate results will be obtained
by using “FilterLength = 0.5 s”
598
Technical manual

Second feature which is determined by the selected value for parameter FilterLength
is the capability of the filter to separate the desired signal from the other disturbing
signals which may have similar frequency value. Note that the filter output will be the
phasor with the highest magnitude within certain “pass frequency band” around the
SetFrequency. Table 342 defines the natural size of this pass frequency band for the
filter, depending on the selected value for parameter FilterLength.
Table 342: Pass frequency band due to FilterLength
Value for parameter FilterLength For 50Hz power system For 60Hz power system
0.1 s ±22.5 Hz ±27.0 Hz
0.2 s ±11.5 Hz ±14.0 Hz
0.5 s ±6.0 Hz ±7.2 Hz
1.0 s ±3.0 Hz ±3.6 Hz
2.0 s ±1.5 Hz ±1.8 Hz
4.0 s ±0.8 Hz ±1.0 Hz
Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the disturbing
signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise present in the
input signal waveform. For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be extracted in 50Hz
power system, then from Table 342 it can be concluded that “FilterLength=1,0 s” shall
be selected as a minimum value. However if frequency deviation of the fundamental
frequency signal in the power system are taken into account it may be advisable to
select “FilterLength=2,0 s” for such application.
Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency band
the filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the signal
frequency will have value minus one. Finally the set value for parameter FilterLength
also defines the response time of the filter after a step change of the measured signal.
The filter will correctly estimate the new signal magnitude once 75% of the filter
length has been filed with the new signal value (i.e. after the change).
If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate but
wider filter) it is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value different from
zero for parameter FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass band can be
defined as:
± (value given in Table 342 + one-half of the set FreqBandWidth value)
Example if in 60Hz system the selected values are “FilterLength =1.0 s” and
“FreqBandWidth = 5.0” the total filter pass band will be ±(3.6+5.0/2)= ± 6.1 Hz.
It shall be noted that the phasor calculation is relatively computation demanding

(required certain amount of the CPU processing time). In order to control the CPU
usage for this filter, the setting parameter OverLap is used. This setting parameter
defines how often the new phasor value is calculated during time period defined by the
set value for the parameter FilterLength (see Table 341). The following list gives
599
Technical manual

some examples how this parameter influence the calculation rate for the extracted
phasor:
• when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per
FilterLength
• when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per
FilterLength
• when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per
FilterLength
• when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per
FilterLength
12.1.7 Filter calculation example

In the following Figure an example from an installation of this filter on a large, 50 Hz
turbo generator with a rating in excess of 1000 MVA is presented. In this installation
filter is used to measure the stator sub-synchronous resonance currents. For this
particular installation the following settings were used for the filter:
• SetFrequency= 31.0 Hz
• FilterLength= 1.0 s
• OverLap = 75%
• FreqBandWidth= 0.0 Hz
IEC13000178 V3 EN
Figure 284: Example of filter calculation
600
Technical manual

The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED. The
following traces are presented in this Figure.
a) Waveforms of the stator three-phase currents given in primary kA.
b) RMS value of the sub-synchronous resonance current extracted by the filter in

primary amperes.
c) Frequency of the extracted sub-synchronous resonance current provided by the

filter in Hz.
Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well
indicates with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor
magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub-synchronous current component.
The following can be observed in the Figure:

• The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary.
• The measured magnitude of the sub-synchronous current is around 173 A
primary (that is, 0.5% of the fundamental 50 Hz component).
• The frequency of this sub-synchronous current component is 31.24 Hz.
With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency are
calculated approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four times per
1024 ms).
601
Technical manual

602

Section 13 Secondary system supervision
13.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions.
It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of open

CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will
stress the secondary circuit.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to

block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.

CCSSPVC
I3P* FAIL
IREF* ALARM
BLOCK
IEC13000304 V1 EN
Figure 285: CCSSPVC function block
Signal IREF must be connected in the configuration.
603
Technical manual

13.1.4 Signals
Table 343: CCSSPVC Input signals
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current input
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Residual reference current input
SIGNAL
Table 344: CCSSPVC Output signals

FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure
13.1.5 Settings
Table 345: CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)
On
IMinOp 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential level
in % of IBase
Table 346: CCSSPVC Group settings (advanced)

Ip>Block 20 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase
Table 347: CCSSPVC Non group settings (basic)

groups

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |ΣIphase| and the absolute value of the residual current
|Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 286.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
604
Technical manual

• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than the
set operate value IMinOp.
• No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
• CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will
be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-
gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase
current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.
I>Ip>Block
BLOCK
IL1 IL1 I>IMinOp
IL2 +å
IL2 å
IL3 IL3 -
+å +å
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
1,5 x Ir
AND OR FAIL
10 ms
20 ms 100 ms
150 ms 1s ALARM
OPERATION
BLOCK
en05000463.tif
IEC05000463 V2 EN
Figure 286: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 287.
605
Technical manual

| åI phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp
| åI phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN
Figure 287: Operate characteristics
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I
phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

Table 348: CCSSPVCtechnical data
Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±10.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase
13.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -
606
Technical manual

The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might
occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods,
negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage
and delta current detection.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated
or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence quantities.
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.
The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order

to take into account the particular earthing of the network.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the
fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in
practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station
operations.

FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS STDI
BLKTRIP STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3
IEC14000065 V1 EN
Figure 288: FUFSPVC function block
607
Technical manual

13.2.4 Signals
Table 349: FUFSPVC Input signals
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected voltage
circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active
Table 350: FUFSPVC Output signals

BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current
STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L1
STDU BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
STDUL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L1
608
Technical manual

13.2.5 Settings
Table 351: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)
On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function
On Off/On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current
in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in
% of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase
Table 352: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

groups
609
Technical manual


Table 353: FUFSPVC Monitored data
3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero
sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero
sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage
13.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection
The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 289:
• the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0
• the negative sequence current 3I2
• the negative sequence voltage 3U2
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and 3I0<,
3U2> and 3I2<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-sequence
current is below the set value 3I0<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured negative
sequence current is below the set value 3I2<.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the
two line ends.
610
Technical manual

Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq
Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b
3U2>
IEC10000036 V2 EN
Figure 289: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part
The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on local
HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.
Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and
DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions
occur:
• The input BLOCK is activated

• The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not
present
• The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
• The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block for
100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the
611
Technical manual

opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse
failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary
circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block
all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of
OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of
MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due
to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.
13.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 290. The calculation of
the changes of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The
calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>.
The algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a
sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The following
quantities are calculated in all three phases:
• The change in voltage DU

• The change in current DI
The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are

fulfilled:
• The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more than
1.5 cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
• The magnitudes of DU in three phases are higher than the corresponding setting
DU>
• The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<
612
Technical manual

In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:
• The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting
IPh>
• The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high
current for the three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used to
reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low,
a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be followed by current
change lower than the setting DI<, and therefore a false fuse failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same time
as circuit breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is connected to FALSE , then only
the first criterion can enable the delta function.If the DUDI detections of three phases
set the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at the level high, then the signal
FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the voltages of three phases are lower
then the setting Uph>.
In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The
internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage, or
respectively current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on a
sample analysis algorithm. In particular DelatU is activated if at least three
consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting DU>. In a similar way DelatI
is activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher then the setting
DI<. When DeltaU or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1, STDUL2,
STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1, STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a sudden change of
voltage or current detection, are activated with a 20 ms time off delay. The common
start output signals STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms time off delay, if any
sudden change of voltage or current is detected.
The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.
613
Technical manual

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
DeltaIL1
IL1
IL2
IL3 DI detection based on sample analysis OR
DI<
UL1
DU detection based on sample analysis

AND
DU>
1.5 cycle 20 ms DeltaUL1
a
a>b t t
UPh> b
IL1 DeltaIL2
IL2 DUDI detection Phase 2
DeltaUL2
IL3
UL2 Same logic as for phase 1
IL1 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
IL2
DeltaUL3
IL3
UL3 Same logic as for phase 1
UL1
a
ab
IPh> b AND
OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR
UL2
a
ab
b AND
OR AND
AND OR
UL3
a
ab
b AND
OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
AND
IEC12000166 V3 EN
Figure 290: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part
614
Technical manual

intBlock
STDI
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND
STDU
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND
IEC12000165 V1 EN
Figure 291: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output
signals
13.2.7.3 Dead line detection
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 292. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to be
dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all
three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated
615
Technical manual

Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b
IL3
a
a<b
b
IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b
UDLD<
intBlock
IEC10000035 V2 EN
Figure 292: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part
13.2.7.4 Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 293. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
Operation to On or Off.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode

selector, OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating
modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation
modes are:
• Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

• UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in
parallel (OR-condition for operation).
• UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in
series (AND-condition for operation).
• OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that
has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will
be activated).
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
616
Technical manual

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is released,
the function will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal BLKZ will be
activated as well if the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not
activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used for blocking voltage related
measuring functions (under voltage protection, energizing check, and so on). The
output BLKZ shall be used to block the impedance protection functions.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below
the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ signals activated as long
as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If all three phase voltages drop
below the set value USealIn< and the setting parameter SealIn is set to On the output
signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ will now be
active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<.
If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored in
the non-volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power
interruption or re-start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-
volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present before the shut
down. All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn< before fuse failure is de-
activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.
The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the
setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has
been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents
are below the setting IDLD< (criteria for open phase detection) and the circuit breaker
is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of
the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs
the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage
dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the
miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be affected
since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance
protection.
617
Technical manual

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted
All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND
AND
Any UL < UsealIn<
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b
AND
DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t
AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND
VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t
AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED
DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd
IEC10000033 V2 EN
Figure 293: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main
logic
618
Technical manual


Table 354: FUFSPVCtechnical data
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ± 0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ± 0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ± 10.0% of Ur
Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ± 10.0% of Ir
Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ± 0.5% of Ir
Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ± 0.5% of Ir
Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 to 0 x Ur Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
13.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of
measured voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:
• Distance protection function.

• Undervoltage function.
• Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.
These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits
between voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional operations
can be prevented by VDSPVC.
619
Technical manual

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit,

based on phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits.
VDSPVC blocking output can be configured to block functions that need to be
blocked in case of faults in the voltage circuit.

VDSPVC
U3P1* MAINFUF
U3P2* PILOTFUF
BLOCK U1L1FAIL
U1L2FAIL
U1L3FAIL
U2L1FAIL
U2L2FAIL
U2L3FAIL
IEC12000142 V2 EN
Figure 294: VDSPVC function block
13.3.4 Signals
Table 355: VDSPVC Input signals
U3P1 GROUP - Main fuse voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Pilot fuse voltage
SIGNAL
Table 356: VDSPVC Output signals

MAINFUF BOOLEAN Block of main fuse failure
PILOTFUF BOOLEAN Alarm of pilot fuse failure
U1L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L1
U2L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L1
620
Technical manual

13.3.5 Settings
Table 357: VDSPVC Group settings (basic)
On
Ud>MainBlock 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 20.0 Blocking picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when main fuse fails
Ud>PilotAlarm 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Alarm picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when pilot fuse fails
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealIn 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of
UBase
Table 358: VDSPVC Non group settings (basic)

groups
Table 359: VDSPVC Non group settings (advanced)

ConTypeMain Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for main fuse
Ph-Ph group
ConTypePilot Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for pilot fuse
Ph-Ph group

Table 360: VDSPVC Monitored data
UL1DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase
L1 for alarm functionality
UL1DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase
L1 for block functionality
621
Technical manual


VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main and
pilot fuse groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is theoretical
zero in the healthy condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be due to a fuse
failure.
If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainL1 <
vPilotL1 or vMainL2 < vPilotL2 or vMainL3 < vPilotL3) and the voltage difference
exceeds the operation level (Ud>MainBlock), a blocking signal will be initiated to
indicate the main fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent functions. In addition,
the function also indicates the phase in which the voltage reduction has occurred.
If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotL1 <
vMainL1 or vPilotL2 < vMainL2 or vPilotL3 < vMainL3) and the voltage difference
exceeds the operation level (Ud>PilotAlarm), an alarm signal will be initiated to
indicate the pilot fuse failure and also the faulty phase where the voltage reduction
occurred.
When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are
restored above the USealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when normal
voltage conditions are restored.
5s
a
ab AND
Ud>MainBlock b MAINFAIL
OR
0
MIN ABS a
a>b AND U2L1FAIL
Ud> PilotAlarm b
BLOCK
OR PILOTFAIL
vPilotL2 U1L2FAIL
vMainL2 Phase L2, same as Phase L1 U2L2FAIL
vPilotL3 U1L3FAIL
vMainL3 Phase L3, same as Phase L1 U2L3FAIL
IEC12000144 V1 EN
Figure 295: Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC
622
Technical manual


Table 361: VDSPVC technical data
Operate value, block of main fuse (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
failure
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main fuse Min. = 5 ms –
failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
fuse failure
Reset ratio <110% –
Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse Min. = 5 ms –
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms
623
Technical manual

624

Control
Section 14 Control
14.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN function checks that

the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one
side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
1½ breaker or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can
have different settings.
For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is provided.

The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of
circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The
synchronizing function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip
frequency and frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled closing of the
circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.
However this function can not be used to automatically synchronize the generator to
the network.
625
Technical manual

Control

SESRSYN
U3PBB1* SYNOK
U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1* AUTOENOK
U3PLN2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE UDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
IEC10000046 V1 EN
Figure 296: SESRSYN function block
14.1.4 Signals
Table 362: SESRSYN Input signals
U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 1
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 2
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 1
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 2
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
626
Technical manual

Control

B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
B2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
LN1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
LN2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
UB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode
Table 363: SESRSYN Output signals

SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
627
Technical manual

Control

USELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
LN2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set
limits
UDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto
operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual
operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual
Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL Bus voltage
ULINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing
14.1.5 Settings
Table 364: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
On
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function
On Off/On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in
% of UBaseBus
628
Technical manual

Control

UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchronizing in
% of UBaseLine
UDiffSynch 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for synchronizing
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 0.500 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC Off - - On Operation for synchronism check function
On Off/On
UHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in
% of UBaseBus
UHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in
% of UBaseLine
UDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
AutoEnerg Off - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
UHighBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing check
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing check
in % of UBaseLine
629
Technical manual

Control

ULowBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing check
in % of UBaseBus
ULowLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing check
in % of UBaseLine
UMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 %UB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in % of
UBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check
Table 365: SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
GblBaseSelBus 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
630
Technical manual

Control
Table 366: SESRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected line
voltage

Table 367: SESRSYN Monitored data
UDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of
phase angle
UBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
ULINE REAL - kV Line voltage
14.1.7.1 Basic functionality
The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual
measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and
also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit
breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all
measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output
is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker
and the closing circuit.
For double bus single circuit breaker and 1½ circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct
voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1½ circuit
breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the
bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.
631
Technical manual

Control
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the application manual.
14.1.7.2 Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN
function components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and
Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchrocheck
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchrocheck function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1,
SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made
automatically for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle difference
caused if different setting values are selected for both sides of the breaker. If needed
an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected line voltage with the
PhaseShift setting.
When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the
set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA,
FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If additional phase angle
adjustment is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is deducted from
the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency
difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not
exceed the set value FreqDiff.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available
and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively.
Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be
delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
632
Technical manual

Control
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.

UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM,
PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and
phase angle difference conditions are out of limits.
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit
breaker has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if
the voltage conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference
between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller
than 5 degrees.
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.
OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND
TSTSC
InvalidSelection AND
BLKSC
OR AUTOSYOK
BLOCK AND
BLOCK
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA
UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA 1
PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA 1
UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
32 ms 100 ms
AND t INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60° AND
PhDiff < 5°
IEC07000114 V5 EN
Figure 297: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchrocheck function
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.
633
Technical manual

Control
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values
for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are
both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for
UDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher
than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the
measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency
FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange and
phase angle, which has to be smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation
to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle
release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK
output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets. The function
will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set
tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in
operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.
634
Technical manual

Control
OperationSynch=On
TSTSYNCH
STARTSYN
InvalidSelection
SYNPROGR
AND
Block AND
S
OR
R
BLKSYNCH
UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t
UHighLineSynch OR
FreqDiffMax TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin
tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND
fBus&fLine ± 5Hz tMax

Phase Diff < 15 deg Synch
SYNFAIL
AND
PhaseDiff=closing angle
FreqDiff
Close pulse
in advance
tBreaker
IEC06000636 V4 EN
Figure 298: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Energizing check function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are
live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and
ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for
line energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision
conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing direction can also be
selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for example,
can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall
635
Technical manual

Control
be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input will mean that the
setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs
MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and
3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG
will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a
separate test output.
manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tManEnerg
AND
OR t
AND
OR
ULowLineEnerg AND
ManEnerg BOTH
ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
UHighLineEnerg
TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND
UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine ±5 Hz
IEC14000031 V1 EN
Figure 299: Manual energizing
636
Technical manual

Control
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tAutoEnerg
AND
OR t
AND OR
AUTOENOK
ULowLineEnerg AND
AutoEnerg BOTH
ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
UHighLineEnerg
TSTENOK
UMaxEnerg AND
fBus and fLine ±5 Hz
IEC14000030 V1 EN
Figure 300: Automatic energizing
BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND
ManEnerg
1½ bus CB
CBConfig AND
B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND
LN2QOPEN
1½ bus alt. CB AND OR

AND
OR
B2QCLD
AND
Tie CB
AND
AND
OR
AND
IEC14000032 V1 EN
Figure 301: Open bays
637
Technical manual

Control
Fuse failure supervision

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected
to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function in the IED.
Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when
available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must
be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs
labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit
is faulty.
The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and
the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line voltage.
Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the
external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the
energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the synchrocheck
function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse failure is needed.
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers
for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN function and determines
the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions.
This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB
supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting is
also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for the
Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts
to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an
inverter for one of the positions.
If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is

allowed, it is considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed for
manual energizing in 1½ breaker and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual energization
of a completely open diameter in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by internal logic.
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for
single CB and double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the
disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-
B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector
connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the bus
1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs B1SEL
and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.
638
Technical manual

Control
The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-
UB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the MCB
for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively
be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected in the selected
voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the
selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as the function can
be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in
figure 302.
B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND
B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND
bus1Voltage busVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND
ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR
BLOCK
en05000779-2.vsd
IEC05000779 V2 EN
Figure 302: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 1½ breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for the
complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is
described.
With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1 1/2
circuit breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt. Bus CB or
Tie CB.
639
Technical manual

Control
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN
function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the
busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar
depending on the best selection of voltage circuit.
Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,

LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL
will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage, which indicates B1SEL.
The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and

with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from
each fuse (MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the
other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output
combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
• The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

• The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit
breaker is closed.
• The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
• The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit
breaker is closed.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If
a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This
output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output
as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function
block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 303
and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 304.
640
Technical manual

Control
LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND
B2SEL
OR
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND
line1Voltage lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000780-2.vsd
IEC05000780 V2 EN
Figure 303: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2 breaker
arrangement
641
Technical manual

Control
LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1
B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND
line1Voltage busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND
line2Voltage lineVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000781-2.vsd
IEC05000781 V2 EN
Figure 304: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2 breaker
arrangement.
642
Technical manual

Control

Table 368: SESRSYN technical data
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -
Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

synchronizing and ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
synchrocheck
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -
Frequency difference limit (0.003-1.000) Hz ± 2.5 mHz
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Phase angle difference limit (5.0-90.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit (0.02-0.5) p.u ± 0.5% of Ur
synchronizing and
synchrocheck
Time delay output for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is
synchrocheck when angle greater
difference between bus and
line jumps from “PhaseDiff”
+ 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” - 2
degrees
Frequency difference (0.003-0.250) Hz ± 2.5 mHz
minimum limit for
synchronizing
Frequency difference (0.050-0.500) Hz ± 2.5 mHz
maximum limit for
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency (0.000-0.500) Hz/s ± 10.0 mHz/s
rate of change
Breaker closing pulse (0.050-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 15 ms whichever is
duration greater
tMaxSynch, which resets (0.000-6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is
synchronizing function if no greater
close has been made before
set time
Minimum time to accept (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is
synchronizing conditions greater
Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
energizing check ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
energizing check
Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -
Maximum voltage for (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
energizing ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
643
Technical manual

Control

Time delay for energizing (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 100 ms whichever is
check when voltage jumps greater
from 0 to 90% of Urated
Operate time for Min = 15 ms –
synchrocheck function when Max = 30 ms
angle difference between bus
and line jumps from
“PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to
“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees
Operate time for energizing Min = 70 ms –
function when voltage jumps Max = 90 ms
from 0 to 90% of Urated
14.2 Interlocking
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage
switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent
material damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED
is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs
communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
system at any given time.

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED.
The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV

apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which
arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication
system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition
of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is
performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on
the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching
devices that may affect it.
644
Technical manual

Control
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay.
The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the
switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different
modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:
• Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
• External release (to add special conditions for release)
• Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
• Output signals to release the HV apparatus
The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 305.
Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI
Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module
Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI
IEC04000526 V1 EN
Figure 305: Interlocking module on bay level
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:
• Unearthed busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to a busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid
Figure 306 illustrates the data exchange principle.
645
Technical manual

Control
Station bus
Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler
Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn
...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay
..
WA1
WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2
QA1 QA1 QA1
QB9 QB9
en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN
Figure 306: Data exchange between interlocking modules
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board
error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for
execution of the function will not be given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:
• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing

switches are always identical.
• Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches, are
normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they
are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line
voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no
line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to
no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
• Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without
load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is,
the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation
is concerned.
• Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit
breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed
connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely
isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or
if they are earthed on both sides.
• Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing
646
Technical manual

Control
switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB

and transformer.
• Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.
To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:
• Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

• Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
• Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
• Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
• Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
• Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
• Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
• 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these
specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in
TR are intended for transfer to other bays.
14.2.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO
14.2.3.1 Identification
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.
647
Technical manual

Control

SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
IEC05000359 V2 EN
Figure 307: SCILO function block
14.2.3.4 Signals
Table 369: SCILO Input signals
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
Table 370: SCILO Output signals

EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end
position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case
EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the
same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the
interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit
breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals come from the
interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller
(SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.
648
Technical manual

Control
POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd
IEC04000525 V1 EN
Figure 308: SCILO function logic diagram
14.2.4 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES - 3
The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one busbar
earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 309.
QC
en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN
Figure 309: Switchyard layout BB_ES
649
Technical manual

Control
BB_ES
QC_OP QCREL
QC_CL QCITL
BB_DC_OP BBESOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBESCLTR
EXDU_BB
IEC05000347 V2 EN
Figure 310: BB_ES function block
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1
QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd
IEC04000546 V1 EN
14.2.4.5 Signals
Table 371: BB_ES Input signals
QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are
valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar
part
Table 372: BB_ES Output signals

QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in closed position
14.2.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS
650
Technical manual

Control
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 311. The function
can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2
QA1
QC3 QC4
en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN
Figure 311: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS
651
Technical manual

Control

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QC3_OP QB2REL
QC3_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC3REL
QC4_CL QC3ITL
S1QC1_OP QC4REL
S1QC1_CL QC4ITL
S2QC2_OP S1S2OPTR
S2QC2_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP QB1OPTR
VP_BBTR QB1CLTR
EXDU_12 QB2OPTR
EXDU_ES QB2CLTR
QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
QA1O_EX2 VPQB1TR
QA1O_EX3 VPQB2TR
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
IEC05000348 V2 EN
Figure 312: A1A2_BS function block
652
Technical manual

Control

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
en04000542.vsd
IEC04000542 V1 EN
653
Technical manual

Control
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd
IEC04000543 V1 EN
14.2.5.5 Signals
Table 373: A1A2_BS Input signals
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
654
Technical manual

Control

EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to busbar
1 and 2
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
Table 374: A1A2_BS Output signals

QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1
and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and
2 exists
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are
valid
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
14.2.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC
655
Technical manual

Control
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 313. A1A2_DC
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1 QC2
A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd
IEC04000492 V1 EN
Figure 313: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC
A1A2_DC
QB_OP QBOPREL
QB_CL QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3
IEC05000349 V2 EN
Figure 314: A1A2_DC function block
656
Technical manual

Control
A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3
en04000544.vsd
IEC04000544 V1 EN
IEC04000545 V1 EN
14.2.6.5 Signals
Table 375: A1A2_DC Input signals
QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position
657
Technical manual

Control

S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open
position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open
position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are
valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are
valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section
1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBCL_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QB
QB
Table 376: A1A2_DC Output signals

QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)
14.2.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3
658
Technical manual

Control
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 315. The function
can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN
Figure 315: Switchyard layout ABC_BC
659
Technical manual

Control
ABC_BC
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QB7_OP QB2REL
QB7_CL QB2ITL
QB20_OP QB7REL
QB20_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QB20REL
QC1_CL QB20ITL
QC2_OP QC1REL
QC2_CL QC1ITL
QC11_OP QC2REL
QC11_CL QC2ITL
QC21_OP QB1OPTR
QC21_CL QB1CLTR
QC71_OP QB220OTR
QC71_CL QB220CTR
BBTR_OP QB7OPTR
BC_12_CL QB7CLTR
VP_BBTR QB12OPTR
VP_BC_12 QB12CLTR
EXDU_ES BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
QA1O_EX1 BC17CLTR
QA1O_EX2 BC27OPTR
QA1O_EX3 BC27CLTR
QB1_EX1 VPQB1TR
QB1_EX2 VQB220TR
QB1_EX3 VPQB7TR
QB2_EX1 VPQB12TR
QB2_EX2 VPBC12TR
QB2_EX3 VPBC17TR
QB20_EX1 VPBC27TR
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
IEC05000350 V2 EN
Figure 316: ABC_BC function block
660
Technical manual

Control

ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd
IEC04000533 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
en04000534.vsd
IEC04000534 V1 EN
661
Technical manual

Control
VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000535.vsd
IEC04000535 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2
en04000536.vsd
IEC04000536 V1 EN
662
Technical manual

Control
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd
IEC04000537 V1 EN
14.2.7.5 Signals
Table 377: ABC_BC Input signals
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
663
Technical manual

Control

QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
position
position
position
position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to
WA1/WA2 busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler
bay
Table 378: ABC_BC Output signals

QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
664
Technical manual

Control

QB220OTR BOOLEAN QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR BOOLEAN QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1
and WA2
WA1 and WA7
and WA7
WA2 and WA7
and WA7
VQB220TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or
closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
WA7 are valid
WA7 are valid
665
Technical manual

Control
14.2.8 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_CONN - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_A - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_B - 3
The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A,

BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter
according to figure 317.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1
QA1 QA1
QC2 QC2
QB6 QB6
QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B
QB61 QA1 QB62
QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9
BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd
IEC04000513 V1 EN
Figure 317: Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard
layout.
666
Technical manual

Control
14.2.8.3 Function blocks
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
IEC05000352 V2 EN
Figure 318: BH_LINE_A function block
667
Technical manual

Control
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
IEC05000353 V2 EN
Figure 319: BH_LINE_B function block
BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
IEC05000351 V2 EN
Figure 320: BH_CONN function block
668
Technical manual

Control

BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd
IEC04000560 V1 EN
669
Technical manual

Control
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd
IEC04000554 V1 EN
670
Technical manual

Control
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3
en04000555.vsd
IEC04000555 V1 EN
CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1
VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd
IEC04000556 V1 EN
671
Technical manual

Control
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd
IEC04000557 V1 EN
672
Technical manual

Control
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3
en04000558.vsd
IEC04000558 V1 EN
CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1
VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd
IEC04000559 V1 EN
673
Technical manual

Control
14.2.8.5 Signals
Table 379: BH_LINE_A Input signals
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
position
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
674
Technical manual

Control

Table 380: BH_LINE_A Output signals

Table 381: BH_LINE_B Input signals

QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
675
Technical manual

Control

CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
position
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
failure
switch QC21
676
Technical manual

Control
Table 382: BH_LINE_B Output signals

Table 383: BH_CONN Input signals

1QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
677
Technical manual

Control

Table 384: BH_CONN Output signals

14.2.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including
DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 321.
678
Technical manual

Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4
QA1 QA2
DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5
QB61 QB62
QC3
QB9
DB_LINE
QC9
en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN
Figure 321: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and the
disconnectors and earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B handles the circuit
breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and earthing
switches of this section.
679
Technical manual

Control

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
en04000547.vsd
IEC04000547 V1 EN
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd
IEC04000548 V1 EN
680
Technical manual

Control
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
en04000552.vsd
IEC04000552 V1 EN
VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd
IEC04000553 V1 EN
681
Technical manual

Control
DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
& en04000549.vsd
IEC04000549 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd
IEC04000550 V1 EN
682
Technical manual

Control
VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd
IEC04000551 V1 EN
DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
IEC05000354 V2 EN
Figure 322: DB_BUS_A function block
683
Technical manual

Control
DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
IEC05000356 V2 EN
Figure 323: DB_LINE function block
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
IEC05000355 V2 EN
Figure 324: DB_BUS_B function block
684
Technical manual

Control
14.2.9.5 Signals
Table 385: DB_BUS_A Input signals
position
position
switch QC11
Table 386: DB_BUS_A Output signals

685
Technical manual

Control
Table 387: DB_BUS_B Input signals

position
position
switch QC21
Table 388: DB_BUS_B Output signals

686
Technical manual

Control
Table 389: DB_LINE Input signals

VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
failure
Table 390: DB_LINE Output signals

687
Technical manual

Control
14.2.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 325. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or
a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
QB9
QC9
en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN
Figure 325: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE
688
Technical manual

Control
ABC_LINE
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QB7_OP QB7REL
QB7_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
QC11_OP QB1OPTR
QC11_CL QB1CLTR
QC21_OP QB2OPTR
QC21_CL QB2CLTR
QC71_OP QB7OPTR
QC71_CL QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4
IEC05000357 V2 EN
Figure 326: ABC_LINE function block
689
Technical manual

Control
ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2
en04000527.vsd
IEC04000527 V1 EN
690
Technical manual

Control
VPQA1 QB1REL
& ³1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1EX3
en04000528.vsd
IEC04000528 V1 EN
691
Technical manual

Control
VPQA1 QB2REL
& ³1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000529.vsd
IEC04000529 V1 EN
692
Technical manual

Control
VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX2
IEC04000530 V1 EN
693
Technical manual

Control
VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd
IEC04000531 V1 EN
694
Technical manual

Control
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd
IEC04000532 V1 EN
14.2.10.5 Signals
Table 391: ABC_LINE Input signals
position
position
position
695
Technical manual

Control

position
position
position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own
bay are open
WA1 and WA2
BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7
are valid
WA2 are valid
WA7 are valid
WA7 are valid
switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors
on WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
696
Technical manual

Control
Table 392: ABC_LINE Output signals

closed)
14.2.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3
697
Technical manual

Control
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a transformer
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 327. The function
is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer.
Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be used. This
function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1
QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2
QC3
QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking
QB3 QB4
en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN
Figure 327: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO
698
Technical manual

Control
AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QB3_OP QB1OPTR
QB3_CL QB1CLTR
QB4_OP QB2OPTR
QB4_CL QB2CLTR
QC3_OP QB12OPTR
QC3_CL QB12CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL VPQB2TR
QC21_OP VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
IEC05000358 V2 EN
Figure 328: AB_TRAFO function block
699
Technical manual

Control

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1
VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1
en04000538.vsd
IEC04000538 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
en04000539.vsd
IEC04000539 V1 EN
700
Technical manual

Control
VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000540.vsd
IEC04000540 V1 EN
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd
IEC04000541 V1 EN
14.2.11.5 Signals
Table 393: AB_TRAFO Input signals
701
Technical manual

Control

QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
WA1 and WA2
WA2 are valid
switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
Table 394: AB_TRAFO Output signals

702
Technical manual

Control

closed)
14.2.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS
or CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
IEC09000079 V1 EN
Figure 329: POS_EVAL function block
703
Technical manual

Control
POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN
Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not
used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker Good 0 0
intermediate)
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0
14.2.12.5 Signals
Table 395: POS_EVAL Input signals
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality
Table 396: POS_EVAL Output signals

OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position
14.3 Apparatus control APC
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is
given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
Apparatus control features:
704
Technical manual

Control
• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position and quality indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchrocheck
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position
Two types of command models can be used:

• Direct with normal security
• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position
is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated with an
additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The command
sequence with enhanced security is always terminated by a CommandTermination
service primitive and an AddCause telling if the command was successful or if
something went wrong.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.

A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor
bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the
apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic
sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation

Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function block that handles
the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process
information used by higher-level control functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised
by one function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals used for
the control of a breaker respectively a disconnector are almost the same, the same
function block type is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.
The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for
circuit breakers) or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and earthing
switches). The physical process in the switchyard is connected to these two function
blocks via binary inputs and outputs.
705
Technical manual

Control
Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and
supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control
function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on
the switchyard configuration. These four types are:
• Bay control QCBAY

• Switch controller SCSWI
• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI
The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control

(LOCREMCTRL), to handle the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve
(QCRSV) and Reservation input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also belong to
the apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function blocks, input and
output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.
14.3.3 Error handling

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will
be set with a value. Table 397 describes the cause values given on local HMI. The
translation to AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table 398. For
IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used, for edition
1 also a number of vendor specific causes are used. The values are available in the
command response to commands from IEC61850-8-1 clients. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and
Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the latest value of the cause during the latest
command.
Table 397: Values for "cause" signal
Cause Name Description Supported
number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready X
state
2 Blocked-by- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc X
switching-hierarchy switches like in CSWI has the value TRUE
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select X
service)
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position X
(Pos in XCBR or XSWI)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR X
or XSWI)
6 Parameter-change- Control action is blocked due to running parameter X
in-execution change
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has X
reached the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or X
XCBR/XSWI)is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow any
switching
706
Technical manual

Control

number
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at X
process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR or
XSWI)
10 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching X
interlocking devices (in CILO attribute EnaOpn.stVal=”FALSE” or
EnaCls.stVal=”FALSE”
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to X
synchrocheck exceed of time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because X
in-execution control action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event that X
prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked, because another control X
action in a domain (for example substation) is already
running (in any XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the
DPC.stSeld=”TRUE”)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time X
limit
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=”TRUE”)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was X
not selected
19 Object-already- Select action is not executed, because the addressed X
selected object is already selected
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority X
21 Ended-with- Control action executed but the end position has
overshoot overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection
communication-loss with the client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to the data attribute X
command CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services X
parameters are not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select and
Operate service are different
27 Locked-by-other- Another client has already reserved the object X
client
-22 Wrong_CTL_Model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-24 Blocked_for_Open_ Blocked for Open command X
Cmd
-25 Blocked_For_Close Blocked for Close Command X
_Cmd
-30 longOperationTime Operation time too long X
-31 switchNotStartMovi Switch did not start moving X
ng
707
Technical manual

Control

number
-32 persistantIntermedi Switch stopped in intermediate state X
ateState
-33 switchReturnedToIn Switch returned to the initial position X
itPos
-34 switchInBadState Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 notExpectedFinalPo Switch did not reach the expected final position X
sition
Table 398: Translation of cause values for IEC61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name
Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
21 21 - Ended-with-overshoot
22 22 - Abortion-due-to-deviation
23 23 - Abortion-by-communication-loss
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
-22 0 -22 Wrong_CTL_Model
708
Technical manual

Control
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
-24 24 -24 Blocked_for_Open_Cmd
-25 24 -25 Blocked_For_Close_Cmd
-30 24 -30 longOperationTime
-31 16 -31 switchNotStartMoving
-32 16 -32 persistantIntermediateState
-33 22 -33 switchReturnedToInitPos
-34 4 -34 switchInBadState
-35 22 -35 notExpectedFinalPosition
14.3.4 Bay control QCBAY
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local
remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY
also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within
the bay.
QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM
IEC10000048 V2 EN
Figure 330: QCBAY function block
14.3.4.3 Signals
Table 399: QCBAY Input signals
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote
position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command
709
Technical manual

Control
Table 400: QCBAY Output signals

PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed
14.3.4.4 Settings
Table 401: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station and
remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local remote
switch is in remote
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control
functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay control
(QCBAY) function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the IEC61850-8-1
edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC61850 edition 1 the functionality is not
described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the Bay control function is
represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.
Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The positions
are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station and/or
remote level and local means that operation is allowed from the IED level. The local/
remote switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the
position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally, not via I/
O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are
connected to the function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select
this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If
the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set
to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.
710
Technical manual

Control
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to
QCBAY.
Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source
To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch
position according to Table 402. In addition, there are two parameters that affect the
value of the PSTO signal.
If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote

state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both local
and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off
position the PSTO value shows the actual state of the switch that is, 0. In this case it
is not possible to control anything
If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set and the LR-switch position is in Remote state,
the PSTO value is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to operate from
both station and remote level without any priority.
Table 402: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel PSTO AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVal Possible
switch positions value (setting Station (command) locations that
parameter) (setting shall be able to
parameter) operate
0 = Off 0 - - - Not possible
to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority - - Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority - - Local or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote 6 Priority No TRUE Station level
2 = Remote 7 No priority No FALSE Remote level
2 = Remote 2 Priority Yes - Station or
Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority - - Local, Station
or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty 3 - - - Not possible
to operate
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within
a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
711
Technical manual

Control
• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands
are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool
in PCM600.
14.3.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are connected
via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY
function block. The parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to
choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external
hardware switch connected via binary inputs.
LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID
IEC05000360 V2 EN
Figure 331: LOCREM function block
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12
IEC05000361 V2 EN
Figure 332: LOCREMCTRL function block
712
Technical manual

Control
14.3.5.2 Signals
Table 403: LOCREM Input signals
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control
Table 404: LOCREM Output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid
Table 405: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
Table 406: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
713
Technical manual

Control

14.3.5.3 Settings
Table 407: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the
local/remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 333, where the inputs on
function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used.
When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between external
and local HMI source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The outputs from
the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate)
on Bay control (QCBAY).
714
Technical manual

Control
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12
IEC10000052 V2 EN
Figure 333: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be
different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/
remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page
that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position
to applicable bay and screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool
in PCM600.
14.3.6 Switch controller SCSWI
715
Technical manual

Control
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle
and operate on one three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.
SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENPOS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOS1 POS_INTR
XPOS2 XOUT
XPOS3
IEC05000337 V3 EN
Figure 334: SCSWI function block
14.3.6.3 Signals
Table 408: SCSWI Input signals
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are
made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the
synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
716
Technical manual

Control

XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
Table 409: SCSWI Output signals

EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SEL_OP BOOLEAN Selected for open command
SEL_CL BOOLEAN Selected for close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function,
started through START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a
set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI
AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands

as e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively closing to the
SCSWI function. They work without regard to how the operator place
selector, PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on the outputs EXE_OP
and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input, EN_OPEN
respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is
active.
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command

sequence connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the
operator place selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote with
no priority. If the control model used is Select before operate, Also the
corresponding enable input must be set, and no interlocking is active.
717
Technical manual

Control
The L_SEL input must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is

operated, if the control model is Select before operate.
14.3.6.4 Settings
Table 410: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm at 00/11 position
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during the
On time tIntermediate
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select -
execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are
fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.
Control handling
.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control
model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with
enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position
is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised
in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position.
Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the
718
Technical manual

Control
command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command
sequence, the sequence is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be read from the
function block and used for example at commissioning.
There is no relation between the command direction and the actual

position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to
execute a close command.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter

PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no
execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent
independent of the position value.
Evaluation of position
The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the switch
controller SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive the
position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for further
evaluation.
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-
phase switches, following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in close position: switch control position = close
One switch =open, two switches= close (or switch control position = intermediate
inversely):
Any switch in intermediate position: switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in bad state: switch control position = bad state
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it goes
to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed
phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is
supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, that is, the
positions of the one-phase switches are not equal positions for a time longer than the
setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values
from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error
the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.
719
Technical manual

Control
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The different blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands
are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.
Dependence on Operator place

For commands from communication protocol, such as IEC 61850-8-1 and DNP, and
through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is evaluated,
and only commands from enabled operator places are accepted, see Table 402.
Commands through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are always from the
local operator place. For commands through the inputs AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE,
the operator place is not evaluated, thus also accepted when the operator place selector
is set to Faulty or Off.
Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the
synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is
continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the
synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is
omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function,
SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit breaker
(SXCBR).
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will
send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the
closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see
Figure 335. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the
"synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-
synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 339.
720
Technical manual

Control
SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function
IEC09000209 V2 EN
Figure 335: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution
after the selection of the object to operate.
select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set
en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN
Figure 336: tSelect
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
721
Technical manual

Control
select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT

t1>tResResponse, then 1-
tResResponse
of-n-control in 'cause' is
timer t1
set
IEC05000093 V2 EN
Figure 337: tResResponse
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 338.
execute command
position L1 open
close
position L2 open
close
position L3 open
close
cmd termination L1
cmd termination L2
cmd termination L3
cmd termination *
position open
close
t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set
* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample . APCtExecutionFB=IEC0

5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd
IEC05000094 V2 EN
Figure 338: tExecutionFB
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at
the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not
start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions
are not fulfilled.
722
Technical manual

Control
The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the start signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing is in
progress.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd
IEC05000095 V1 EN
Figure 339: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing
14.3.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise
the switching operation and position.
SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENPOS
POSOPEN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE TR_POS
CBOPCAP CNT_VAL
TR_OPEN L_CAUSE
TR_CLOSE EEHEALTH
RS_CNT CBOPCAP
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN*
IEC05000338 V4 EN
Figure 340: SXCBR function block
723
Technical manual

Control
14.3.7.3 Signals
Table 411: SXCBR Input signals
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI
Table 412: SXCBR Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for CB
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
724
Technical manual

Control
14.3.7.4 Settings
Table 413: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)
The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes
commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision
conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the
function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the
function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 397.
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local HMI,
a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the
Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The health of the
external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to IEC 61850-8-1. The
operation counter functionality and the external equipment health supervision are
independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the
signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted.
When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) are rejected,
even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the
local/remote switch is described in Figure 341.
725
Technical manual

Control
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 341: Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autoreclosure.
The blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function
is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are
rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of
the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use
the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the
process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow
the substituted position. The substituted values are stored in a non-
volatile memory. If the function is blocked or blocked for update when
the substitution is released, the position value is kept the same as the
last substitution value, but the quality is changed to "questionable, old
data", indicating that the value is old and not reliable.
726
Technical manual

Control
When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1

data object is marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted
quality, but the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not
dependent on the substitution indication in the quality, so it does not
show that it is derived from a substituted value.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 342 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove
if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 342: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to
be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 343 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both
execute output pulses.
727
Technical manual

Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 343: Execute output pulse
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse
time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits for
the end of the execution pulse before telling the activating function
that the command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the
pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 344 .
728
Technical manual

Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 344: Open command with open position indication
14.3.8 Circuit switch SXSWI
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary
output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENPOS
POSOPEN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE CNT_VAL
SWOPCAP L_CAUSE
RS_CNT EEHEALTH
EEH_WARN SWOPCAP
EEH_ALM
XIN
IEC05000339 V3 EN
Figure 345: SXSWI function block
729
Technical manual

Control
14.3.8.3 Signals
Table 414: SXSWI Input signals
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
SWOPCAP INTEGER 4 Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C,
4 = O and C
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI
Table 415: SXSWI Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for DIS
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
SWOPCAP INTEGER Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C,
4 = O and C
730
Technical manual

Control
14.3.8.4 Settings
Table 416: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,
Disconnector 3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates
block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all
conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs the execution
command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate
"cause" value, see Table 397.
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary
input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point
Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC), for example.
Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to
IEC 61850-8-1.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the
signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted.
When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal
IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in Figure 346.
731
Technical manual

Control
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 346: Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autorecloser.
The blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function
is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are
rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the
manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow
the substituted position. The substituted values are stored in a non-
volatile memory. If the function is blocked or blocked for update when
the substitution is released, the position value is kept the same as the
last substitution value, but the quality is changed to "questionable, old
data", indicating that the value is old and not reliable.
732
Technical manual

Control
When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1 data
object is marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted
quality, but the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not
dependent on the substitution indication in the quality, so it does not
show that it is derived from a substituted value.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 347 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
tStartMove
if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 347: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to
be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 348 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both
execute output pulses.
733
Technical manual

Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 348: Execute output pulse
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 349.
734
Technical manual

Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 349: Open command with open position indication
14.3.9 Bay reserve QCRSV
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
IEC05000340 V2 EN
Figure 350: QCRSV function block
735
Technical manual

Control
14.3.9.3 Signals
Table 417: QCRSV Input signals
EXCH_IN INTEGER 0 Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is not possible and the output signals
are reset
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block ResIn
Table 418: QCRSV Output signals

RES_GRT1 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to
operate
operate
operate
operate
operate
operate
operate
operate
RES_BAYS BOOLEAN Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B BOOLEAN Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED BOOLEAN Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks
736
Technical manual

Control
14.3.9.4 Settings
Table 419: QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
tCancelRes 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Supervision time for canceling the
reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 1
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function starts
to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay
or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve
the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is
the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller (SCWI). The
signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from
function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN
and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only
(TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.
Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know
which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input
signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the
requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can
be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself
or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED.
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch
737
Technical manual

Control
controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset
and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.
Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that
requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it
will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for
their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by
activating the output RES_BAYS.
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-
control" in the "cause" signal.
Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into
the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in
QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment
from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved
the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.
Blocking and overriding of reservation

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is
blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This
can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE
input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the external
acknowledge.
Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight apparatuses,
the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to Figure 351. If more than one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be
in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
738
Technical manual

Control
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_BAYS
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 ³1
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 ³1
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B RESERVED
³1
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
IEC05000088 V2 EN
Figure 351: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks
14.3.10 Reservation input RESIN
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from
other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up
to 60 instances are available).
RESIN1
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000341 V2 EN
Figure 352: RESIN1 function block
739
Technical manual

Control
RESIN2
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807 V1 EN
Figure 353: RESIN2 function block
14.3.10.3 Signals
Table 420: RESIN1 Input signals
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from
this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay
are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay
Table 421: RESIN1 Output signals

ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks
Table 422: RESIN2 Input signals

EXCH_IN INTEGER 5 Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from
this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay
are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay
740
Technical manual

Control
Table 423: RESIN2 Output signals

ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks
14.3.10.4 Settings
Table 424: RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use
Table 425: RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use
The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions.
The logic diagram in Figure 354 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs
of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals
transferred over the station bus from another bay.
741
Technical manual

Control
EXCH_IN INT
BIN
ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
³1
ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK ³1
VALID_TX
&
BAY_VAL ³1
RE_RQ_B
³1
BAY_RES &
V _RE_RQ
³1
BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT
en05000089.vsd
IEC05000089 V1 EN
Figure 354: Logic diagram for RESIN
Figure 355 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules
in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the
reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions
are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles the reservation
function in the own bay.
742
Technical manual

Control
RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN
Figure 355: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN
14.4 Voltage control
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 TCMYLTC - 84
binary inputs
Tap changer control and supervision, 32 TCLYLTC - 84
binary inputs
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC as well as Tap
changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are is used for control
of power transformers with a on-load tap changer. The functions provide automatic
regulation of the voltage on the secondary side of transformers or alternatively on a
load point further out in the network.
Control of a single transformer, as well as control of up to eight transformers in

parallel is possible. For parallel control of power transformers, three alternative
743
Technical manual

Control
methods are available, the master-follower method, the circulating current method
and the reverse reactance method. The first two methods require exchange of
information between the parallel transformers and this is provided for within IEC
61850-8-1.
Voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility of to avoid

simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a transformer
in a group which regulates it to a correct tap position even though the LV CB is open,
compensation for a possible capacitor bank on the LV side bay of a transformer,
extensive tap changer monitoring including contact wear and hunting detection,
monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so that for example, the voltage
control can be blocked if the power reverses etc.
14.4.3 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC
The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC) and 32 binary
inputs TCLYLTC gives the tap commands to the tap changer, and supervises that
commands are carried through correctly. It has built-in extensive possibilities for tap
changer position measurement, as well as supervisory and monitoring features. This
is used in the voltage control and can also give information about tap position to the
transformer differential protection.
Reading of tap changer position

The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and supervision,
6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC function block in the
following ways:
1. Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions).
2. Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray coded
binary signals.
3. Via a mA input signal.
Via binary input signals, one per tap position

In this option, each tap position has a separate contact that is hard wired to a binary
input in the IED. Via the Signal Matrix tool in PCM600, the contacts on the binary
input card are then directly connected to the
• inputs B1 – B6 on TCMYLTC function
• or inputs B1 – B32 on TCLYLTC function.
744
Technical manual

Control
Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray coded
binary signals
The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) decodes binary
data from up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may be decoded
either as BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the parameter
CodeType.
It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the
parity check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.
The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) can be used as supervisory input for
indication of any external error ( Binary Input Module) in the system for reading of tap
changer position. Likewise, the input OUTERR can be used as a supervisory of the
Binary Input Module.
The truth table (see table 426) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded
Decimal, and Gray coded signals.
745
Technical manual

Control
Table 426: Binary, BCD and Gray conversion
IEC06000522 V1 EN
The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from
decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.
746
Technical manual

Control
Table 427: Gray code conversion
IEC06000523 V1 EN
Via a mA input signal

Any of the six inputs on the mA card (MIM) can be used for the purpose of tap changer
position reading connected to the Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC.
747
Technical manual

Control
The measurement of the tap changer position via MIM module is based on the
principle that the specified mA input signal range (usually 4-20 mA) is divided into N
intervals corresponding to the number of positions available on the tap changer. All
mA values within one interval are then associated with one tap changer position value.
The number of available tap changer positions N is defined by the setting parameters
LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap, which define the tap position for lowest voltage and
highest voltage respectively.
14.4.4 Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and

TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC
The two function blocks Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control
TR1ATCC and parallel control TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and supervision,
6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are connected to each
other according to figure 356 below.
748
Technical manual

Control
(Rmk. In case of
parallel control,
this signal shall
TR8ATCC TCLYLTC also be connected
I3P1 ATCCOUT YLTCIN URAISE to HORIZx input of
I3P2 MAN TCINPROG ULOWER the parallel
U3P2 AUTO INERR HIPOSAL transformer
BLOCK IBLK RESETERR LOPOSAL TR8ATCC function
MANCTRL PGTFWD OUTERR POSERRAL
block)
AUTOCTRL PLTREV RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
PSTO QGTFWD RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
RAISEV QLTREV PARITY POSOUT
LOWERV REVACBLK BIERR CONVERR
EAUTOBLK UHIGH B1 NEWPOS
DEBLKAUT ULOW B2 HIDIFPOS
LVA1 UBLK B3 INVALPOS
LVA2 HOURHUNT B4 YLTCOUT
LVA3 DAYHUNT B5
LVA4 HUNTING B6
LVARESET SINGLE B7
RSTERR PARALLEL B8
DISC HOMING B9
Q1ON ADAPT B10
Q2ON TOTBLK B11
Q3ON AUTOBLK B12
SNGLMODE MASTER B13
T1INCLD FOLLOWER B14
T2INCLD MFERR B15
T3INCLD OUTOFPOS B16
T4INCLD COMMERR B17
T5INCLD ICIRC B18
T6INCLD TRFDISC B19
T7INCLD VTALARM B20
T8INCLD T1PG B21
FORCMAST T2PG B22
RSTMAST T3PG B23
ATCCIN T4PG B24
HORIZ1 T5PG B25
HORIZ2 T6PG B26
HORIZ3 T7PG B27
HORIZ4 T8PG B28
HORIZ5 B29
HORIZ6 B30
HORIZ7 B31
HORIZ8 B32
MA
IEC06000507 V2 EN
Figure 356: Connection between TR8ATCC and TCLYLTC
The TR8ATCC and TR1ATCC function blocks have an output signal ATCCOUT,
which is connected to input YLTCIN on TCMYLTC. The data set sent from
ATCCOUT to YLTCIN contains 5 binary signals, one “word” containing 10 binary
signals and 1 analog signal. For TR8ATCC data is also sent from output ATCCOUT
to other TR8ATCC function input HORIZx, when the master-follower or circulating
current mode is used.
749
Technical manual

Control
Table 428: Binary signals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
raiseVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a raise command
lowerVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a lower command
automaticCtrl The regulation is in automatic control
extRaiseBlock Block raise commands
extLowerBlock Block lower commands
Table 429: Binary signals contained in word “enableBlockSignals”: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
CircCurrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of high circulating current
CmdErrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of command error
OCBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of over current
MFPosDiffBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the tap difference between a
follower and the master is greater than the set value
OVPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because the busbar voltage is above Umax
RevActPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because reverse action is activated
TapChgBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error
TapPosBl Alarm/Block commands in one direction because the tap changer has reached
an end position, or Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer
error
UVBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the busbar voltage is below Ublock
UVPartBl Alarm/Block lower commands because the busbar voltage is between Umin
and Ublock
Table 430: Analog signal: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
currAver Value of current in the phase with the highest current value
In case of parallel control of transformers, the data set sent from output signal
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC blocks input HORIZx contains one "word"
containing 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals:
Table 431: Binary signals contained in word “status”: ATCCOUT / HORIZx
Signal Description
TimerOn This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is going
to tap when the set time has expired.
automaticCTRL Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control
mutualBlock Activated when the automatic control is blocked
disc Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar
receiveStat Signal used for the horizontal communication
750
Technical manual

Control
Signal Description
TermIsForcedMaster Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower
parallel control mode
TermIsMaster Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel
control mode
termReadyForMSF Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control
mode
raiseVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap up
lowerVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap down
Table 432: Analog signals: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Signal Description
voltageBusbar Measured busbar voltage for this transformer
ownLoad Currim Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer
ownLoadCurrre Measured load current real part for this transformer
reacSec Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side
relativePosition The transformer's actual tap position
voltage Setpoint The transformer's set voltage (USet) for automatic control
The TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function blocks have an output YLTCOUT. As shown

in figure 356, this output shall be connected to the input ATCCIN and it contains 10
binary signals and 4 integer signals:
Table 433: Binary signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN
Signal Description
tapInOperation Tap changer in operation, changing tap position
direction Direction, raise or lower, for the most recent tap changer operation
tapInHighVoltPos Tap changer in high end position
tapInLowVoltPos Tap changer in low end position
tapPositionError Error in reading of tap position ( tap position out of range, more than one step
change, BCD code error (unaccepted combination), parity fault, mA out of
range, hardware fault for example, BIM etc.)
tapChgError This is set high when the tap changer has not carried through a raise/lower
command within the expected max. time, or if the tap changer starts tapping
without a given command.
cmdError This is set high if a given raise/lower command is not followed by a tap position
change within the expected max. time
raiseVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a raise command shall be executed
lowerVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a lower command shall be executed
timeOutTC Setting value of tTCTimeout that tTCTimeout has timed out.
751
Technical manual

Control
Table 434: Integer signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Signal Description
tapPosition Actual tap position as reported from the load tap changer
numberOfOperations Accumulated number of tap changer operations
tapPositionMaxVolt Tap position for highest voltage
tapPositionMinVolt Tap position for lowest voltage

TCMYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
MA
IEC07000038 V2 EN
Figure 357: TCMYLTC function block
752
Technical manual

Control
TCLYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
MA
IEC07000037 V2 EN
Figure 358: TCLYLTC function block
14.4.6 Signals
Table 435: TCMYLTC Input signals
YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
753
Technical manual

Control

B1 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position
Table 436: TCMYLTC Output signals

URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position
indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected position
change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN
Table 437: TCLYLTC Input signals

YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
754
Technical manual

Control

BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position
755
Technical manual

Control
Table 438: TCLYLTC Output signals

URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position
indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected position
change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN
Table 439: VCTRRCV Input signals

Table 440: VCTRRCV Output signals

VCTR_REC GROUP SIGNAL Received data from horizontal communication
COMVALID BOOLEAN Communication is valid
DATVALID BOOLEAN Data valid
14.4.7 Settings
Table 441: TCMYLTC Group settings (basic)
On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration
756
Technical manual

Control
Table 442: TCMYLTC Non group settings (basic)

LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 s 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
groups
Table 443: TCLYLTC Group settings (basic)

On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration
Table 444: TCLYLTC Non group settings (basic)

LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
757
Technical manual

Control

CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 s 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
groups

Table 445: TCMYLTC Monitored data
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Number of operations on
tap changer
CLCNT_VAL REAL - - Remaining number of
operations at rated load
TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position
Table 446: TCLYLTC Monitored data

TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks. Both are logical nodes
in IEC 61850-8-1.
• Automatic voltage control for tap changer

• TR1ATCC for single control
• TR8ATCC for parallel control
• Tap changer control and supervision
• TCMYLTC, 6 binary inputs
• TCLYLTC, 32 binary inputs
TR1ATCCand TR8ATCC are designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the

LV-side side of a power transformer within given limits around a set target voltage. A
raise or lower command is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given
period of time, deviates from the set target value by more than the preset deadband
value that is, degree of insensitivity. A time-delay (inverse or definite time) is set to
758
Technical manual

Control
avoid unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the target value,
and in order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the system.
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC are an interface between TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC and
the transformer load tap changer. More specifically this means that it receives
information from TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and based on this it gives command-
pulses to a power transformer motor driven on-load tap changer and also receives
information from the load tap changer regarding tap position, progress of given
commands, and so on.
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC also serve the purpose of giving information about tap
position to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF.

Table 447: TCMYLTC and TLCYLTC technical data
Transformer reactance (0.1–200.0)Ω, primary -
Time delay for lower (1.0–100.0) s -
command when fast step
down mode is activated
Voltage control set voltage (85.0–120.0)% of UBase ± 0.25 % of Ur
Outer voltage deadband (0.2–9.0)% of UBase -

Inner voltage deadband (0.1–9.0)% of UBase -
Upper limit of busbar voltage (80–180)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
Lower limit of busbar voltage (70–120)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
Undervoltage block level (50–120)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
Time delay (long) for (3–1000) s ± 0.2% or ± 600 ms

automatic control commands whichever is greater
Time delay (short) for (1–1000) s ± 0.2% or ± 600 ms
automatic control commands whichever is greater
Minimum operating time in (3–120) s ± 0.2% or ± 600 ms
inverse mode whichever is greater
Line resistance (0.00–150.00)Ω, primary -
Line reactance (-150.00–150.00)Ω, primary -
Load voltage adjustment (-20.0–20.0)% of UBase -
constants
Load voltage auto correction (-20.0–20.0)% of UBase -
Duration time for the reverse (30–6000) s ± 0.2% or ± 600 ms
action block signal whichever is greater
Current limit for reverse (0–100)% of I1Base -
action block
Overcurrent block level (5–250)% of I1Base ± 1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir
± 1.0% of I at I>Ir
Level for number of counted (0–30) operations/hour -

raise/lower within one hour
759
Technical manual

Control

Level for number of counted (0–100) operations/day -
raise/lower within 24 hours
Time window for hunting (1–120) minutes -
alarm
Hunting detection alarm, (3–30) operations/window -
max operations/window
Alarm level of active power in (-9999.99–9999.99) MW ± 1.0% of Sr
forward and reverse direction
at (10-200)% of Sr and
(85-120)% of UBase
Alarm level of reactive power (-9999.99–9999.99) MVAr ± 1.0% of Sr
in forward and reverse
direction at (10-200)% of Sr
and (85-120)% of UBase
Time delay for alarms from (1–6000) s ± 0.2% or ± 600 ms
power supervision whichever is greater
Tap position for lowest and (1–63) -
highest voltage
mA for lowest and highest (0.000–25.000) mA -
voltage tap position
Type of code conversion BIN, BCD, GRAY, SINGLE, mA -
Time after position change (1–60) s ± 0.2% or ± 200 ms
before the value is accepted whichever is greater
Tap changer constant time- (1–120) s ± 0.2% or ± 200 ms
out whichever is greater
Raise/lower command (0.5–10.0) s ± 0.2% or ± 200 ms
output pulse duration whichever is greater
14.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC (or
the selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch
functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware
selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions
760
Technical manual

Control
operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance
issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The selector
switch function eliminates all these problems.

SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN
IEC14000005 V1 EN
Figure 359: SLGAPC function block
14.5.4 Signals
Table 448: SLGAPC Input signals
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
761
Technical manual

Control
Table 449: SLGAPC Output signals

P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)
762
Technical manual

Control
14.5.5 Settings
Table 450: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)
On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled

Table 451: SLGAPC Monitored data
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
function has two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the
UP input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates
the UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a signal is received on the
DOWN input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output,
in descending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one
activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated). Depending on the
output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, the
output will be active till the time it receives next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also,
depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN
activation signal positive front and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application

Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or
remotely, using a “select before execute” dialog. One can block the function
operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be
kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is
specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE
from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGAPC function block has
also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions
763
Technical manual

Control
and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the
menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.
14.5.7.1 Graphical display
There are two possibilities for SLGAPC
• if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
• if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but
only the first three letters of the name will be used.
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when
building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the
following sequence of commands will ensure:
764
Technical manual

Control
From the graphical display:
Control
Control Single Line Diagram
Measurements Commands
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Change to the "Switches" page Reset
of the SLD by left-right arrows. Authorization
Select switch by up-down Language
arrows
../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control SMBRREC control
WFM Select switch. Press the
WFM
I or O key. A dialog box
Pilot setup appears.
Pilot setup
OFF OFF
Damage control E P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until OK Cancel
you press the E-button for O.K.
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
IEC06000421 V2 EN
Figure 360: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.
14.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - -
765
Technical manual

Control
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used for
a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line
diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.

VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
IEC14000066 V1 EN
Figure 361: VSGAPC function block
14.6.4 Signals
Table 452: VSGAPC Input signals
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input
Table 453: VSGAPC Output signals

BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is
blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1
766
Technical manual

Control
14.6.5 Settings
Table 454: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the same
way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1
and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed
in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated

with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on
the screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in
PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote).
An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit

representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
767
Technical manual

Control
IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11
14.7 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function
block is used to send double indications to other systems, equipment or functions in
the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is
especially used in the interlocking station-wide logics.
IEC13000081 V1 EN
Figure 362: DPGAPC function block
14.7.4 Signals
Table 455: DPGAPC Input signals
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication
768
Technical manual

Control
Table 456: DPGAPC Output signals

POSITION INTEGER Double point indication
14.7.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to
the systems, equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these signals.
To be able to get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use
other tools, described in the Engineering manual and define which function block in
which systems, equipment or functions should receive this information.
14.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of
LED's or putting IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple
commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by
other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands can
be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.
769
Technical manual

Control

SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ÔUT1
PSTO ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
IEC07000143 V3 EN
Figure 363: SPC8GAPC function block
14.8.4 Signals
Table 457: SPC8GAPC Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
Table 458: SPC8GAPC Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
14.8.5 Settings
Table 459: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)
On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
Latched 2
770
Technical manual

Control

Latched 3
Latched 4
Latched 5
Latched 6
Latched 7
Latched 8

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the
eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected.
The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if
the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will
block the operation of the function – in case a command is sent, no output will be
activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator
places, only REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function.
14.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3
771
Technical manual

Control
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into
the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The
AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
IEC09000925 V1 EN
Figure 364: AUTOBITS function block
14.9.4 Signals
Table 460: AUTOBITS Input signals
772
Technical manual

Control
Table 461: AUTOBITS Output signals

CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
14.9.5 Settings
Table 462: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
On
773
Technical manual

Control
Table 463: DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On
On
Table 464: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baud-rate for serial port
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
115200 Bd
Table 465: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

DLinkConfirm Never - - Never Data-link confirm
Sometimes
Always
tDLinkTimeout 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Data-link confirm timeout in s
DLinkRetries 0 - 255 - 1 3 Data-link maximum retries
tRxToTxMinDel 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Rx to Tx minimum delay in s
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size
StopBits 1-2 - 1 1 Stop bits
Parity No - - Even Parity
Even
Odd
tRTSWarmUp 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 RS485 back-off delay in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 RS485 maximum back-off random delay
in s
774
Technical manual

Control
Table 466: CH1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP portfor initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master
Table 467: CH1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

size
size

TCP/IP
UDP-Only
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response

size
size
775
Technical manual

Control

TCP/IP
UDP-Only
master

size
size

TCP/IP
UDP-Only
master

size
size
Table 474: MSTSER Non group settings (basic)

On
ChToAssociate RS485 - - RS485 Channel to associate to
Optical
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
776
Technical manual

Control

MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
Table 475: MSTSER Non group settings (advanced)

ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
777
Technical manual

Control

ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in
s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
report treshold
timeout
report treshold
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - Yes Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
778
Technical manual

Control
Table 476: MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

On
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
2:BIWithStatus
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
2:DIWithFlag
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
2:BOStatus
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
779
Technical manual

Control
Table 477: MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Yes
Yes response
Yes
Yes
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
line retry mode
s
report treshold
timeout
report treshold
timeout
report treshold
timeout
Yes
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
generated
Yes timeout
Yes
Yes
780
Technical manual

Control

tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

On
Yes
Address
Address
2:BIWithStatus
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
2:DIWithFlag
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
2:BOStatus
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
781
Technical manual

Control

T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Yes
Yes response
Yes
Yes
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
line retry mode
s
report treshold
timeout
report treshold
782
Technical manual

Control

timeout
report treshold
timeout
Yes
UTC
Yes
generated
Yes timeout
Yes
Yes

On
Yes
Address
Address
2:BIWithStatus
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
2:DIWithFlag
783
Technical manual

Control

e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
2:BOStatus
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Yes
Yes response
Yes
Yes
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
784
Technical manual

Control

line retry mode
s
report treshold
timeout
report treshold
timeout
report treshold
timeout
Yes
UTC
Yes
generated
Yes timeout
Yes
Yes

On
Yes
Address
785
Technical manual

Control

Address
2:BIWithStatus
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
2:DIWithFlag
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
2:BOStatus
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Yes
Yes response
786
Technical manual

Control

Yes
Yes
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
line retry mode
s
report treshold
timeout
report treshold
timeout
report treshold
timeout
Yes
UTC
Yes
generated
Yes timeout
Yes
Yes
787
Technical manual

Control

AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time.
To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off,
pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were
appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive
100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation of the
BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an
overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation
of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again,
momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place. The
command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in “Local” then
no change is applied to the outputs.
14.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from
the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.
788
Technical manual

Control

SINGLECMD
BLOCK ÔUT1
ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
ÔUT9
ÔUT10
ÔUT11
ÔUT12
ÔUT13
ÔUT14
ÔUT15
ÔUT16
IEC05000698 V3 EN
Figure 365: SINGLECMD function block
14.10.4 Signals
Table 484: SINGLECMD Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function
Table 485: SINGLECMD Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1
789
Technical manual

Control
14.10.5 Settings
Table 486: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Steady
Pulsed

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals.
The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13
characters in PCM600.
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting
is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block.
The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function
has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also
a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in
functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.
790
Technical manual

Logic
Section 15 Logic
15.1 Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC 94
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved
in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a trip
pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-
operation with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving faults
and breaker lock-out.

SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
IEC05000707 V2 EN
Figure 366: SMPPTRC function block
791
Technical manual

Logic
15.1.4 Signals
Table 487: SMPPTRC Input signals
BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 1
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase
selection
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function
Table 488: SMPPTRC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
TR1P BOOLEAN Tripping single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Tripping two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
792
Technical manual

Logic
15.1.5 Settings
Table 489: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)
On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single, two or
1ph/3ph three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secures 3-pole trip when phase selection
failed
Table 490: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

TripLockout Off - - Off On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip
On latch, Off: only outp
AutoLock Off - - Off On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and
On trip, Off: only inp

The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure
the breaker opening.
For three-phase tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC has a single input
(TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the
IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs,
are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs
binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP
TRIN OR
AND t
Operation Mode = On
Program = 3Ph
en05000789.vsd
IEC05000789 V1 EN
Figure 367: Simplified logic diagram for three phase trip
SMPPTRC function for single-phase and two-phase tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter
793
Technical manual

Logic
inputs enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions which do not
have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip
output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated
trip inputs of the expanded SMPPTRC function. Examples of such protection
functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded SMPPTRC function
has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (for example, carrier-
aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth
fault tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection).
Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command

for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals.
The expanded SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides
the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary
outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There are
also separate output signals indicating single-phase, two-phase or three-phase trip.
These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser SMBRREC
function.
The expanded SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special
input is also provided which disables single- phase and two-phase tripping, forcing all
tripping to be three-phase.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each

breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from
another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-phase trip,
if desired.
It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing
only the choice is by setting TripLockout.
TRINL1
TRINL2
OR
TRINL3
1PTRZ OR
1PTREF
OR
TRIN RSTTRIP
AND
Program = 3 phase
IEC05000517 V3 EN
Figure 368: Three-phase front logic — simplified logic diagram
794
Technical manual

Logic
TRIN
TRINL1
PSL1 L1TRIP
OR
AND
TRINL2
PSL2 L2TRIP
OR
AND
TRINL3
PSL3 L3TRIP
OR
AND
OR
OR OR
- loop
l-oop
OR
AND
AND
AND
1 PTREF AND tWaitForPHS
1 PTRZ OR t
IEC10000056 V3 EN
Figure 369: Phase segregated front logic
795
Technical manual

Logic
L1TRIP 150 ms
OR
AND t RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
L2TRIP 150 ms
OR
AND t STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
L3TRIP 150 ms
OR
AND t TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
BLOCK OR
OR AND
P3PTR
OR
-loop
IEC10000268 V2 EN
Figure 370: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode
796
Technical manual

Logic
BLOCK
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
Figure 371: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode
797
Technical manual

Logic
IEC05000521-3.vsd
Figure 372: Final tripping circuits

Table 491: SMPPTRC technical data
Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever
is greater
3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s ± 0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is
greater
Single phase delay, two phase (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is
delay and evolving fault delay greater
15.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -
798
Technical manual

Logic
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected
to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable
pulse or steady output.

TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
IEC13000197 V1 EN
Figure 373: TMAGAPC function block
15.2.4 Signals
Table 492: TMAGAPC Input signals
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
799
Technical manual

Logic

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
Table 493: TMAGAPC Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32
800
Technical manual

Logic
15.2.5 Settings
Table 494: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)
On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3
output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the
function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value
1 the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1
the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.
By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay
is always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set time. The
ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be steady with an
drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with duration set by
PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are connected in an OR-
function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are reset and
then one is activated again. For steady operation the OffDelay will start when all
related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 374
801
Technical manual

Logic
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 16
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed
INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 32
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput3=Pulsed
OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
IEC09000612 V3 EN
Figure 374: Trip matrix internal logic
Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain
satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

Table 495: Number of TMAGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -
15.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -
802
Technical manual

Logic
The group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to
a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC13000181 V1 EN
15.3.4 Signals
Table 496: ALMCALH Input signals
803
Technical manual

Logic
Table 497: ALMCALH Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
15.3.5 Settings
Table 498: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)
On

The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one
ALARM output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in
order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal
from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
ALARM output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.
Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
³1 t
Input 16
IEC13000191 V1 EN
Figure 375: Group alarm logic

Table 499: Number of ALMCALH instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5
804
Technical manual

Logic
15.4 Logic for group warning WRNCALH
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -
The group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC13000182 V1 EN
15.4.4 Signals
Table 500: WRNCALH Input signals
805
Technical manual

Logic

Table 501: WRNCALH Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
15.4.5 Settings
Table 502: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)
On

The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and
1 WARNING output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in
order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal
from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.
steady signal.
INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
³1 t
INPUT16
IEC13000192 V1 EN
806
Technical manual

Logic

Table 503: Number of WRNCALH instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5
15.5 Logic for group indication INDCALH
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -
The group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC13000183 V1 EN
807
Technical manual

Logic
15.5.4 Signals
Table 504: INDCALH Input signals
Table 505: INDCALH Output signals

IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
15.5.5 Settings
Table 506: INDCALH Group settings (basic)
On

The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and
1 IND output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order
to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from the
function block.
808
Technical manual

Logic
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the IND
output signal will get logical value 1.
steady signal.
INPUT1
200 ms
IND
³1 t
INPUT16
IEC13000193 V1 EN

Table 507: Number of INDCALH instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -
15.6 Basic configurable logic blocks
The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of
signals (have no suffix QT at the end of their function name). A number of logic blocks
and timers are always available as basic for the user to adapt the configuration to the
specific application needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and
their features.
These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package with the
same number of instances.
• AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output.
• INVERTER function block that inverts one input signal to the output.
• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle.
809
Technical manual

Logic
• OR function block. Each block has up to six inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.
• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. RESET input has priority.
• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. The SET input has
priority.
• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.
• XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
15.6.1 AND function block AND

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
IEC14000071 V1 EN
Figure 376: AND function block
810
Technical manual

Logic
15.6.1.2 Signals
Table 508: AND Input signals
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
Table 509: AND Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Table 510: Number of AND instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160
15.6.2 Controllable gate function block GATE

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should
be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

GATE
INPUT OUT
IEC04000410 V2 EN
Figure 377: GATE function block
15.6.2.2 Signals
Table 511: GATE Input signals
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate
811
Technical manual

Logic
Table 512: GATE Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate
15.6.2.3 Settings
Table 513: GATE Group settings (basic)
On

Table 514: Number of GATE instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20
15.6.3 Inverter function block INV

INV
INPUT OUT
IEC04000404 V2 EN
Figure 378: INV function block
15.6.3.2 Signals
Table 515: INV Input signals
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input
Table 516: INV Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output
812
Technical manual

Logic

Table 517: Number of INV instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240
15.6.4 Loop delay function block LLD

The Logic loop delay function block (LLD) function is used to delay the output signal
one execution cycle, that is, the cycle time of the function blocks used.
LLD
INPUT OUT
IEC15000144.vsd
IEC15000144 V1 EN
Figure 379: LLD function block
15.6.4.2 Signals
Table 518: LLD Input signals
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Table 519: LLD Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

Table 520: Number of LLD instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20
15.6.5 OR function block

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.
813
Technical manual

Logic
OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
IEC04000405 V2 EN
Figure 380: OR function block
15.6.5.2 Signals
Table 521: OR Input signals
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
Table 522: OR Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

Table 523: Number of OR instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 60 60 160
15.6.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting the operation time of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length. When
the input is 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then
it returns to 0.
814
Technical manual

Logic

PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT
IEC04000407 V3 EN
Figure 381: PULSETIMER function block
15.6.6.2 Signals
Table 524: PULSETIMER Input signals
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer
Table 525: PULSETIMER Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer
15.6.6.3 Settings
Table 526: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function

Table 527: Number of PULSETIMER instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
15.6.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if,
after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the
power interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over
SET input.
815
Technical manual

Logic
Table 528: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
IEC09000294 V1 EN
Figure 382: RSMEMORY function block
15.6.7.2 Signals
Table 529: RSMEMORY Input signals
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
Table 530: RSMEMORY Output signals

15.6.7.3 Settings
Table 531: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

Table 532: Number of RSMEMORY instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
816
Technical manual

Logic
15.6.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if,
after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the
power interruption. The input SET has priority.
Table 533: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0
SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
IEC04000408 V2 EN
Figure 383: SRMEMORY function block
15.6.8.2 Signals
Table 534: SRMEMORY Input signals
Table 535: SRMEMORY Output signals

15.6.8.3 Settings
Table 536: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
On
817
Technical manual

Logic

Table 537: Number of SRMEMORY instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20
15.6.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has two outputs for the delay of
the input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also
has an Operation setting On and Off that controls the operation of the timer.
Input
tdelay
On
Off
tdelay
t
IEC08000289 V2 EN
Figure 384: TIMERSET status diagram

TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF
IEC04000411 V2 EN
Figure 385: TIMERSET function block
15.6.9.2 Signals
Table 538: TIMERSET Input signals
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer
818
Technical manual

Logic
Table 539: TIMERSET Output signals

ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed
15.6.9.3 Settings
Table 540: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

Table 541: Number of TIMERSET instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
15.6.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are
the same.
Table 542: Truth table for XOR function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
IEC04000409 V2 EN
Figure 386: XOR function block
819
Technical manual

Logic
15.6.10.2 Signals
Table 543: XOR Input signals
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate
Table 544: XOR Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

Table 545: Number of XOR instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20
15.7 Configurable logic blocks Q/T
The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time stamp and the quality of the
input signals (have suffix QT at the end of their function name).
The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs' configuration to the specific
application needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their
features.
• ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and
the quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one
is inverted.
• INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single position

input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part
of SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the corresponding quality part
of SP_OUT output.
• INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. The value
part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single
position input is copied to TIME output. The quality bits in the common part and
the indication part of inputs signal are copied to the corresponding quality output.
820
Technical manual

Logic
• INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a

"valid" input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality
invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The time
stamp of an output will be set to the latest time stamp of INPUT and VALID
inputs.
• INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates the
time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
• ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time stamp and the quality of
the input signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also propagates
the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to
the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time
stamp and the quality of the input signal.
• SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to
the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time
stamp and the quality of the input signal.
• TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also propagates the
time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
• XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and
the quality of the input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
15.7.1 ANDQT function block

The ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.
821
Technical manual

Logic
ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
IEC09000297 V1 EN
Figure 387: ANDQT function block
15.7.1.2 Signals
Table 546: ANDQT Input signals

Table 547: ANDQT Output signals


Table 548: Number of ANDQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ANDQT - 20 100
15.7.2 Single point indication related signals combining function

block INDCOMBSPQT
The value of single point input (SP_IN) is copied to the value part of the SP_OUT
output. The TIME input is copied to the time part of the SP_OUT output. State input
bits are copied to the corresponding state part of the SP_OUT output. If the state or
value on the SP_OUT output changes, the Event bit in the state part is toggled.
INDCOMBSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.
822
Technical manual

Logic
INDCOMBSPQT
SP_IN* SP_OUT
TIME*
BLOCKED*
SUBST*
INVALID*
TEST*
IEC15000146.vsd
IEC15000146 V1 EN
Figure 388: INDCOMBSPQT function block
15.7.2.2 Signals
Table 549: INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single point indication
TIME GROUP 0 Timestamp
SIGNAL
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN 0 Substitued
INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN 0 Testmode
Table 550: INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

SP_OUT BOOLEAN Single point indication

Table 551: Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCOMBSPQT - 10 10
15.7.3 Single point input signal attributes converting function block

INDEXTSPQT
The value part of the single point input signal SI_IN is copied to SI_OUT output. The
time part of single point input is copied to the TIME output. The state bits in the
common part and the indication part of the input signal are copied to the corresponding
state output.
823
Technical manual

Logic
INDEXTSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC 61850.

INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN* SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST
IEC14000067 V1 EN
Figure 389: INDEXTSPQT function block
15.7.3.2 Signals
Table 552: INDEXTSPQT Input signals

SI_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single indication
Table 553: INDEXTSPQT Output signals

SI_OUT BOOLEAN Single indication
TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input
BLOCKED BOOLEAN Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN Testmode

Table 554: Number of INDEXTSPQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDEXTSPQT - 10 10
15.7.4 Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT

Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.
The values of the input signals INPUTx (where 1<x<16) are copied to the outputs
OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16). If the input VALID is 0 or if its quality bit is set invalid,
824
Technical manual

Logic
all outputs OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16) quality bit will be set to invalid. The time
stamp of any output OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16) will be set to the latest time stamp of
any input and the input VALID.
INVALIDQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC 61850.
INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID
iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN
Figure 390: INVALIDQT function block
15.7.4.2 Signals
Table 555: INVALIDQT Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1
825
Technical manual

Logic

VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or not
Table 556: INVALIDQT Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1

Table 557: Number of INVALIDQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVALIDQT - 6 6
15.7.5 Inverter function block INVERTERQT

The INVERTERQT function block inverts one binary input signal to the output. It can
propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.
826
Technical manual

Logic
INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT
IEC09000299 V1 EN
Figure 391: INVERTERQT function block
15.7.5.2 Signals
Table 558: INVERTERQT Input signals

Table 559: INVERTERQT Output signals


Table 560: Number of INVERTERQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVERTERQT - 20 100
15.7.6 ORQT function block
The ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions
OR with boolean variables. ORQT function block has up to six inputs and two outputs.
One of the outputs is inverted. It can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps
of the signals via IEC 61850.
827
Technical manual

Logic
ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
IEC09000298 V1 EN
Figure 392: ORQT function block
15.7.6.2 Signals
Table 561: ORQT Input signals

Table 562: ORQT Output signals


Table 563: Number of ORQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ORQT - 20 100
15.7.7 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT
The pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or for limiting the operation time of the outputs. PULSETIMERQT
has a settable output pulse length.
828
Technical manual

Logic
When the input goes to 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay
parameter t. Then it returns to 0.
When the output changes value, the time stamp of the output signal is updated.
The supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each
execution cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated time stamp on the
output.
PULSETIMERQT can propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC 61850.
PULSETIMERQT
INPUT OUT
IEC15000145.vsd
IEC15000145 V1 EN
Figure 393: PULSETIMERQT function block
15.7.7.2 Signals
Table 564: PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Table 565: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

15.7.7.3 Settings
Table 566: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

Table 567: Number of PULSETIMERQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMERQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
829
Technical manual

Logic
15.7.8 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT
The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or
set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function block has
two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power
interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power
interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, the RESET input has higher priority than the
SET input.
RSMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
Table 568: Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block
RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
IEC14000069 V1 EN
Figure 394: RSMEMORYQT function block
15.7.8.2 Signals
Table 569: RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Table 570: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

830
Technical manual

Logic
15.7.8.3 Settings
Table 571: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
On

Table 572: Number of RSMEMORYQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORYQT - 10 30
15.7.9 Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT
The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power
interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power
interruption. The SET input has priority.
SRMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
Table 573: Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0
If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
IEC14000070 V1 EN
Figure 395: SRMEMORYQT function block
831
Technical manual

Logic
15.7.9.2 Signals
Table 574: SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Table 575: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

15.7.9.3 Settings
Table 576: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
On

Table 577: Number of SRMEMORYQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORYQT - 10 30
15.7.10 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has two outputs for delay of the
input signal at pick-up and drop-out. The timer has a settable time delay (t). It also has
an Operation setting On/Off that controls the operation of the timer.
When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each
execution cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the
output.
TIMERSETQT can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the signals via
IEC 61850.
832
Technical manual

Logic

TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF
IEC14000068 V1 EN
Figure 396: TIMERSETQT function
15.7.10.2 Signals
Table 578: TIMERSETQT Input signals

Table 579: TIMERSETQT Output signals

ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed
15.7.10.3 Settings
Table 580: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
Table 581: Number of TIMERSETQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSETQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
15.7.11 Exclusive OR function block XORQT
The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory

expressions with boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two outputs.
833
Technical manual

Logic
One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are
different and 0 if they are equal.
Table 582: Truth table for XORQT function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1
XORQT can propagate the quality, value and time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.
XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
IEC09000300 V1 EN
Figure 397: XORQT function block
15.7.11.2 Signals
Table 583: XORQT Input signals

Table 584: XORQT Output signals


Table 585: Number of XORQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XORQT - 10 30
834
Technical manual

Logic
15.8 Extension logic package
When extra configurable logic blocks are required, an additional package can be
ordered.
Table 586: Number of instances in the extension logic package
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 40 40 100
GATE - - 49
INV 40 40 100
LLD - - 49
OR 40 40 100
PULSETIMER 5 5 49
SLGAPC 10 10 54
SRMEMORY - - 110
TIMERSET - - 49
VSGAPC 10 10 110
XOR - - 49
15.9 Fixed signals FXDSIGN
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can
be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer,
floating point, string types of signals are available.
835
Technical manual

Logic

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC05000445 V3 EN
Figure 398: FXDSIGN function block
15.9.4 Signals
Table 587: FXDSIGN Output signals
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off
15.9.5 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value
• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
836
Technical manual

Logic
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value

• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value
15.10 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary

(logical) signals into an integer.

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
IEC07000128 V2 EN
Figure 399: B16I function block
15.10.3 Signals
Table 588: B16I Input signals
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
837
Technical manual

Logic

Table 589: B16I Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value

Table 590: B16I Monitored data
OUT INTEGER - - Output value
15.10.5 Settings

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of
up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx
= 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available
on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated.
OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it
corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16I function
is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is
activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.
838
Technical manual

Logic
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

Table 591: Number of B16I instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8
15.11 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation BTIGAPC
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logic node representation
839
Technical manual

Logic
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function BTIGAPC
is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input
will freeze the output at the last value.
BTIGAPC can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator
position input (PSTO).

BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
IEC13000303 V1 EN
Figure 400: BTIGAPC function block
15.11.4 Signals
Table 592: BTIGAPC Input signals
840
Technical manual

Logic

Table 593: BTIGAPC Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value
15.11.5 Settings

Table 594: BTIGAPC Monitored data
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16,
to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to
32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the
values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer
values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is
available on the output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving the
integer input from a station computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK
input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.
OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
841
Technical manual

Logic

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

Table 595: Number of BTIGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8
15.12 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals.
842
Technical manual

Logic
IB16
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC06000501 V3 EN
Figure 401: IB16 function block
15.12.4 Signals
Table 596: IB16 Input signals
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input
Table 597: IB16 Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
843
Technical manual

Logic
15.12.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1,
OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of
these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1≤x≤16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a
value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated
outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal
to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are according to the table
below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving
the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical
outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.
OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
844
Technical manual

Logic

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (where x
= 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the IB16 function block.

Table 598: Number of IB16 instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 6 4 8
15.13 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is
used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the
function to 16 binary coded (logic) output signals.
ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for the
operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the
corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block. The
845
Technical manual

Logic
input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new integer
values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.

ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC14000012 V1 EN
Figure 402: ITBGAPC function block
15.13.4 Signals
Table 599: ITBGAPC Input signals
Table 600: ITBGAPC Output signals

846
Technical manual

Logic

15.13.5 Settings
This function does not have any setting parameters.

An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and
received by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC 61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1
on each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5≤x≤16) remains 0.
The boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values of each of the
outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these
OUTx (1≤x≤4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC 61850 network. The
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the Table 601. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
The value of each OUTx for 1≤x≤16 (1≤x≤16) follows the general formulae: OUTx
= 2x-1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be equal
to the integer value received over IEC 61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated
via IEC 61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The values represented by the different OUTx
are according to Table 601. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 601: Outputs and their values when activated
847
Technical manual

Logic

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16)
are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by
the ITBGAPC function block.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer
number that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while
the PSTO is in position “Remote”. If PSTO is in position ”Off” or ”Local”, then no
changes are applied to the outputs.

Table 602: Number of ITBGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8
15.14 Pulse integrator TIGAPC
Pulse integrator TIGAPC
The integrator function TIGAPC integrates input pulses and compares the integrated
time with a settable time delay to operate. Moreover, the time delay to reset the output
is settable in this function.
848
Technical manual

Logic

TIGAPC
IN OUT
IEC14000013 V1 EN
Figure 403: TIGAPC function block
15.14.4 Signals
Table 603: TIGAPC Input signals
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input to integrator
Table 604: TIGAPC Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from integrator
15.14.5 Settings
Table 605: TIGAPC Group settings (basic)
On
tDelay 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay to operate
tReset 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay to reset

In the pulse integrator TIGAPC, the time during which the input is high is integrated.
This means there is no output until the sum of the input pulses equals the set time delay
to operate. The output is deactivated when the input signal is FALSE and the time
delay to reset has elapsed.
849
Technical manual

Logic
1 t Reset
In
t int 0 t
t Delay
Integration
0 t
Out
0 t
IEC13000175 V2 EN
Figure 404: IN pulse length sufficient for integration to reach the set tDelay, OUT is
set until the tReset time has elapsed, which resets tDelay and OUT
1 t Reset
In
0 t
t int
t Delay
Integration
0 t
Out
0 t
IEC13000174=2=en.vsd
IEC13000174 V1 EN
Figure 405: IN pulse too short for integration to reach the set tDelay
1 t Reset
t Reset t Reset
In
t int 0 t
t Delay
Integration
0 t
Out
0 t
IEC13000176 V1 EN
Figure 406: IN pulse too short for integration to reach the set tDelay, and tReset
resets integration before next pulse can be integrated.
850
Technical manual

Logic
1
t Reset tReset tReset
In
t int 0 t
t Delay
Integration
0 t
Out
0 t
IEC13000177 V2 EN
Figure 407: The next IN pulse is received before tReset has elapsed. Sufficient
time during the pulses is accumulated to reach tDelay. When tDelay is
reached, OUT is set until tReset time has elapsed, which resets tDelay
and OUT.
tint integration time
tReset time delay to reset
tDelay time delay to operate
Table 606: TIGAPC technical data

Function Cycle time (ms) Range of value Accuracy
Time integration ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
continuous active 3 0-999999.99 s greater
Time integration 8 0-999999.99 s ± 0.2% or ±50 ms whichever is
continuous active greater
Time integration 100 0-999999.99 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever
continuous active is greater
Table 607: Number of TIGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIGAPC - 30 -
15.15 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -
851
Technical manual

Logic
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the
elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 408.
BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain
q-1
a
OVERFLOW
AND
a>b
999 999 s b
a
WARNING
AND
a>b
tWarning b
a
ALARM
AND
a>b
tAlarm b
q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-2-en.vsd
IEC13000290 V2 EN
Figure 408: TEIGAPC logics
The main features of TEIGAPC
• Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

• Supervision of overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10
milliseconds
• Retain the integration value
• Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• Report of the integrated time

TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME
IEC14000014 V1 EN
Figure 409: TEIGAPC function block
852
Technical manual

Logic
15.15.4 Signals
Table 608: TEIGAPC Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the
elapsed time, when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time
Table 609: TEIGAPC Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
overflow limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds
15.15.5 Settings
Table 610: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)
On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides
• time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has
been high
• blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
• retaining of the integrated value
Figure 410 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block “Time
Integration“ covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
“Transgression Supervision Plus Retain“ contains the logics for the last two.
853
Technical manual

Logic
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN
Loop Delay
IEC12000195 V4 EN
Figure 410: TEIGAPC Simplified logic
TEIGAPC main functionalities

• integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high
• applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds)
• output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
• integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
• any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation
value for the integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also
reset
• unconditionally on the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
• BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
• unconditionally on the signal value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds
• alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
• warning if ACCTIME > tWarning
The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow,
tAlarm and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there
is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.
854
Technical manual

Logic
tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending
on the level of the defined values for the parameters.
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs
freeze if an overflow occurs.
15.15.6.1 Operation accuracy
The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

• function cycle time
• the pulse length
• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs
In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses
may lead to reduced accuracy.
15.15.6.2 Memory storage
The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

Table 611: TEIGAPC Technical data
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms
integration whichever is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms
Table 612: Number of TEIGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4
855
Technical manual

856

Monitoring
Section 16 Monitoring
16.1 Measurements
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN
Phase current measurement CMMXU -
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN
Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital
857
Technical manual

Monitoring
for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides

to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power
system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection
and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument
transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the
measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of
the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection
function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
impact of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.
Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system

quantities:
• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
• I: phase current amplitude
• F: power system frequency
,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:
• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)
The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using

fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively
voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as
instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low
pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.
858
Technical manual

Monitoring
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual

hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component

quantities:
• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and
angle).

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
IEC10000016 V1 EN
Figure 411: CVMMXN function block
CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
IEC05000699 V2 EN
Figure 412: CMMXU function block
859
Technical manual

Monitoring
VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL
IEC05000701 V2 EN
Figure 413: VMMXU function block
CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
IEC05000703 V2 EN
Figure 414: CMSQI function block
VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL
IEC05000704 V2 EN
Figure 415: VMSQI function block
VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL
IEC09000850 V1 EN
Figure 416: VNMMXU function block
860
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.1.4 Signals
Table 613: CVMMXN Input signals
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
Table 614: CVMMXN Output signals

S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range
Table 615: CMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 616: CMMXU Output signals

IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
861
Technical manual

Monitoring

Table 617: VMMXU Input signals

U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 2
SIGNAL
Table 618: VMMXU Output signals

UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 619: CMSQI Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 3
SIGNAL
Table 620: CMSQI Output signals

3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
862
Technical manual

Monitoring

I2 REAL I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 621: VMSQI Input signals

U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 4
SIGNAL
Table 622: VMSQI Output signals

3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 623: VNMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 624: VNMMXU Output signals

863
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.1.5 Settings
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.
These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only available
in the first setting group.
The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:
• UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage
supervised object.
• IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the
supervised object.
• SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.
Table 625: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
864
Technical manual

Monitoring

URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
On
groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
measurement, U and I
Table 626: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
865
Technical manual

Monitoring

PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
866
Technical manual

Monitoring

FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5%
of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5%
of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
Table 627: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

IL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
IL1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
groups
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
Dead band
Int deadband
867
Technical manual

Monitoring

Dead band
Int deadband
Table 628: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5%
of Ir
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
100% of Ir
IL1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
868
Technical manual

Monitoring

Table 629: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

UL12DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
On
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL12Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
groups
UL12AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Int deadband
Table 630: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

UL12HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL12HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
869
Technical manual

Monitoring

UL12LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
100% of Ur
UL12Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in in % of UBase
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
UL23Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
Table 631: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
On
3I0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3I0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3I0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
870
Technical manual

Monitoring

I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
I1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
I1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
I2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table 632: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
3I0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
871
Technical manual

Monitoring

I1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
Table 633: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3U0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
3U0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
groups
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
On
3U0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
3U0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3U0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3U0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
872
Technical manual

Monitoring

U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
U2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
U2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
U2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
at 30% of Ur
at 100% of Ur
Table 634: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3U0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3U0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
U1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
U1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
U1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
873
Technical manual

Monitoring

U2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Table 635: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

On
Dead band
Int deadband
groups
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Int deadband
874
Technical manual

Monitoring
Table 636: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

100% of Ur

Table 637: CVMMXN Monitored data
S REAL - MVA Apparent Power
magnitude of deadband
value
P REAL - MW Active Power magnitude
of deadband value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive Power
value
PF REAL - - Power Factor magnitude
of deadband value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage
value
I REAL - A Calculated current
value
F REAL - Hz System frequency
value
875
Technical manual

Monitoring
Table 638: CMMXU Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
value
reported value
value
reported value
Table 639: VMMXU Monitored data

UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude,
value
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle, magnitude
of reported value
value
of reported value
value
of reported value
Table 640: CMSQI Monitored data

3I0IMAG REAL - - 3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude,
value
3I0ANGIM REAL - - 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
876
Technical manual

Monitoring

I1IMAG REAL - - I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
I1ANGIM REAL - - I1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I2IMAG REAL - - I2 Amplitude, magnitude
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
I2ANGIM REAL - - I2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
Table 641: VMSQI Monitored data

3U0IMAG REAL - - 3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude,
value
3U0ANGIM REAL - - 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U1IMAG REAL - - U1 Amplitude, magnitude
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
U1ANGIM REAL - - U1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U2IMAG REAL - - U2 Amplitude, magnitude
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
U2ANGIM REAL - - U2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
877
Technical manual

Monitoring
Table 642: VNMMXU Monitored data

value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
value
reported value
value
reported value
16.1.7.1 Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends
on the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function
Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference.
Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2,
3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping
might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the measurement values
within CVMMXU.
878
Technical manual

Monitoring
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 417. The monitoring
has two different modes of operating:
• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 417.
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0 t
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
IEC05000657 V2 EN
Figure 417: Presentation of operating limits
Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).
The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded,
3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The
output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get
measurement supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 417.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one
channel.
Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting
879
Technical manual

Monitoring
of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:
• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Y
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4
Y1 Y5
t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)
t
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000500 V2 EN
Figure 418: Periodic reporting
Amplitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change
is larger than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn), then the
measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information
flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 419 shows an example with the amplitude dead-
880
Technical manual

Monitoring
band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
Value Reported
Y

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1
IEC99000529 V2 EN
Figure 419: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting
After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the ±ΔY set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set
limit (XDbRepInt), figure 420, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 420 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
881
Technical manual

Monitoring
Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported
t
IEC99000530 V2 EN
Figure 420: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
16.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and
calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the
available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a
parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
882
Technical manual

Monitoring
Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 three phase-
EQUATION1385 V1 EN to-earth
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
voltages are
EQUATION1386 V1 EN available
2 Arone Used when
S = U L1 L 2 × I L*1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L* 3 U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 three two
phase-to-
(Equation 137) phase
EQUATION1387 V1 EN
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
voltages are
EQUATION1388 V1 EN (Equation 138) available
3 PosSeq Used when

S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq only
symmetrical
(Equation 139) three phase
EQUATION1389 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
power shall
EQUATION1390 V1 EN (Equation 140) be measured
4 L1L2 Used when

S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 only UL1L2
phase-to-
(Equation 141)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1391 V1 EN
voltage is
5 L2L3 Used when

S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L* 2 - I L* 3 ) U = U L2 L3 only UL2L3
phase-to-
(Equation 143)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1393 V1 EN
voltage is
6 L3L1 Used when

S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L* 3 - I L*1 ) U = U L 3 L1 only UL3L1
phase-to-
(Equation 145)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1395 V1 EN
voltage is
7 L1 Used when
S = 3 × U L1 × I L*1 U = 3 × U L1 only UL1
phase-to-
(Equation 147) earth voltage
I = I L1
EQUATION1397 V1 EN
is available
8 L2 Used when
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L* 2 U = 3 × U L2 only UL2
phase-to-
I = IL2
EQUATION1399 V1 EN
is available
9 L3 Used when
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L* 3 U = 3 × U L3 only UL3
phase-to-
I = I L3
EQUATION1401 V1 EN
is available
* means complex conjugated value
883
Technical manual

Monitoring
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes
that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power
system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the
P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
Q = Im( S )
S = S = P +Q
2 2
PF = cosj = P
S
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging
behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor
is leading the voltage phasor.
Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to
get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in
figure 421.
884
Technical manual

Monitoring
IEC05000652 V2 EN
Low pass filtering

to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I
and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in
the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:
X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
885
Technical manual

Monitoring
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, it is possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for current
and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or
voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power
(P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement
supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these values the zero
clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero
point clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement
supervision").
Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as amplitude
(setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex
constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for
example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration
it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.
Directionality
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown
in the following figure 422.
886
Technical manual

Monitoring
Busbar
IED
P Q
Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN
Figure 422: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements
Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of
the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have
actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements.
This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0
degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained
from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as
an output.
16.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU
The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-

phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the
function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal
use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
887
Technical manual

Monitoring
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and

above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 421.
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
16.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the

configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the
outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".
16.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI
The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or

voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than
X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to
calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and
transferred to corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer
in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Table 643: CVMMXN technical data
Frequency (0.95-1.05) × fr ± 2.0 mHz
Voltage (0.1-1.5) ×Ur ± 0.5% of Ur at U£Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Connected current (0.2-4.0) × Ir ± 0.5% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 0.5% of I at I > Ir
888
Technical manual

Monitoring

Active power, P 0.1 x Ur Sr
Conditions:
Reactive power, Q 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 0.8 x Ur < U < 1.2 Ur
0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.2 x Ir < I < 1.2 Ir
Apparent power, S 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur
0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir
Power factor, cos (φ) 0.1 x Ur 0.5 × Ir
Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ± 1.0° at 0.1 × Ir 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ± 0.5° at U ≤ 50 V
± 0.2° at U > 50 V
Table 646: CMSQI technical data

Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ± 0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
Three phase settings ± 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ± 0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ± 0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ± 1.0° at 0.1 × Ir 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ± 0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
± 0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ± 0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
± 0.2% of U at U > 50 V
± 0.2° at U > 50 V
Table 648: VNMMXU technical data

Voltage (5 to 175) V ± 0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
± 0.2% of U at U > 50 V
± 0.2° at U > 50 V
16.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG
Gas medium supervision SSIMG - 63
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input
signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received
information.
890
Technical manual

Monitoring

SSIMG
BLOCK PRESSURE
BLK_ALM PRES_ALM
PRESSURE PRES_LO
TEMP TEMP
PRES_ALM TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
IEC09000129 V1 EN
Figure 423: SSIMG function block
16.2.4 Signals
Table 649: SSIMG Input signals

BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
PRESSURE REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout
Table 650: SSIMG Output signals

PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
891
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.2.5 Settings
Table 651: SSIMG Group settings (basic)
On
PressAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, and gas pressure signal
PRESSURE, are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and PRES_LO.
When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_ALM
is high then the gas pressure alarm, PRES_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if
pressure input PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal from CB
PRES_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit
then the gas pressure lockout, PRES_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tPressureAlarm or
tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than
these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm PRES_ALM or lockout
PRES_LO will be initiated. The SET_P_LO binary input is used for setting the gas
pressure lockout. The PRES_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the
setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used
to block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout
indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.
892
Technical manual

Monitoring
When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater
than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above the
settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is
used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value
until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators
have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input
BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both
alarms and the lockout indication.

Table 652: SSIMG Technical data
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
lockout greater
16.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML
Liquid medium supervision SSIML - 71
893
Technical manual

Monitoring
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as
input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on
received information.

SSIML
BLOCK LEVEL
BLK_ALM LVL_ALM
LEVEL LVL_LO
TEMP TEMP
LVL_ALM TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
IEC09000128 V1 EN
Figure 424: SSIML function block
16.3.4 Signals
Table 653: SSIML Input signals

BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
LEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SET_L_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout
Table 654: SSIML Output signals

LEVEL REAL Level service value
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
LVL_LO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
894
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.3.5 Settings
Table 655: SSIML Group settings (basic)
On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of oil level LVL_ALM, LEVEL_LO and oil level signal
LEVEL are taken into account to initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO. When
LEVEL is less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_ALM is high, then
the oil level indication alarm, LVL_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if oil level input
LEVEL is less than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_LO is high or
temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit, then the oil level
indication lockout, LVL_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the function
need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or
tLevelLockOut have been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for more
than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or lockout
LVL_LO will be initiated. The SET_L_LO binary input is used for setting the gas
pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the
setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used
for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout
indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.
895
Technical manual

Monitoring
When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater
than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above the
settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is
used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value
until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators
have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input
BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both
alarms and the lockout indication.

Table 656: SSIMLTechnical data
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
lockout greater
16.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -
896
Technical manual

Monitoring
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of
the breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of
operations reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker,
it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or
breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and estimate the accumulated
energy during arcing periods.

SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO
IEC13000231 V2 EN
Figure 425: SSCBR function block
16.4.4 Signals
Table 657: SSCBR Input signals
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time
897
Technical manual

Monitoring
Table 658: SSCBR Output signals

OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel
time exceeds alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel
time exceeds lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
16.4.5 Settings
Table 659: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
On
groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation selection
Trip Signal
898
Technical manual

Monitoring

CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for energy
calculation
AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter
Table 660: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in auxiliary
and main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status of
trip output and start of main contact
separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent
integr over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in
hours
899
Technical manual

Monitoring

Table 661: SSCBR Monitored data
TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during opening operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during closing operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation
cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of
respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB
has been inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated
I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open
travel time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the
CB spring

The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions. The
subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are On and Off.
The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in

Figure 426. All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.
900
Technical manual

Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT
OPENPOS
CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR
TRCMD
Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW
CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER
CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS
SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT
CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
IEC12000624 V3 EN
Figure 426: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring
901
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time
The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact
travel time for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact
travel time measurement is described in Figure 427.
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT
TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615 V2 EN
Figure 427: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time
Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of
change of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the
opening of the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts. Similarly,
the closing travel time is measured between the opening of the POSOPEN and closing
of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation factor has been added to
consider the time difference between auxiliary contact operation and the actual
physical opening of the breaker main contact.
Main Contact
1
0
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
1
t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4
tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

IEC12000616 V2 EN
Figure 428: Travel time calculation
There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the actual
opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting. The closing
902
Technical manual

Monitoring
time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to
the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time
(TTRVCL) are given as service values.
The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input
RSTCBWR.
Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrOpenAlm
setting, the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the measured closing
travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCLAL
output is activated.
It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by activating
the BLOCK input.
16.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status
The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that
is, whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is
described in Figure 429.
Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check
OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS
IEC12000613 V3 EN
Figure 429: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting. If
the current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact
position indicator module as closed circuit breaker.
Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low,
the POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting AccStopCurr
value. The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the
POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary contacts
903
Technical manual

Monitoring
have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low and the
POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr.
The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS, CLOSEPOS
and INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.
16.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker
The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on the
wear and tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of the
circuit breaker reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the interrupted
current. The remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip
curve provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is decreased by at least one
when the circuit breaker is opened. The operation of the remaining life of circuit
breaker subfunction is described in Figure 430.
I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation
RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000620 V3 EN
Figure 430: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker
Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the
RatedOperCurr setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one
operation. If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the
RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced by
the set OperNoRated by divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the tripping current
is between these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is calculated
based on the maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer. The
OperNoRated parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the
rated current. The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the breaker
can perform at the rated fault current.
Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel
setting, the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.
It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input
BLKALM.
904
Technical manual

Monitoring
The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from LHMI or
by activating the input RSTCBWR.
16.4.7.4 Accumulated energy
The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based
on current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The
operation is described in Figure 431.
The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil
circuit TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.
I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND
LRSTIPOW
IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM
IEC12000619 V3 EN
Figure 431: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy
Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by selecting
the AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.
The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends when
the RMS current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.
905
Technical manual

Monitoring
Main Contact Main Contact

close close
open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1
0 0
Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts
ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
IEC12000618 V1 EN
Figure 432: Significance of correction factor setting
The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to the
time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy starts
after the auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the
ContTrCorr setting has passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts in
advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.
Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip
output. TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between
the trip initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting
OperTimeDelay.
The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value can
be reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW.
Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set
value AlmAccCurrPwr.
IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the
LOAccCurrPwr setting.
The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary
input BLOCK.
16.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles
The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-
opening sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after each
closing-opening sequence. The operation is described in figure433.
906
Technical manual

Monitoring
POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR
OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM
IEC12000617 V2 EN
Figure 433: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change of
the auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit
breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the InitCounterVal
parameter and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on the LHMI or
activating the input RSTCBWR.
Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.
If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the
OperLOLevel setting, the OPERLO output is activated.
The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input
is activated.
16.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring
The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of
the circuit breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set level.
The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in figure 434.
POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN
Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000614 V2 EN
Figure 434: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring
907
Technical manual

Monitoring
Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has
remained in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring the
states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial
number of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.
Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit
value defined by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal
MONALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.
16.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring
The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring
charging time. The operation is described in Figure 435.
SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT
Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000621 V2 EN
Figure 435: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge
indication
Spring charging time measurement

The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging
time. SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring
charging time is calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring
charging indication is described in Figure435.
The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The
spring charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input
RSTSPCHT.
Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the
SpChAlmTime setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.
It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary
input.
908
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication
The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure
inside the arc chamber. The operation is described in Figure 436.
PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM
BLKALM
tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
IEC12000622 V3 EN
Figure 436: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure
indication
When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated after
a time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be
blocked by activating the BLKALM input.
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes high,
activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO
setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from
the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

Table 662: SSCBR Technical data
Alarm level for open and close (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
travel time
Alarm level for number of (0 – 9999) -
operations
Independent time delay for (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
spring charging time alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure lockout greater
CB Contact Travel Time, ±3 ms
opening and closing
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is
greater
909
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.5 Event function EVENT
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level.
These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the
Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for LON and SPA
communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.

EVENT
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
IEC05000697 V2 EN
Figure 437: EVENT function block
910
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.5.4 Signals
Table 663: EVENT Input signals
INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
911
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.5.5 Settings
Table 664: EVENT Non group settings (basic)
SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
912
Technical manual

Monitoring

OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1
913
Technical manual

Monitoring

The main purpose of the Event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state
or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state
transition, for which event generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a
name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create
single events, but are also intended for double indication events.
The EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
Events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module.
Time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a
resolution corresponding to the execution cycle-time of the source application. Time-
tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of
1 ms.
The outputs from the EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and
alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input
is intended to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Events are produced according to set event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. An EventMask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
• NoEvents
• OnSet
• OnReset
• OnChange
• AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of the EVENT function generates the events. This
can be performed individually for communication types SPAChannelMask and
LONChannelMask. For each communication type these settings are available:
• Off
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16
For LON communication, events are normally sent to station level at change. It is also
possible to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input
channel.
914
Technical manual

Monitoring
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate
the EVENT function or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is
implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted
quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be
removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the
maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45 events per
second.
16.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE
Analog input signals A41RADR - -
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - -
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a,
maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
915
Technical manual

Monitoring
• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder
The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR

function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected
signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the
recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same
applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is
used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files may be
uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
IEC05000406 V3 EN
Figure 438: DRPRDRE function block
A1RADR
^GRP INPUT1
^GRP INPUT2
^GRP INPUT3
^GRP INPUT4
^GRP INPUT5
^GRP INPUT6
^GRP INPUT7
^GRP INPUT8
^GRP INPUT9
^GRP INPUT10
IEC05000430 V4 EN
Figure 439: A1RADR function block
916
Technical manual

Monitoring
A4RADR
ÎNPUT31
ÎNPUT32
ÎNPUT33
ÎNPUT34
ÎNPUT35
ÎNPUT36
ÎNPUT37
ÎNPUT38
ÎNPUT39
ÎNPUT40
IEC05000431 V3 EN
Figure 440: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs
B1RBDR
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
IEC05000432 V3 EN
Figure 441: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR -
B6RBDR
16.6.4 Signals
Table 665: DRPRDRE Output signals
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used
917
Technical manual

Monitoring
Table 666: A1RADR Input signals

GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
918
Technical manual

Monitoring

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
Table 670: B1RBDR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
919
Technical manual

Monitoring



920
Technical manual

Monitoring



921
Technical manual

Monitoring


16.6.5 Settings
Table 676: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
922
Technical manual

Monitoring

TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On
Table 677: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Table 678: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 1
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
923
Technical manual

Monitoring

% of signal
% of signal
% of signal
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in %
of signal
% of signal
% of signal
% of signal
% of signal
% of signal
% of signal
924
Technical manual

Monitoring

% of signal
% of signal
% of signal
% of signal
% of signal
% of signal
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal
OverTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
% of signal

Operation11 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
On
On
On
On
925
Technical manual

Monitoring

On
On
On
On
On

in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
OverTrigLe13 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 13 in
% of signal
in % of signal
926
Technical manual

Monitoring

% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
927
Technical manual

Monitoring

in % of signal
% of signal

On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

in % of signal
% of signal
928
Technical manual

Monitoring

in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
929
Technical manual

Monitoring

% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal

On
On
On
On
On
On
930
Technical manual

Monitoring

On
On
On
On

in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
931
Technical manual

Monitoring

in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
932
Technical manual

Monitoring

in % of signal
% of signal
Table 685: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
933
Technical manual

Monitoring

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
934
Technical manual

Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
935
Technical manual

Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
Table 686: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
936
Technical manual

Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
937
Technical manual

Monitoring

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
938
Technical manual

Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
939
Technical manual

Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
940
Technical manual

Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
941
Technical manual

Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
942
Technical manual

Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
943
Technical manual

Monitoring

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
944
Technical manual

Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
945
Technical manual

Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
946
Technical manual

Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
947
Technical manual

Monitoring

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
948
Technical manual

Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
949
Technical manual

Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Show
Show
Show
950
Technical manual

Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
951
Technical manual

Monitoring

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
952
Technical manual

Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
953
Technical manual

Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
954
Technical manual

Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
955
Technical manual

Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
956
Technical manual

Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
957
Technical manual

Monitoring

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
958
Technical manual

Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
959
Technical manual

Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
960
Technical manual

Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show

Table 697: DRPRDRE Monitored data
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
channel 2 activated
channel 2 activated
channel 3 activated
channel 3 activated
channel 4 activated
channel 4 activated
channel 5 activated
channel 5 activated
channel 6 activated
channel 6 activated
961
Technical manual

Monitoring

channel 7 activated
channel 7 activated
channel 8 activated
channel 8 activated
channel 9 activated
channel 9 activated
channel 10 activated
962
Technical manual

Monitoring

963
Technical manual

Monitoring

FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.
964
Technical manual

Monitoring
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
• Event list (EL)

• Indications (IND)
• Event recorder (ER)
• Trip value recorder(TVR)
• Disturbance recorder (DR)
Figure 442 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND) uses
information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder
(TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR).
Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and
BxRBDR.
AxRADR Disturbance Report
DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec
BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder
Binary signals
Event list
Event recorder
Indications
IEC09000337 V3 EN
Figure 442: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function
is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and
so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power.
Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
965
Technical manual

Monitoring
Disturbance report
Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100
General dist. Trip Event Disturbance

Indications Event list
information values recordings recording
en05000161.vsd
IEC05000161 V1 EN
Figure 443: Disturbance report structure
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one.
The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. Figure 444
shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested for a typical
configuration, that is, in a 50 Hz system it is possible to record 100 where the average
recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the
disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER), Indications (IND) and Trip
value recorder (TVR)).
Number of recordings
100
3,4 s
80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s
6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time
250 300 350 400 s
en05000488.vsd
IEC05000488 V1 EN
Figure 444: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time
966
Technical manual

Monitoring
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or
MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely
via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged), see section "" for more detailed information.
Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.
Event list (EL)

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.
Trip value recorder (TVR)

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and
during the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.
Disturbance recorder (DR)

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after
the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report
Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a
settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
967
Technical manual

Monitoring
Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register
disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which

criterion stops the current disturbance recording
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT
1 2 3
en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN
Figure 445: The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit
time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a
recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use
the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data
communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and
summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally
calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals,
phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).
968
Technical manual

Monitoring
SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
IEC10000029 V1 EN
Figure 446: Analog input function blocks
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according
to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than
the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until
a new updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In
case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the
corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the
SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used
as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
969
Technical manual

Monitoring
If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.

However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The
input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The
signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal
is selected to be recorded when:
• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation
= Off). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI
(SetLED = On/Off).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.
The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which
runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled,
there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance
of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is
generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual
for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
970
Technical manual

Monitoring
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in
the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average
value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger
is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the
range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.
Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However,
under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault
recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig

= On) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and,
during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start
until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig
occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a
new complete recording will be started.
Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance

recordings.

Table 698: DRPRDRE technical data
Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
971
Technical manual

Monitoring

Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 844
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the 30 -
Trip Value recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a 96 -
disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the 150 -
Event recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Event list
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s 340 seconds (100 recordings) at -
recording time and maximum number 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
of channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -
16.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA
master to poll signals from various other functions.
972
Technical manual

Monitoring

BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
ÎNPUT1 OUTPUT2
ÎNPUT2 OUTPUT3
ÎNPUT3 OUTPUT4
ÎNPUT4 OUTPUT5
ÎNPUT5 OUTPUT6
ÎNPUT6 OUTPUT7
ÎNPUT7 OUTPUT8
ÎNPUT8 OUTPUT9
ÎNPUT9 OUTPUT10
ÎNPUT10 OUTPUT11
ÎNPUT11 OUTPUT12
ÎNPUT12 OUTPUT13
ÎNPUT13 OUTPUT14
ÎNPUT14 OUTPUT15
ÎNPUT15 OUTPUT16
ÎNPUT16
IEC09000730 V1 EN
Figure 447: BINSTATREP function block
16.7.4 Signals
Table 699: BINSTATREP Input signals
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1
973
Technical manual

Monitoring
Table 700: BINSTATREP Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
16.7.5 Settings
Table 701: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16
outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via
SPA communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input
signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal
resets.
974
Technical manual

Monitoring
INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t t
IEC09000732 V1 EN
Figure 448: BINSTATREP logical diagram
16.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high
limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to enable
translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals:
below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high
limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for
alarming purpose.

RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
IEC05000346 V2 EN
Figure 449: RANGE_XP function block
975
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.8.4 Signals
Table 702: RANGE_XP Input signals
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range
Table 703: RANGE_XP Output signals

HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC). The
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according
to table 704.
Table 704: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised below low-low between low‐ between low between high- above high-
value is: limit low and low and high limit high and high high limit
Output: limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High
16.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT
Limit counter L4UFCNT -
976
Technical manual

Monitoring
The 30 limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four independent
limits where the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are
counted against the setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated
when the counted value reaches that limit.
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on
the binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if
the accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four
limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated
until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash
memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
16.9.3.1 Design
Figure 450 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.
BLOCK
INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW
OnMaxValue
Limit LIMIT1 … 4
MaxValue Check
CounterLimit1...4
Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue
IEC12000625 V1 EN
Figure 450: Logic diagram
The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the
function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three
possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are:
977
Technical manual

Monitoring
• Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count
The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 451.
Overflow indication
Actual value ... Max value -1® Max value ® Max value +1 ® Max value +2 ® Max value +3 ...
Counted value ... Max value -1 ® Max value ® 0 ® 1 ® 2 ...
IEC12000626 V1 EN
Figure 451: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed
The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial
value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input
and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition
remains until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are
applied.
The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not
counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be
initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial
states until the release of the block input.
16.9.3.2 Reporting
The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.
Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.
Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for
example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement
on the local HMI graphical display.
978
Technical manual

Monitoring

L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE
IEC12000029 V1 EN
Figure 452: L4UFCNT function block
16.9.5 Signals
Table 705: L4UFCNT Input signals
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
Table 706: L4UFCNT Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value
settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than
MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit1
CounterLimit2
CounterLimit3
CounterLimit4
VALUE INTEGER Counted value
979
Technical manual

Monitoring
16.9.6 Settings
Table 707: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or pulsed
Rollover Pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

Table 708: L4UFCNT Monitored data
VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

Table 709: L4UFCNTtechnical data
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -
980
Technical manual

Metering
Section 17 Metering
17.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -
S00947 V1 EN
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses,
for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read
by the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The
special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be
ordered to achieve this functionality.

PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
IEC09000335 V3 EN
Figure 453: PCFCNT function block
981
Technical manual

Metering
17.1.4 Signals
Table 710: PCFCNT Input signals
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value
Table 711: PCFCNT Output signals

INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete
integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information
17.1.5 Settings
Table 712: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse
ReportEvents counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit
per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value
982
Technical manual

Metering

Table 713: PCFCNT Monitored data
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter
value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time
and status information

The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary
input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter
values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All
active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or
IEC 61850.
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional

incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses
a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range
0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:
• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is,
the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is
finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be
connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station
HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.
The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card, BIMp,

that is specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.
Figure 454 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the
inputs and outputs.
983
Technical manual

Metering
SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
”Reset counter” RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT
SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd
IEC05000744 V1 EN
Figure 454: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI.
As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected
to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must
be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC
Event function block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where
the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up,
in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during
last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There
are two reasons why the counter is blocked:
• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
984
Technical manual

Metering
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time
and status information.

Table 714: PCFCNT technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of counter (1–3600) s -
value
17.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as
reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction.
Energy values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are
also calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to remove
noise from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy calculations,
integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm signals for limit
violation of energy values and maximum power demand, can be found.
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power values
by integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and
reactive energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions. These
985
Technical manual

Metering
energy values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of
energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC and STOPACC) and EnaAcc
setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC input.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output channels.
The active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated for both
forward and reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD input.

ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC14000019 V1 EN
Figure 455: ETPMMTR function block
17.2.4 Signals
Table 715: ETPMMTR Input signals
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading
Table 716: ETPMMTR Output signals

ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
986
Technical manual

Metering

ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set
interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in
set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in
set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value in
VArS
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in
VArS
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value
for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse
direction
17.2.5 Settings
Table 717: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
987
Technical manual

Metering

EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
Table 718: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping detection
On function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
100000000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
100000000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
100000000.000 energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
100000000.000 energy

Table 719: ETPMMTR Monitored data
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward
active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse
active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward
reactive energy value in
VArS
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse
reactive energy value in
VArS
988
Technical manual

Metering

MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward
reactive power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reactive power
demand value in reverse
direction

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure
the integrated energy. Figure 456 shows the overall functionality of the energy
calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR.
MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC
IEC13000185 V2 EN
Figure 456: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram
The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by
the STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output
ACCINPRG is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 457 shows the logic of the
ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and the
EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the output
ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG is
deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.
989
Technical manual

Metering
STOPACC
FALSE
STARTACC T
³1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &
q-1
RSTACC

IEC13000186 V4 EN
Figure 457: ACCINPRG Logic diagram
The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service values
and also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can be
connected to a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for forward
as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to initial
accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or with the
input signal RSTACC. Figure 458 shows the logic for integration of energy in active
forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active reverse, reactive
forward and reactive reverse is done.
RSTACC
EAFPrestVal
ACCINPRG
P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
S T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F
&
q-1
EALim T
q-1 0.0 F
a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
IEC13000187 V4 EN
Figure 458: Logic for integration of active forward energy
The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy

values and energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy values
are divided by the energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The number of
990
Technical manual

Metering
pulses can be reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset
menu. The pulse on and off time duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and
tEnergyOffPls. Figure 459 shows the logic for pulse output generation for the
integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the pulse generation for
integrated energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC
a Counter q-1
a>b CU
EALim b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1
0
÷ X
S R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty ÷ 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst
q-1
tEnergyOnPls
IEC13000188 V4 EN
Figure 459: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a
register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD,
MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse
direction. When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset menu, these
outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated once the periodic energy value
crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 460 shows the logic of alarm for active forward
energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active power demand value. Similarly,
the maximum power calculation and energy alarm outputs in the active reverse,
reactive forward and reactive reverse is implemented.
991
Technical manual

Metering
P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b
EALim
RSTMAXD
0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F
q-1
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000189 V4 EN
Figure 460: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

Table 720:
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVarh Input from MMXU. No extra error
Export/Import at steady load
992
Technical manual

Section 18 Station communication
18.1 670 series protocols
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or

many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation
(SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Following communication protocols are available:
• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• LON communication protocol
• SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• DNP3.0 communication protocol
Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
18.2 DNP3 protocol
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.
18.3 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
18.3.1 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 721: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX (ST Glass fibre (ST
EIA-485
connector) connector)
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported
When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports
are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address
993
Technical manual

138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IP-

address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0
18.3.2 Settings
Table 722: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
On
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LANAB Port selection for GOOSE communication
LANAB
LANCD
PortSelMMS Front - - Any Port selection for MMS communication
LANAB
LANCD
Any
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemoteModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
AllowGOOSESimulation No - - No Allow enabling of GOOSE Simulation
Yes
IEC61850BufTimEnable Disabled - - Enabled Enable BRC buf time behavior
Enabled

Table 723: Communication protocols
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–19200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
18.3.4 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC
994
Technical manual

Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to send
one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

SPGAPC
BLOCK
ÎN
IEC14000021 V1 EN
Figure 461: SPGAPC function block
SP16GAPC
BLOCK
ÎN1
ÎN2
ÎN3
ÎN4
ÎN5
ÎN6
ÎN7
ÎN8
ÎN9
ÎN10
ÎN11
ÎN12
ÎN13
ÎN14
ÎN15
ÎN16
IEC14000020 V1 EN
Figure 462: SP16GAPC function block
18.3.4.3 Signals
Table 724: SPGAPC Input signals
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status
Table 725: SP16GAPC Input signals

IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
995
Technical manual


18.3.4.4 Settings

Table 726: SPGAPC Monitored data
OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL
Table 727: SP16GAPC Monitored data

OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
996
Technical manual


SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR
SIGNAL gate for input 1 to 16
Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single Point
indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment
or system that requests this signal. Additional configuration is needed with PCM600
or IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1 communication established For more information
refer to the Engineering manual.
18.3.5 Generic communication function for Measured Value

MVGAPC
Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used to

send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
ÎN RANGE
IEC14000022 V1 EN
Figure 463: MVGAPC function block
997
Technical manual

18.3.5.3 Signals
Table 728: MVGAPC Input signals
IN REAL 0 Analog input value
Table 729: MVGAPC Output signals

VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range
18.3.5.4 Settings
Table 730: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
998
Technical manual


Table 731: MVGAPC Monitored data
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband
value
RANGE INTEGER 1=High - Range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the
range, as output values. Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600
to get the IEC 61850-8-1 communication established. For more information see the
Engineering manual.
18.3.6 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication
Function description LHMI and ACT IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification identification device number
Parallel Redundancy PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH - -
Protocol Status
Duo driver PRP - - -
configuration
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC
62439-3 Edition 2 parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) are available as options when
ordering IEDs. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses
both port AB and port CD on the OEM module.
PRPSTATUS
PRP-A LINK
PRP-A VALID
PRP-B LINK
PRP-B VALID
IEC09000757.vsd
IEC09000757 V2 EN
Figure 464: PRPSTATUS function block
999
Technical manual

18.3.6.3 Signals
Table 732: PRPSTATUS Output signals
PRP-A LINK BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Status
PRP-A VALID BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Valid
PRP-B LINK BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Status
PRP-B VALID BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Valid
18.3.6.4 Settings
Table 733: PRP Non group settings (basic)
On
PRPMode PRP-0 - - PRP-1 PRP Mode
PRP-1
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.7.10 IP-Address
Address
IPMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
Address

Table 734: PRPSTATUS Monitored data
AB Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - AB Link Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
CD Beh INTEGER 1=On - CD Link Beh
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
PRP Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - PRP Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
18.3.6.6 Principle of operation
The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is

transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one
channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel, if they are the
1000
Technical manual

same, the last package is discarded. The PRP communication is based on the so called
duo driver concept.
The PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the
last 10 s, the output PRP-A LINK and/or PRP-B LINK is set to 0 which indicates an
error.
Station Control System
Redundancy
Supervision
Duo
Data Data
Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2
Data Data
AB CD IED
Configuration OEM
PRP PRPSTATUS
=IEC09000758=3=en=Original.vsd
IEC09000758 V3 EN
Figure 465: Redundant station bus
1001
Technical manual

18.4 LON communication protocol
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace,
from the control center and also from other terminals.
LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version

3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks.
These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few
bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low
maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the
needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the
reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International
Standardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.
18.4.2 Settings
Table 735: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
Table 736: ADE Non group settings (basic)

On
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast
TimeDomain Local without DST - - Local with DST Time domain
Local with DST

The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With
protection and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of the
maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the
devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet
1002
Technical manual

and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one
subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to
the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example,
interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages,
such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals.
Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and
explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for
multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network
variables.
Introduction of LON protocol

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and
Control, User’s manual and Technical description.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON
LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks
network, is easily accessible on a single tool program.
Activate LON Communication

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main Menu/
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/ LON/HORZCOMM:
1, where Operation must be set to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing
the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT
package version 1p2 r04.
LON net address

To establish a LON connection, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net
address consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON
Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.
1003
Technical manual

Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.
Events and indications

Events are sent to the monitoring devices using explicit messages (message code 44H)
with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is
changed in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from
terminal.
Binary events
Binary events are generated in Event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the
IEDs. The EVENT function blocks have predefined LON addresses. Table 737 shows
the LON addresses to the first input on the EVENT function blocks. Addresses to the
other inputs on the EVENT function block are consecutive after the first input. For
example, input 15 on EVENT:17 function block has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) =
1294.
For double indications, only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 can
be used for other types of events at the same EVENT block.
Three EVENT function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop time
(3 ms) are available as basic in the IEDs.. The remaining EVENT function blocks
EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 run with a loop time of 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20 run
with a loop time of 100 ms. The EVENT blocks are used to send binary signals,
integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions and mA input
modules as well as pulse counter signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16, and 24 mA input

service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 – SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the
IEDs.
The first LON address in every EVENT function block is found in table 737
Table 737: LON adresses for EVENT functions
Function block First LON address in
function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
1004
Technical manual

Function block First LON address in

function block
EVENT:9 1152
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328
Event masks
Event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Settings/IED settings/ Monitoring / Event Function or via parameter setting
tool (PST) as follows:
• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always
reported on change, no changed detection is done in the EVENT function block. Other
Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event
masked in the EVENT function block.
Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions. Event
reporting is based on the information coming from SCSWI functions, so no change
detection is done in the EVENT function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an EVENT function block.
• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

• 01 generates an open event with the read status 1
• 10 generates a close event with the read status 2
• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
1005
Technical manual

Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal. Otherwise it is taken from the
EVENT function block.
Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N)
are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only
one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the
next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That is,
the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24; the SPA
addresses are according to table 738.
Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 670 series
IEDs.Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series
IEDs The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state
is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the

information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented
for the application by a multiple command receive function block
(MULTICMDRCV). With horizontal communication, the input BOUND on
MULTICMDSND must be set to 1. There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60
MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. These function blocks are connected
using the LON network tool (LNT). The tool also defines the service and addressing
on LON.
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for the IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables

Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON
network tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure network
variables concerning, for example, interlocking between two IEDs.
1006
Technical manual

LON
BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MULTICMDSND: 7 MULTICMDSND: 9 MULTICMDSND: 9
en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN
Figure 466: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and

MULTICMDRCV function blocks in three IEDs
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From
LNT window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.
en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN
Figure 467: The network variables window in LNT
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the
drag-and-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag
them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there;
or, they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/ Download.
1007
Technical manual

en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN
Figure 468: The download configuration window in LNT
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the Main
Processing Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP
communication.
There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connectors for plastic fibre cables and
ST/bayonet connectors for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either
type of connector or a combination of both connectors. This is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical
fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning
handling and connection of fibre cables.
Table 738: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
command
command
command
command
1008
Technical manual


block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
1009
Technical manual


block address
command
command
command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
1010
Technical manual


block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command before
SELClose+ILO=11, operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
1011
Technical manual


block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command before
ExcClose+ILO=11, operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
1012
Technical manual


block address
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
1013
Technical manual


block address
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
1014
Technical manual


block address
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
1015
Technical manual


block address
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
1016
Technical manual


block address
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
1017
Technical manual


block address
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
1018
Technical manual


block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
1019
Technical manual


block address
command
command
command

Table 739: LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s
18.5 SPA communication protocol
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.
18.5.2 Design
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires
the following equipment:
• Optical fibres
• Opto/electrical converter for the PC
• PC
The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600.
SPA cannot be used with PCM600.
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is
a front-connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for
using "FSTACCS", that is, Field Service Tool Access.
1020
Technical manual

18.5.3 Settings
Table 740: SPA Non group settings (basic)
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
Table 741: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

On

The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data
bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more
information on recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical
reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need
to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and,
consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the
slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (for
example, for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information
to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common
a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit
and receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to
an IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found in
table 742.
1021
Technical manual

Table 742: SPA addresses for the MIM function

Function block SPA address
MIM3-CH1 4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2 4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3 4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4 4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5 4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6 4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1 4-O-6527
MIM4-CH2 4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3 4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4 4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5 4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6 4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1 4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2 4-O-6549
MIM5-CH3 4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4 4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5 4-O-6554
MIM5-CH6 4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1 4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2 4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3 4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4 4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5 4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6 4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1 4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2 4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3 4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4 4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5 4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6 4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1 4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2 4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3 4-O-6607
MIM8-CH4 4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5 4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6 4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1 4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2 4-O-6625
1022
Technical manual


MIM9-CH3 4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4 4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5 4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6 4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1 4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2 4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3 4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4 4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5 4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6 4-O-6652
MIM11-CH1 4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2 4-O-6663
MIM11-CH3 4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4 4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5 4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6 4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1 4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2 4-O-6682
MIM12-CH3 4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4 4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5 4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6 4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1 4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2 4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3 4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4 4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5 4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6 4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1 4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2 4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3 4-O-6721
MIM14-CH4 4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5 4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6 4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1 4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2 4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3 4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4 4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5 4-O-6744
1023
Technical manual


MIM15-CH6 4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1 4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2 4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3 4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4 4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5 4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6 4-O-6766
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are found
in table 743.
Table 743: SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function
Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL
PCFCNT:1 6-O-2788 6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2 6-O-2794 6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3 6-O-2800 6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4 6-O-2806 6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5 6-O-2812 6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6 6-O-2818 6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7 6-O-2824 6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8 6-O-2830 6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9 6-O-2836 6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10 6-O-2842 6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11 6-O-2848 6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12 6-O-2854 6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13 6-O-2860 6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14 6-O-2866 6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15 6-O-2872 6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16 6-O-2878 6-O-2877
I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function
block are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 – BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to
section Related documents in Product Guide.
Single command, 16 signals

The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16
outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.
1024
Technical manual

Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks;

SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 3 signals function
block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The
other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the
SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to

SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 744.
Table 744: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529
1025
Technical manual

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
Figure 469 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED
for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in SINGLECMD:
1 are shown in table 744.
SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ÔUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
#CD01-CMDOUT1 ÔUT2
#CD01-CMDOUT2 ÔUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT3 ÔUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT4 ÔUT5 AND PULSETIMER
ÔUT6 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
#CD01-CMDOUT5
ÔUT7 INPUT2 NOUT
#CD01-CMDOUT6
#CD01-CMDOUT7 ÔUT8 INPUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT8 ÔUT9 INPUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT9 ÔUT10
#CD01-CMDOUT16
SYNCH OK
IEC05000717 V4 EN
Figure 469: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of
a circuit breaker
1026
Technical manual

The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or
setable pulse length signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main
Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command or via
Parameter Setting Tool (PST).
Event function EVENT

The Event function (EVENT) sends time-tagged events to the station level (for
example, operator workplace) over the station bus. On the station level, events are
presented in an event list. Events can be created from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. All the internal signals are time tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module.
Events are produced according to a set of event masks. These masks are treated
commonly for both LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask
are stored in a buffer which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before
the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow
alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED: Terminal
Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
Input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under:
Main Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Monitoring / Event Function or via the
Parameter Setting Tool (PST) as follows:
• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
For double indications, only the fist eight inputs, 1–8, must be used. Inputs 9–16 can
be used for other types of events in the same EVENT block.
Status and event codes for the EVENT function are found in Table 745.
1027
Technical manual

Table 745: Status and event codes
Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
event ate 00 11
EVENT:1
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -
EVENT:2 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EVENT:3 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EVENT:20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..
These values are only applicable if the event mask is masked ≠ OFF.
Connection of signals as events

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and sent as events to
the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus), are connected to the EVENT
function block as specified in Figure 470.
1028
Technical manual

EVENT
Block BLOCK
ILRANG ÎNPUT1
PSTO ÎNPUT2
UL12RANG ÎNPUT3
UL23RANG ÎNPUT4
UL31RANG ÎNPUT5
3I0RANG ÎNPUT6
3U0RANG ÎNPUT7
FALSE ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
IEC07000065 V2 EN
Figure 470: Connection of protection signals for event handling
18.5.4.1 Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the

numeric processing module (NUM). It is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and
DNP communication.
There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connector for plastic fibre cables and
ST/bayonet connector for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either
type or connector or with a combination of both types of connectors. This is identified
with a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical
fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to instructions concerning
handling and connection of fibre cables.
For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the
Application manual and Commissioning manual respectively.

Table 746: SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400
Bd
Slave number 1 to 899
1029
Technical manual

18.6 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
18.6.1 Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
18.6.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.
The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data
Units) are generated.
• 9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P, Q,
F are optional but there can be no holes.
• 3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
• 3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
• 3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
• 3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).
Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IL1
3.4 = IN AND UN
3.3 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND P AND Q
3.2 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IL2 AND NOT (3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -
1030
Technical manual

I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F
IEC10000287 V1 EN
Figure 471: I103MEAS function block
18.6.2.4 Signals
Table 747: I103MEAS Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency
18.6.2.5 Settings
Table 748: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
1031
Technical manual


MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 45.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency
18.6.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor

direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block
in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.
Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
IEC10000288 V1 EN
Figure 472: I103MEASUSR function block
1032
Technical manual

18.6.3.4 Signals
Table 749: I103MEASUSR Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
18.6.3.5 Settings
Table 750: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 1
10000000000.00 2
10000000000.00 3
10000000000.00 4
10000000000.00 5
10000000000.00 6
10000000000.00 7
10000000000.00 8
10000000000.00 9
1033
Technical manual

18.6.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in

monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.
Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD
IEC10000289 V2 EN
Figure 473: I103AR function block
18.6.4.4 Signals
Table 751: I103AR Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-
recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked
18.6.4.5 Settings
Table 752: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
1034
Technical manual

18.6.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information
number parameter is defined for each output signal.
Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
IEC10000290 V1 EN
Figure 474: I103EF function block
18.6.5.4 Signals
Table 753: I103EF Input signals
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
18.6.5.5 Settings
Table 754: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
1035
Technical manual

18.6.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN
represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the
general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.
Function status fault protection for IEC I103FLTPROT - -
60870-5-103
1036
Technical manual

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
IEC10000291 V1 EN
Figure 475: I103FLTPROT function block
18.6.6.4 Signals
Table 755: I103FLTPROT Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
1037
Technical manual


76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system
neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-
CALCMADE)
18.6.6.5 Settings
Table 756: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
18.6.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined
for each input signal.
1038
Technical manual

IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
IEC10000292 V2 EN
Figure 476: I103IED function block
18.6.7.4 Signals
Table 757: I103IED Input signals
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
18.6.7.5 Settings
Table 758: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
1039
Technical manual

18.6.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications

in monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV - -
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
IEC10000293 V1 EN
Figure 477: I103SUPERV function block
18.6.8.4 Signals
Table 759: I103SUPERV Input signals
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of
U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up
protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm
18.6.8.5 Settings
Table 760: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
1040
Technical manual

18.6.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF
I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction.
Each instance is associated with a Function Type (FUN) and each input signal with an
Information Number (INF). Additionally, all input signals may be defined to use
relative time and how to respond to a GI request.
The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all
connected inputs. See Settings for details.
Status for user defined signals for IEC I103USRDEF - -
60870-5-103
I103USRDEF
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
RT_START
IEC10000294 V3 EN
Figure 478: I103USRDEF function block
18.6.9.4 Signals
Table 761: I103USRDEF Input signals
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
1041
Technical manual


RT_START BOOLEAN 0 Trig to set base of relative time
RT_START registers the positive transition (0->1) of a pulse and sets the time from
which relative time is derived. Relative time is assigned only to inputs where the
corresponding TypNo parameter is set to Relative. The maximum relative time and
unit conform to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
18.6.9.5 Settings
Table 762: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
InfNo1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
TypNo1 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
1042
Technical manual


Relative
Relative
GiNo1 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block

with a FUN. Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a
userdefined INF. Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time. This
adheres to the TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) message types 1 (time-tagged
message) and 2 (time-tagged message with relative time) of the IEC 60870-5-103
standard.
The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or

not. Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
18.6.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output

signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of
restart.
1043
Technical manual

Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103
I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
IEC10000282 V1 EN
Figure 479: I103CMD function block
18.6.10.4 Signals
Table 763: I103CMD Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands
Table 764: I103CMD Output signals

16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential
protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection
18.6.10.5 Settings
Table 765: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
18.6.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.

All outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse length is fixed to 0,4s.
1044
Technical manual

IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -
I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
IEC10000283 V1 EN
Figure 480: I103IEDCMD function block
18.6.11.4 Signals
Table 766: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Table 767: I103IEDCMD Output signals

19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
18.6.11.5 Settings
Table 768: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
1045
Technical manual

18.6.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output

signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.
Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD
BLOCK ÔUTPUT1
ÔUTPUT2
ÔUTPUT3
ÔUTPUT4
ÔUTPUT5
ÔUTPUT6
ÔUTPUT7
ÔUTPUT8
IEC10000284 V1 EN
Figure 481: I103USRCMD function block
18.6.12.4 Signals
Table 769: I103USRCMD Input signals
Table 770: I103USRCMD Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
1046
Technical manual


18.6.12.5 Settings
Table 771: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
18.6.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103.

The function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2

steady ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while
the OFF output is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted
and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with command 1. Steady mode
is selected by setting PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is retained, and a command
in steady mode will be reissued on restart.
Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103
1047
Technical manual

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON
IEC10000285 V1 EN
Figure 482: I103GENCMD function block
18.6.13.4 Signals
Table 772: I103GENCMD Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
Table 773: I103GENCMD Output signals

CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON
18.6.13.5 Settings
Table 774: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)
18.6.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD
I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and
interprets any state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC
60870-5-103 link. Additionally, it listens for general interrogation (GI) requests and
replies to those with a GI response message with the current state of each connected
input.
Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that

any state transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported
spontaneously. However, the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by
1048
Technical manual

setting the Report Intermediate Position = Off. See the settings for RS485 and optical
serial communication for more information.
Input SELECT is a single-indication signal, and it is also GI enabled. State transitions

to ON and OFF are reported spontaneously.
When input BLOCK is ON, the function will ignore GI requests and cease all
monitoring activity. Consequently, no transitions will be detected.
The I103POSCMD function is also equipped with two additional commands: Operate
and Cancel. These are hidden in ACT and respond only to base INF +2 and +3
respectively. The base INF (Information Number) parameter is an IEC 60870-5-103
identifier that associates a function in a 103 Master (such as Scada) with its equivalent
in the IED.
IED commands with position and select I103POSCMD - -
for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT
IEC10000286 V1 EN
Figure 483: I103POSCMD function block
18.6.14.4 Signals
Table 775: I103POSCMD Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object
18.6.14.5 Settings
Table 776: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type
InfNo 160 - 236 - 4 160 Information number for command output
1049
Technical manual

18.6.15.1 General
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial

communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and
a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.
Introduction to IEC 60870–5–103 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:
• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurements)
• Fault location
• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part
5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with
the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the
protection and control IED.
Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be

considered to ensure correct time stamping.
Commands in control direction

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
1050
Technical manual

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 777: I103IEDCMD supported indications
INF Description
19 LED Reset
23 Activate setting group 1
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 778: Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications
INF Description
16 Auto-recloser on/off
17 Teleprotection on/off
18 Protection on/off
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103USRCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with
parameter FunctionType.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Table 779: I103USRCMD supported indications
INF 1) Description
1 Output signal 01
2 Output signal 02
3 Output signal 03
4 Output signal 04
5 Output signal 05
1051
Technical manual

INF 1) Description
6 Output signal 06
7 Output signal 07
8 Output signal 08
1) User defined information number
Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.
Information number is defined for each input signals.

Table 780: I103IED supported functions
INF Description
19 LED reset
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103USRDEF

Function indication block in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Information number is required for each input signal.

Table 781: I103USRDEF Information number default values
INF Description GI TYP COT
11) Input signal 01 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
2* Input signal 02 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

3* Input signal 03 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
4* Input signal 04 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
5* Input signal 05 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
1052
Technical manual

INF Description GI TYP COT

6* Input signal 06 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
7* Input signal 07 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
8* Input signal 08 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
1) * User defined information number
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for output signals.

Table 782: I103SUPERV supported functions
INF Description TYP GI COT
32 Measurand supervision I 1 Y 1,7,9
33 Measurand supervision U 1 Y 1,7,9
37 I>>back-up operation 1 Y 1,7,9
38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1,7,9
46 Group warning 1 Y 1,7,9
47 Group alarm 1 Y 1,7,9
Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 783: I103EF supported indications
INF Description
51 Earth fault forward
52 Earth fault reverse
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
1053
Technical manual

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, overcurrent
and earth fault protection functions.
FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
1054
Technical manual


70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
85 Breaker failure Yes
86 Trip measuring system L1 Yes
89 Trip measuring system N Yes
90 Over current trip I> Yes
91 Over current trip I>> Yes
92 Earth fault trip IN> Yes
93 Earth fault trip IN>> Yes
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 784: I103AR supported indications
INF Description
16 Autorecloser active
128 CB on by Autorecloser
130 Autorecloser blocked
Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
Measurands in public range, I103MEAS

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
1055
Technical manual

The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU
(Application Service Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as
OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and 2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require that
a rated value to use as base exists, and then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as maxVal.
You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as there is no way to propagate value to
client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not make much difference.
You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or

client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>
If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-

max ::= 1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2
Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best
accuracy.
Table 785: I103MEAS supported indications
INF Description
148 IL1
144, 145, IL2
146, 148
148 IL3
147 IN, Neutral current
148 UL1
148 UL2
148 UL3
145, 146 UL1-UL2
147 UN, Neutral voltage
146, 148 P, active power
146, 148 Q, reactive power
148 f, frequency
Measurands in private range, I103MEASUSR

Function type parameter for each block in private range.
Information number must be selected for measurands.
1056
Technical manual

Table 786: I103MEASUSR supported indications

INF FUN GI TYP COT Description
*1) *2) No, polled *3) 2,7 Meas1
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is
defined by semantics of connected source.
<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.
Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.
<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that is,

only Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted.
Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
• IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

• IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• UL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• UEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR
1057
Technical manual

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private
range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 128-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for
transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the
master) will not be reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded

disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be
sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when
a disturbance is deleted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new disturbance
has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some
of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the
IED series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In ‘list of recorded disturbances’ (ASDU23) an information element named SOF

(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates
whether:
• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than
start
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information
is always set (hard coded) to:
TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
1058
Technical manual

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the
standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action.
FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance.
ASDU26 / ASDU31
When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault number
in the power system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-
reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF is just as
FAN, equal to disturbance number.
Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 Yes
number of loads 32
Optical interface
glass fibre Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes
Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
1059
Technical manual

Supported
10 Generic data No
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command Yes
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No
18.6.15.2 Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and is placed assembled
on the Numerical module (NUM). The serial communication module can have
connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available
depending on type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay
special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the
optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
1060
Technical manual


Table 787: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd
18.7 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for

interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via
the IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending
apparatus position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n
control. GOOSE can also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point and
analog measured values between IEDs.
1061
Technical manual

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
ÂPP1_OP
ÂPP1_CL
APP1VAL
ÂPP2_OP
ÂPP2_CL
APP2VAL
ÂPP3_OP
ÂPP3_CL
APP3VAL
ÂPP4_OP
ÂPP4_CL
APP4VAL
ÂPP5_OP
ÂPP5_CL
APP5VAL
ÂPP6_OP
ÂPP6_CL
APP6VAL
ÂPP7_OP
ÂPP7_CL
APP7VAL
ÂPP8_OP
ÂPP8_CL
APP8VAL
ÂPP9_OP
ÂPP9_CL
APP9VAL
ÂPP10_OP
ÂPP10_CL
APP10VAL
ÂPP11_OP
ÂPP11_CL
APP11VAL
ÂPP12_OP
ÂPP12_CL
APP12VAL
ÂPP13_OP
ÂPP13_CL
APP13VAL
ÂPP14_OP
ÂPP14_CL
APP14VAL
ÂPP15_OP
ÂPP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC07000048.vsd
IEC07000048 V3 EN
Figure 484: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block
18.7.3 Signals
Table 788: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
1062
Technical manual

Table 789: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
1063
Technical manual


COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output
18.7.4 Settings
Table 790: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
On
1064
Technical manual

18.8 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ÔUT1
DVALID1
ÔUT2
DVALID2
ÔUT3
DVALID3
ÔUT4
DVALID4
ÔUT5
DVALID5
ÔUT6
DVALID6
ÔUT7
DVALID7
ÔUT8
DVALID8
ÔUT9
DVALID9
ÔUT10
DVALID10
ÔUT11
DVALID11
ÔUT12
DVALID12
ÔUT13
DVALID13
ÔUT14
DVALID14
ÔUT15
DVALID15
ÔUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC07000047.vsd
IEC07000047 V3 EN
Figure 485: GOOSEBINRCV function block
18.8.2 Signals
Table 791: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
Table 792: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
1065
Technical manual


COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output
18.8.3 Settings
Table 793: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
On
1066
Technical manual

18.9 GOOSE function block to receive a double point

value GOOSEDPRCV
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000249 V1 EN
Figure 486: GOOSEDPRCV function block
18.9.4 Signals
Table 794: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals
Table 795: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output
1067
Technical manual

18.9.5 Settings
Table 796: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
On

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the double point values.
The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the
DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.
18.10 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
1068
Technical manual


GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ÎNTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000250 V1 EN
Figure 487: GOOSEINTRCV function block
18.10.4 Signals
Table 797: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals
Table 798: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
18.10.5 Settings
Table 799: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
On


a cross to receive the integer values.
1069
Technical manual


18.11 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000251 V1 EN
Figure 488: GOOSEMVRCV function block
18.11.4 Signals
Table 800: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
1070
Technical manual

Table 801: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
18.11.5 Settings
Table 802: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
On


a cross to receive the measured value.

18.12 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value
1071
Technical manual

GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000248 V1 EN
Figure 489: GOOSESPRCV function block
18.12.4 Signals
Table 803: GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Table 804: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
18.12.5 Settings
Table 805: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
On

1072
Technical manual


a cross to receive the binary single point values.

18.13 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND

Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive
signals via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16
binary inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving
function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.
18.13.2 Design
18.13.2.1 General
The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of
two modes: Steady or Pulse.
• 1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
• 2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse with
a duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corresponding binary
output. This means that no connected function block may have a cycle time that
is higher than the execution cycle time of the particular MULTICMDRCV
instance.
1073
Technical manual


MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
IEC06000007 V2 EN
Figure 490: MULTICMDRCV function block
MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC06000008 V2 EN
Figure 491: MULTICMDSND function block
18.13.4 Signals
Table 806: MULTICMDRCV Input signals
1074
Technical manual

Table 807: MULTICMDSND Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
Table 808: MULTICMDRCV Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid
1075
Technical manual

Table 809: MULTICMDSND Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error
18.13.5 Settings
Table 810: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between receptions
of input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between receptions
of input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command outputs
Table 811: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between
transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between
transmission of output data

There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are fast
(8 ms cycle time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance has 16
binary inputs, to which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected signals
are sent through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent, MULTICMDRCV,
located on a different IED.
The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through
the command block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are 60
instances of the MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the others are
slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision function, which
sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not receive any data
within the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.
LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).
1076
Technical manual

18.14 Security events on protocols SECALARM
18.14.1 Security alarm SECALARM
18.14.1.1 Signals
Table 812: SECALARM Output signals
EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event
18.14.1.2 Settings
Table 813: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On
18.15 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG
18.15.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.
There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be
configured with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be
either syslog (RFC 5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.
18.15.2 Settings
Table 814: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
1077
Technical manual


Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
1078
Technical manual

Section 19 Remote communication
19.1 Binary signal transfer
Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive - -
Binary signal transfer BinSignTransm - -
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values with a maximum of 8 binary signals in the line differential protection IED, or
for the transmission of only binary signals (up to 192) in the other IEDs. The binary
signals are freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any purpose, for example,
communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals
between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line
Data Communication Module (LCDM). The LDCMs then act as interfaces to a 64
kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
The IED can be equipped with up to two short range or medium range LDCMs.
1079
Technical manual


LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000043 V2 EN
LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000044 V2 EN
Figure 492: LDCMRecBinStat function blocks
LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC05000451 V2 EN
Figure 493: LDCMRecBinStat function block
19.1.4 Signals
Table 815: LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
1080
Technical manual


NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
message
message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted

1081
Technical manual


message
message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
19.1.5 Settings
Table 818: LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On
1082
Technical manual


OutOfService
communication
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
HighPower 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
signal is activated
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant
channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data and
transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
On
1083
Technical manual


OutOfService
communication
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
HighPower 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel
signal is activated
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant
channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data and
transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
On
1084
Technical manual


Table 821: LDCMRecBinStat1 Monitored data
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
1085
Technical manual


The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s
channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same
in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is
C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be
transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated
with C37.94).
Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag
8 bits n x 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits

en01000134.vsd
IEC01000134 V1 EN
Figure 494: Data message structure
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the
HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition.
The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing
is included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the
correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function
detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight
binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented
as sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity
of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the
capacity of 192 signals.
1086
Technical manual

19.2 Transmission of analog data from LDCM

LDCMTransmit

LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N
IEC10000017 V1 EN
Figure 495: LDCMTransmit function block
The function blocks are not represented in the Application

Configuration tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is
visible in ACT. The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool when
a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector
tool.
19.2.2 Signals
Table 824: LDCMTRN Input signals
CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to
remote end
remote end
remote end
CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N to
remote end
remote end
remote end
remote end
CT2N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N to
remote end
1087
Technical manual

1088

Basic IED functions
Section 20 Basic IED functions
20.1 Authority check ATHCHCK
Authority check ATHCHCK - -
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:
• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management
tool.
1089
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
IEC12000202 V2 EN
Figure 496: PCM600 user management tool

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas
of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 825.
Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when
writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:

• R= Read
• W= Write
• - = No access rights
1090
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Table 825: Pre-defined user types

Access rights System Protection Design User
Guest Super User SPA Guest
Operator Engineer Engineer Administrator
Basic setting possibilities (change R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
setting group, control settings, limit
supervision)
Advanced setting possibilities (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R
example protection settings)
Basic control possibilities (process R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
control, no bypass)
Advanced control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control including interlock
trigg)
Basic command handling (for R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
example clear LEDs, manual trigg)
Advanced command handling (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
example clear disturbance record)
Basic configuration possibilities R R/W R R R R/W R/W
(I/O-configuration in SMT)
Advanced configuration R R/W R R R R/W R/W
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT, GDE
and CMT)
File loading (database loading from - R/W - - - R/W R/W
XML-file)
File dumping (database dumping to - R/W - - - R/W R/W
XML-file)
File transfer (FTP file transfer) - R/W - R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
transfer)
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) - R/W - - - R/W -
Database access for normal user R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
User administration (user R R/W R R R R R/W
management – FTP File Transfer)
User administration (user - R/W - - - - -
management – SPA File Transfer)
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED,
there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
If the IED is Central Account Management enabled, users can only be

created, deleted or edited in the Central Account Management server.
In that case, only the user rights can be edited using the PCM600 tool.
See Cyber Security Deployment Guidelines manual.
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and

passwords.
1091
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
The maximum of characters in a password is 18.
At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to

be able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.
At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the IED User Management..
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user
defined!”
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED
returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 10
minutes at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded
into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user
attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window will
appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, the user
can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down”
arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the “E” key again.
When it comes to password, upon pressing the key, the following character will
show up: “$”. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose
OK and press the key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the
Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the
Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes it
right or presses “Cancel”.
20.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED
The users, their roles and rights are created, deleted and edited only in the Central
Account Management server (SDM600). However, the user rights can be edited in the
IED by using the PCM600 user tool.
One user can have one or several user roles. By default, the users in Table 240 are
created in the IED, and when creating new users in the SDM600 server, the predefined
roles from Table 827 can be used.
1092
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser when using the
LHMI and as Administrator when using FTP or PCM600 until Central
Account Management is activated.
Table 826: Default users

User name User rights
SuperUser Full rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default until other users
are defined
Guest Only read rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default when other
users are defined (same as VIEWER)
Administrator Full rights. Password: Administrator. This user has to be used when reading out
disturbances with third party FTP-client.
Table 827: Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351-8

User roles Role explanation User rights
VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI
OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as
perform control actions
ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings
for the IED and also run commands and manage
disturbances
INSTALLER Installer Can load configurations and change settings for the IED
SECADM Security Can change role assignments and security settings. Can
administrator deploy certificates.
SECAUD Security auditor Can view audit logs
RBACMNT RBAC Can change role assignment
management
ADMINISTRATOR Administrator Sum of all rights for SECADM, SECAUD and RBACMNT
rights
This User role is vendor specific and

not defined in IEC 62351–8
Changes in user management settings do not cause an IED reboot.
The PCM600 tool caches the login credentials after successful login
for 15 minutes. During that time no more login will be necessary.
The successfully activation of Central Account Management will disable built-in

users or remove all local created users from PCM600.
1093
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Management of user credentials and roles is handled on the central Account

Management server e.g. SDM600 The IED employs two strategies to ensure
availability of the authentication system even if there is a problem with the network or
authentication server:
• A substation can be equipped with two redundant authentication servers
operating in a hot standby mode.
• If configured by the security administrator, the IED itself maintains a local replica
in the database with selected users. This database is periodically updated with
data from the server and used as fallback if none of the servers are reachable.
Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica. There might be
users that are not assigned to any replication group. IED only replicates those users
which are part of replication group configured in the IED.
This replication can be disabled using PCM600 by the security administrator, which
means that the IED will forward login requests to the SDM600 for authorization and
in case of problems with the network users will not be able to log in to the IED.
If user replication has been disabled in a CAM-enabled IED and if

communication with SDM600 is lost, access to that IED will be
denied until communication is re-established.
All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using
secure communication. Customers using SDM600 are required to generate and
distribute certificates during the engineering process of the substation. These
certificates ensure mutual trust between IED and for example SDM600, FTP,
PCM600 and other system.
Table 828: Authority-related IED functions
Function Description
Authority status This function is an indication function block for user logon activity.
ATHSTAT User denied attempt to logon and user successful logon are reported.
Authority check To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
ATHCHCK accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:
• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only in the CAM server.
Authority This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
management maintenance menu logon time out.
AUTHMAN
For more information on the functions Authority Management (AUTHMAN),

Authority Status (ATHSTAT), and Authority Check (ATHCHCK) functions, refer to
chapter “Basic IED functions” in the Technical Manual.
1094
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.2 Authority management AUTHMAN
Authority management AUTHMAN - -
20.2.2 AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
maintenance menu log on time out.
20.2.3 Settings
Table 829: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
MaintMenuDisAuth Disable - - Enable In maintenance menu, disable authority
Enable selection is shown
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout
20.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -
20.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate
with TLS.
The automatic negotiation mode acts on configured port number 21 and server
features, it tries to negotiate with explicit TLS via AUTH TLS. If the specified port is
any other, it tries to negotiate in a similar way.
Using FTP without TLS encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This
mode is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.
1095
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a

specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer.
The password of this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.
20.3.3 Settings
Table 830: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
PortSelection None - - Any Port selection for communication
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL
PasvPortStart 0 - 65515 - 1 49200 First TCP data port for PASV
PasvPortEnd 0 - 65535 - 1 49232 Last TCP data port for PASV
20.4 Authority status ATHSTAT
Authority status ATHSTAT - -
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
IEC06000503 V2 EN
Figure 497: ATHSTAT function block
1096
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.4.4 Signals
Table 831: ATHSTAT Output signals
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on
The output signal USRBLKED is not valid if the IED is Centralized

Account Management enabled.
20.4.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED
and the user authorization:
• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event
(EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850
station bus.
20.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system
events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal
events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event
viewer tool.
1097
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYN CERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK
IEC09000787 V2 EN
Figure 498: INTERRSIG function block
20.5.3 Signals
Table 832: INTERRSIG Output signals
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block
20.5.4 Settings

The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the
Event Viewer in PCM600.
A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm

contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this
1098
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 500 and a
couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 499
IEC04000520 V1 EN
Figure 499: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact
IO fail
OR Set e.g. BIM 1 Error
IO stopped
Reset
IO started
e.g. IOM2 Error OR
e.g. IO (n) Error Internal
OR FAIL
LON ERROR
FTF fatal error

OR
Watchdog NUMFAIL
RTE fatal error
Internal
Set WARN
RTE Appl-fail
OR
RTE OK Reset
IEC61850 not ready NUMWARNING

OR
RTCERROR Set RTCERROR
RTC OK Reset
TIMESYNCHERROR
OR TIMESYNCHERROR
Time reset Set
SYNCH OK Reset
SETCHGD
Settings changed
1 second pulse
en04000519-1.vsd
IEC04000519 V2 EN
Figure 500: Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block
1099
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The
signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs
for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions
if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in
the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from
the time synchronization block TIME.
20.5.5.1 Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals that give information about the
internal status of the IED. For this reason they are also called internal signals. These
internal signals , available on local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General, can be divided into two groups.
• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see table 833.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see table 834.
Table 833: Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
FAIL Internal Internal fail This signal will be active if one or more of the
Fail status following internal signals are active;
LMDERROR, WATCHDOG, APPERROR,
RTEERROR, or any of the HW dependent
signals
WARNING Internal Internal This signal will be active if one or more of the
Warning warning following internal signals are active;
status RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR,
TIMESYNCHERROR
RTCERROR Real Time Real time This signal will be active when there is a hardware
Clock clock error with the real time clock.
status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Time synch This signal will be active when the source of the
Synchroni time synchronization is lost, or when the time
zation system has to make a time reset.
status
RTEERROR Runtime Runtime This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine
Execution execution failed to do some actions with the application
Error threads. The actions can be loading of settings or
status parameters for components, changing of setting
groups, loading or unloading of application
threads.
IEC61850ERROR IEC IEC61850 This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack
61850 did not succeed in some actions like reading IEC
Error 61850 configuration, startup, for example
status
DNP3 DNP3 DNP3 This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any
error configuration error during startup.
status
1100
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
LMDERROR LON/Mip SLM301 LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an
Device unrecoverable error state.
Error
status
APPERROR Runtime Runtime This signal will be active if one or more of the
Applicatio App Error application threads are not in the state that
n Error Runtime Engine expects. The states can be
status CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for
example
SETCHGD Settings Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
changed changed Internal Event list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD Setting Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
groups changed Internal Event list if any setting groups are
changed changed.
Table 834: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
PSM PSM-Error Power PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware
Supply error.
Module
Error
status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
Error n = slot number
status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
status
IOM IOM-Error In/Out IOMn Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
status
MIM MIM-Error Millamper MIMn Activated if the module has a hardware
e Input error.
Module n = slot number
Error
status
SOM SOM-Error Static Out SOMn Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
status
NUM NUM-Error Numerical NUM30 Activated if the module has a hardware or
/CPU software error.
Module
Error
status
ADM ADM-Error A/D ADM31 Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
Error
status
1101
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
ADM ADM-Error A/D ADM32 Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
Error
status
OEM OEM-Error Optical OEM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware
Ethernet error.
Module n = slot number
Error
status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line LDCM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware
Differentia error.
l n = slot number
Communi
cation
Module
Error
status
TRM TRM-Error Transform TRM40
er Module
Error
status
TRM TRM-Error Transform TRM41
er Module
Error
status
20.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of
the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will
be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.

Table 835: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out
1102
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.6 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN
The time synchronization function is used to select a common source of absolute time
for the synchronization of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes
it possible to compare events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a station
automation system and in between sub-stations.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time

synchronization source.
20.6.2 Settings
There are two groups of parameter settings related to time:
• System time
• Synchronization
The System time group relates to setting the on/off and start/end of the Daylight
Saving Time (DST) for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC). The Synchronization group relates to selecting the coarse and fine
synchronization sources. As well as defining the synchronization master and accuracy
levels specifically for IEC 61850-9-2.
All the settings and parameters related to time are available via Local HMI under
Main menu/Configuration/Time/System time and via PCM600 under IED
Configuration/Time.
1103
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Table 836: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
IEC103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
TimeAdjustRate Slow - - Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
Fast
HWSyncSrc Off - - Off Hardware time synchronization source
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
AppSynch NoSynch - - NoSynch Time synchronization mode for
Synch application
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified
Table 837: BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

ModulePosition 3 - 16 - 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 - 1 1 Binary input number for time
synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - - PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
NegativeEdge
Table 838: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address
1104
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Table 839: DSTENABLE Non group settings (basic)

DST Enable Off - - On Enables or disables the use of Daylight
On Saving Time
Table 840: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time starts
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00
1105
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Table 841: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time ends
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00
1106
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Table 842: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

TimeZone -12:00 - - 1:00 Local time from UTC
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00
Table 843: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ
1107
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.6.3.1 General concepts
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time
the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the
time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.
Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on software and hardware clocks that run independently
from each other. See figure 501
External
Synchronization
sources Time tagging and general synchronisation
Off
Comm- Protection
LON Events
Time- unication and control
SPA Regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting,
GPS see
SW-time
technical
SNTP
reference
DNP manual) Connected when GPS-time is
IRIG-B used for differential protection
PPS
Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)
Off Time-
GPS Regulator HW-time
(fast or slow)
IRIG-B
PPS Diff.-
A/D Trans-
converter comm- ducers*
unication
*IEC 61850-9-2
IEC08000287 V2 EN
Figure 501: Design of the time system (clock synchronization)
1108
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
External
synchronization
sources Time tagging and general synchronization
Off
Commu- Protection
LON Events
Time nication and control
SPA regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting:
SNTP
see SW time
DNP Technical
manual)
IRIG-B
PPS
Synchronization for differential protection

(Echo mode)
Off Time
IRIG-B regulator HW time
(fast or slow)
PPS
A/D Diff. Trans-

converter commu- ducers*
nication
*IEC 61850-9-2
IEC16000002 V2 EN
Figure 502: Design of the time system (clock synchronization)
All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When, for example, a status
signal is changed in the protection system of a function based on the free running
hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the
event recorder. The hardware clock can thus run independently.
The echo mode of differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there
is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only
when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential
protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock
synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an automatic
fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the synchronization
time as short as possible during start-up or at interruptions/disturbances in the GPS
timing. The fast and slow settings are also available on the local HMI.
The hardware and software clocks are not synchronized if a GPS clock is used.
Fast clock synchronization mode

At start-up and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signals, the deviation
between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A
1109
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
new start-up is also required, for example, after maintenance of the auxiliary voltage
system.
When the time difference is >16μs, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the
clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, with
big time adjustment steps in the beginning, and then smaller steps until a time
deviation between the GPS time and the differential time system of <16μs has been
reached. The differential function is then enabled and the synchronization remains in
fast mode or switches to slow mode depending on the setting.
Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is used. This
prevents the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16µs, emanating from the
differential protection requirement of correct timing.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure.
A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower
levels.
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
IEC09000342 V1 EN
Figure 503: Synchronization principle
A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock
based on this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:
• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.
1110
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.6.3.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation
The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.
Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time
clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off,
the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time
the time will be lost completely.
Real-time clock at startup
Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS)
gives an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of the three
following conditions happens with each of the coming synchronization messages
configured as FineSynchSource:
• If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an

offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for
synchronization, which means, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages,
a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also
has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization
message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds. If the offset
is more than the threshold, the clock jumps a whole number of seconds so the
remaining offset is less than 500ms. The remaining offset is then slowly adjusted
with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000ppm it
takes 500 seconds to remove an offset of 500 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the
time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and
only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.
Rate accuracy
The Rate accuracy is the accuracy of the internal clock while the external time signal
is lost (e.g. GPS lost). In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the
IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the
surrounding temperature is constant. It can take up to one hour after a cold start of the
IED to reach to a stable rate due to the normal warming-up procedure of the IED.
Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces have a time-out, and a configured interface must
receive time synchronization messages regularly in order not to give an error signal
(TSYNCERR) that is reported from the INTERRSIG function block. The time-out is
1111
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
such that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one
message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
20.6.3.3 Synchronization alternatives
Four main alternatives of external synchronization sources are available. The

synchronization message is applied:
• via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including
date and time
• as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
• via GPS
• via IRIG-B or PPS
Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an
IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate
properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The
SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary
inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.
SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse
time synch source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only. The
only reason to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine source.
The combination SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used.
SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or
at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.
Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are
sent.
• Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that
is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
• Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
The SLM module is located on the Numeric processing module (NUM).
1112
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built-in GPS clock modules receive and decode time information from the global
positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization
Module (GTM).
Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be
generated from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not
synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the
substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal
is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED.
The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation

and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute
pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute
pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the
IED.
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only
the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the
last flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:
• Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

• Pulse length (b):
• Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.
• Maximum pulse length is optional.
• Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".
Deviations in the period time (a) larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.
1113
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN
Figure 504: Binary minute pulses
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The
next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the
pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without
effecting the system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less
than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute
pulse will not be accepted.
Binary synchronization example

An IED is configured to use only binary input for time synchronization, and a valid
binary input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the
approximate time, and the minute pulse is then used to synchronize the IED. Minute
pulse means that each pulse occurs one minute after the previous pulse, so the first
pulse is not used at all. The second pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike
filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time, and will reset the time so that the
fourth pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the
IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or if the RTC backup
still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed, for example, for
an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If
the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse is automatically rejected. The second pulse
will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will set the time if the
time offset is more than 500 ms or adjust the time if the time offset is small enough.
If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set.
If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within one minute.
Synchronization via IRIG-B module

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are numbers
stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
1114
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC
connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the
galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic
interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range
of 0-7.
“00” means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B
module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. “12” means that a 1 kHz modulation
is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains

information of the year. If the x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time
within the year, and year information has to be set via PCM600 or local HMI.
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-
zone.

Table 844: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse ± 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement ± 1.0 ms typically
values
20.7 Parameter setting groups
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,
either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable
IED that can be applied to a variety of power system scenarios.
1115
Technical manual

Basic IED functions

ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN
IEC05000433 V3 EN
Figure 505: ActiveGroup function block
20.7.3 Signals
Table 845: ACTVGRP Input signals
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
Table 846: ACTVGRP Output signals

GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed
REMSETEN BOOLEAN Settings over IEC 61850 enabled
1116
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.7.4 Settings
Table 847: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 Active setting group
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
MaxNoSetGrp 1-6 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6

Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available
for configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group is always
available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.
1117
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1
ACTVGRP
IOx-Bly1
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3 ACTGRP3 GRP3

Æ
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4
IOx-Bly5
Æ ACTGRP5 GRP5
IOx-Bly6
Æ ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN
IEC05000119 V3 EN
Figure 506: Connection of the function to external circuits
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.
SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will
be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.
20.8 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.
1118
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000946.vsd
IEC09000946 V2 EN
Figure 507: CHNGLCK function block
20.8.3 Signals
Table 848: CHNGLCK Input signals
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock
Table 849: CHNGLCK Output signals

ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state
that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
1119
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Binary input Function

1 Activated
0 Deactivated
20.9 Test mode functionality TESTMODE
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing
yellow LED on the local HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal
operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later
restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions
blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with
actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.

TESTMODE
IED_TEST TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850
IEC09000219 V2 EN
Figure 508: TESTMODE function block
20.9.3 Signals
Table 850: TESTMODE Input signals
IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode
1120
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Table 851: TESTMODE Output signals

TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST BOOLEAN IED test mode is active
BLOCK BOOLEAN Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during test mode
INPUT BOOLEAN IED TEST input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850 BOOLEAN Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test
blocked
20.9.4 Settings
Table 852: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
IEDTestMode Off - - Off Activate IED Test mode
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during test mode
On
BlockAllFunc Off - - On Block all functions when entering IED test
On mode
CmdTestEd1 Off - - Off Require test bit in command at test mode
On (only for IEC61850 Ed1)

Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by
• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE
is activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the
“Test mode: being in On” state. If the input from the configuration (OUTPUT signal
is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are
blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and
event signalling.
The deblocking is reseted when exiting test mode.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.
1121
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
If the IED is restarted while set to IED TESTMODE by a binary input

all functions will be temporarily unblocked during startup, which
might cause unwanted operations.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions

when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24
contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
commissioning or maintenance test.
20.10 IED identifiers TERMINALID
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual
IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
20.10.2 Settings
Table 853: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
1122
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.11 Product information PRODINF
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change)
that uniquely identifies the IED:
• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED
identifiers
This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g.
during repair and maintenance).
20.11.2 Settings
20.11.3 Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different
Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers
The following identifiers are available:
• IEDProdType
• Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
• ProductDef
• Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.2.2.0
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 1.2.3
1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the
product
1123
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new
hardware added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is
either changed or enhanced in the product
• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection).
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
20.12 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see
the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for
one IED configuration.

SMBI
^VIN1 ^BI1
^VIN2 ^BI2
^VIN3 ^BI3
^VIN4 ^BI4
^VIN5 ^BI5
^VIN6 ^BI6
^VIN7 ^BI7
^VIN8 ^BI8
^VIN9 ^BI9
^VIN10 ^BI10
IEC05000434 V2 EN
Figure 509: SMBI function block
20.12.3 Signals
Table 854: SMBI Input signals
BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
1124
Technical manual

Basic IED functions

Table 855: SMBI Output signals

BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1

The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 509, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) or
ACT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to
BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user defined
name. These names will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be
connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/output user defined
name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.
20.13 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see
1125
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one
IED configuration.

SMBO
BO1 ^BO1
BO2 ^BO2
BO3 ^BO3
BO4 ^BO4
BO5 ^BO5
BO6 ^BO6
BO7 ^BO7
BO8 ^BO8
BO9 ^BO9
BO10 ^BO10
IEC05000439 V2 EN
Figure 510: SMBO function block
20.13.3 Signals
Table 856: SMBO Input signals
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool

The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 510, receives
logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware)
outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) or ACT. The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to
BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags
will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical
IO and the SMBO.
1126
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.14 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). See
the Application Manual for information about how milliamp (mA) inputs from
external transducers are physically connected to the MIM board inputs used in an IED.
Via the SMMI, the signals are brought into the IED configuration, for example, to the
input for ambient temperature compensation of the thermal overload function when
there is a need for ambient temperature compensation in the thermal function.

SMMI
ÂI1 ÂI1
ÂI2 ÂI2
ÂI3 ÂI3
ÂI4 ÂI4
ÂI5 ÂI5
ÂI6 ÂI6
IEC05000440.vsd
IEC05000440 V3 EN
Figure 511: SMMI function block
20.14.3 Signals
Table 857: SMMI Input signals
AI1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
Table 858: SMMI Output signals

AI1 REAL Analog milliampere input 1
1127
Technical manual

Basic IED functions

The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 511, receives its inputs
from the real (hardware) mA inputs (the MIM boards) via the Signal Matrix Tool
(SMT), and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog
outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, outputs, as well as the whole block, can be
given user-defined names which will be represented in SMT and ACT.
The outputs on SMMI can also be connected to the IEC 61850 generic communication
I/O functions (MVGAPC) for further use of the mA signals elsewhere in a substation
system.
20.15 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function
block, analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and
calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle,
frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This
information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in
ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC G1AI3P
REVROT G1AI1
^GRP1L1 G1AI2
^GRP1L2 G1AI3
^GRP1L3 G1AI4
^GRP1N G1N
IEC14000027 V1 EN
Figure 512: SMAI1 function block
SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2L1 G2AI2
^GRP2L2 G2AI3
^GRP2L3 G2AI4
^GRP2N G2N
IEC14000028 V1 EN
Figure 513: SMAI2 function block
Figure 513 is an example of SMAI2:n to SMAI12:m in each of the three task time
groups 1, 2 or 3 where:
1128
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
• n=2 and m=12 in task group 1

The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 3, 8 or 1 ms respectively for
the three task time groups.
20.15.3 Signals
Table 859: SMAI1 Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for
DFT calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity
Table 860: SMAI1 Output signals

SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1
G1N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample
Table 861: SMAI2 Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
1129
Technical manual

Basic IED functions

GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity
Table 862: SMAI2 Output signals

G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample
20.15.4 Settings
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal
frequency DFT reference is then the reference.
1130
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Table 863: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 864: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase
1131
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
Table 865: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

groups
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 866: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog
signals (three phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current, see
figure 512 and figure 513. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the
3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency
derivates etc. – 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value
zero if BLOCK is TRUE (1).
System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and
Frequency settings in the primary system values PRIMVAL function. Logic 1 in the
REVROT input to the SMAI function means that the phase rotation is changed relative
to the set PhaseRotation in PRIMVAL.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the four
inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. GxN (x = 1-12) is always
calculated residual sum from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase
information containing all relevant information about four connected inputs. Note that
all other functions, with a few exceptions, use this output in configuration. Note that
1132
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
the SMAI function will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the
input GRPxN is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall
always be connected to AI3P.
20.15.5.1 Frequency values
The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence
voltage, MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If
the positive sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the
frequency output value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the
nominal value. A signal is available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due
to non-valid frequency values. MinValFreqMeas is set as % of UBase/√3
If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPxL1,

GRPxL2 and GRPxL3, where 1≤x≤12, must be connected in order to calculate the
positive sequence voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected
as follows: L1-L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3 to GRPxL2, L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be
connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
Ph, the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 514 to make SMAI calculate a
positive sequence voltage.
SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P U3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
UL1L2 BLOCK START
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEL1 G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1L1 G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEL2
G1N
^GRP1L2
PHASEL3
^GRP1L3
NEUTRAL
^GRP1N
EC10000060-3-en.vsdx
IEC10000060 V3 EN
Figure 514: Connection example
The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is available,
the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI
ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be
accounted for when setting MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all three
SMAI inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and the
frequency functions will not work properly.
1133
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used
for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency protection
(SAPTUF) and Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) due
to that all other information except frequency and positive sequence
voltage might be wrongly calculated.
The same phase-phase voltage connection principle shall be used for frequency
tracking master SMAI block in pump-storage power plant applications when
swapping of positive and negative sequence voltages happens during generator/motor
mode of operation.
20.16 Global base values GBASVAL
Global base values GBASVAL - -
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common
for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values
for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets.
This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a
single point for updating values when necessary.
Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out
of the twelve sets of GBASVAL functions.
20.16.3 Settings
Table 867: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Global base current
SBase 1.00 - 200000.00 MVA 0.05 2000.00 Global base apparent power
1134
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.17 Primary system values PRIMVAL
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -
The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600
parameter setting tree.
20.17.3 Settings
Table 868: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1
20.18 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of
three-phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need
it.
1135
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
3PHSUM
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^G1AI3P* AI2
^G2AI3P* AI3
AI4
IEC05000441 V3 EN
Figure 515: 3PHSUM function block
20.18.3 Signals
Table 869: 3PHSUM Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
BLKGR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 1
BLKGR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second
SIGNAL SMAI
Table 870: 3PHSUM Output signals

SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase
inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both
SMAI blocks
SMAI blocks
SMAI blocks
SMAI blocks
1136
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.18.4 Settings
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
Table 871: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
Table 872: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in
% of UBase

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.
20.19 Denial of service DOS
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic.
The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary
functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that
too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be
the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
1137
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.19.2 Function blocks

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000749 V1 EN
Figure 516: DOSFRNT function block
DOSLANAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC13000308 V1 EN
Figure 517: DOSLANAB function block
DOSLANCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC13000309 V1 EN
Figure 518: DOSLANCD function block
20.19.3 Signals
Table 873: DOSFRNT Output signals
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state
Table 874: DOSLANAB Output signals

Table 875: DOSLANCD Output signals

1138
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
20.19.4 Settings

Table 876: DOSFRNT Monitored data
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
Table 877: DOSLANAB Monitored data

DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
0-100
Table 878: DOSLANCD Monitored data

DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
0-100

The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD)
measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not
jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The
function has the following outputs:
1139
Technical manual

Basic IED functions
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication
1140
Technical manual

IED hardware
Section 21 IED hardware
21.1 Overview
21.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display
IEC04000458-2-en.psd
IEC04000458 V2 EN
Figure 519: 1/2 19” case with local HMI display.
1141
Technical manual

IED hardware
IEC05000762 V2 EN
IEC04000460 V2 EN
1142
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.1.2 Case from the rear side

Table 879: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X51
MIM and X52
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or GTM X312, X313
TRM X401
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
1143
Technical manual

IED hardware

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to
MIM X101 and X102
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313
TRM X401
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
1144
Technical manual

IED hardware

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and
MIM X72
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
1145
Technical manual

IED hardware

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X161 and
IOM or MIM X162
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or X302
RS485
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM,RS485 or X312, X313
GTM
TRM X401
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
1146
Technical manual

IED hardware
Table 883: Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slots

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and
IOM or MIM X132
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or X302
RS485
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or X312, X313, X322, X323
GTM
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
1147
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2 Hardware modules
21.2.1 Overview
Table 884: Basic modules
Module Description
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that
supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
• An internal fail alarm output is available.
Numerical module (NUM) Module for overall application control. All

information is processed or passed through this
module, such as configuration, settings and
communication.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI) The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push
button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to
connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM) Transformer module that galvanically separates
the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It
has 12 analog inputs.
Analog digital conversion module (ADM) Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Table 885: Application specific modules

Module Description
Binary input module (BIM) Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM) Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole
command outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM) Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10
outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Line data communication modules (LDCM), short Modules used for digital communication to remote
range, medium range ,long range,X21 terminal.
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 Used for SPA/LON/IEC 60870–5–103
communication modules (SLM) communication
Optical ethernet module (OEM) PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
mA input module (MIM) Analog input module with 6 independent,
galvanically separated channels.
GPS time synchronization module (GSM) Used to provide the IED with GPS time
synchronization.
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B) Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both
pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude
modulated signals and one is used for optical input
type ST for PPS time synchronization.
1148
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2.2 Numeric processing module (NUM)
21.2.2.1 Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection
functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is
the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, compact-PCI CPU

module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two
compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots
onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash
file system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of
the real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.
1149
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2.2.3 Block diagram
Compact
Flash Logic
PMC
connector
PC-MIP
connector
UBM
Memory Ethernet
North
bridge
Backplane
PCI-PCI-
connector
bridge
CPU
en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN
Figure 522: Numeric processing module block diagram
21.2.3 Power supply module (PSM)
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is
available.
21.2.3.2 Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC
input voltage ranges see table 886. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-
1150
Technical manual

IED hardware
regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the
external battery system.
Connection diagram
IEC08000476 V2 EN
Figure 523: PSM Connection diagram.

Table 886: PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL ±20%
EL = (90-250) V EL ±20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -
21.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)

Refer to section "Local HMI" for information.
21.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM)
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary
currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has
twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs. Either
protection class or metering class CT inputs are available.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
1151
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2.5.2 Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the
module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.
Basic versions:
• 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

• 12 current channels
• 6 current channels
The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs
are selected at order.
Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with

current transformers intended for protection purposes, due to
limitations in overload characteristics.
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for
analog inputs SMAI".
1152
Technical manual

IED hardware
IEC08000479 V2 EN
Figure 524: TRM connection diagram

Table 887: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
modules
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) × Ir
Operative range (0-100) x Ir
Permissive overload 4 × Ir cont.

100 × Ir for 1 s *)
Burden < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A
Ac voltage Ur = 110 V 0.5–288 V
Operative range (0–340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz ±5%
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
1153
Technical manual

IED hardware
Table 888: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
modules
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0-1.8) × Irat Ir = 1 A
(0-1.6) × Irat Ir = 5 A
Permissive overload 1.1 × Ir cont.

1.8 × Ir for 30 min at Ir = 1 A
1.6 × Ir for 30 min at Ir = 5 A
Burden < 350 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 200 mVA at Ir = 1 A
Ac voltage Ur = 110 V 0.5–288 V
Operative range (0–340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz ±5%
21.2.6 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization

(ADM)
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot.
The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according
to table 889. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
Table 889: PC-MIP cards and PMC cards
PC-MIP cards PMC cards
SR-LDCM SLM
LR-LDCM OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485
21.2.6.2 Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic
voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate
A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is
obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
1154
Technical manual

IED hardware
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system

frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and
are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency
and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
Channel 1
AD1 Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
AD2
Channel 5
1.2v Channel 6
AD3 Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
AD4 Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
PMC
level shift
PC-MIP
2.5v
PCI to PCI
PC-MIP
en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN
Figure 525: The ADM layout
1155
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2.7 Binary input module (BIM)
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs
to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable
and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also
be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables
extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated
electrical circuits.
21.2.7.2 Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level
of the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBI".
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a

hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it
possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 526 The figure shows the typical operating
characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand

disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs
are debounced by software.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.
1156
Technical manual

IED hardware
[V]
300
176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17
24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V
xx06000391-2-en.vsd
IEC06000391 V2 EN
Figure 526: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs
Operation
Operation uncertain
No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 527 and 528.
1157
Technical manual

IED hardware
[mA]
50
55 [ms]
en07000104-3.vsd
IEC07000104 V3 EN
Figure 527: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of
BIM.
[mA]
50
5.5 [ms]
en07000105-1.vsd
IEC07000105 V2 EN
Figure 528: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.
1158
Technical manual

IED hardware
IEC99000503 V3 EN
Figure 529: Connection diagram
21.2.7.3 Signals
Table 890: BIM Output signals
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value
1159
Technical manual

IED hardware

OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning
21.2.7.4 Settings
Table 891: BIM Non group settings (basic)
On

Table 892: BIM Monitored data
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input module
1=Error status

Table 893: BIM - Binary input module
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
1160
Technical manual

IED hardware

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1–20 ms
Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated

simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range.
Table 894: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Binary inputs 16 -
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

21.2.8 Binary output modules (BOM)
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output
or any signaling purpose.
21.2.8.2 Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair
of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 530. This
should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the
back of the IED.
1161
Technical manual

IED hardware
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker
trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker
auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is
required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
outputs SMBO".
Output module
xx00000299.vsd
IEC00000299 V1 EN
Figure 530: Relay pair example
1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2
1162
Technical manual

IED hardware
IEC99000505 V3 EN
Figure 531: Connection diagram
21.2.8.3 Signals
Table 895: BOM Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
1163
Technical manual

IED hardware

Table 896: BOM Output signals

STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status
21.2.8.4 Settings
Table 897: BOM Non group settings (basic)
On

Table 898: BOM Monitored data
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary output part of IOM
1=Error module status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1164
Technical manual

IED hardware

1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1165
Technical manual

IED hardware

1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - nary output 11 value
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1166
Technical manual

IED hardware

1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
B017FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 force
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
BO19FORCE BOOLEAN 1=Forced - Binary output 19 force
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1167
Technical manual

IED hardware

1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
BO24FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - nary output 24 force
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Table 899: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms an

additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96
outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1
s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM should
be activated continuously due to power dissipation.
1168
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2.9 Static binary output module (SOM)
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output
relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.
21.2.9.2 Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
The SOM consists mainly of:
• An MCU
• A CAN-driver
• 6 static relays outputs
• 6 electromechanical relay outputs
• A DC/DC converter
• Connectors interfacing
• CAN-bus to backplane CBM
• IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)
The following parts are supervised:
• Interruption in relay coil

• Short circuit of relay coil
• Driver failure
IEC09000974 V1 EN
Figure 532: SOM Static output principle
1169
Technical manual

IED hardware
IEC09000975 V1 EN
Figure 533: Connection diagram of the static output module
21.2.9.3 Signals
Table 900: SOM Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 7
Table 901: SOM Output signals

STATUS BOOLEAN Static binary output module status
1170
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2.9.4 Settings
Table 902: SOM Non group settings (basic)
On

Table 903: SOM Monitored data
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Static binary output
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
1171
Technical manual

IED hardware

0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
1172
Technical manual

IED hardware
Table 904: SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity Static binary output trip
Rated voltage 48-60 VDC 110-250 VDC
Number of outputs 6 6
Impedance open state ~300 kΩ ~810 kΩ
Test voltage across open contact, 1 No galvanic separation No galvanic separation
min
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 5A 5A
1.0 s 10 A 10 A
Making capacity at capacitive load
with the maximum capacitance of
0.2 μF :
0.2 s 30 A 30 A
1.0 s 10 A 10 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A
40 ms
60 V/0.75 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 1 ms < 1 ms
Table 905: SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2):
Electromechanical relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC
Number of outputs 6
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 8A
1.0 s 10 A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the
maximum capacitance of 0.2 μF:
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
1173
Technical manual

IED hardware
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with

influencing factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24
outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must
not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued
activation is possible with respect to current consumption but after 5
minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life.
Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated
continuously due to power dissipation.
21.2.10 Binary input/output module (IOM)
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are
needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling
purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where
short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for
required binary input information.
21.2.10.2 Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the
disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with
a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 527.
Inputs are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 526.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays.
One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are
connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other
group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see
figure 534.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is
connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix for
binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".
1174
Technical manual

IED hardware
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.
IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN
Figure 534: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to
rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named XB to
rear position X32, X42, and so on
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.
1175
Technical manual

IED hardware
xx04000069.vsd
IEC04000069 V1 EN
Figure 535: IOM with MOV protection, relay example
21.2.10.3 Signals
Table 906: IOMIN Output signals
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input part of IOM module status
OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning
Table 907: IOMOUT Input signals

BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
1176
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2.10.4 Settings
Table 908: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)

Table 909: IOMIN Monitored data
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input part of IOM
Table 910: IOMOUT Monitored data

0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
1177
Technical manual

IED hardware

0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
1178
Technical manual

IED hardware

0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Table 911: IOM - Binary input/output module
Binary inputs 8 -
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz
Release settable 1-30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

Table 912: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1000 V rms 800 V DC
1 min
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
1179
Technical manual

IED hardware
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Making capacity at inductive load
with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

affect the hardware life.Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM should
Table 913: IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC
61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 250 V rms 250 V rms
1 min
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
1180
Technical manual

IED hardware
Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

j>0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM should
21.2.11 mA input module (MIM)
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the –20 to +20
mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers. The
module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.
21.2.11.2 Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMMI".
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter
has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately
The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory
on the module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range.
1181
Technical manual

IED hardware
IEC99000504 V2 EN
Figure 536: MIM connection diagram
21.2.11.3 Signals
Table 914: MIM Output signals
STATUS BOOLEAN Milliampere input module status
CH1 REAL Analog input 1
1182
Technical manual

IED hardware

21.2.11.4 Settings
Table 915: MIM Non group settings (basic)
On
MaxReportT 0 - 3600 s 1 1 Maximum time between reports
EnDeadBandCh1 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 1
DeadBandCh1 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 1
IMinCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 1
IMaxCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 1
ValueMinCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh1
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh1
- 10000000000.000
On channel 2
- 10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
On channel 3
- 10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
On channel 4
1183
Technical manual

IED hardware

- 10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
On channel 5
- 10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
On channel 6
- 10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

Table 916: MIM Monitored data
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Milliampere input module
1=Error status
CH1 REAL - - Analog input 1
CH1 REAL - A Service value analog
input 1
input 2
input 3
1184
Technical manual

IED hardware

input 4
input 5
input 6

Table 917: MIM - mA input module
Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:
Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -
Input range ± 5, ± 10, ± 20mA -

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Power consumption -
each mA-board £2W
each mA input £ 0.1 W
21.2.12 Serial and LON communication module (SLM)
The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC
60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical
communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is used
for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port) and one port is
dedicated for LON communication.
21.2.12.2 Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations of
optical fiber connectors, see figure 537. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in
type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
1185
Technical manual

IED hardware
I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
igi
nal
.psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN
Figure 537: The SLM variants, component side view
1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
A Snap in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber
Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear side
of the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and contact 1
in the lowest position.

Table 918: SLM – LON port
Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
1186
Technical manual

IED hardware
Table 919: SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
21.2.13 Galvanic RS485 communication module
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC
60870-5-103 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The
RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire
connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a
multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires
however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX
and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No
special control signal is needed in this case.
21.2.13.2 Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module.
RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 538) are presented in
table 920:
Table 920: The arrangement for the pins
Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description

1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485– TX– Receive/transmit
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver
in 2–wir case) (connect to TX+)
4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)
5 N.A. RX– Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high
1187
Technical manual

IED hardware
Angle
bracket
Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6
Backplane
IEC06000517 V1 EN
Figure 538: RS485 connector
• 2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5
• Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3
• Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6
Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be
used in two combinations like:
• Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part · .
• Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV

Table 921: Galvanic RS485 communication module
Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector
Soft ground 2-pole connector
1188
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2.14 Optical ethernet module (OEM)
The optical fast-ethernet module is used for fast and interference-free communication
of synchrophasor data over IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 protocols. It is also used
to connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC
61850-8-1 protocol (port A, B). The module has one or two optical ports with ST
connectors.
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according
to IEC 61850–8–1 have been implemented.
21.2.14.3 Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card
on the ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single channel or
double channel unit.
IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN
Figure 539: OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels
• 1: Transmitter
• 2: Receiver
1189
Technical manual

IED hardware

Table 922: OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels 1 or 2
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
21.2.15 Line data communication module (LDCM)
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <110 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 540.
Line data communication module LDCM

Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED
communicates.
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.
Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.

Never look into the laser beam.
21.2.15.2 Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:
• the ADM
• the NUM
1190
Technical manual

IED hardware
ST
IO-connector
ST
IEC07000087 V2 EN
Figure 540: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector
C
IEC06000393 V2 EN
Figure 541: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width
format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
1191
Technical manual

IED hardware
Table 923: Line data communication module

Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fiber Graded-index Singlemode 9/125 Singlemode 9/125 µm
multimode µm
62.5/125 µm
Peak Emission
Wave length 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Nominal 865 nm 1330 nm 1580 nm
Maximum 792 nm 1290 nm 1520 nm
Minimum
Optical budget 13 dB (typical 22 dB (typical 26 dB (typical distance 110 km/68
Graded-index distance about 3 distance 80 km/50 mile *)
multimode 62.5/125 km/2 mile *) mile *)
mm, 9 dB (typical
distance about 2
km/1 mile *)
Graded-index
multimode 50/125
mm
Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC

Protocol C37.94 C37.94 C37.94 implementation **)
implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
Data rate
Clock source Internal or derived Internal or derived Internal or derived from received
from received from received signal signal
signal
**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as
C37.94
21.2.16 Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.
Examples of applications:
• Line differential protection

• Binary signal transfer
1192
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.2.16.2 Design
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.
C
en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN
Figure 542: Overview of the X.21 LDCM module
1 4
1 8
9 15
3 2
en07000239.wmf
IEC07000239 V1 EN
Figure 543: The X.21 LDCM module external connectors
1. Earth selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

2. Earth pin
3. Soft earth pin, see figure 544
4. X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27) balanced
version
1193
Technical manual

IED hardware
I/O
100kW 100nF
Soft ground
en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN
Figure 544: Schematic view of soft earth
Earthing
Three different kinds of earthing principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1. Direct earth - The normal earthing is direct earth, connect terminal 2 directly to
the chassis.
2. No earth - Leave the connector without any connection.
3. Soft earth - Connect soft earth pin (3), see figure 543
X.21 connector
Table 924: Pinout for the X.21 communication connector
Pin number Signal

1 Shield (earth)
2 TXD A
3 Control A
4 RXD A
6 Signal timing A
8 Earth
9 TXD B
10 Control B
11 RXD B
13 Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15 Not used
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64
kbit/s.
1194
Technical manual

IED hardware
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission
is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a DTE.
When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal is low
it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control
register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set as
a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal
Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.

Table 925: Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch
Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal
Standard CCITT X21
Communication speed 64 kbit/s
Insulation 1 kV
Maximum cable length 100 m
21.2.17 GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one
SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-
connector output.
21.2.17.2 Design
The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots. The
antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to
eliminate the risk of electromagnetic interference.
1195
Technical manual

IED hardware
All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time data
is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1μs accuracy at
sampling level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time
synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output connector
is of ST-type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.

Table 926: SYNCHGPS Monitored data
NoOfSatellites INTEGER - - Number of GPS signals
from satellites

Table 927: GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Receiver – ±1µs relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes –
position or after power loss longer than 1 month
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer <15 minutes –
than 48 hours
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter <5 minutes –
than 48 hours
21.2.18 GPS antenna
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.
21.2.18.2 Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on
an antenna mast. See figure 545
1196
Technical manual

IED hardware
1 6
4 7
xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN
Figure 545: Antenna with console
where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, 78x150 mm
4 Mounting holes 5.5 mm
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position
Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male
SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose cable type
and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the
antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable
with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When
the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver.
The IED must be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.
1197
Technical manual

IED hardware

Table 928: GPS – Antenna and cable
Function Value
Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end
TNC in antenna end
Accuracy +/-1μs
21.2.19 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the
IED from a station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC
61850-9-2LE is used.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.
21.2.19.2 Design
The IRIG-B module has two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both
a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type
ST for optical pulse-width modulated signal (IRIG-B 00X).
1198
Technical manual

IED hardware
ST
Y2
A1
T
IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN
Figure 546: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for optical IRIG-B
00X 820 nm multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC
connector for IRIG-B signal input
21.2.19.3 Settings
Table 929: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

Table 930: IRIG-B
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of optical channels 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
– low level 1-3 Vpp
– high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
1199
Technical manual

IED hardware

Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fibre 62.5/125 μm multimode fibre
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy +/- 1μs
21.3 Dimensions
21.3.1 Case without rear cover
A
D
B C
IEC08000164 V2 EN
Figure 547: Case without rear cover
1200
Technical manual

IED hardware
K
F
G
H J
xx08000166.vsd
IEC08000166 V1 EN
Figure 548: Case without rear cover with 19” rack mounting kit
Case size (mm) A B C D E F G H J K

6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 201.1 252.9 205.7 190.5 203.7 465.1 187.6 482.6
6U, 3/4 x 19” 265.9 336.0 201.1 252.9 318.0 190.5 316.0 465.1 187.6 482.6
6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9 448.3 201.1 252.9 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 187.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit
1201
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.3.2 Flush mounting dimensions
A C
B
E
D
IEC08000162 V2 EN
Figure 549: Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm)

Case size
Tolerance A B C D
+/-1 +/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19" 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 3/4 x 19" 322.4 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 1/1 x 19" 434.7 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover
1202
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.3.3 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions
IEC06000182 V2 EN
Figure 550: A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6
G
D
B
E
F
C
xx05000505.vsd
IEC05000505 V1 EN
Figure 551: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting
Case size (mm) A B C D E F G

Tolerance ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1
6U, 1/2 x 19” 214.0 259.3 240.4 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 3/4 x 19” 326.4 259.3 352.8 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 1/1 x 19” 438.7 259.3 465.1 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
1203
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.3.4 Wall mounting dimensions
IEC04000471 V2 EN
Figure 552: Wall mounting
Case size (mm) A B C D E

6U, 1/2 x 19” 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 3/4 x 19” 404.3 379.4 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 1/1 x 19” 516.0 491.1 272.8 390.0 243.0
21.3.5 External resistor unit for high impedance differential

protection
WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high

voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object
protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national
law/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or
in a separate box!
1204
Technical manual

IED hardware
[1.48]
[6.97]
[4.02]
[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]
[18.98]
Dimension
mm [inches] xx06000232.eps
IEC06000232 V2 EN
Figure 553: Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[1.50]
[10.47]
[7.50]
[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]

[18.98]
en06000234.eps
[inches]
IEC06000234 V2 EN
Figure 554: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit
1205
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.3.6 External current transformer unit

482.6 [19]
89 [3.5]
57 [2.24]
Dimension
mm [inches]
xx06000233.vsd
IEC06000233 V1 EN
Figure 555: Dimension drawing of summation current transformers
21.4 Mounting alternatives
21.4.1 Flush mounting
21.4.1.1 Overview
The flush mounting kit can be used for case sizes:
• 1/2 x 19”
• 3/4 x 19”
• 1/1 x 19”
• 1/4 x 19” (RHGS6 6U)
Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54
protection.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when

IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when
mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing

must be ordered when ordering the IED.
1206
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting
IEC08000161 V2 EN
Figure 556: Flush mounting details.
PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory - -
mounted between the case and front plate.
2 Fastener 4 -
3 Groove - -
4 Screw, self tapping 4 2.9x9.5 mm
5 Joining point of sealing strip - -
6 Panel - -
1207
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.4.2 19” panel rack mounting
21.4.2.1 Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19” cubicle rack by using the for each size
suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles, fastening screws and
washers for the angles.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19” or
3/4 x 19” either to the left or right side of the cubicle.
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-
side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19”.
Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the
plates and the angles on the IED. Screws with wrong dimension may
damage the PCBs inside the IED.
1208
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting
1a
1a
IEC08000160 V3 EN
Figure 557: 19” panel rack mounting details
The required torque for the screws is 3.5 Nm.
Pos Description Quantity Type

1a Mounting angles, which can be mounted, either to the 2 -
left or right side of the case.
2 Screw 8 M4x6
3 Washer 8 M4x6
1209
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.4.3 Wall mounting
21.4.3.1 Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19”, 3/4 x 19”,1/1 x 19”, can be wall mounted. It is also possible
to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication
modules with fiber connection.
21.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting
2
3
1 4
IEC130 00266-1-en.vsd
IEC13000266 V1 EN
Figure 558: Wall mounting details.
1210
Technical manual

IED hardware

1 Bushing 4 -
2 Screw 8 M4x10
3 Screw 4 M6x12 or
corresponding
4 Mounting bar 2 -
5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 -
21.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED
The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with
this type of mounting. See figure 559.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhinged
side.
3
1
80 mm 2
IEC06000135 V3 EN
Figure 559: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover (Ordered separately)
1211
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting
21.4.4.1 Overview
IED case size 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” and RHGS cases can be mounted side-by-side up
to a maximum size of 19”. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting
kit together with the 19” rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has
to be ordered separately.
21.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting
IEC04000456 V3 EN
Figure 560: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
5 Washer 16 M4x6
1212
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.4.4.3 IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case
An 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending
on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type
RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of,
for example, a DC-switch or two trip relays.
1 2 1 2
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
IEC06000180 V2 EN
Figure 561: IED in the 670 series (1/2 x 19”) mounted with a RHGS6 case
containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and
a RX2 terminal base
21.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting
21.4.5.1 Overview
If IP54 is required it is not allowed to flush mount side by side mounted cases. If your
application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details
kit and the 19” panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be
ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19”.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is

obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is required to mount the IEDs
separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see
section "Flush mounting".
1213
Technical manual

IED hardware
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT

switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.
21.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting
1 2
IEC06000181 V2 EN
Figure 562: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x
19” IED).

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw, washer 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
1214
Technical manual

IED hardware
21.5 Technical data
21.5.1 Enclosure
Table 931: Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)
Table 932: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP20
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type
IP10 with ring lug terminals
Table 933: Weight

Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 10 kg/22 lb
6U, 3/4 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb
6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 18 kg/40 lb
21.5.2 Electrical safety

Table 934: Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27
Equipment class I (protective earthed)

Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a
temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected)
21.5.3 Connection system

Table 935: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
ring lug terminals
1215
Technical manual

IED hardware
Table 936: Auxiliary power supply and binary I/O connectors

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
ring lug terminals
Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for

Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two
adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.
21.5.4 Influencing factors

Table 937: Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, +20°C -10 °C to +55°C 0.02% / °C
operate value
Relative humidity 10%-90% 10%-90% -
Operative range 0%-95%
Storage temperature - -40 °C to +70 °C -
Table 938: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range Influence
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01% / %
Operative range Full wave rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate ±20% of EL 0.01% / %
value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%
90-250 V DC ±20%
Interruption
interval
0–50 ms No restart
0–∞ s Correct
behaviour at
power down
Restart time <300 s
1216
Technical manual

IED hardware
Table 939: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0% / Hz
operate value fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Frequency dependence fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±2.0% / Hz

for distance protection fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
operate value
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%
dependence (20%
content)
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±3.0% / Hz
dependence for
21.5.5 Type tests according to standard

Table 940: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test Type test values Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
oscillatory wave immunity
test
Ring wave immunity test, 100 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
kHz
Surge withstand capability 2.5 kV, oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
test 4.0 kV, fast transient
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms IEC 60255-26, Zone A
high energy
Power frequency immunity 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
test
Conducted common mode 15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
immunity test
Power frequency magnetic 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
field test 100 A/m, cont.
1217
Technical manual

IED hardware

Pulse magnetic field 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Class V
immunity test
Damped oscillatory magnetic 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
field test
Radiated electromagnetic 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
field disturbance
1.4-2.7 GHz
Radiated electromagnetic 20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
field disturbance 80-1000 MHz
Conducted electromagnetic 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
field disturbance
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
Table 941: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
ANSI C37.90
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC
Table 942: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C IEC 60068-2-14
to +70°C
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40°C IEC 60068-2-78
and humidity 93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to IEC 60068-2-30
+55°C and humidity 93 to
95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)
Table 943: CE compliance

Test According to
Immunity EN 60255–26
Emissivity EN 60255–26
Low voltage directive EN 60255–27
1218
Technical manual

IED hardware
Table 944: Mechanical tests

Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3
1219
Technical manual

1220

Injection equipment hardware
Section 22 Injection equipment hardware
This chapter describes the hardware equipment used for sensitive rotor earth fault
protection and 100% stator earth fault protection by injection. The descriptions
includes diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection
terminals and modules as well as dimensions and drilling plan.
22.1 Overview
22.1.1 Front view of injection unit, coupling capacitor and shunt

resitor unit
22.1.1.1 Injection unit REX060
The injection unit REX060 is used to inject voltage and current signals to the generator
or motor stator and rotor circuits. REX060 generates two square wave signals with
different frequencies for injection into the stator and rotor circuits respectively. The
response from the injected voltage and currents are then measured by the REX060 unit
and amplified to a level suitable for the analog voltage inputs of IED.
For local operation, the REX060 unit is provided with a control panel on the front.
Local operation shall only be performed according to the operation

regulations set up by the relevant operation authority of the plant.
1221
Technical manual

22.1.1.2 REX060 Front panel controls
IEC11000053 V1 EN
Figure 563: REX060 front panel
1222
Technical manual

Table 945: HMI keys on the front of the injection unit REX060
Key Function
The Injection switch enables injection at rotor and stator 2 s
after switching on. A LED indicates that the injection switch
is set to enable injection. The injection switch can be
padlocked in off position in order to cut-off both injection
signals.
The Key-lock button enables/disables the keypad.

Hold the Key-lock button for a period of 1.2 s to 4 s to lock or
unlock the keys. A key-lock LED indicates when the keypad
is unlocked.
• Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrows

• When the cursor is in the value change state, pressing
the up button increases the value and pressing the
down button decreases the value.
Pressing the clear button cancels changes that have not

been stored.
Pressing the enter button stores the changed value. If the

value is outside range, the limit value is stored.
22.1.1.3 Coupling capacitor unit REX061
X1 X2
IEC11000019 V1 EN
Figure 564: Coupling capacitor unit REX061
1223
Technical manual

217 [8,54]
155 [6,1]
2 [0,079]
235 [9,25]
255 [10]
199 [7,83]
38 [1,5]
Ø 5,5 [0,22] 84 [3,3] 84 [3,3]
223 [8,78]
IEC11000037 V2 EN
Figure 565: Measure and drilling plan
REX061 shall be mounted close to the generator in order to limit the exposure of the
field circuit. Alternatively it can be located in the excitation cubicle.
The surface of REX061 unit may be temporarily very hot due to heat
dissipation, up to about 50° C above the ambient temperature. It must
be installed to get a open air convection and prevent contact with
combustible material to the surface.
1224
Technical manual

22.1.1.4 Shunt resistor unit REX062
X1
IEC11000038 V1 EN
Figure 566: Shunt resistor unit REX062
217 [8,54]
155 [6,1]
2 [0,079]
235 [9,25]
255 [10]
199 [7,83]
38 [1,5]
84 [3,3] 84 [3,3]
Ø 5,5 [0,22]
223 [8,78]
IEC11000039 V2 EN
Figure 567: REX062 measures and drilling plan
REX062 shall be mounted close to the IED. It is recommended that REX060 and
REX062 are mounted in the same cubicle as the IED.
The surface of REX061 unit may be temporarily very hot due to heat
dissipation, up to about 65° C above the ambient temperature. It must
1225
Technical manual

be installed to get a open air convection and prevent contact with

combustible material to the surface.
22.1.2 Injection unit REX060 from rear side
22.1.2.1 Injection unit REX060
IED and
Injection Power
connectors Top view connector Back view Front view
X11 X61 X81

1 1 1
5
Stator Injection
Power Supply
Rotor Injection
18 18
X62 X82
1 1
5 5
Power
Stator
Rotor
BackPlane
Front-plate Injection switch

HMI and Logic
IEC11000018 V1 EN
Figure 568: Rear and top view of injection unit REX060
22.2 Injection unit REX060
22.2.1 Introduction
The injection unit REX060 is used to inject voltage and current signals to the generator
or motor stator and rotor circuits. REX060 generates two square wave signals with
different frequencies for injection into the stator and rotor circuits respectively. The
response from the injected voltage and currents are then measured by the REX060 unit
and amplified to a level suitable for the analog voltage inputs of IED.
22.2.2 Design
REX060 consists of a standard enclosure (6U, 1/2 x 19"). In this enclosure, the
modules for stator (SIM) and/or rotor (RIM) earth fault protection are installed. The
stator injection transformer and the power supply are also installed inside the
enclosure.
On the front of the enclosure there is a backlit LCD, control buttons and a key switch.
1226
Technical manual

In figure 569 below the content of display is shown for a REX060 with one SIM and
one RIM module. Row 1 contains mains frequency information. Row 2-3 contains
stator information and row 4-5 rotor. Column 1 (empty) gives status, column 2 and 3
are informative and column 4 contains variables, settable by the keypad.
Column
Row 1 2 3 4
1 System f [Hz] : 50
2 STATOR f [Hz] : 087
3 UmaxEF [V] : 120
4 ROTOR f [Hz] : 113

5 Gain 4
IEC10000334 V1 EN
Figure 569: Normal display content
When the injection unit REX060 is energized, the ABB logotype is shown followed
by current REX060 revision status. When the start up sequence is completed, the main
menu (normal display content) is shown. The duration of the start up sequence is a few
seconds.
LCD backlight is active during a period of 30 seconds after pressing any button.
Backlight activation by pressing a button will not cause any normal button action.
Column 1 is a status column (empty in the above picture), where the following
symbols are displayed when applicable:
1227
Technical manual

Table 946: Status symbols and their description

Status symbol Description of the status Priority
Over voltage occurred, injection is blocked. This can occur on both
X61/62 and X81/82 (Stator & Rotor) simultaneously or on either of
IEC10000329 V1 EN
them. The symbol is displayed in the status column (column 1) in 1
row 2 for X61/62 and in row 4 for X81/82. The injection is blocked
until a manual reset of the blocking occurs.
Injection blocked by the injection switch. The symbol is displayed in 2
the status column (column 1) and is always shown in both row 2 Over voltage
IEC10000330 V1 EN
and 4. blocked status
overrides
displaying of
this status
Injection blocked by binary input. Blocked injection will be shown in 3
the status column (column 1) depending on binary in status. This Injection switch
can occur on both X61/62 then shown in row 2 and X81/82 then and over
shown in row 4 (Stator & Rotor) simultaneously or on ether of them. voltage
Ø
blocked
overrides
displaying of
this status
Analog output saturation. This status is set when the analog signal, Not applicable
current and or voltage, to REG670 IED is too high and may thereby
IEC10000332 V1 EN be incorrect due to saturation in amplifier stage. Saturation status
will be shown in the status column (column 1) in row 3 or 5
depending on the saturation occurrence
Overvoltage reset
Stator module (SIM) and rotor module (RIM) injection outputs are protected against
voltages exceeding maximum operating range (10% of rated VT/DT for the stator and
75 % of max voltage during gain dependent time for the rotor) by a relay blocking the
injection circuit. This blocking is controlled by measuring the sense voltage, and
remains blocked by stored status in non-volatile memory. Injection block is released
by performing the following sequence:
1. Power off the REX060
2. Simultaneous press the C and key buttons
3. Power on the REX060 and wait until status indication Over-voltage is removed
from display
Stator and rotor overvoltage protection of injection circuit
Both rotor and stator have two levels of protection, injection circuit interruption
controlled by the voltage sense input and a fuse for over-current protection. The
voltage controlled interruption, overvoltage, will normally occur prior to interruption
by fuse and the reset sequence is described above. A blown fuse requires module
disassembling to replace the fuse (F 4 A 250 V for stator and F 160 mA 250 V for
rotor). However, if this occurs it is recommended to identify the reason for the over-
current and take necessary actions to reduce the current before restarting the unit. The
problem must be outside the injection unit since this unit cannot provide enough
energy to blow the fuse.
1228
Technical manual

Saturation
When the voltage or current amplifiers in an injection module saturates due to high
voltage level, it is indicated with a warning symbol in the status column in the REX060
display . Besides this a binary out for the specific module is set active to indicate to the
IED that the signal may not be reliable due to saturation and could cause incorrect
measurements.
Binary in
The injection can be blocked by application in the IED. For this purpose, two binary
inputs to the REX060 exist:
• BLOCK on X61 terminal 1, 2 or 3: Prohibits injection on the injection unit
inserted in X62
• BLOCK on X81 terminal 1, 2 or 3: Prohibits injection on the injection unit
inserted in X82
The used terminal is depending on actual binary voltage, pin 1 for 220 V, 2 for 110 V,
3 for 48 V and 4 for return (common).
Binary out
The following binary outputs exist on the REX060:

• INJ_BLOCKED_NC on X61 terminal 5:
Indicates to the IED that the injection on X62 is blocked. The reason for blocking
is indicated in the REX060 LCD.
• SAT_NO on X61 pin 6:
Indicates to the IED that there is a risk of saturated amplifier on voltage and/or
current output at X61, indication is also given in the REX060 LCD.
• COMMON on X61 terminal 7:
Common return for X61 terminal 5 and 6
• INJ_BLOCKED_NC on X81 pin 5:
Indicates to the IED that the injection on X82 is blocked. The reason for blocking
is indicated in the REX060 LCD.
• SAT_NO on X81 pin 6:
Indicates to the IED that there is a risk of saturated amplifier on voltage and/or
current output at X81, indication is also given in the REX060 LCD.
• COMMON on X81 terminal 7:
Common return for X81 terminal 5 and 6
Power status
• X11 terminal 3:
Fail, power off NC
• X11 terminal 1:
Ready, power off NO
• X11 terminal 2:
Common
1229
Technical manual

22.3 Coupling capacitor unit REX061
22.3.1 Introduction
REX061 isolates the injection circuit from the rotor exciter voltage.
The REX061 coupling capacitor unit grounding point and grounding brush of the
rotor shaft should be properly interconnected.
22.3.2 Design
Measure points are added to the capacitor box that enables the measuring of rotor
voltages without any connection to a hazardous voltage, by the use of protective
impedance. This enables the usage of standard oscilloscope or handheld DVM.
The measure ports cause an additional rotor impedance of 20 MΩ per

terminal to ground. However, the rotor calibration procedure extracts
this impedance.
REX061
Coupling Capacitor unit
Measuring point +
Ground (measuring)
Rotor+
Injection
Ground (injection)
Rotor-
Measuring point-
PE
IEC11000040 V1 EN
Figure 570: REX062 principle design
1230
Technical manual

22.4 Shunt resistor unit REX062
22.4.1 Introduction
REX062 is typically used when injection is done via a grounding transformer.
22.4.2 Design
REX062 for stator protection is used when either injection via a grounding
transformer (i.e. not via a VT) is used or when maximum voltage posed on injection
equipment by the generator is bigger than 120V.
REX062
Shunt Resistor unit
Injection A External A
Fuse
Injection B External B
I sense A
PE
I sense B
IEC11000041 V1 EN
Figure 571: REX062 Principal design
REX062 input protection
REX062 limits overvoltage by a varistor at the injection output to stator. Normally ,

REX060 will interrupt the injection circuit in case of excessive over-current in the
injection chain. Fuse within REX062 is an additional protection in case of failure
within REX062 during over-voltage condition.
A blown REX062 fuse requires a module disassembling to replace the fuse (F 6.3 A
250 V). However, if this occurs it is recommended to identify the reason for the over-
current and do needed actions to reduce the current.
1231
Technical manual

REX060 REG670
Injection unit X11:4 +
EL
Power Supply Module X11:5 -
Exciter REX061
Coupling Capacitor unit Ready; X11:1 BI
source
Common; X11:2 RL+
X1:1; Rotor + Fail; X11:3 (BI)
Rotor X82:1; InjA Rotor Module (RIM)
Injection; X1:9 X82:3; InjA Block 220V; X81:1
Block 110V; X81:2 BO
Ground; X1:10 X82:4; InjB
Block 48V; X81:3
X1:7; Rotor - X82:5; InjB Block Common; X81:4 RL-
X82:2; InjShB
PE
I Out; X81:10
X81:16; IA sense
A
X81:14; IA sense I Out; X81:11

B
X81:15; IB sense
U Out; X81:8
A
X81:12; UA sense
U Out; X81:9
B
X81:13; UB sense
Blocked; X81:5 BI
Saturation; X81:6 BI
REX062 Common; X81:7 RL+
Shunt Resistor unit Stator Module (SIM)
X62:1; InjExtA
X1:2; Injection A External A; X1:9 X62:3; InjA Block 220V; X61:1
Block 110V; X61:2 BO
R X1:4; Injection B External B; X1:10 X62:4; InjB
Stator Block 48V; X61:3
I sense A; X1:6 X62:5; InjB Block Common; X61:4 RL-
Distribution X62:2; InjExtB
Transformer I sense B; X1:8
PE X61:14; IA sense I Out; X61:10
A
AI (U), current measure

X61:15; IB sense I Out; X61:11
B
X61:12; UA sense U Out; X61:8

A
AI (U), voltage measure
X61:13; UB sense U Out; X61:9
B
Blocked; X61:5 BI
Saturation; X61:6 BI
PE Common; X61:7 RL+ PE
IEC11000017 V1 EN
Figure 572: Example installation when REX062 unit is required
22.5 Technical data
22.5.1 Hardware
Table 947: REX060 Technical data
Specifications Values
Case size 6U, 1/2 19”; 223.7 x 245 x 267 mm (W x D x H)
Weight 8.0 kg
Burden, binary inputs BI 220 V: burden 0.4 W
BI 110 V: burden 0.2 W
BI 48 V: burden 0.1 W
Burden, RIM injection < 10 VA at 100 V external disturbance
Burden, SIM injection < 10 VA at 12 V earth fault voltage
0 VA at > 10% of maximum earth fault voltage
Burden, SIM injection with REX062 < 1 VA at 24 V earth fault voltage
Burden, measuring transformer SIM < 60 mVA at 24 V; 87 Hz
Burden, measuring transformer RIM < 60 mVA at 50 V; 113 Hz
Installation category III
Pollution degree 2
1232
Technical manual

Table 948: REX060 Power supply Technical data

Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 – 60) V EL ±20%
EL = (90 – 250) V EL ±20%
Power consumption 30 W –
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 5 A during 0.1 s –

Function Range or values Accuracy
For machines with:
• rated field voltage up to 800 V DC -
• static exciter with rated 1600 V 50/60 Hz -

supply voltage up to
Case size 218 x 150 x 243 mm (W x D x H)
Weight 4.8 kg
Assembling 6 x 5 mm screws (3 at bottom and 3 at top)
Rated rotor injection voltage 250 V
Burden, static excitation system X1:1 to X1:7 < 0.5 VA at 100 V external disturbance
Burden, static excitation system X1:1 or X1:7 to < 1.0 VA at 100 V external disturbance
0V
Burden, brushless excitation system X1:1 and < 1.5 VA at 100 V external disturbance
X1:7 to 0 V
Pollution degree 2

Case size 218 x 150 x 243 mm (W x D x H)
Weight 4.5 kg
Assembling 6 x 5 mm screws (3 at bottom and 3 at top)
Rated stator injection voltage 240 V
Rated stator voltage 240 V
Burden, injection X1:2 and X1:4 < 25 VA at 12 V earth fault voltage
< 100 VA at 24 V earth fault voltage
Pollution degree 2
1233
Technical manual

Table 951: Degree of protection

Description Values
REX060
Front IP40
Panel mounted, front IP54
Rear, sides, top, bottom and connection terminals IP20
REX061 and REX062
Top IP41
Front, rear, sides and bottom IP20
22.5.2 Type tests according to standards

Table 952: Electromagnetic compatibility tests
1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
oscillatory wave immunity
test
Surge withstand capability 2.5 kV, oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
test 4.0 kV, fast transient
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.3
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A
test
Surge immunity test 1-2 kV, and 2-4 kV, 1.2/50 µs IEC 60255-26, Zone A
High energy
Power frequency immunity 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
test
Power frequency magnetic 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8
field test 100 A/m, cont.
Radiated electromagnetic 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
field disturbance test 1.4-2.7 GHz
Radiated electromagnetic 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
field disturbance test
Conducted electromagnetic 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
field disturbance test
Voltage dips and short Dips: IEC 60255-26
interruptions 40% /200 ms
70% /500 ms
Interruptions:
0-50 ms: No restart
0… ∞ s: Correct behaviour at
power down
Radiated emission 30-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
1234
Technical manual

Table 953: Insulation tests, REX060, REX062 and REG670

Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min IEC 60255-27
Impulse voltage test 5.0 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J IEC 60255-27
Insulation resistance >100 MΩ at 500V DC IEC 60255-27
Table 954: Insulation tests, REX061

Dielectric test 7.48 kV DC, 1min IEEE 421.3
(connections to rotor)
2.8 kV DC, 1 min IEC 60255-27

Impulse voltage test 12.0 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J IEC 60664-1
(connections to rotor)
5.0 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J

IEC 60255-27
Insulation resistance >100 MΩ at 500V DC IEC 60255-27
Table 955: Mechanical tests

Test Reference standards Requirements
Vibration response test IEC 60255-21-1 Class 2
Vibration endurance test IEC 60255-21-1
REG670 and REX060 Class 1
REX061 and REX062 Class 2
Shock response test IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test IEC 60255-21-3
REX061 and REX062 Class 2 extended
1235
Technical manual

Table 956: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold test IEC 60068-2-1
operation 16 h at -25°C
storage 16 h at -40°C
Dry heat test IEC 60068-2-2
operation 16 h at +70°C
storage 16 h at +85°C
Damp heat test IEC 60068-2-78
steady state 240 h at +40ºC
humidity 93%
cyclic 6 cycles at +25 to +55ºC IEC 60068-2-30
humidity 93-95%
22.5.3 Influencing factors

Table 957: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence
Test Type test values Influence
Auxiliary voltage dependence, ±20% of EL 0.01%/%
operate value
Ripple in DC auxiliary voltage, 15% of EL 0.01%/%
operate value
Table 958: Temperature influence

Test Type test values Influence
Ambient temperature, operate -25°C to +55°C 0.02%/°C
value
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C -
1236
Technical manual

Labels
Section 23 Labels
23.1 Labels on IED
Front view of IED
10
9 1
8 2
3
7
5
6
IE C15000506-1-en.vsd
IEC15000506 V1 EN
1237
Technical manual

Labels
1
1 QR-code containing the
complete ordering code
10 2 Power supply module (PSM)
9
3 mA input module (MIM)
4 Ordering and serial number
8
5 Manufacturer
6 Transformer designations
7
2 7 Transformer input module,
7 rated currents and voltages
8 Optional, customer specific
6 information
9 Order number, dc supply
6
3 voltage and rated frequency
10 Product type, description and
serial number
5
IEC15000504 V1 EN
Figure 573: Example of IED label
Rear view of IED
4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN
1238
Technical manual

Labels
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label
IEC06000575 V1 EN
4 Warning label
23.2 Labels on injection equipment
Front view of injection unit REX060
IEC11000226 V1 EN
1239
Technical manual

Labels
1a Product type, description and

1a serial number
1b
1b Order number and dc supply
voltage
1c Stator and rotor input module
designations
1c
1d Manufacturer
1d
IEC11000233 V1 EN
2 Ordering and serial number

2
IEC11000234 V1 EN
Rear view of injection unit REX060
IEC11000227 V1 EN
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 ESD label
4 Warning label
1240
Technical manual

Labels
Front view of coupling capacitor unit REX061
IEC11000229 V1 EN
1 Warning label (hot surface)

2 Ordering number
Rear view of coupling capacitor unit REX061
IEC11000228 V1 EN
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 ESD label
4 Warning label
1241
Technical manual

Labels
Front view of shunt resistor unit REX062
IEC11000231 V1 EN
1 Warning label (hot surface)

2 Ordering number
Rear view of shunt resistor unit REX062
IEC11000230 V1 EN
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 ESD label
4 Warning label
1242
Technical manual

Connection diagrams
Section 24 Connection diagrams
The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part
of the product delivery.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.
Connection diagrams for Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.0 1MRK002801-AE
Connection diagrams for Configured products
Connection diagram, REG670 2.0, A20 1MRK002803-GA
Connection diagram, REG670 2.0, B30 1MRK002803-GB
Connection diagram, REG670 2.0, C30 1MRK002803-GC
1243
Technical manual

1244

Inverse time characteristics
Section 25 Inverse time characteristics
25.1 Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at

different points in the network different time delays for the different protections are
normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more
sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both
alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections
operating in series.
I> I> I>

xx05000129.vsd
IEC05000129 V1 EN
Figure 574: Three overcurrent protections operating in series
Stage 3
Time
Stage 2 Stage 2
Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN
Figure 575: Definite time overcurrent characteristics
1245
Technical manual

Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN
Figure 576: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
• Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
• Reset times of the protections
• Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections
Assume we have the following network case.
1246
Technical manual

A1 B1
Feeder
I> I>
Time axis
t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3
en05000132.vsd
IEC05000132 V1 EN
Figure 577: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1
where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips
t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3 is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1
the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its
delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between
the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the
B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts
and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between
different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test
protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1
is reset, that is the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the
current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be
minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed
reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following
applications:
• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, starts
and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.
1247
Technical manual

25.2 Principle of operation
25.2.1 Mode of operation

The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component
inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current
level used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached
or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and
the reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are
chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 158.
æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B ÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:
1248
Technical manual

ææ i öp ö
(top - B × k ) × ç ç ÷ - C ÷ = A×k
è è in > ø ø
where:
top is the operating time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according
to equation 160, in addition to the constant time delay:
t
ææ i öp ö
ò ç çè in > ÷ø - C ÷ × dt ³ A × k
0 è ø
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
næ æ i( j ) ö p ö
Dt × å ç ç ÷ - C ÷ ³ A× k
j =1 è è in > ø ø
where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been
detected, that is, when
i
>1
in >
EQUATION1193 V1 EN
Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 578.
1249
Technical manual

Operate
time
tMin
Current
IMin
IEC05000133 V2 EN
Figure 578: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set
to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current start value. Note that the operating
time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 162:
æ ö
ç k ÷
t[ s ] = ç
in > ÷
ç 0.339 - 0.235 × ÷
è i ø
where:
in> is the set start current for step n
k is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current
1250
Technical manual

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
earth-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive earth faults. The
curve is described by equation 163:
æ i ö
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è k × in > ø
where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current
If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time
curve according to the general equation 164.
æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility
to choose between three different reset time-lags.
• Instantaneous Reset
• IEC Reset
• ANSI Reset.
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops
below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current
drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis).
The timer will reset according to equation 165.
1251
Technical manual

æ ö
ç tr ÷
t [s] = ç ÷×k
çæ i ö ÷
2
çç ÷ -1 ÷
è è in > ø ø
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the

choice of time delay characteristic.
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics
are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent
reset time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current
dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must
be given, see equation 166:
æ ö
ç tr ÷
t [s] = ç ÷×k
çæ i ö ÷
pr
çç ÷ - cr ÷
è è in > ø ø
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate

time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it
is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to
zero.
1252
Technical manual

In version 2.0, a typical starting time delay of 24ms is subtracted from

the set trip time delay, so that the resulting trip time will take the
internal IED start time into consideration.
25.3 Inverse characteristics
Table 959: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
± 2.0% or ± 40 ms
æ ö whichever is greater
A
t=ç + B ÷ × k + tDef
è (
çç I P - 1
)÷÷
ø
EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6
1253
Technical manual

Table 960: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 2.0%
or ± 40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
æ A ö B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = ç P + B÷ × k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
ç (I - C ) ÷ P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
è ø 0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
TR
t = ×k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 961: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 2.0%
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
æ Iö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è kø
I = Imeasured/Iset
1254
Technical manual

Table 962: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
± 5.0% or ± 40 ms
A
è (
çç I P - 1
)÷÷
ø
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset

tr=29.1
tr=21.6
tr=0.46
tr=4.85
tr=30
tr=13.46
tr=4.6
1255
Technical manual

Table 963: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

0.001
æ A ö B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
ç (I - C ) ÷ P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
è ø 0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
TR
t = ×k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.
1256
Technical manual

Table 964: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 965: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±5.0% or ±160 ms
A
è (
çç I P - 1
)÷÷
ø
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset

tr=29.1
tr=21.6
tr=0.46
tr=4.85
tr=30
tr=13.46
tr=4.6
1257
Technical manual

Table 966: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

0.001
æ A ö B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
ç (I - C ) ÷ P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
è ø 0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
TR
t = ×k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.
1258
Technical manual

Table 967: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual
overcurrent and power protection
RI type inverse characteristic 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 968: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
± 5.0% or ±40 ms
A
è (
çç I P - 1
)÷÷
ø
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset

tr=29.1
tr=21.6
tr=0.46
tr=4.85
tr=30
tr=13.46
tr=4.6
1259
Technical manual

Table 969: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 970: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in ±5.0% or ±45 ms
steps of 0.01 whichever is greater
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U > ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000)
t = +D in steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in
ç -C÷
steps of 0.01
è U > ø
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps
of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001
1260
Technical manual

Table 971: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in ±5.0% or ±45 ms
steps of 0.01 whichever is greater
k
t =
æ U < -U
ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
é ù A = (0.005-200.000)
ê ú in steps of 0.001
k×A B = (0.50-100.00) in
t =ê ú+D
ê æ U < -U P
ú steps of 0.01
ö C = (0.0-1.0) in steps
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè U < ø û of 0.1
EQUATION1433-SMALL V1 EN D = (0.000-60.000)
U< = Uset in steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
U = Umeasured
steps of 0.001
1261
Technical manual

Table 972: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of ±5.0% or ±45 ms
0.01 whichever is
k greater
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
ç -C÷ of 0.01
è U > ø
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
1262
Technical manual

A070750 V2 EN
Figure 579: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics
1263
Technical manual

A070751 V2 EN
Figure 580: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics
1264
Technical manual

A070752 V2 EN
Figure 581: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics
1265
Technical manual

A070753 V2 EN
Figure 582: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics
1266
Technical manual

A070817 V2 EN
Figure 583: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics
1267
Technical manual

A070818 V2 EN
Figure 584: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics
1268
Technical manual

A070819 V2 EN
Figure 585: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics
1269
Technical manual

A070820 V2 EN
Figure 586: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics
1270
Technical manual

A070821 V2 EN
Figure 587: IEC Very inverse time characteristics
1271
Technical manual

A070822 V2 EN
Figure 588: IEC Inverse time characteristics
1272
Technical manual

A070823 V2 EN
Figure 589: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics
1273
Technical manual

A070824 V2 EN
Figure 590: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics
1274
Technical manual

A070825 V2 EN
Figure 591: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics
1275
Technical manual

A070826 V2 EN
Figure 592: RI-type inverse time characteristics
1276
Technical manual

A070827 V2 EN
Figure 593: RD-type inverse time characteristics
1277
Technical manual

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN
Figure 594: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection
1278
Technical manual

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN
Figure 595: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection
1279
Technical manual

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN
Figure 596: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection
1280
Technical manual

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN
Figure 597: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection
1281
Technical manual

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN
Figure 598: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection
1282
Technical manual

Glossary
Section 26 Glossary
26.1 Glossary
AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time
synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for
serial communication
1283
Technical manual

Glossary
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information
in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
four twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting
data in both directions and two for transmitting clock
signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
1284
Technical manual

Glossary
DFC Data flow control

DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,
data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of
up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical
fibers
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used
by local telephone companies. Can be transported over
balanced and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS
receiver module
1285
Technical manual

Glossary
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600

GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
ICT Installation and Commissioning Tool for injection based
protection in REG670
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6:
Requirements for protective current transformers for
transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial
master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s
on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IEDs) Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
1286
Technical manual

Glossary
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are

available in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that
function. One instance of a function is identical to another of
the same kind but has a different number in the IED user
interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an
item of information that is representative of a type. In the
same way an instance of a function in the IED is
representative of a type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP
protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line differential communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus
originally developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
1287
Technical manual

Glossary
NUM Numerical module

OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical Ethernet module
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than
start/pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching
when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps
it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near
proximity to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital
data in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
1288
Technical manual

Glossary
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SLM Serial communication module.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with
constant impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/
slave protocol for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport
layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The
de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into
4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for
Internet working and encompasses both network layer and
transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two
protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to
refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite
based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
1289
Technical manual

Glossary
TM Transmit (disturbance data)

TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and
voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for
further signal processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et
Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated
dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals.
UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by
the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to
synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing
for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational axis tilt
(23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular
rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated
Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses
the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship
navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet
stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the
residual or the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as
the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
1290
Technical manual

1291

Contact us
For more information please contact: Note:
1MRK502052-UEN
We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify
the contents of this document without prior notice. ABB AB
ABB AB does not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential
Substation Automation Products errors or possible lack of information in this document.
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject
matter and illustrations contained herein. Any reproduction,
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents – in
www.abb.com/substationautomation whole or in part – is forbidden without prior written consent of
ABB AB.
© Copyright 2014 ABB.
All rights reserved.
Scan this QR code to visit our website

ABB REG670 Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB REG670 Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB REG670 Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Relion® 670 series

Generator protection REG670 2.0 IEC

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

© Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Section 2 Available functions......................................................... 53

Section 3 Analog inputs..................................................................63

Section 4 Binary input and output modules....................................75

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ..........................77

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Section 6 Differential protection................................................... 101

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Section 7 Impedance protection...................................................177

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Operation principle.................................................................... 180

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Under voltage seal-in........................................................... 331

Section 8 Current protection.........................................................333

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Internal polarizing................................................................. 363

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Low pass filtering..................................................................433

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Section 9 Voltage protection........................................................ 477

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Technical data........................................................................... 541

Section 10 Frequency protection....................................................543

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Functionality ............................................................................. 557

Section 11 Multipurpose protection................................................ 565

Section 12 System protection and control......................................595

Section 13 Secondary system supervision.....................................603

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Operation principle.................................................................... 604

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Technical data...................................................................... 813

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Single point input signal attributes converting function block

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Function block........................................................................... 849

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Function block........................................................................... 894

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com

Section 17 Metering....................................................................... 981

Section 18 Station communication................................................. 993

Downloaded from www.dlmanuals.com